quarter

academic

Aalborg Universitet kvarter akademisktidsskrift for humanistisk forskning

Volume 04 08 • 2012 ej e Re s r Journys quarter

academic

Aalborg Universitet kvarter akademisktidsskrift for humanistisk forskning

Akademisk kvarter Tidsskrift for humanistisk forskning Academic Quarter Journal for humanistic research Redaktører / Issue editors Rune Andersen & Knud Knudsen Ansvarshavende redaktører / Editors in chief Jørgen Riber Christensen & Kim Toft Hansen © Aalborg University / Academic Quarter 2012 Tidsskriftsdesign og layout / Journal design and layout: Kirsten Bach Larsen ISSN 1904-0008 Yderligere information / Further information: http://akademiskkvarter.hum.aau.dk/ For enkelte illustrationers vedkommende kan det have været umuligt at finde eller komme i kontakt med den retmæssige indehaver af ophavsrettighederne. Såfremt tidsskriftet på denne måde måtte have krænket ophavsretten, er det sket ufrivilligt og utilsigtet. Retmæssige krav i denne forbindelse vil selvfølgelig blive honoreret efter gældende tarif, som havde forlaget ind- hentet tilladelse i forvejen. akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Indhold

Journeys – an introduction 5

Tourists’ travels, travelers and travel literature Multiple identiteter 14 Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed 28 Middle Class America in Africa 42 All Writings Great and Small 58

Journeys in history/ historical journeys The Hammock and the Colonial Journey of Conquest 72 ”En disposition, form og orden” 83 Death or taxes 97 The Parthians between Rome and China 109

Literary journeys/ Journeys in literature, film and theatre Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey to The Land of Mist 121 Livet ude af balance 133 Sin Nombre 146 Writing the Mists of Memory 162 A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s 180

Volume 04 3 4 192 207 222 237 253 263 276 291 308

Volume 04

En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier En opdagelsesrejse Spiritual journeys a yoga-travel-spirit nexus Identification-of-self through The Travails of Sal Paradise The Travails of Female Development Search Heading South in flung open the wonder-world flood-gates of The great The trip as a script Spectators’ Journeys Sociability Travelling journeysVirtual – digital journeysjourneys – on the internet Why walk when you can teleport? quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Journeys – an introduction

According to Giambattista Vico, inventive and creative thinking in- volves the ability to actively combine conditions in new ways and the ability to constantly observe the diverse circumstances through new perspectives. With this idealistic axiom in mind the call for Jour- neys was aiming at a multifarious approach across the academic dis- ciplines trying to accommodate space in-between the specialized and at times restricted disciplines. Based on this broad condition the call for this issue of Academic Quarter invited contributions about journeys in very general terms – “across the humanistic disciplines”, “from Homer to the present.” The ambition was to focus “on the journey as a focal point and the human element in its centre” – not in a narrow sense of the word, but including “related categories and sub-categories such as liter- ary forms/genres comprising everything from scientific or reli- gious traveling to famous movie site tourism or colonially moti- vated mobility or subjects that involve cultural aspects, images of identity/identification and imaginary encounters that are mediated through journeys.” Journeys direct attention to the exchange of cul- tural relationships, but also to those not characterized through reg- ular conventions. “In this sense identity or identification could be seen as something that is intimately connected to mobility, whether it is journeys of reality or imaginary.”

Volume 04 5

------) - th 6

“traveling from “traveling from ) Sigmund Freud ) Sigmund Freud Volume 04 cited in Fussell, 1980 Journeys introduction – an Vegetti, 2011 Vegetti, Rune Andersen and Knud Knudsen Knudsen and Knud Andersen Rune Etymological Dictionary,

) In other words the tourist and the travel pat the tourist and the travel ) In other words to new interesting combinations. The attempt to Douglas Harper the room the room century conflict where the journey amongst others was th , but equally on the premises for why and how the distance In Vegetti’s assumption there is a clear distancing from mass mass is a clear distancing from assumption there In Vegetti’s The journey as a medium for one getting point from to another is Reflecting on the etymological starting point, the journey is, ac Bærenholdt, 2007 Bærenholdt, hus passive compared to the active traveler. This antithesis be tern connected to this category, is more engaged in the place and engaged is more tern connected to this category, t tween traveler and tourist has reminiscences back to an old 17 18 and In this period the courage and heroism. to action, danger, related traveler was the empirical link between society and the unknown. Thus, scientists (and traders) were instructed to keep detailed re ports of their whereabouts in order to facilitate other potential motivation for traveling ”lies in the fulfilment of these early wishes ( father.” the especially and family the escape to mass tourism. Mass tourismtraveling i.e. what is generally termed is in short a combination of mass-accessibility and mass-attend transporta necessary the that requisite absolute an it making ance tion is available and that it can Another accommodate the masses. experience the about more is journey the that made be could point between “one place to another” whereas takes “Tourism place when people – hosts and guests – perform tourist places (...)”. ( investigate and isolate different characteristics in the traveler’s characteristics in investigate and isolate different on tology is determined not only by the characteristics of the traveler se per accomplished.between “one place to another” is photographer and traveler Mat in clear contrast to what the Italian ­ Veget Lost”. Getting of Art ”The the as characterized has Vegetti teo situations to live extraordinary ti writes “Getting lost allowed me and meet incredible people I would have never experienced, had I followed a map or a guidebook.” ( claiming that the strongest interpretation would apply a different cording to cording distance or room That naturally gives the one place to another”. between “one place to another” endless possibilities. The call has thus not been formulated with the intention of defining the con cept of journeys, but rather to shed light on the multidimensional meanings and understandings of the operative in-between room or the choice of theories will alsoplaces. The methodical emphasis connect quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ​​ ------7 Stagl,

Volume 04 Journeys introduction – an ) Rune Andersen and Knud Knudsen Knudsen and Knud Andersen Rune ) The blank points also included Sherman, 2002 Sherman, 2002 ) Hence travel literature is used as a broad term for accounts, Within Within this margin of fiction andnon-fiction a diverging travel- The heroism and fame that traveling was associated with trig The heroism jail-time for minor theft. May’s conceptual universe and geographi and universe conceptual May’s theft. minor for jail-time cal frame included America Asia both and without him having ac publica the after was it but America, in was (May there. been tually the synonyms as under American accounts.) May wrote the tion of Capitan Ramon Diaz de la Escosura, Prinz Muhamel Lautréamont and Ernst von Linden, just to name a May’s few. books have sold into over 30 languages than 200 million copies and translated more his books on the including Additionally, and Hebrew Esperanto. journeys and the subsequent production of travel accounts. ( 1995 as a historical or fictional. whether you can determine them art took form – the imaginary journey – a that genre gave the writ er’s is in many plot a limitless range of performance. This genre a highly developed “sixth produces as it “often ways peculiar, contempo sense” of the human aspect” that could generate great and writers travel imaginary successful most the of One effect. rary a model example of this phenomenon, is the German Karl May (1842-1912), who began his as career a writer while he was serving a common motivation across the different types of genres seems genres types of the different across motivation common a based on the relationship between curiosity and observation. Out travel activity arises, whoseof this elementary condition a general is account the hand, one the On purposes: main two serves function me of new a and source informative insights about the unfamiliar, diated through the contact between different societies, in order to obtain empirical information about other societies as the basis for could discovery the hand, other the On orientation. and knowledge lead to a transformation of the traveler’s self-understanding and his place in nature. Man’s place in nature – biology and religion as the two key factors – thus justified and motivated a great deal of travelers’ navigation. In this engagement the traveler was meant to In this engagement the traveler travelers’ navigation. fill in the blank points in the geographical knowledge that was ”strange to us”. ( updates on ”figures and shapes of men and women in their ap parel as also their in manner... every place as you shall find them us]”. ( [from differing production, this Within books. travel of production massive a gered though forms literary different between distinguish to necessary is it quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------8

Volume 04

) Journeys introduction – an Rune Andersen and Knud Knudsen Knudsen and Knud Andersen Rune Frayling, 1998 share a common theme, the articles alto the articles theme, a common share Academic Quarter The theme – identity – remains in focus when we move from when we move from in focus The theme – identity – remains History as a study is, per se, a journey in time, and journeys in A related, still different approach can be found in the travel litera travel the in found be can approach different still related, A Two articles deal with tourists’ travels from different perspec different articles deal with tourists’ travels from Two This issue reflects the broad definition of journeys in thecall, in nd takes the reader back to the age of England Victorian and he American perception of lack of modernity in the postcolonial American perception he Herriot – in an attempt of “a rereading” of his popular stories as his popular stories of Herriot – in an attempt of “a rereading” in its own right. is a genre literature Travel works of travel literature. tourism to spiritual travels; or to be precise: The “Identification- of-self” – is the theme in Patrick J. Holladay and Lauren M. Pon der’s article about yoga-spirit-travels. history/historical journeys cover a broad range of topics and ap in particular the variations in tourist travels as elements of iden in particular the variations in tourist tity construction (Bodil S. Blichfeldt & Karina M. Smed); the se­ co early popular tourism and argues that the guide book and muse tour of objects the introduce only not did age Victorian the of ums ists’ travels but also presented institutionalized interpretations of Andersen). them (Rune ture which is analyzed by Thomas Halloran F. in his discussion of t Africa; and by John who S. introduces Vassar the world of James system – or – order by the organizing articles in sections – tourist litera in journeys history, in journeys literature, travel and travels ture, film and theatre, digital journeys and spiritual journeys. Some articles could have been categorized in more than one of these sec in spiritualism is one of Doyle’s deep interest Conan Arthur tions: Co “Arthur article literary Christensen’s Riber Jørgen in themes the Land of Mist”. Thomas Halloran’snan Doyle’s Quest Journey to The spe a to contribution a time same the at is literature travel on article Africa. and to the discussion of post-colonial cific literary genre identity, and tourism between relation the discusses first the tives: Indian Winnetou Indian were made Winnetou into filmbeing the indirect cause of ( genre. the spaghetti-western Although the contributions to this our is opinion in a positive way. of sue Jour the theme: to approaches of varieties the demonstrate gether in many ways and neys in can a be discussed numberand explored from tourism to experimental theatre, of academic disciplines – from some create to tried have We games. role-playing digital to literature quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------e­ 9 in

century. Leonardo Leonardo century. century addressing century addressing Volume Academic Quarter 04 th th Journeys introduction – an Rune Andersen and Knud Knudsen Knudsen and Knud Andersen Rune century AD and the Chinese ex AD century st and early 19 th centuries (Nwankwo Nwaezeigwe). T. th . and early 20 th The authors investigate a great variety of issues related to jour The majority of contributions to this issue of ma in a context of globalization and of cultural transnationalism Soares) (Miro Chris Riber Jørgen journey. the of metaphors by discussed or neys vestigate the worlds of “ecotopia” (Kim Toft Hansen), the danger the Hansen), Toft (Kim “ecotopia” of worlds the vestigate ous travels of the illegal immigration from Mexico (Pablo to USA the point of view of the theatrical performances from Cristoffanini), cin artist’s in mobility of issue the and Belhomme), (Elsa spectators purposes, others for economic gains and profits, for ideological or religious in this issue. presented few of these are A reasons. vestigate the many facets of journeys in and literature the arts, film, such writers famous about articles includes section This theatre. and Callen Ernest Christensen), Riber (Jørgen Doyle Conan Arthur as (Lénia Bouvier Nicolas and Michaux Henri Hansen), Toft (Kim bach (Minjeong Lawrence H. D. Sørensen), (Bent Kerouac Jack Marques), Kim), Herman Melville (Rasmus Grøn) and Douglas Coupland (Mikkel Jensen). There are contributions on modern directors and in that that articles – movies and theatre experimental film-makers, Gregoratti Gregoratti takes us back to the 1 economic and contacts establish to attempt an in westwards pansion tells the story of a Gregoratti with the Roman Empire. relationships had that AD 97 around Ying Gan dignitary Chinese a by led mission to stop at the borders of the Parthian kingdom; returning to China, he wrote a report about his meeting with the Parthians, which Altogether the four articles on his in the article. presents Gregoratti torical journeys point to a variety of motivations for traveling – as mentioned above: People have traveled in order to explore new dangers of various escape from worlds, others have traveled to sorts, human, ecological etc.; some have traveled for political proaches; in the present volume the historical approach is represent is approach historical the volume present the in proaches; journeys colonial of accounts upon based first the articles, four by ed America) (North in to the the 17 New World issues government such and as authority sovereignty, (Johan Hein sen); the second about journeys of conquest in colonial Nigeria in the late 19 articles deal Two with journeys in the Middle East. Eivind Heldaas Mediterranean the between travelling overland about writes Seland and the Persian Gulf in the 18 quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - ­ - - - - - 10 cen th The Lost are used are

– as both a cultural Volume 04 On the Road the On Journeys introduction – an Moby Dick Rune Andersen and Knud Knudsen Knudsen and Knud Andersen Rune Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini argues for a a for argues Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo Sin Nombre and space instances of the daily existence”. The perspective is (1920) as a Bildungsroman, in which a journey to southern Ita southern to journey a which in Bildungsroman, a as (1920) The perspective is changed in the two articles on experimental on experimental articles the two is changed in perspective The film and theatre by Miro Soares and Elsa Belhomme. Analyzing two Analyzing Belhomme. Elsa and Soares Miro by theatre and film plays Belhomme shows how the spectators must undertake “an in thein being of sense own their renegotiate and journey tro-directed similar to that of the traveler”, she claims. It is “a process theatre.” Miro Soares is elaborating an initial notion of voluntary uprooting as a creative process; uprooting is “responsible for breaking the time neys both express an urge for constant motion and at the same time stability require Mikkel and Jensen order. in his analysis of a Douglas Coupland short story depicts the journey as representing two parallel narratives of human development (father and son) and a drive from urban center to the Canadian countryside. Ras mus Grøn analyses the journey – in project and an individual, subjective project. The many meanings of the journey as a metaphor directing our attention towards mo uncertainties bility, and the unknown territory between the start ing point and the end cannot be missed when surveying the liter ary contributions to this issue. manner. Lénia Marques demonstrates the manner. role of imagination in 20 two travelers in the the writing of Michaux and Bouvier, who wrote tury, about their experiences between the real and the imaginary; memory played the main role, but imagination had a role too. Minjeong Kim examines D.H. Lawrence’s novel Girl at and dominance patriarchal from emancipation as described is ly the same time a cultural encounter between English (European) argues primitivism”. Bent Sørensen civilization and “unrestrained novel 1957 Kerouac’s Jack in journeys the that psychological travails. Jour as a metaphor for socially triggered tensen’s article describes how the territorial journey of the quest was used narratologically by Conan Doyle in his Challenger no­ vels to explore the contradictory realm of applying a scientific ap proach to the subject of spiritualism. Kim Hansen Toft illustrates hand problematic man’s of aware becoming of means a as traveling ling of nature. In his analysis of the American filmmaker Cary Fukunagy’s discus a to contribution a as film the of interpretation contextual sion of serious conflicts in Mexico in a utopian and ideological quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------11 Academic Academic

Volume 04 Journeys introduction – an Rune Andersen and Knud Knudsen Knudsen and Knud Andersen Rune century, and the article follows the century, st to the 21 th it was our hope that new insights might be gained by dis The articles investigate that area (the unfamiliar) in various waysvarious in unfamiliar) (the area that investigate articles The Altogether, the articles leave the impression that across academic that across the impression the articles leave Altogether, Journeys in the digital world is discussed by Nick in Webber his Closing this section is an essay, not on journeys in literature, rath literature, in journeys on not essay, an is section this Closing and at the same time make it clear that other ways might have beenhave might ways other that clear it make time same the at and possible and perhaps fruitful. In preparing this issue of Quarter relation mutual “the including context, broad a in journeys cussing constitution the in co-producers as imaginary and real between ship of the self and the other” – as we wrote in the call, No doubt, the articles in this issue demonstrate that it is one of the key element of Holmes from the 19 Holmes from television to the social media – from transfer of “Sherlock” from Omegle.com and more; it is Tumblr, a BBC’s homepages to Twitter, digital journey which also transformed the meanings and functions of the original series. spectator the literature, historical or fiction of reader the disciplines, of the unfamiliar or the or cinemas, the traveler in search in theatres that of all share to the unfamiliar, tourist who wants an instruction and trying to make sense the territories of time and space crossing of the unfamiliar. mobile library on a theoretical as well as an empirical level. mobile library on a theoretical con games. Travel roleplaying article on travel as a theme in online stitutes a significant activity in manyonline roleplaying games, pursuing quests, trading, adventuring or sim “whether players are arti his to introduction the in writes Webber Nick as exploring”, ply asgames the of perspective the from is approach Webber’s Nick cle. is that journey digital of sort different a quite is It gamers. the as well explored by Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen in their article about for Holmes” “Sherlock” – a modernization of “Sherlock the BBC’s the TV media. BBC transferred the well-known story of Sherlock changed, but the themes and associated concepts related to trave the same. ling are er the opposite, traveling literature so to speak: the mobile library. (Pirkko Raudaskoski & Thessa Jensen) is The that argument mobil ity creates conditions for new forms of and sociability, that the ra a constitutes library the that is authors, two the to according tionale, con a is information and knowledge to access democracy; for basis of the article to discuss the It is the purpose dition for democracy. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 12 New Cam Chur: Academic

Blurb. Volume 04 Journeys introduction – an San Francisco: , London: I.B. Tauris & Co Ltd. London: I.B. Tauris Rune Andersen and Knud Knudsen Knudsen and Knud Andersen Rune Stirrings and searchings (1500-1720), Stirrings and searchings Coping with Distances: Producing Nordic Atlan Coping with Distances: Producing Spaghetti Westerns, Spaghetti Westerns, The Art of Getting Lost Abroad: British literary traveling between the wars, British Abroad: , Oxford: Berghahn Books. Berghahn , Oxford: A history of curiosity: the theory of travel 1550-1800, A have nevertheless successfully captured Vico’s multifarious Vico’s successfully captured have nevertheless tic Societies University Press. Oxford York: Press. bridge: The Cambridge University Publishers. Academic Harwood The question: What makes a journey? Cannot be answered une Frayling, C. 1998. 1980. P. Fussell, H. 2002. Sherman, W. Stagl, J. 1995. M. 2011. Vegetti, “journeys” – as a pattern of human mobility – to challenge the fa codes of conduct and perception. miliar and conventional of issue this to contributions the view our in but quivocal, Quarter in new ways. mobility and the art of travel angle and combined References 2007. O. J. Bærenholdt, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk quarter

academic

Aalborg Universitet kvarter akademisktidsskrift for humanistisk forskning

Tourists’ travels, travelers and travel literature akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Multiple identiteter Ferierejsen som identitetskonstruerende

Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil Stilling Blichfelt er lektor ved institut for kultur og globale studier, Aalborg Universitet. Både hendes forskning og undervisning er koncentreret omkring forbrug og forbrugskulturer, branding samt turisme. Karina Madsen Smed Karen Madsen Smed er adjunkt ved institut for kultur og globale studier, Aalborg Universitet. Både hendes forskning og undervisning er koncentreret omkring kultur, identitet og forbrug primært i en turismekon- tekst. turisme. Abstrakt Den identitetsmæssige symbolværdi i moderne forbrug er vel- kendt. Formålet med artiklen er at bidrage til en nuancering og problematisering af, hvordan ferierejsen aktivt anvendes i indi- videts identitetskonstruktioner, når identiteter både er multiple og under evig forandring. På basis af en række kvalitative under- søgelser diskuteres centrale elementer af ferierejsen som identitets- konstruerende. Analysen pointerer kompleksiteten af ferierejsen som identitetsskabende forbrug, idet turisten trækker på multiple, fleksible identiteter som knyttes til forskellige rejser og oplevelser i en stadig mere omfattende ’rejsekarriere’. Igennem turistens rejser bygges oplevelser ovenpå hinanden og bidrager til identitetskon- struktion, der forhandles og iscenesættes i forskellige sociale sam- menhænge, og individets turismemæssige forbrug sættes i direkte relation til individet selvopfattelse og ønskelige identiteter i nuet. Forhandlingerne er kommunikative og udspringer af kontekst og signifikante andre, f.eks. igennem sociale medier som benyttes til positionering af selvet i relation til den kontekst det enkelte indi- vid befinder sig i på et givent tidspunkt

Emneord: Turisme, rejse, forbrug, identitet.

Volume 04 14 ------15 -

Multiple identiteter Multiple Volume 04 via kontinuerlig forhand via kontinuerlig konstrueres konstrueres ) til både at iscenesætte og præsentere sig Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil er ”Identity can be seen as a story that a person writes and un end the reaching never herself, or him about rewrites parts, so that the earlier til they die, and always rewriting the activity of writing becomes itself part of the story” (Giddens i Gabriel & Lang, 2006:83) Turismerelateret forbrug Turismerelateret er karakteriseret ved ferierejsens kom Ifølge Giddens bygges fortællinger op omkring for eksisterende som så udbygges eller tællinger, afvises via diskursiv gentagelse Disse identitetspositioner. af, eller afstandstagen fra, eksisterende ”byg fundamentale således bliver afstandstagen) (eller gentagelser gesten” i fortællingen. I konteksten af ferierejser - og de oplevelser bestående rejsekarriere en om tale man kan – indeholder ferierejser en til byggesten udgør som sted, og tid i rejser af typer forskellige af fortælling (Cohen, 1972). identitetskonstruerende oplevelser, som alle bidrager til bestemte identitetspositioner. Sam identitetspositioner. bestemte til bidrager alle som oplevelser, og i en given kontekst ’spil tidig kan individet på et givet tidspunkt til identitet som forhandling, I forhold le’ på forskellige identiteter. skriver Giddens følgende:kommunikation og italesættelse dan italesætter individet så sine ferierejser? Dette er alle spørgs nærmere. mål, som denne artikel søger at adressere pleksitet og derved af et væld af potentielle symbolske værdier i tilknytning til dette identitetskonstruerende forbrug. Eksempelvis argumenterer Desforges (2000) at for, ferierejsen giver den enkelte rolle, den på baseret fortælling en konstruere at for mulighed turist brug gøre individet kan Dermed liv. dennes i spiller ferierejsen som af en sådan fortælling( i En fortælling er givetvis en fortælling mennesker. andre overfor nuet, men dog oftest konstrueret af forudgående begivenheder og Indledning statisk, men Identitet er ikke måde hvorpå identitet En og italesættelser. ling, kommunikation f.eks. – forbrug via er italesættes og kommunikeres forhandles, kan identitetskonstruktio mellem forholdet er hvad Men ferierejser. af at både til med virkelig ferierejsen Er foretager? vi rejser, de og ner hvem til andre, vi kommunikerer hvem vi er og hvordan definere, vi er? Og hvis ferierejsen understøtter forbrugerens selvopfattelse og identitetskonstruktion i den kontekst, man befinder sig i, hvor quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------16

Multiple identiteter Multiple Volume 04 søger turisten det spændende søger turisten det Enten Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil det kendte og ufarlige (Cohen, 1972; Cohen & vi ønsker at konstruere, understøtte og/eller frem understøtte vi ønsker at konstruere, eller er . At der netop ses på identiteter som mangfoldige og varierende At der netop ses på identiteter som mangfoldige og varierende . Formålet med denne artikel er således at bidrage til en nuance I turismelitteraturen har der været tendens til at klassificere turi er og -motivation. Artiklen redegør derfor ikke på traditionel vis for resulta løbende inddrages stedet I undersøgelse. én af resultaterne har forfatterne som forskningsprojekter, forskellige række en fra ter arbejdet med igennem de seneste cirka 5 år. Det menings- og identitetsskabende forbrug Ifølge Jantzen & Østergaard (2000) er nutidens forbruger fokuseret og livet’, med ‘mening skabe at grad stigende i og oplevelser nye på ring af, hvordan ferierejsen aktivt anvendes i sådanne identitets Dermed er artiklens formål ikke at bidra processer. konstruerende ge til forståelse af den enkelte ferierejse, men nærmere at udforske identitetskonstruktio individets og ferierejsen mellem relationerne n for denne artikel er et af, at udgangspunktet ift. tid og sted er affødt syn på ferierejsen som et kontekstafhængigt, identitetsskabende de skiftende sociale kontek artiklen illustreres Igennem fænomen. sters indvirkning på og vurdering italesættelse af via ferierejsen ci ferierejser af undersøgelser kvalitative forskellige række en fra tater oplevelser og erfaringer (Hogg & Abrams, 1988; Jenkins, 2008). Der 2008). Jenkins, 1988; Abrams, & (Hogg erfaringer og oplevelser med bliver ethvert forsøg på at forstå, hvem turisten er og hvordan ferierejser bidrager til identitetsskabelse langt mere udfordrende end dét at kategorisere turister. Dermed bliver valget af ferie og hvilke af om, et spørgsmål er på ferie også vi vi laver mens hvad identitet vores under det bør Hertil aktiviteter. disse og rejse denne netop via hæve som betragtes udgangspunktet i identitetskonstruktion at streges, en ubevidst handling, og derved betragtes valg og ønsker i forbin delse med som ferierejsen en del af de underliggende og som oftest turisters identitet. til at konstruere som er med ubevidste processer, ster som ’enten eller’ uafhængigt af hvor i fortællingen man er, ellerster som ’enten eller’ er, af hvor i fortællingen man uafhængigt den fortælles i: hvilken kontekst anderledes og 2004; Avieli, 2004). Hjalager, Det må dog kunne antages, at netop forskelligheden i turistens oplevelser (både under den enkelte ferie fast skabelse, til aktivt bidrage kan ferier) forskellige af tværs på og af en lang række forskellige identitets holdelse og videreudvikling som således sættes konstruktioner, i spil på baggrund af forskellige quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ­ ------17

Multiple identiteter Multiple Volume 04 i jagten på stadig mere me mere stadig på jagten i opad’ Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil I en turismemæssig kontekst har Pearce og Caltabiano (1983) nuet, men også (eller måske især) ift. at kunne bidrage til at kon identiteter. for individet værdifulde struere De identitetskonstruerende ferierejser forfatterne af den På tværs af de forskellige forskningsprojekter, ele synes tre ne artikel har gennemført gennem de sidste fem år, særligt centrale. som identitetskonstruktion menter af ferierejsen cen informanter været elementer har for en lang række Alle tre individet over tid ’bevæger sig ’bevæger tid over individet ved senere, imødegået dog blev kritik Denne oplevelser. ningsfulde eksplicit at tage højde at for, individet, som med tiden bliver en øn forskellige mellem rundt sig bevæge kan rejsende, erfaren mere skede oplevelser og rejsemotivationer (Ryan, 1998). Rejsekarriere bringes rejser desuden, at erfaring fra tidligere indikerer begrebet med ind i nye hvorfor ferierejser, rejser aldrig fungerer i isolation, Calta & (Pearce rejseerfaringer internaliserede ovenpå bygger men biano, 1983; Pearce & Lee, 2005), hvorved disse indgår i turisme Dermed bliver identitetskonstruktioner. den relaterede enkelte fe rierejse ikke kun betydningsfuld ift. at give oplevelser værdsat i dividet ’medlemskab’ af forskellige grupper eller endog ’stammer’ (Maffesoli, 1996), hvorved andre medlemmers anerkendelse opnås via symbolsk i indlejret værdi forbrug (og ’ikke-forbrug’) ud fra be positiv/nega har der ferierejser f.eks. af typer hvilke af, tragtninger tiv symbolværdi. samt Pearce (1988) beskæftiget sig med ’rejsekarrieren’ som et ud tryk for at deltagelse i forskellige ferierejser i forskellige livsfaser in begrebet rejsekarriere var Oprindeligt ’rejsekarriere’. en udgør behovs (1970) Maslows som, kritik samme for udsat og af, spireret hierarki, og dermed blev teorien især kritiseret for ideen om, at forbrug forbrug bliver dermed et spørgsmål om, hvordan individets forsøg bliver Herved understøttes. kan liv meningsfyldt et konstruere at på formid og skaber man hvordan om, spørgsmål et grad høj i forbrug ler den ønskede (om end ubevidste) betydning (McCracken, 1988). Forbrug har således skiftet rolle fra at være en (forholdsvis) simpel behovsdækkende adfærd, til at være en integreret del af, hvem vi både via således defineres Identitet ’være’. ’er’at ønsker vi hvem og et internt, psykologisk element og et eksternt, social element (Tajfel 1979). & I Turner, forbindelse med det eksterne element søger in quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , ------18 anvendelse anvendelse

, f.eks. hvor Multiple identiteter Multiple identitetsdynamik Volume 04 , dvs. hvordan ’andre’ påvir ’andre’ , dvs. hvordan Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil social identitet sted, hvor det er okay at vi er der sammen, som forældre forældre som sted, hvor det er okay at vi er der sammen, tror jeg Men os. til skævt ser nogen at uden lille den med vi tager hen, fordi hvor over til at tænke mere vi kommer på øje få at nemmere det er så og familie, en som rejser vi til vi kommer så veninder, to være at bare for stedet I os. at tage af sted som to forældre med et barn” (Blichfeldt et al, 2012) ”... og nu vi skal have en lille, så bliver det nok mere et de over fortolkedes tidligere disse ferierejser, ud fra den livskon på det tidspunkt, hvor informanterne tekst, der var dominerende tidligere om fortællinger Turisters ferierejse. specifikke den på tog rejser fungerer således ikke blot som en rejse igennem rejsekarri hvorfor for, redegør fortælleren men også igennem tid, hvor erer, sted, fandt de tidspunkt, det netop på vigtige var rejser forskellige hvorved rejsens identitetskonstruerende karakter italesættes. Et eksempel herpå er fra et interview med Anna (en 38-årig kvinde der venter sit første barn sammen med sin gravide kæreste): des som ’adgangsbillet’ til grupper, som individet gerne vil være, være, vil gerne individet som grupper, til ’adgangsbillet’ som des blive eller forblive medlem af. Det tredje element er i identitetskonstruktioner af ferierejser sammenhæng og identitetskon og ferierejser forskellige af tværs på – danindividet – struktioner forsøger at skabe en sammenhængende konstruk elementer tre disse uddyber Vi er. så ’jeg’ hvem afspejler som tion i de følgende afsnit. den jeg gerne og vil være Identitetsdynamik: Den jeg er, den jeg var engang reflektere undersøgelser empiriske forskellige vores i turister Når trale for deres identitetskonstruktioner, og disse tre elementer er elementer er disse tre og identitetskonstruktioner, trale for deres af samspil i forsøget på at opbygge en forståelse dermed vigtige let mellem den enkelte ferierejse og individets mere langsigtede er element første Det identitetskonstruktioner. turister relate over tid, hvordan identitet forandres dvs. hvordan tidspunkt specifikt ’var’et de på hvem ferier, tidligere deres til rer ferier påvirker disse identiteter. tidligere hvordan og liv, i deres Det andet element er ker individets valg og af hvordan ferierejsen ferierejser, anven quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------19 ikke tidli - nu fremtidige

Multiple identiteter Multiple Volume 04 var ‘rigtige’, og at de ’. Erik forholder sig således sam ’. Erik forholder dengang dengang Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil “De der skoleture – hvad husker du bedst fra dem?” – hvad husker du bedst “De der skoleture “Jamen, at få et stempel i passet, når du tog over græn “Så det med at krydse grænser?” hvor ud, komme og hjemmefra væk komme at “Jamen, sen, fordi det kunne du vise til de andre bagefter – at dér” du havde været de gamle aldrig har Og været. at komme hjem igen og fortælle om det” I: K: I: K: “… og så var vi med færge og tog fra Harwich til London. “…så var vi med færge og Og det var vel tre gange vi gjorde det, og det gjorde det halve Danmark. Det var helt vildt alle de, der rejste. De omkring fyldt med mennesker, var prop kæmpe færger togt på de færger Dansker Det var rent 1500 mennesker. Det var virkeligt et hit dengang.” (Smed, 2009) der. ferierejser var vigtige dengang han tog på dem: ferierejser til disse som ‘et stort hit tidigt til, at disse ferierejser det der på et således, hvordan har den samme status. Erik indikerer tidspunkt er meningsgivende ikke ferierejser, nødvendigvis er me afhængigt af, hvilke inter tidspunkt – alt ningsgivende på et senere på det der er dominerende ne og eksterne identitetskonstruktioner, givne tidspunkt. Eriks udsagn understøtter således, at såvel faktiske som ønskværdige identiteter hverken er stabile eller givne, men i fortællerdansker) (36-årig Ken forandring. konstant under er stedet han var på for cirka 20 år siden: ligeledes følgende om skolerejser, gere gere ‘utænkeligt’er tidspunkt nuværende på det at Erik, fortæller Senere for ham at tage på denne type af omend rejser, han også relaterer Anna relaterer i ovenstående citat fremtidige ferierejser til den større større den til ferierejser fremtidige citat ovenstående i relaterer Anna livsændring, hun umiddelbart og står hvordan overfor, det at blive forældre vil gøre det langt lettere for andre at ‘spotte’ hendes sek de og ferietyper nye overveje at til hende får der forhold et – sualitet hun ikke statisk, tværtimod laver Anna er identitet For stinationer. ‘rum’ til hendes nye identitet som – forældre hvilket også forventes fokuse Anna Hvor ferierejser. af valg hendes i ændringer omfatte at rer på, hvordan hendes ‘nye’ identitet vil påvirke hendes Erik fokuserer (61-årig dansker) på, hans hvordan ferierejser, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------20 - - -

Multiple identiteter Multiple Volume 04 dengang. Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil “Men alt i alt, så lyder det ikke som om de ture var så var “Men alt i alt, så lyder det ikke om de ture som den at sige. Men dengang var de, “Det er sgu svært fede?” gang var det det sejeste. Men der sker jo hele tiden no get nyt, du oplever mere og bliver mere erfaren” (Bli chfeldt, 2007a) ... I: K: og dermed bliver kommunikation af ferierejser en essentiel bygge som understøttes i individets møde sten i identitetskonstruktioner, eksempel på vigtigheden Et og kommunikation med omverdenen. af andres anerkendelse findes i Blichfeldts 2007a (her diskuteres en årligt tilbagevendende ferieform - deltagelse i en musikfestival) for en familie med en teenagedatter. I denne forbindelse siger den 34-årige far i familien: ver fortællingerne om ferierejser ikke blot enkeltstående anekdoter, anekdoter, enkeltstående blot ikke ferierejser om fortællingerne ver gerneindividet hvem er, individet hvem om, fortællinger også men identitet: og hvem individet var vil være, Social “Du sidder da ikke alene og kigger på dine feriebilleder” individet via valg og selvi sig til, hvordan Social identitet relaterer valg af ferie scenesættelser søger anerkendelse, og dermed hvordan rejser påvirkes af antagelser om positiv symbolværdi for individets Dermed ferierejser sig relaterer forskellige ikke medlemskaber. kun til ’hvem jeg er’, men også til, ’hvem jeg gerne vil ses som af andre’, get han ‘kom hjem og fortalte om’ (eller endog pralede af). Samtidig af). pralede endog (eller om’ fortalte og hjem ‘kom han get sejeste’, ‘det var rejser disse om selv at ift. specifik meget dog han er sta så har de på ingen måde en tilsvarende da han var teenager, Både Erik og Ken italesætter således, hvordan tus her 20 år senere. de ferierejser, var på for mange år siden, relaterede til en tidligere iro og humoristisk både til, stand i er de at med samtidig identitet, niserende, at genfortælle, hvordan disse ferierejser var identitets Det vil altså liv. i deres tidligere og –forstærkende konstruerende sige, at for informanterne har opfattelsen af, hvem ’jeg’ ændret er, ønskede identiteter fremhævede sig over tid, og hvor disse ferier bli Hermed p.t. fra afstand tages der fortællinger, det er så engang, I bagklogskabens skær giver Ken udtryk for, at skoleturene var no at skoleturene udtryk for, I bagklogskabens skær giver Ken quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------21 - ferien, ferien, atferien, efter vi oplever, vi oplever,

under mens Multiple identiteter Multiple Volume 04 Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil “We got friends coming next weekend and we’ll pro we’ll next weekend and coming got friends “We bably be showing them slides on the computer. But what that shows is the post-holiday experience, I’m and Cairo, it – the slides of Egypt still trying to relive and I still wanted to be there long time after we got back, when Mark was showing them on a slide” ferien. Derfor kan turistens aktive anvendelse af ferieoplevel R: “Men i skolen er det også en ‘stor’ ting, at vi tager til den hvordan fortæller, forældre andre de af flere Fordi festival. af nogle Og sted. af komme at også om plager unger deres ikke må komme med om de spurgt, ungerne har allerede 2007a) næste sommer” (Blichfeldt, En oplevelse er ikke nødvendigvis en oplevelse, En oplevelse er ikke nødvendigvis bert og Mark (to briter på 56 og 54) forklarer…: andre andre sociale medier (f.eks. 2011; Munar, Hjalager & Jensen, 2012). Med dette perspektiv in mente, bliver selve italesættelsen (både element væsentligt et ferieminder vores af billedligt) og bogstaveligt idet det er dette kommunika af den sociale identitetskonstruktion, tive element, der udløser positiv For (forhåbentligt) signalværdi. ikke således det er eksempel ovenstående i datteren idet hun dette opnår primært de sker værdier, brugbare fore af samme gruppe medlemmer når kommunikationen til andre og kommer, den positive symbolværdi konstrueres derfor primært ex facto eller som Ro en essentiel del af identitetskonstruktionerne, ser være for hendes umiddelbare gruppemedlemskaber. Det interessante er, er, Det interessante for gruppemedlemskaber. hendes umiddelbare identitet konstruerer at datteren ved og anerkender, at også faderen han også sig selv som en ferievalg, og derved konstruerer via deres ’cool’ far. ham selv som en ret far med en særlig identitet – i følge idet oplevelsen i lige så høj grad når denne opstår, genfortælles (Noy, 2004; & Vetner Jantzen, 2007). karikeres F.eks. 70ernes glade for ende gerne udsætter andre masseturist ofte som en person, der løse diasshows fra den veloverståede ferierejse. I en mere nutidig version findes der også talrige eksempler på, at tilsynela ferierejser dende ikke eksisterer før de kommunikeres ud på Facebook eller For datteren er For musikfestivalen datteren noget, der tales om i løbet af skole året, og også noget som øjensynligt påvirker hendes status blandt kammeraterne, og som dermed synes at have positiv symbolværdi quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - : 22 - - -

Multiple identiteter Multiple Volume 04 af ferieminder. Ligeledes fortæller af ferieminder. delingen Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil “But down and look at it alone, you do that down and look at in a company” (Smed, 2009)

“På en eller anden måde gør jeg det [viser og beviser over beviser og [viser det jeg gør måde anden eller en “På an fortælle at begynder jeg snart så alligevel jo andre] for ferier” (Blichfeldt et al, 2012) om mine dre it’s “Well, really boring isn’t it, other people’s holiday ex periences, especially when they get the photographs out … just, it’s now, camera a taking bother even don’t We […] or new that’s photograph to nothing just there’s know, you 2009) (Smed, different” M: you don’t do that on your own. don’t You sit 47-årige Else, at selv om hun ikke tager på ferie for at ‘vise sig’ eller sig’ ‘vise at for ferie på tager ikke hun om selv at Else, 47-årige det ender hun alligevel med at gøre ‘bevise noget overfor andre’, informanternes udtalte Trods bevidsthed om, at deres deling af for end selv dem for interessant mere er -billeder og ferieminder del af, hvordan en essentiel så synes dette at være modtageren, disse individer konstruerer social identitet på basis af deres fe ferieminder er at kedelige, ‘andres’ i særdeleshed Judy erkender, når de ‘finder billederne frem’ og samtidig forklarer hun, at hun Robert lægger vægt på, at feriebillederne gør ham i stand til at (gen) at til stand i ham gør feriebillederne at på, vægt lægger Robert opleve ferien, mens Mark supplerer denne betragtning med at for og deltagelse er en nødvendig for tilstedeværelse andres at klare, udsætning for, at man (gen)ser sine feriebilleder og dermed (gen) identitets disse grad forankres oplever sin ferie. I en eller anden dermed i konstruktioner Dvs. rierejser. at italesættelse af ferieminder giver mening, hvis At turists synsvinkel. vi ser det fra den identitetskonstruerende selve om meget så ikke således handler feriebilleder sine fremvise rekonstruere ferien som om individets forsøg på at konstruere, identitet. Hele ritualet karakteri social og eventuelt dekonstruere værdi væsentlig har ritualet hvor dobbelthed, en ved derfor seres for turisten samtidig med at denne er opmærksom på, at ritualet for modtage- kedeligt, trivielt eller endog uinteressant kan være det således: 61-årige britiske Judy formulerer ren. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------23

, der løseligt Multiple identiteter Multiple idem Volume 04 det ønskes. Sammenlignet med hvor og når Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil på ferie (Hjalager & Jensen, 2012). er Sammenlignet med tidligere tiders formidling af ferieminder der Sammenlignet med tidligere tiple identiteter, er individet dog i udgangspunktet en enkelt og dog i udgangspunktet en enkelt og er individet tiple identiteter, også at i sig selv fuldstændig og afgrænset enhed. Dette fremgår selve oprindelsen af ordet identitet; det latinske at selv om kan oversættes til ’den samme’ og som dermed illustrerer, så multiple identiteter, ideen om, at individet kan have vi accepterer er studiet af identitet forankret i en interesse for dét ved individet, 1998; (Ezzy, samme’ ’det er grad høj i dog så altid, ikke end om som, Gabriel & Lang, 2006). Som Giddens (1996) er påpeger, identiteten medier således ske på modtagerens initiativ og i højere grad på den på grad højere i og initiativ modtagerens på ske således medier der budskab det ift. rolle en spille vil givetvis hvilket betingelser, nes ønskes formidlet. Men ligegyldigt om den hjemvendte rejsendes ’showroom’ er virtuelt eller ej, påpeger vores informanter, at dette ’rum’ er centralt for deres kommunikation til betydende andre om, hvem de er og dermed bliver delingen af ferieminder centralt for sociale identitetskonstruktioner. deres At anvende og skabe sammenhæng mellem identiteter: mig’ At ’være mul af konstruktion til anvendes kan aktivt ferierejser at af trods På 70ernes diasshows kan identitetskonstruktionen (eller selviscene kan identitetskonstruktionen 70ernes diasshows af ferieminder via sociale sættelsen), der sker gennem formidling foretrukne foretrukne fremgangsmåde nu at være at poste disse fotoalbum på Facebook, rejseblogs eller andre sociale medier – ofte allerede mens man (med undtagelse af postkortet) krævede, at modtageren var klar til ønskede at formidle den at modtage informationen, når aftageren italesættelsefor form ny en for op medier sociale nutidens åbner ne, har mulighed for at modtage idet modtageren af disse oplevelser, denne kommunikation, ikke længere tager billeder på sine fordi ferier, der ikke er noget, der er ‘nyt’ eller ‘anderledes’ nok til at berettige fotografering eller implicit, at det Judy også, omend mere Hermed siger fremvisning. tilpas noget viser de hvis feriebilleder, vise og tage at ‘acceptabelt’ er sket et markant Indenfor de sidste år er der nyt og/eller anderledes. skifte i, hvordan vi deler vores ferieoplevelser og –billeder med an og hvor 80ernes og frem, Hvor 70ernes turist fandt diasshowet dre. 90ernes turister ofte brugte lang tid på at fremkalde, sortere, navn give og feriebillederne strukturere i fysiske fotoalbum, syntes den quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------24 -

Multiple identiteter Multiple være udfordrende udfordrende være Volume 04 ) gennem hele livet, ) gennem hele livet, er kan Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil se). Udover disse sociale normer er der også en fare for, for, se). Udover disse sociale normer er der også en fare bør go there ...” (Smed, 2009) ...” go there “In fact we find that it’s good to have less and less informa less and less have to good it’s that find we fact “In strong a such get you otherwise because places, about tion sense of the place almost before you’re there and then and you different, disappointed or they are either you’re an important part of itlose any sense of surprise and that’s somewhere go just to want wouldn’t we Obviously, […] and do something silly and you come back and people and such or didn’t youwill go, ohh didn’t you go do such af en turist, og at han dermed risikerer både at gøre noget, der er ’dumt’ og ikke få set, ’det man burde’ – som defineret af ens med med forbundet normer således er Der grupper. diverse af lemskaber ser man hvad og hen tager man hvor vedrører, både som turistrollen især (og at valget af en bestemt ferierejse kan appellere til nogle identitets modstrid med an at det er i direkte samtidig med konstruktioner dre. Et eksempel på en ferierejse, som appellerer til den personlige På basis af mangfoldige erfaringer med det at ‘være turist’, har Ed – primært omfanget af hans informationssøgning gradvis reduceret fordi det at vide meget, før man tager af sted (a) forøger forvent svært ved at har oplevelser faktiske sådan grad, at de en ningerne i bil mentale af konstruktion til leder (b) og forventninger disse indfri med, hvad leder af stedet, som ikke nødvendigvis korresponderer af den sidste del af citatet, så det fremgår Men som stedet faktisk er. omintet) (eller mindre vide at vælge at det at på, opmærksom Ed er hvad der ’forventes’ i modstrid med, feriedestinationen, kan være Et eksempel på, hvordan overvejelser om forskellige identitetskon turist’, er Ed (62-årig brite): det ’at være kan komplicere struktioner ikke givet på forhånd, hvorfor individet kan konstruere, udforske konstruere, kan individet hvorfor ikke givet på forhånd, og forme sin identitet (eller identitet rettere forskellige identiteter, hvor mange og hvor for, men der er grænser der kan sættes i spil for den enkelte uden at der opstår konflikter - ’den samme’ at være Men at fastholde eller endog identitetskriser. identiteter og roller på tværs af forskellige kan identitetskonstruerende er ferierejse af valget omfang det i og det være problematisk at vælge netop dén (eller de) der ferier, kor identitet. social som identitet personlig såvel med bedst responderer quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------25

Multiple identiteter Multiple Volume 04 Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil ”, at netop disse meninger kan blive mere styrende for rich in implied and inferred meaning about the consumer making rich in implied and inferred ”Men jeg syntes lidt: Jeg tager bare aldrig til Lesbos, fordi fordi Lesbos, til aldrig bare tager Jeg lidt: syntes jeg ”Men kliche, en da sgu er Det dét. i rundt rode ..., jo, alle kan så et al, 2012) hvis jeg tager til Lesbos, ikke?” (Blichfeldt ciale relationer (i form af anerkendelse fra betydende andre) en rolle rolle en andre) betydende fra anerkendelse af form (i relationer ciale som disse for i turistens fortællinger og de identitetskonstruktioner, identitet kontinuert i sig til. Samtidigt forhandles tællinger relaterer omhele, store det i sammenhæng og forståelse skabe at på forsøg et end dette tegner et kompleks billede af turistisk forbrug som iden i titetskonstruerende en langt mere udbredt grad end hvad der ofte til i turismelitteraturen. refereres for Linda ikke at fremstå som en ’kliche’ end at tage på ferie der, at tage på ferie der, end en ’kliche’ som ikke at fremstå Linda for hvor hun helst vil. Konklusion identitetskonstruerende indeholder ovenfor, eksemplificeret Som forbrug af ferierejser en række som elementer, alle på forskellig vis bidrager til navigerer imellem fortællingen om turisten. Turisten multiple identiteter og trækker i den forbindelse på forskellige ele konteksten, indenfor hvilken hver enkelt fortæl til menter relateret ling udspilles. Således spiller dynamik (så som opfattelserændrede andre og ikke af mindst selv, den ferierejse, der italesættes) og so righeden med de andre gæster på denne ‘gay destination’, har hunrigheden med de andre ’kliche’ en være vil det fordi rejse, denne netop fravalgt konsekvent at forbrugsvalg for, at tage til Lesbos. Belk (1982:523) argumenterer er så “ these choices forbrugsvalget end hvad vi som forbrugere egentligt har mest lyst til. For Linda betyder dette, at hun fravælger at tage til Lesbos, for di hun via dette forbrugsvalg risikerer negativ symbolværdi. Den af identitet kontinuerte som (re)konstruktion valg er af ferierejser forankret i bliver således også et spørgsmål om at undgå ferier der vigtigere er det når f.eks. – omverdenen til signaler negative sender identitet samtidig med at den kolliderer med den sociale identitet er med den sociale identitet med at den kolliderer identitet samtidig atift. for udtryk giver hun overvejelser de og lesbisk) er (som Linda tage til Lesbos: Selvom Linda har et dybfølt ønske om at opleve Lesbos og samhø quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

. , , ------26 Tourism

The Sociological Multiple identiteter Multiple Copenhagen: Hans , 31(4): 755-778 Volume . London: Routledge 04 . , Vol. 27 , Vol. Journal of Vacation Marketing Journal of Vacation The Unmanageable Consumer. Social AIdentifications: Social Psychol , 9(1): 523-530 P. (2000): “Shifting P. Perspectives in Con Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil Annals of Tourism Research Annals of Tourism Modernitet og selvidentitet , 39:164-182 Annals of Tourism Research Annals of Tourism Østergaard 39(2), 239-252 Consumer Research Handelshøjskolens Forlag, Copenhagen Business School Business Copenhagen Forlag, Handelshøjskolens Social Research 52(2):195-201 based Travellers on their Propensity to go Online before, dur (Reds.): Cantoni L. & Ricci F. M., Fuchs, I Trip. the after and ing 2012 in Tourism Information and Communication Technologies Biography” in Quarterly, Individual differences in Individual of perceptions differences consumption symbol ism”, in in Careers”, Travel Aspirations and ogy of Intergroup Relations and Group Processes Relations and Group ogy of Intergroup Buyer Behaviour to Consumption Stud From sumer Research: ies”, in Beckmann, Suzanne C. and Richard H. Elliott (editors). Paradigms, Methodologies & Appli Consumer Research. Interpretive cations, Press Second edition, Sage Publications Ltd., London Second edition, Sage Publications Reitzel Springer Verlag Wien: script not yet published in 13(2), 179-201 ology, Impediment”, in 13(2):149-164 Manu tourists”. lesbian of study A life’: gay my in straight very Hogg, M. Abrams & D. (1988): Jantzen C. & Gabriel, Yiannis Gabriel, & Yiannis Lang, (2006): Tim Giddens, A. (1996): in why?”, and eat tourists do ”What (2004). A.-M. Hjalager, Anne-Mette & Hjalager, Jan Møller of Jensen Typology (2012): A Cohen E. (1972): ”Towards a Sociology of International Tourism”, a Sociology of International Tourism”, Cohen E. (1972): ”Towards Soci Experiences. Tourist of Phenomenology A (1979): Eric Cohen, and Attraction – Tourism in ”Food (2004): Avieli N. And E. Cohen Travel and Identity - World the “Traveling (2000): Luke Desforges, identity. narrative Theorizing (1998): Douglas Ezzy, Referencer Belk, R., Mayer R. and Bahn K. (1982): “The eye of the beholder: in Experience Variations Blichfeldt, B. Nice S. Vacation: (2007a): “A Blichfeldt, B. A. S., Therkelsen J. & Chor, N. B. Milan (2012): “‘I’m quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , , ------27 , vol. vol. , The So Annals of

Multiple identiteter Multiple

edition. New York: York: New edition. Volume Journal of Travel Re Journal of Travel 04 . Bloomington: Indi . Bloomington: nd 2 Journal of Travel Research Travel of Journal Aalborg: Aalborg Univer Aalborg Aalborg: , Monterey, CA: Brooks-Cole CA: Monterey, , : “Developing the travel Ca travel the “Developing : Annals of Tourism Research Tourism of Annals . Third Edition. London: Routledge . Third Sage Publications The Time of the Tribes. The Decline of Indi of the Tribes. The Time The Ulysses Factor: Evaluation Visitors in in The Ulysses Factor: Evaluation Visitors & Identity - Accumulated tourist ex Tourism

Bodil Stilling Blichfeldt og Karina Madsen Smed Madsen og Karina Stilling Blichfeldt Bodil Culture & Consumption Culture International Journal of Culture, Tourism and Hos Tourism International Journal of Culture, , 25(4), 936-957 Motivation and Personality. Personality. and Motivation . New York, Springer Verlag York, . New , 5(3), 291-305 Social Identity Vol. 43 Vol. tur” in Jantzen, Christian & Rasmussen, Tove Arendt (editors).Arendt tur” in Jantzen, Christian & Rasmussen, Tove Oplevelsesøkonomi: vinkler på forbrug. sitetsforlag search, identity construction narratives in tourists’ perience and travel career SPIRIT PhD Series, No. 23 Research Tourism Stephen. Worchel, G.; William Austin, in Conflict”, group Relations cial Psychology of Intergroup struk socialpsykologiske Oplevelsens konstituent. tetsmæssig pitality Research Narratives of Self-Change”, in 31, No. 1 in Experiences” Travellers’ from vation 22(2) Vol. Settings Tourist in Motivation” Tourist to Approach reer Harper and Row ana University Press nation branding. vidualism in Mass Society. vidualism in Mass Smed, Karina M. (2009): Appraisal. An Ladder: Career Travel The (1998): C. Ryan, Inter of Theory Integrative “An (1979): John Turner, Henri; Tajfel, identi som “Oplevelsen (2007) Christian Jantzen, & Mikael Vetner, Noy, Chaim Noy, (2004): “This trip really changed me - Backpackers’ Moti Travel “Inferring (1983): L. M. Caltabiano, & L. Philip Pearce, Pearce, Philip L. (1988): (2005) Uk-Il Lee, & L. Philip Pearce, McCracken, G. (1988): content: Rethinking desti Tourist-created Ana Maria (2011): Munar, Jenkins, R. (2008): Jenkins, R. (2008): Maffesoli, Michel (1996): (1970): A. Maslow, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed En undersøgelse af guidebøgernes og museets gensidige formidlingsstruktur i den victorianske periode

Rune Andersen (f. 1974), ph.d. Center for Mellemøststudier ved Syddansk Universitet Odense. Har publiceret in- denfor forskningsområderne ’epistemology and phi- losophy of tourism’. I øjeblikket involveret i et pro- jekt om turismens topiklære. Er gæsteredaktør på dette nr. af Akademisk Kvarter.

Abstract Artiklen undersøger formidlingsligheden mellem guidebog og det naturhistoriske museum i den victorianske periode. Det er argu- mentet at der i begge ’videns-institutioners’ formidlingsstil ikke blot ligger en fremstilling, men også en fortolkning af ’det frem- mede’. Dette argument knyttes til den svenske botaniker Carl Linné og hans taksonomisystem som metode for naturens forudsigelig- hed. Artiklen indeholder således også en kort skitsering af Linné og videnskabsrejsen som en historisk forudsætning for guidebogen og det naturhistoriske museum.

Forholdet mellem det, der almindeligvis benævnes ’den moderne guidebog’ og naturmuseet, har nogle påfaldende strukturelle for- midlingsligheder i den victorianske periode, og er i denne sam- menhæng interessante ved deres latente ambition om at formidle ting, steder og information. I det følgende er det hensigten at på- pege nogle af disse formidlingsligheder, dvs. hvordan guidebogen og museet som ’formidlingsinstitutioner’ ”taler” til modtageren og hvordan selve fremstillingsformen eller organiseringen af viden, både kan indebære en anvisning til og en fortolkning af det frem- mede. Fremstillingsformen kædes sammen med den victorianske periodes videnskabelige orientering mod kulturel systematik med

Volume 03 28 ------for

29

Rune Andersen Rune ). Selve den victo Volume 04 Hvor den guidelitterære Hvor den guidelitterære om, at den pointerede argumentet argumentet Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet ud fra sidé, der sammen med museet er artiklens omdrejningspunkt. Det er en forudsætning for denne artikel, at guidebog og museum og guidebog at artikel, denne for forudsætning en er Det Waller, S.L: Vol. 14. S.L: The Vol. Age, Victorian Waller, Part Two ’videns-institution’. Guidebogen – mellem videnskab og dannelse Indflydelsen harrejselitteraturen fra til alle tider en været betydelig helt op i det 20. århundre og kilde til information om det fremmede, Storbritannien i læste mest den til hørt litteratur rejserelateret har de ( rianske periode markerer blandt briterne et naturvidenskabeligt og Det er argumentet, at begge institutioner tilstræber tidens viden Det er argumentet, skabelige standarder for objektiv vidensformidling, men at de in får konsekvenser hvori fremstillingsformen deholder en struktur, for mødet med det fremmede. omfat ikke dermed og konstruktioner, idéhistoriske som behandles guide forskellige 3 de har Således sammenstillinger. empirinære ter bøger små variationer hinanden i ganske indhold be (de kopierede fremhævelse men med en næsten identisk fremstilling, tragteligt), og anvisning Guidebøgerne til vil den medegyptiske fremmedhed. udgangspunkt i artiklens specifikke ærinde blive behandlet som én skal det pointeres at Egypten som geografisk afsæt ikke er afgø rende for artiklens argument, da det er guidebogen som formid ling Artiklens idé formes midlingslighed indgår i guidebøgerne og det naturhistoriske mu der som automatik realisering, seum som en tilsyneladende passiv for erkendelsens for resonansbund underliggende en konstituerer hold mellem det kendte og det ukendte. formidling tekstuelt assisterer turisten med henblik på stedlig og museum en organisato har det naturhistoriske tidslig instruering, funktion. beskrivende tekstens over ud rækker der realisering, risk udgangspunkt i Carl Linnés videnskabstaksonomi. cen Konkret undersøgelsen treres om henholdsvis den britiske museumstradi pub af udgivet Egypten guidebøger’til ’moderne første de og tion 1847 mellem Baedeker og Cook i årene Murray, likationshusene et af de første var i midten af det 19. århundrede og 1897. Egypten som lande bl.a. uden i for kraft iEuropa, af de koloniale interesser landet muliggjorde, at en turistindustri kunne etableres. Med det en Egypten som turistdestination udgangspunkt repræsenterer Dog kultur. til fremmed markant anderledes og ny indsigtskilde quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------30

Rune Andersen Rune ) Den systematise Volume 04 Barber, Barber, 1980: s. 47 Konkret havde Linnés kunststykke bag kunststykke Linnés havde Konkret

1 Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet Forholdet Forholdet mellem rejse og videnskab får stor betydning for med den victorianske periodes videnskabsideal, der med Linnés ver organisere at måder nye for åbnet havde metode taksonomiske en botanik teoretisk var taksonomi Linnéiske den for Forud på. den var indviklede navne til og uoverskuelig opgave. Der kompliceret dem klassificere at for kriterierne og arter, almindelige mest de selv selv. sig i videnskab en var provinser, hierarki med dets kongeriger, i samtidens sociale grund der ramme, en i dyr og planter indpassede Han landsbyer. og sogne tode som revolutionerede videnskaberne fremefter. Metoden hav Metoden fremefter. videnskaberne revolutionerede som tode de udgangspunkt i et deskriptivt klassifikationssystem, hvori alle med de i overensstemmelse planter kunne karakteriseres verdens Klassifikationssystemet der blot behøvede ophav. reproduktive res to navne, et slægtsnavn og et artsnavn, blev hurtigt målestok for muligheder nye videnskaberne dermed gav og væsner levende alle objekterne. Linné blev en og af ekskludere de mestfor at inkludere citerede videnskabsmænd i Viktoriatiden og formulerede dermed grundlaget for hvordan viden skulle klassificeres ogregistreres i systemet af kendsgerninger. ( tæt sammen hang af det fremmede og fremstillingen viden rede guidebøgerne i det 19. århundrede. Tidens største publikationshuse største Tidens århundrede. 19. det i guidebøgerne Beadeker og Cook benyttede til og videnskabe refererede Murray, guidebøger af del en som disse integrerede og kendsgerninger lige nes informative og instruktive Guidebøgerne vejledninger. repræ på forsøg seriøst publikationshusene for et periode denne i senterer med tidens vi tråd i et litterært anvisningsformat, præsentere at forbin har rejse-/videnskabsforhold Dette dogmer. denskabelige om, at vidensopnåelse skulledelser til oplysningstidens imperativ Blandt viden til rationalisme og natur. relation i ufravigelig foregå skabernes allerstørste overbevisninger havde den svenske læge og botaniker Carl Linné (1707-1778) udarbejdet en videnskabelig me imperialt højdepunkt, der basalt set var et resultat af en lang tradi Herunder videnskabsekspeditioner. og opdagelsesrejsende af tion havde videnskabsrejsende kæmpet om retten til de store empiriske at om ambition metafysiske den til betydeligt bidraget og spørgsmål underlægge naturen gennem videnskaberne. De rejsende fik status både dermed bidrog og førstepersoner erfaringsvidenskabernes af til den nødvendige videnskabelige empiri og udfyldte samtidig de kartografiske tomrum. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------­ 31 Brendon, Brendon,

Rune Andersen Rune

) med øget respekt øget respekt med

Volume 04 Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet Oplysningstidens tendens til øget generering og 2 ), hvorunder de historiske og litterære forudsætninger og litterære de historiske ), hvorunder Turisten som Turisten den nye type af rejsende, blev en konkurrent til I det rejselitterære domæne fik videnskabsklassificering særlig – i hvert fald så længe, at denne blev foretaget af folk med den rette socio-kulturelle pondus, og så længe den blev fremstillet i orga videnskabelig for præference tidens med overensstemmelse nisering. Enhver rejselitterær ytring var med andre ord en ytring i ytring en ord andre med var ytring rejselitterær Enhver nisering. en bestemt rejsediskurs påhæftet bestemte genremæssige regler for acceptabilitet. grund rejsens forrykkede og rejsetraditioner stolte så tidligere de læggende idé om at være en original og dannelsesmæssig disci revo turismens af del en fremmest og først var Guidebogen plin. lutionerende idé om at individuelle rejsende kunne orientere og ’mo Den tjenestefolk. og (dragomen) guides lokale uden navigere derne guidebog’ blev forenklet sagt den ’moderne turismes’ in- oplys ordnede taksonomisk indeholdte som vejledning, struktive mellem ninger om ting, steder og mennesker i overensstemmelsen turistens præferencer og guidebogens oplysninger og anvisnin blev udgangspunkt det Med præferencer. disse af opnåelse til ger guidebogen, med sin oplysnings- og anvisningslogik, en betyde systematisk så og turisten lig autoritet i hvad, hvor og hvordan oplevede destinationen. ikke mindst øget organisering af viden havde bidraget til at om gærde indsamlingen af viden om det fremmede det om viden af indsamlingen gærde indvirkning ved overgangen til oplysningstiden, hvor rejselittera hvor oplysningstiden, til overgangen ved indvirkning 1991: s. 120 rejsetra i baggrund tekstlige og oprindelse deres havde sagt som Guidebogen til det fremmede Egypten (og til dels Palæstina) blev for den europæiske turist den turistdestination uden ( for første Europa organiserede bestod af fem hovedkategorier – rige, klasse, orden, slægt, art. tidli naturens af beherskelse og metodik revolutionerende Denne gere så abstrakte og ubændige omfang blev kendt som det bino 2007: s. 105-111 miale (Warne, nomenklatursystem. rejse maritim fra forvandling paradigmatisk en gennemgik turen det pri eventyr og overlevelseslitteratur som herunder litteratur, mære oplevelsesmoment, til en orientering mod en rejselitterær videnskabsdisciplin til forklaring af det europæiske menneskes i verden. væren quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , ------32 , der dæk

Rune Andersen Rune Volume 04 Towner, 1985: s. 297-333 Towner, , Manners and Customs Cook’s tourists’ handbook for Egypt, tourists’ Cook’s , en Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet . Denne selvfølgelighed involverede og be Hazbun, 2008: s. 3 ) Havde man med andre ord muligheden for at ord ) Havde man med andre Egypt Taksonomien inkluderede både fysiske og historiske og fysiske både inkluderede Taksonomien

– John Murray and Sons, Thomas Cook Ltd, og Karl Baedeker Sons, Thomas Cook Ltd, og Karl – John Murray and 3 Det repræsentative fællesskab mellem museum og guidebog lig guidebog og museum mellem fællesskab repræsentative Det af nogle bestemte og forventede tegn-, typer-, fortællinger- og race og fortællinger- typer-, tegn-, forventede og bestemte nogle af var guidebøgerne ved træk gennemgående Et genkendeligheder. det omfangsrige og detaljerede kapitel om Egyptens menneskety under overskriften præsenteret per, kede over en taksonomisk inddeling af de forskellige folkeslags karakteristika. sammenstillinger samt forklaringer af moralske og eksotiske sær præg understøttet af videnskabelige referencer eller udtalelser fra et litterært og diskursivt skifte fra individuel narrativ til guidebog. henvendte tiders den forskel nye fra rejsenarrativer tidligere lit Til teraturform sig til læseren med et imperativ om oplevelses- og er mellem der navigerede faringsimitering. Heri lå en formidlingsstil, detaljerede oplysninger og anvisninger med henblik på et publi Formidlingen forfatteren. det samme som kum, der ville se og gøre indbefattede med andre ord en i guidebogen særegen stilistisk ka etable allerede af baggrund på eftergørelse forudsatte der rakter, og praksisformer. forestillinger rede ger derfor også i den fælles tanke om bevarelse eller opretholdelse rejse rejse til Egypten i denne periode, ville det være en selvfølgelig hed at søge sine informationer om landet i enten en John Murray’s in Egypt Handbook for Travellers eller en Baedeker kontekst i en helt ny økonomisk, politisk og teknologisk grundedes den medførte sammenhæng britisk I mobilitet. kulturel og social for industrielle revolution, at en ny middelklasse kunne finde både midlerne og fritiden til at rejse, og dermed bryde med tidligere ti som en beskæftigelse ders kun rejsetraditioner forbeholdt viden skabsfolk og aristokrati. Skiftet fra en britisk rejsetradition for beholdt de få til en demokratisering i rejseformen betød ligeledes ditioner som videnskabsrejsen og The Grand Tour i mellem det 17. ditioner som og videnskabsrejsen The Grand Tour publikations tre især fik traditioner disse af Ud århundrede. 19. og huse – helt afgørende indflydelse på guidebogslitteraturen om Egypten og den moderne turisme i det hele taget. På den baggrund grund guidebogslitteratu og Egypten, i rejseform ny som turismen lagdes som ren dennes tekstuelle ytringsform i udbredtes Egypten i årene mellem 1847 og 1897. ( Black, 2003: s. 7-11 quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - 33 over ------) in Cook,

( serdf Rune Andersen Rune kategorien til at Volume 04 Manners and customs Manners and customs Her eksempelvis egypteren med Her eksempelvis egypteren manners and customs Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet ) uændret natur. uændret rule rule handsome and dignifiedin appearance, and courte Ar (...)” haughty though strangers, to manner their in ous trades, and commerce in engaged chiefly are “(...) menerne especially as goldsmiths and jewellers and overbearing to remarkable “(...) som beskrevet blev Jøderne natives.” the in Egypt for their fair blue hair, eyes, and white skin, just as they generally in Europe are to be distinguished by op posite characteristics. The money street changers ( “We start with the cardinal fact, that, although the coun start with the cardinal “We Ethi Hyksos, by overrun periods various at been has try Assyrians, opians, (...) the Egyptians have for thousands (...)” types physical unvarying same the retained years of Nubiere “keep up a warlike spirit”. “(...) Tyrkere are as a tented race, very much like the American Negroes in their American Negroes tented race, very much like the Their humour. thoughtlessness, and good simplicity, bread is a coarse, dark, barley cake; their dwellings are which shelter from hair, goats’ made of simple, low tents hence, uncomfortable; quite are respects other in but rain, in cold they weather, resort, if possible, to caves.” 1897: s. 303 “The Towárahs earn a scanty livelihood by “The burning Towárahs char flocksfew a feed Alewi the and market, Cairo the for coal patches of ground, of sheep or goats, and cultivate small advantages the of careless and ignorant alike are both but of civilized they life. Yet are apparently a cheerful, con fremhæve og kombinere racernes taksonomi med samtidige repræ samtidige med taksonomi racernes kombinere og fremhæve sentationer af egyptisk hverdagsliv: Murrays guidebog anvendte Mens Baedeker fremhævede en historisk taksonomi til pointering Mens Baedeker fremhævede af folkeslagenes fysiske udvikling. en historisk tidens forskningsetablissement. Under skriften fokuserede Cook eksempelvis på en blanding af moralske karaktertræk:og civilisatoriske quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------34 ­ - -

Rune Andersen Rune ) Volume 04 ) Murray, 1888: s. 32-34 Murray, ( Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet Cook, 1897: s. 303-304 ( Egypt and Palestine, are of a very prosaic character; rude, character; prosaic very a of are Palestine, and Egypt no points of attrac they offer and greedy, ignorant, lazy, tion (...).” “The people who live in the desert have always been a but a very short and favorite poetry, subject of romance experience is sufficient to dissipate youthful delusions. between found are as them of such least at Bedouins, The the towns are Jews, and there are many wealthy merchants merchants many wealthy are Jews, and there the towns are mis though the Jews’ quarter is a poor, and shopkeepers, erable-looking one, and they themselves are said to be dirty in person and unclean in their habits.” Og euro pærene “(...) are an important and sectionever-increasing (...)” of the population ning til ruten og den herunder udspecificerede og sekvenserede tid kunne planlægge en indledende sortering af oplevelsernes og stedernes Det muligheder. var afgørende for guidebøgerne ikke at afvige fra tidens tilstræbte videnskabelige hvorun standarder, der viden både skulle fremstilles i en overskuelig og sammenlig tone passiv og distanceret en i formidles samt taksonomi, nelig er vigtig med for videnskabens objektivitet. Talepositionen respekt enbenytter museum og guidebog både da sammenhæng, denne i Guidebogen virkede dermed som den rejsende amatørs primære tilgang til meningsfuld (og tidsforpligtet) navigering i og forståel sesramme til de Guidebøgernes fremmede kulturer. fornemmelse fri begrænsede den til relation tæt i oplevelserne maksimere at for turisten at gjorde, vejledninger lavpraktiske de med kombineret tid før både destinationen med mødet ”beherske” og overskue kunne anvis guidebogens gennem turisten at betød, Det rejsen. under og og let overskuelige kategorier. Overskueligheden og medførte let også overskuelige atkategorier. guidebøgerne til de forskellige kategorier og indeholdte karakter sig til denne skulle forholde træk kunne anvise turisten i, hvorledes opmærksom således turisten til at være typerne. Cooks opfordrede beduinen om forestilling forvrængede den mellem misforholdet på sande karakter og den virkelige oplevelse af beduinens Med den taksonomiske metode kunne guidebøgerne formidle kom formidle guidebøgerne kunne metode taksonomiske den Med plekse geografiske og kulturelle problemstillinger i differentierede quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------35 ) ). Tanken ). Tanken ), der fun

– Amerbach – 4 Rune Andersen Rune Volume 04 Behdad, 1994 : s. 41 ). Guidebogen indeholdt cabinet of curiosities Hunter, 2001: s. 217-229 s. 2001: Hunter, eng. Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet Behdad, 1994 : s. 40 Wunderkammer ytringsfunktioner. ​​ ytringsfunktioner. Det vil sige, at hvor rejselitteraturen Et klassisk udgangspunkt for museumstraditionen indledes ofte Den guidelitterære Den udtryksform, guidelitterære i modsætning til rejselitteratu lem det 15. og 18. århundrede, og som regnes for at have været for at have været og som regnes lem det 15. og 18. århundrede, foregangsmænd for det 16. århundredes undringskabinet/kurio (ty. sitetskabinet eller erindringsteater over verden. som et mikrokosmos gerede Dette opstillede mikrokosmos kunne ligeledes formidle ejerens ( verden over magt og symbolske bag den repræsenterede og organiserede ”virkelighed” fuldend Europa i museum offentlige første det med 1671 i tes Som en del af det erkendelsesrum, det 19. århundredes turister turister det 19. århundredes Som en del af det erkendelsesrum, navigerede i, var naturhistoriske museer og udstillinger en bety delig del af vinduet til det fremmede og det, som umiddelbart lå Museet udenfor som virkelighedens idé erkendelsesmuligheder. var mæssig institution til formidling af kendsgerninger om verden således tæt forbundet til ideen om neutralitet og uberørt fremstil ling eller konservering. Ideen indbefatter på den baggrund mu seet som et vindue for offentligheden til et sagligt indblik i det umiddelbart fremmede. rigeste familier mel en af Europas Medici familien, der var med rerede som producent og indholdsansvarlig. Selv i tilfælde hvor og som producent rerede navnet på redaktøren var nævnt, blev dennes udsagn udtrykkeligt ham fra tekstens samlede helhed. Iefterfulgt af udsagn, der adskilte re som der funktion, forenende rejseberetningernes til modsætning ytringsmæssigede var fortæller, første-person en af udgjort blev gel i guidebogen kvaliteter forbundet afpræsenteret med en spredning det talende subjekt ( eller udgjorde, ud fra dette rationale, en diskurs, der ikke havde en eller ensartet ytringsposition. ( centraliseret Museet og den neutrale formidling formidlingsstil, der ikke umiddelbart refererer til et fortællersub jekt, men som fremstår neutrale der formidlere, har en implicit in stitutionel reference metode, hvori udsagn og ytringspositio som en konstrueredes rens, diversi en betød hvilket hinanden, fra adskilt var almindeligvis ner ficering i frem omstændigheder normale under der forfattersubjekt, et havde figu der udgiveren, selve guidebogen for det var udgiver, som stod quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - ) ------­ 36 www. det før

Rune Andersen Rune Volume 04 Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet Den rejsende og museets organisering af viden skulle således kabinettet – i Basel. Nu kunne man skabe overskuelige mikrouni zoo de Herunder erkendelsesmuligheder. borgers almindelige den hvor fremmede logiske haver steder, som geografisk organiserede på de fremmede repræsentationer som dyr og planter fungerede Museum British The blev sammenhæng britisk I kulturer. - der af museum, eksempel på et moderne offentligt ste konkrete løste traditionen af kuriositetskabinetter som eksempelvis John (1678- Museum Ashmolean The og Ark The (1577-1638) Tradescants 1683). The British Museum blev etableret i 1753 af videnskabsman Sir den Hans Sloane og blev ifølge Museet selv ”one of the finest ( history.” human of years million two spanning existence, in ) britishmuseum.org I parallel udvikling med briternes koloniale ekspansion oprettedes The Natural History Museum (etableret i Mu- Museum. British The af afdeling én som fungerede der 1881), seet skulle omfatte de i tiden fem vigtigste områder: botanik, en og zoologi og således dispo tomologi, mineralogi, palæontologi af over naturstudiet de med vigtigste speciale grene nere i Linnés 47-55 s. 1980: (Barber, konservering. og identifikation taksonomi, Den taksonomiske metode betød således, at det såkaldte kuriosi- tetskabinet, hvor oplevelsens omdrejningspunkt primært var ret tet mod den bizarre og eksorbitante del af udstillingen, nu blev mod orienteret fremstilling stringent og videnskabelig en af afløst genstandens naturhistoriske værdi. For videnskaben og den her at måden i transformering en det indebar litteratur, følgende efter Linnés i baggrund Med bearbejdning. dennes og viden organisere lø videnskabelige den museum moderne det fik operandi modus og for kunne organiseres at viden for, dighed, der var afgørende midles uden synlig subjektivisme. ople- lade men museumsoplevelsen, i eksplicit figurere ikke heller passiv formidling og for sig selv gennem velsen tale uforstyrret konstruktion oplevelsens implicit saglighed. Dermed intenderede at diktere de indeholdte fakta i form af strukturer begivenheder, m.m., der såvel forekom plausible som og relevante, at disse blev bundet sammen af en fremstilling, der virkede neutral, men også overbevisende. Fremstillingsformen autoriserede således indhol dets vægt og fylde ved at omgrænse det i sin overbevisende for klaringsmodel af ’fakta der taler for sig selv’. Fælles for disse ideer verser og fremstille og formidle det, der almindeligvis lå uden for det, der almindeligvis lå og formidle verser og fremstille quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------). I 37 rede rede Kirs Muse hvori “

Rune Andersen Rune (be)gribelsen Volume 04 således at publikum at således ) I denne formidlings Byrnes, 1994: s. 209 s. 1994: Byrnes, ). overskuelsen ). De scenariske detaljer skulle der Mitchell, 1991: s. 9 Mitchell, 1991: s. Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet Casey, 2003: s. 2 Casey, ( ” Med det rationale indebar organiseringen og fremstillingen en be even better than actually going to the place depicted.” ( henblatt-Gimblett, 1998: s. 133 både for dobbeltbehovet gennem lanceres med med lighed tæt så en have skulle repræsenterede det gennem virke nærgående den fornemme kunne publikum at originalen, lighed, men samtidig imødegås af kunne beherske indfangelsens distance kontekst. til den ­ percipe kendelsens forbindelse til verden – struktureredes kendelsens blikkets forbindelse præ til – verden struktureredes verden efterlade kunne der normativitet, imaginære og indlejrede af det frem Museets organisering som genstand for genoplevelse. mede skulle fremstå som desubjektiveret forvalter af den indly det uundgåeli sende sandhed og virkelighed, som syntes at være af afdækning lødige og tilbundsgående rejsendes de af resultat ge at om ideen og side ene den på videnskabsidealet Med område. et på den anden fremmede og formidle kontakten med det skildre side, var det afgørende både at imødese behovet for distanceret shows ”Such emnet. med interaktion intim skabe at og objektivitet might that travel for substitutes as day own their in celebrated were og fremstilling af genstandens kontekstuelle modalitet. og fremstilling by valuable objects make but objects valuable gather just not do ums gathering them. The museum is able to produce cultural knowl edge by organizing how the materials it authorizes are seen – by the Gaze. controlling hen iboende genstandens med der forvaltning, erkendelsesmæssig en situation, repræsenterede visning til en original tilstand eller som trans mellem genstand og original henvisning, tankeproces formerede et kulturelt rum til bevidsthed ( denne henvisning – hvori det kulturelle rum besegledes med er var, at de ligesom guidebøgerne hvilede på den dobbelte betragt var, ene side skulle tilgodese en overensstemmende ning, der på den an og eksotiske, og på den og intim kontakt det fremmede med frem verden af (be)gribelse og overskuelse distanceret en side den ( mikrokosmos. som stillet oplevelserkunstneriske museumsgængernes transskriberedes form som et kulturelt indblik i kulturers artefakter fremmede og histo rie indsat i en kontekstgenkendelse, som bestemt organisatorisk afhængig af museets organisering derved lod genkendelsen være quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------). 38

Rune Andersen Rune ) Fremmedheden Fremmedheden ) Duncan et al., 1999: Volume 04 Maffesoli, Maffesoli, 2004: s. 206 Kant, 1770: Paragraf 10,12 og Bundgård, 2004: s. 29 s. 2004: Bundgård, Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet s.og guidebogen hvor forklaringsramme, en antydes Hermed ). 116 museet som tekstuelt og organisatorisk omdrejningspunkt kon ganiseret efter et hierarki af kulturel betydning ( betydning kulturel af hierarki et efter ganiseret struerer et særligt kulturelt blik, der henter deres fremstillings- og Denne struktur. anvisningslogik i den samme erkendelsesmæssige struktur tilkendegives i og de forestillinger praksisfor etablerede der mer, både har en stilistisk implicithed i guidebogens - informa i sin musealiserede dialektik og fremmedheden tive og instruktive fra tu forestilling der leder til den antagede og forventede form, ristens side om den i teksten etablerede fremmedhed. Der bliver med andre ord en organisatorisk medbestemmelse på turistens og museumsgængerens præindlejrede mulighedsspektrum og der en ”kulturel ved en erkendelsesmæssig afgrænsning, der rummer er meningsgivende, når eller genstanden normalisering”. Figuren i forhold fortolkningen af det visuelle sanseindtryk er organiseret til den taksonomiske genkendelighed, som indeholdes i guidebo Det vil sige, at det ukendte gens og museets formidlingsstruktur. genkendes eller identificeres med en kendt struktur; kausaliteten er i ledtog med en før-prædikativ givethed der både forholder sig fremadskuende de lader også men forhånd, på kender vi det til (Frye, 1982: givethed erindringens være forbindelser, typologiske s. 141). Maffesoli kalder denne meningsetablering for en dialektik mellem det dagligdags og det arketypiske ( Der antydes med en ord andre meningskausalitet, som forløber på er dermed anlagt og udlagt imellem en tekstuel og organisatorisk en tekstuel og organisatorisk er dermed anlagt og udlagt imellem og or taksonomiseret og rum, iscenesættelse af det turistiske sted ). Her udspilles turistens perception af den æstetiske og kulturelle af den æstetiske og kulturelle 13). Her udspilles turistens perception understøt mulighedsspektrum taksonomisk et for inden oplevelse Den a posterioriske fremmedhed Den a posterioriske Det fremmede som a posteriorisk erfaring er øjensynligt et syntak repræsen paradoks, da det fremmede tisk og erkendelsesmæssigt - erfaringsmæssigt gen ikke kan være det ukendte og dermed terer er ikke desto mindre paradoksale forudsætning kendeligt. Denne (desti ”ukendte” det med mødet i erfaringsvilkår og oplevelses- et ”ukendte” erkendes a posterio nationen/museet). Mødet med det men sanserne, gennem direkte ikke inspireret) (Kantiansk dvs. risk, ved at turisten drager slutninger af sanseindtrykkene ud indirekte, fra sine almene begreber og viden ( ( tet af en apriorisk struktur. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------og 39 WARNE, K. WARNE,

Rune Andersen Rune Guide to the Levant Volume 04 . 105-111. , 38 The English guide book, c. 1780-1870: an ydreverdensreferens Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet Smithsonian, . Det er dog uklart om Cruchley selv har rejst de steder han steder de rejst har selv Cruchley om uklart dog er Det . , David & Charles Abbot (Newton Eng and North Pomfret, Af andre varianter var der kristent motiverede og organiserede og organiserede var der kristent motiverede Af andre varianter VAUGHAN, J. E. 1974. VAUGHAN, Kombinationen af de koloniale og rejsende aktørers hjemførelse aristokratisk sport. eksempelvis der var guidebogsudgivere indflydelsesrige 3 disse af siden Ved George Frederick Cruchley en britisk udgiver, kortsælger og boghandler der i en andre guidebøger) mange (blandt ca 1840 tilbød Handbook to the East skriver om. illustrated history Vt)., side 40. Kennedy Warne påpeger eksempelvis at tomaten før Linné blev benævnt ” (...) påpeger eksempelvis at tomaten før Linné blev benævnt Warne Kennedy incises—the solanum with theSolanum caule inermi herbaceo, foliis pinnatis incised pinnate leaves.” smooth stem which is herbaceous and has Man. 2007. Organization videnskabste den sig: og litteraturretninger rejse- to særligt Her markerede matiserede rejse (scientific travelling) ogTour). dannelsesrejsen (The Grand som litteratur, historiske den i eksemplificeret blevet ofte er Videnskabsrejsen del af den europæiske oplysningstid et fænomen der opstår som en naturlig dannelsespro elitært et som fremstod overfladen under dannelsesrejsen mens søgte efter som ganske vist på makroplan briter, af velstående domineret jekt som grad dyrkede opdagelsen højere i langt ny viden, men som på mikroplan 3 1 2 ninger organiseret som bevis for generelle forklaringer af eksem af forklaringer generelle for bevis som organiseret ninger pelvis et steds historie, mens mennesker parallelt blev forklaret civilisations og kultur- inddelte taksonomisk til referencer gennem tæt i lys det i var identifikation normative og kulturelle Den stader. kontakt med både naturmuseets og guidelitteraturens taksono Således kunne miske fremmedhed. af den kulturelle fremstillinger for erkendelsen gennem refe og udstilles præsenteres sted og rum rencer til mennesker objekter, eller oplevelser indsat i guidbogens genkendelses- og tolkningsskemaer. eller museets generelle Noter to niveauer som en ramme i en ramme, der på den ene side mulig der på den ene en ramme, en ramme i som niveauer to gør en med-givet egenerfaring af rum den og perciperede tid, men Hans side trækker på det litteraturteoretiker som på den anden en Lauge Hansen kalder mobili fremstilling, bekræftende museernes og kulturgenstande af kul til anvisningsform særlige guidebøgernes med sammen serede afvalidering og gensidig en effektiv forholdsmæssigheder, turens betragt autoritative de blev Herunder konstitution. fremmedes det quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------40 , Secker Archives Archives

. Writes of pas Writes Rune Andersen Rune , University of Greek-English Lexi Greek-English Volume 04 Odense, Odense SDU. s.l., s.l. London, House of Stratus. Århus, Aros. Århus, , Routledge London. . LIDDELL, H. G. E. A. 1996. LIDDELL, H. G. E. Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet Kunst - semiotiske beskrivelser af æstetisk betyd beskrivelser af Kunst - semiotiske s.l., P.Hasse & Søns Forlag AS. Søns Forlag & s.l., P.Hasse The Imperfect Authority of the Eye The Imperfect Authority of Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press. Beaches, Ruins, Resorts The politics of Tourism in Beaches, Ruins, Resorts The politics of Tourism Thomas Cook: 150 years of popular tourism popular of 150 years Cook: Thomas Belated travelers: orientalism in the age of colonial age of colonial Belated travelers: orientalism in the Stemning som æstetisk og eksistentiel kategori i følsom i kategori eksistentiel og som æstetisk Stemning The cabinet institutionalized: the Royal Society’s ‘Re Society’s the Royal The cabinet institutionalized: The heyday of natural history 1820-1870 Cook’s tourists’ handbook for Egypt, the Nile, and the the and Nile, the Egypt, for handbook tourists’ Cook’s Durham & London, Duke University Press. Durham The British Abroad: The Grand Tour In The Eighteenth In The Eighteenth The Grand Tour The British Abroad: Den store kode, Den store Dissertation on the Form and Principles of the Sensible Representation: Cultural Representations and Signifying Cultural Representations Representation: London, Sage Publications Ltd. Gloucestershire, Sutton Publishing Limited. Gloucestershire, London, Thomas Cook & son. Oxford Oxford University Press. Oxford Oxford University pository’ and its background, and its background, pository’ fra 1768 til 1868, med særligt henblik på poetik og bystemnin me rejser ger og med hovedvægt på H.C.Andersen and the form of the intelligible world mance in the contemporary cultural-history museum. museum. cultural-history contemporary the in mance & Museum Informatics Desert, travel writing sage: reading Practices, the Arab World, dissolution, Century, Ltd. (Martin) & Warburg ning og oplevelse, Michigan Press. rejser der benyttede deres egne vejledninger til sted og seværdighed. Et andet deres egne vejledninger til sted og seværdighed. rejser der benyttede Mellemøsten Son der også havde små ekspeditioner til eksempel er Gaze & nuvæ mellem museet i dets er der bevidst differentieret I denne afgrænsning der i højre grad græske variant (Mouseion) fra 283 f.Kr. rende form og den havde form af et bibliotek. con, Frye, N. 1982. Hunter, M. 2001. M. Hunter, 2010. B. L. Jensen, Kant, I. 1770. Cook, T. 1897. T. Cook, Duncan, J. D. S., & GREGORY, MYILIBRARY 1999. Hall, S. 1997. Hazbun, 2008. W. Behdad, A. 1994 Blach, J. 2003. 1991. Brendon, P. 2004. F. P. Bundgård, Byrnes, G. M. 1994. 2003. The V. Casey, museum effect: gazing from object to perfor 4 Referencer L. 1980. Barber, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

, - - - In: 41 Chur, Chur,

Rune Andersen Rune 105-111. , Cultural Studies, Oxford Oxford Oxford 38 London, J.M. Dent 297-333. Volume 04 , Chicago, University of Chicago, University of http://www.britishmuseum. [Accessed 31. december 2012]. december 31. [Accessed Smithsonian, New York: Putnam. York: New Volume 12 Volume London, Cambridge University University Cambridge London, The Cambridge History of English of History The Cambridge Destination culture: Tourism, museums, Tourism, Destination culture: Greek-English Lexicon, Greek-English The Great Map of Mankind: British Percep The Great . Available: Available: . Mødet med den systematiserede fremmedhed systematiserede med den Mødet The English guide book, c. 1780-1870: an illus The English guide book, c. 1780-1870: Colonising Egypt, Colonising A Social History of Truth, Social History of Truth, A A handbook for travellers in lower and upper Egypt for handbook A , David & Charles (Newton Abbot Eng and North , Univ of California Pr. , Univ of California A history of curiosity: the theory of travel 1550-1800, A 201-210. , Annals of Tourism Research, Annals of Tourism WALLER., A. W. W. A. R. (ed.) R. A. W. W. A. WALLER., 1-18. Vol and American Literature org/the_museum/about_us.aspx trated history Vt). Pomfret, Press. John Murray. Chicago Press. Publishers. Academic Harwood ism. and heritage University Press. 18 Vol. in the Age of Enlightment, tions of the World & Sons Ltd. www.britishmuseum.org Waller, A. W. W. A. R. S.L. The Literature of Travel, 1700–1900. of Travel, The Literature A. R. S.L. W. W. A. Waller, Man. K. 2007. Organization Warne, Mitchell, T. 1991. Mitchell, T. J. 1888. Murray, Shapin, S. 1995. Stagl, J. 1995. tour the history of in key phase A tour: grand The 1985. J. Towner, J. E. 1974. Vaughan, Maffesoli, M. 2004. Everyday Tragedy and Creation. and Creation. Tragedy M. 2004. Everyday Maffesoli, 1982. G. W., J. P. Marshall, Kirshenblatt-Gimblett, B. 1998. B. Kirshenblatt-Gimblett, Liddell, H. G. E. A. 1996. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Middle Class America in Africa Paul Theroux and American Perspectives on Postcolonial Africa

Thomas F. Halloran Dr. Thomas F. Halloran is Assistant Professor of English and Chair of Liberal Arts at Marian Court College in Massachusetts. He is the author of James Joyce: Developing Irish Identity (2009) and many articles in the areas of Irish Studies, postcolonial theory, and American expatriate writing. This article is a part of a larger study titled Strangers in the Postcolonial World.

This paper studies the American perception of a lack of modernity in the postcolonial world. As usual, the lack of modernity allows for an idealized, romanticized vision of a simpler life without the ugli- ness of modern, Western life. A large aspect of Theroux’s thesis con- cerns the need for Africa to “return” to its “traditional” ways, as a simple land, and cast-off the failed attempt at colonial moderniza- tion enforced by the Europeans. As a travelogue, Theroux is also a tourist. Therefore, this work returns to the typical motif of the search for authenticity. Here I investigate Theroux’s approach to “finding” the real Africa as well as how his Africa is shaped by the experience he wants to find. Thinking himself apart from the mechanisms and history of the white man in Africa, Theroux speculates on the legacy of colonialism in the nations he visits. Customary colonial motifs of white superiority, African lack of technical know-how, and Africa’s lack of culture arise. Theroux describes how Africans commit atroc- ities and oppress their own people in crueler ways than Europeans ever had. However, Theroux’s criticism also extends to the present day European and American presence in Africa. Paul Theroux’s perspective as a privileged, middle-class, white American seems to oscillate from being racist to ignorant to brutally honest.1 Dark Star Safari (2002) depicts his journey by land from Egypt to South Africa2. It is important to note that Theroux’s trave-

Volume 04 42

------43 - Journal of a

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Ethiopian Travels: The Travels: Ethiopian (1857). Thus Theroux Theroux Thus (1857). (1829), Richard and John Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle , H. Clapperton’s , H. Clapperton’s Travels and Researches Travels Travels in the Interior Districts of Africa in the Interior (1860), Travels Journal to Explore the Course and Termination of the Niger and Termination the Course Journal to Explore [I]n my usual traveling mood: hoping for the picturesque, [I]n my usual traveling mood: hoping was Happiness appalling. the for braced misery, expecting ba a is it desirable, is happiness although for unthinkable, nal subject for Africa travel. seemed Therefore, perfect for 2002, p. 5) (Theroux, a long journey. Theroux is a professional travel writer who chooses Africa as a Africa as a travel writer who chooses is a professional Theroux the Furthermore, assumes that one travels to escape. Theroux logue follows a long line of European travel writing in Africa in in travel writing a long line of European logue follows Harri’s A. Cornwall as cluding works such into the Interior of Africa Second Expedition Lander’s Highlands of Ethiopia Described of 1844 Highlands of Ethiopia From this opening statement, Africa is the ideal subject for misery. It misery. for subject ideal the is Africa statement, opening this From is his objective to find wretchedness, the appalling, and the pictur enters a well-beaten path of white explorers and adventurers. While adventurers. and explorers white of path well-beaten a enters his observations often are shaped (with or without acknowledging Theroux’s generations of Europeans, by previous his predecessors) a window Africa provides American perspective on contemporary Americans both colonialist emulate traits into European and how insights. fresh offer to diverge shock value and discomfort for means of vicariously maximizing his American middle-class readers’ sensibilities and values. His wish his and expedition particular this on embarking upon mood to encounter the African unpleasant experience must be remem bered in comparison to what Theroux finds. In other words, his ofrepresentation Western impov- to desire find the stereotypical erished, backwards, and ruthless Africa is a fait accompli. Ther thought: oux begins his journey with this value. shock about only not is project this However, Africa. in esque would want to travel through the West anyone from only reason of escapism. It is a place end Africa is to experience the most extreme “homebound other the and machines, answering phones, without total means Africa that imagines Theroux writer’s3). (p. irritants” This isolation is for not a just Westerner. escape from personal rela tionships and in responsibilities the United States; it is impor more (1830), Mungo Park’s Livingstone’s and Dr. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------44

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 However, this ruined site this ruined However, is the necessity of encour 4 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle Theroux posits that Africa offers offers Africa posits that Theroux 3 Dark Star Safari I was reminded again that medieval cities were all like again that medieval cities were I was reminded life that the sort of street cities recapitulate African this. that cities a motley liveliness European had vanished from and much of earlylends color and vitality to old folktales (p. 178) English literature. Theroux continually looks for examples of how efforts to mod continually looks for examples of how efforts Theroux ernize Africa are failures. For example, when he stumbles across the across stumbles he when example, For failures. are Africa ernize ruins of an unused, modern style, German built housing complex is due to the lo deduces that its failure Ethiopia, Theroux in Harar, cals’ desire to live in mud huts (p. 113). that reason the is backwardness such that speculation for allows like Arthur Westerners Rimbaud love Africa. Theroux imagines Africa as a foil for the West: and contemplates on phere, phere, the urban African cityscape is the “nastiest” in the world; appre be only could pit,” “snake the or city, African the therefore, ciated by misguided foreigners who fail to understand how mis foreigners These (p.255). Africa and urbanization mix to is it taken Ther that bush” happier “simpler, the of unaware likely most are oux remembers from his days in the Peace Corps (p. 188). One of of the central arguments African modes of life, in other aging “traditional” and “authentic” words, the mud huts and subsistence farming of Theroux’s rural influence Western discouraging simultaneously while imaginings and aid which leads to modernization and urbanization. how we once lived and traded” (p. 62). Although the African city in Although the how we once lived and traded” (p. 62). por a offers it violent, and sad, desperate, be may opinion Theroux’s Europe: to experience medieval tal for Westerners despite Yet this preservation of medieval conditions and atmos tantly, the possibility of escaping modernity. For Theroux, Africa is a is Africa Theroux, For modernity. escaping of possibility the tantly, backward continent that has never developed the infrastructure to back Africa’s that posits Theroux premise, this On modernity. allow wardness is its strength because it can serve as a foil to the modern Ernest Renan and from not far removed a line of argument West, as a feminine coun role of Ireland’s Arnold’s conception Matthew terbalance to masculine England. of man and allows the nature a vision into the primitive Westerners Africa show us the “markets in modern man to see his origins, as quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------45 - There 5

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle [Rimbaud] had Africa liked for being the anti-Europe, the which anti-West, it is, sometimes sometimesdefiantly, la was nothing too, for there reasons, I liked it for those zily. star. dark a on being like was Africa in Being here. home of (p. 117) The search for the authentic local experience is a familiar theme The search ble. He complains when people in the service industry smile at him, clearly expecting a tip (p. 46). Interaction between the tourist and the local equates to the same power play involved in the ser The local is expected to vice industry as a whole in any country. the tourist/guest wherein of the authentic host, a play play the role desire tourists Yet compensation. of form some provide to meant is that provided, being service a actually not is there though as feel to their experience is an “authentic” interaction between cultures. taurant, to find a beach without other tourists, or to form a bond their rela dynamic that orders with a local, tourists enter a power is de Nevertheless, Theroux tionship with the local community. authentic be to deems he that performance dance local a by lighted because, “[T]his was not a spectacle put on for photographers and 68). (p. it” of joy pure the for done rite, weekly a rather but tourists The distinction between an inauthentic spectacle and an authentic performance seems tenuous, as the authenticity in this construc tion seems measured by the level of inaccessibility to the tourist. touristposition as his when and annoyed aware is equally Theroux is obvious, in other words, when the power is structure most visi is Earth, and Africa is extraterrestrial, the West is white, and Africa is and is white, the West Africa is extraterrestrial, is Earth, and whole host A dark. of other positions are signified in this statement back and strangeness, unknowable, the darkness, around revolving wardness. goal of in general as well as an easily recognized in travel literature anyone who has been a tourist. Guidebooks promise to help us that so path” beaten the “off are that activities non-touristy the find meaningful than and more we may experience something deeper what the overtly orchestrated tourism industry no provides. Yet matter how self-satisfying it may be to eat in a neighborhood res In this quote, Theroux uses the most fundamental type of binary modern. not and not Western is that which is Africa logic: the West Furthermore, escape modernity. Africa is to to to travel fore, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 46 - -

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle The distinction between the authentic and the inauthentic, the and authentic the between distinction The is a powerful semiotic opera the natural and the touristy, South Africans went to Mozambique for some of the rea the of some for Mozambique to went Africans South went to Mexico: for “color” and a whiff Americans sons of the gutter and the slum; for cheap eats, fresh tiger and authenticity, Africa,” real “the for especially; prawns ugly knickknacks, also for snorkeling and swimming and whoring. (p.420) Towards the Towards conclusion of his Theroux journey, attempts to de When the reality of the tourist/service industry becomes too vis drawing attention to the shallowness of such a search; however, much of his travelogue has been a search for authentic local color. like a condemnation of the more reads this statement Therefore, African tourist’s South bad taste in local color than a condemnation to Jonathan Culler: According for color itself. of the tourist’s search Although the phrasing of this excerpt might seem to indicate an Although the phrasing of this excerpt might seem to indicate an characterizations that such of the essentialism and gross awareness sympathet a such problematizes review further creates, analogy an be to seems Theroux marks, quotation in color putting By reading. ic be relaxing. Theroux’s search for the authentic is in juxtaposition to Theroux That is to say, familiar. his tendency to also seek out the desires the non-touristed dangerous zones and also the “back wards” of his fantasies which he associates with authenticity. Africa scribe the tourism Africa rapport and between MozambiqueSouth using an analogy Americans about visit how Mexico. This analogy as a colorful Mexico interpret readers American that his assumes everything from the dollar goes far in where and exotic playground writes the following: to sex. Theroux food to merchandise ible for Theroux, he demonstrates his frustration by expressing his disappointment. For example, Theroux confirms his dissatisfaction his to alien so is it because Hurghada, town, resort the in stuck when relax, to him begs manager resort this Although Africa. of notions I would wanted to relax, If I “I don’t want to relax. replies, Theroux not have Africa” come (p. to Africa 51). for The Theroux can “real” matter no beach; the on comfortably sitting while experienced be not how “real” this experience might actually be, Africa the cannotreal quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------47

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle announces, “All news out ofnews out announces, “All Dark Star Safari Dark Star tor within tourism. The idea of seeing the real Spain, the The idea of seeing the real tor within tourism. natives really unspoiled, how the Jamaica, something real work or live, is a major touristic topos, essential to the (p.159) of tourism. structure In terms of finding the authentic and the familiar in Africa, we In a similar vein, Theroux highlights the concept of “the real Af highlights the concept of “the real In a similar vein, Theroux newspaper; I wanted the pleasure of being Africa in again” (p. 1). logical most first, the reader, American the of perspective the From Africa of implies that the pleasure is that Theroux interpretation exists in finding the Africa, “real” a joyous and pleasurable conti nent that exists behind the myth of misery and terror depicted in such a naïve perspective U.S. media. However, the mainstream could perhaps suggest Africa’s that problems are relatively minor compared to the everyday joy of spending time there. What be makes about his audience, namely that he is speaking to an Ameri an to speaking is he that namely audience, his about makes pleas the appreciate can who reader male and middle-class, can, ures that the the gutter, slum, the consumable object, the recrea Theroux a poor country can offer. tional activities, and the women for Africa as playgrounds assumes his audience views Mexico and desires. Western must also consider the phenomenon of finding what we look for. The first sentence of the the horror, through Africa is bad. It made me want to go there, hot spots, the massacre- and earthquake stories you read in the spoiled’ place, an attraction that has not attracted tourists or be critiquescomehaughtily Theroux (p.163). encrustedrenown” with the tourist (American or South African) while distinguishing him authentic places. Not only doesself as a traveler who seeks out the mission to the exploits of European this distinction tie Theroux’s him, but it colonists also before makes his own quest for authentic quixotic. ity seem all the more not Mozambique, of vision African South the critiques he but rica,” Africa.” Fur exists something that is the “real that there the premise that Theroux quotation highlights the assumptions this thermore, Unintentionally it seems, Theroux acknowledges the tourist’s tourist’s acknowledges the it seems, Theroux Unintentionally failing to or “authentic” while simultaneously the “real” for search Africa.” for the “real of his own search the touristic nature recognize As Culler explains, the problem for tourists “is to find an ‘un quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------48

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle While in Sudan, following President Clinton’s bombing of the Imagining himself to be a completely independent and objective and independent completely a be to himself Imagining lowing for the logical explanation that his presence is something of lowing for the logical explanation that his presence a reminder of the “white man in Africa” black working his “post” job or not. be it a lonely as a colonizer, be conversation a in participating himself finds Theroux country, sto horror various recounting are who diplomats Western tween that proclaims speakers the of one When 16). (p. Africa about ries Africa is returning to a pre-colonial state (read pre-modern and the people scream “foreigner” at Theroux and try to spit on him. at Theroux “foreigner” the people scream unlucky and un is considered explains that the foreigner Theroux safe, no doubt as a result of the European colonial legacy (p. 104). writes, Theroux a treatment of clarifying such means as a Strangely, “Since aloneness is the human condition, a stark example of the perfect stranger was the white man in black Africa, alone in his post, the odd man out” (p. 106). Theroux actually does not make specificreference to colonialism but instead implies that it is the difference between races that actually explains the Africanhostile as a racially moti By portraying the hostile reception reception. Africans as bigots without al denigrates Theroux vated prejudice, reporter, Theroux describes how decolonization has reporter, been unsuc cessful, and how Europe has despite failed Africa. these Yet judg never allows for Theroux failure, African and European ments of coloni how notes Theroux level, one On culpability. American any Afri that way the observing by Africa shape to continues zation cans interact with outsiders. He finds that the former colonizers are still present, continuing to create problems; for example, he notes that the soldiers French in Djibouti have a for reputation ex such of validity the of Regardless 93). (p. prostitution child ploiting helps whites on the French a claim, putting the animosity against In Harar, often receives. that Theroux explain the hostile reception comes increasingly clear throughout the narrative is that the mis throughout clear comes increasingly ery and the terror constitute the pleasure of being Africa. in Ther oux confirms thisreading as he summarizes his experience upon a from stolen were possessions his of all after States the to re-entry home. food eaten in Ethiopia on the way from hotel and he is sick (p. diseased” and Africanized—robbed home arrived “I writes, He 472). The shock of such a statement is muted by the knowledge African experience he wanted. that this was exactly the quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ­ ------49

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle (p. 17) This was a crudely coded sway of saying that Africans that coded sway of saying This was a crudely he what respect another in Yet savagery. to reverting were was saying was After true. a spell of being familiar and of itself: Africa had slipped into a stereotype promising, starving people in a blighted land governed by tyrants, rumors of unspeakable atrocities, despair and darkness. In line with colonial era stereotypes, and justifications for coloni for justifications and stereotypes, era colonial with line In so soon (p. 97). On a more personal level, he notes how the white British men that offer him a ride are far more proficient at fixing a blown tire than the Africans: “Mick and Abel jacked up the truck, This speed half an hour. was changed in Ben supervising. The tire was in great contrast to the cackhanded incompetence shown by Mustafa and his men the day before” (p. 161-2). However, these brief observations are less pronounced than specific cases of man ofimage an present to uses Theroux that organization agement and same news stories he mentions in the opening, the backwards, same vio news stories he mentions in the opening, the backwards, choosingAfrica. Whether of lent chaos that is the inverse stereotype to dig beneath the surface of the idealistic Africa or the Western ultimately ar Africa as hell on earth, Theroux media’s portrayal of stereotypes extreme the of one supports that conclusion a at rives about the continent. Af to superior technically being as whites describes Theroux alism, ricans. Occasionally this brief position asides;through is expressed such as a lament for the uncompleted colonial railway lines that had not come Africa if only revolution could have done so much for Missing from this assessment is one evident detail; the Western per Western the detail; evident one is assessment this from Missing Ther Yet stereotype. the reflect to Africa on story the spins spective oux’s firsthand experience makes his anecdotal argument persua the differences marker to discuss sive. Using race as the primary inflam many make to Theroux allows West the and Africa between Ther While civilization. African of failures about statements matory hisshocks that Africa on perspective bold a presenting be may oux more liberal readers used to a more colorful, sugarcoated picture of rural bliss and exotic African people, he also replicates those forsaking the gifts of colonization), Theroux offers this judgment offers forsaking the gifts of colonization), Theroux of the situation: quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 50 - -

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle a grizzly collection of crime of grizzly collection a Volksmoord/Genocide torture and murder, the electric shocks and beatings in po in beatings and shocks electric the murder, and torture lice stations. (p. 480) Mugabe spent a great deal of time attacking whites and trying to make Zimbabwe’s into failure a racial issue, but in fact black Zimbabweans accounted for most of the vic government-sanctioned the — abuse rights human of tims In this case, Theroux attempts to reaffirm his point that whites have been discriminated against in Zimbabwe while also high ills Zimbabwe’s of majority the suffered have blacks how lighting if for no other reason than because they are the While majority. Zimba of whole the for sympathy indicate to seems stance a such such a work in this context if not to reaffirm his racial bias against postcolonial that argue to seems Theroux civilization? African black on However, at the hands of Black leadership. Africa has suffered Hiscomplicated. more is race attitude towards Theroux’s occasion, criticism of Zimbabwe’s black government contains a gesture to awareness: some sort of greater wards his effect of demonstrating black Africa’s inability to organize and group a to voice giving by claim this strengthens further He govern. for argue farmers disposed these Zimbabwe: from émigrés white of and to a white government for the sake of organization a return economy (p. 385). Although this minority opinion might be useful in the larger debate, Theroux juxtaposes their argument along im ages of massacre and chaos in Zimbabwe since Robert Mugabe’s makes detailed note Theroux For instance, in Cape Town takeover. of the rare book photography from the farms where whites have been killed, often in barbaric ways (p. why 461). go Yet to such lengths to promote black Africa as backwards. While visiting a white Zimbabwean farm, he admires the efficiency and organization of such an opera tion, which is clearly a pointed jab at the other locations he visited visits Theroux directly, this case even more during the trip. Making one of the black squatters on this white farmer’s land. He finds the black man to be buffoonish and ridiculous (p. 369). By describing as contrasts stark such with farmers white Zimbabwe’s of plight the compared white sensible and efficient the of example particular this to the unreasonable and foolish black Theroux squatter, achieves quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 51

, on the banned the on , Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 , this anecdote taken Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle Jungle Lovers Dark Star Safari . 6 . As is often the case in . 7 When Theroux finds his own novel, own his finds Theroux When Furthermore, Theroux carefully details the examples of African examples of details the carefully Theroux Furthermore, sub-Saharan indophobia, Theroux is exposing an ugly consequence ugly an exposing is Theroux indophobia, sub-Saharan of postcolonialism. Colonialism engenders racism, but Theroux chooses to mock the of “backwardness” these views rather than draw this hostility. attention to the colonial condition that created Africa to perform clerical, administrative, immigrated to Indians and banking work for independencethe British Empire; however, movements often lumped these Indians together as “others,” “ex played case this While British. the with “collaborators” or ploiters,” book list in Malawi, he explains that Malawi bans the works that would be the classics of “any enlightened country” (p. Al 315). at a government that denies ac though this comment is directed is equally critical of common in classics, Theroux cess to Western boatman a of ignorance the detail in describes He well. as dividuals who believes that the Indian get merchants their wealth by taking the hearts of black virgin girls and using them to pull in fish that are full of diamonds (p. 344). While these descriptions may be these events as truthful presents made in a comic fashion, Theroux depictions of his actual experience. By giving voice to the strain of individually evokes no suspicion. However, when presented in thein presented when However, suspicion. no evokes individually this story African cruelty, of company of so many other examples seems like an inflammatory comment on the of oppression whites in Africa. Later while aboard a train that passes through a South at him thrown how stones are African squatter camp, he notes when he refuses to pass food out the window (p. 469). While I do not wish to debate the validity of this experience nor deny that a situations, I do wish to drawwhite person might experience such the of representation one-sided problematic, Theroux’s to attention an over of these experiences which create events and his ordering Africa as barbaric. of all impression bwe, Theroux’s larger claim is that the black government is cruel claim is that the black government is cruel larger bwe, Theroux’s and backwards civilizationAfrican far how just out pointing of means a as cruelty masters. While in without the guidance of colonial slipped has against the advice of makes a pilgrimage, Africa, Theroux South allAmerican a young locals, to visit the squatter camp where the raceher of because mob angry an by killed was graduate Stanford 455) (p. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------52 -

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 . Again, I do not deny the . 8 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle had been the shifta bandits firing their rifles over the truck the over rifles their firing bandits shifta the been had most The men. wild Marsabit: of north just in riding was I plum the Ugandan hookers in their nighttime exotic were in Kampala: trees the roadside age, hissing at me from wild women. (p. 404) The most dangerous creatures I had seen so far in Africa I had seen so far in creatures The most dangerous Not only Africans are described as but technically they inferior, Here Theroux is Theroux Here conflating the local people with the exotic animals. the than dangerous more as Africans paints description This Africa, where rather than noble savages, Africans were recast as plain savages or beasts paving the way for the “White Man’s Bur describ In proselytize. and colonize to imperative moral the den,” also Theroux lingers close dangerously to ing the locals as beastly, anthropological the of one reminding slavery: for justifications the application of social Darwinism thatand and physiological studies buttressed the slave trade. when Later, he gives in to his desire to visit the protected big game parks (no matter how touristy they may be) he consoles himself with the following: ans), Theroux supports his thesis that Africa is backwards. Africa is backwards. supports his thesis that ans), Theroux One bus are also ride presented as causes beastly. Theroux to re such despite But 275). (p. people local the of smell bad the on mark basic sensory insults, Theroux insinuates something more sinister “Africans who seemed to under when he is sick. He writes that harry slower the way predators stand that I was weak pursued me, as though animals, and they demanded money, or uncertain prey knowing that I was too weak to refuse them” (p. 329). This exam to predatory Africans likens ple is only one instance when Theroux of impressions colonial early the to back hark notions His animals. out most dramatically in Idi Amin’s Uganda resulting in a massivea in resulting Uganda Amin’s Idi in dramatically most out of British colonial the lingering aftereffects deportation of Indians, 1857 of Rebellion Indian the to response in circulated that prejudice trickled down to for independence of struggle and ensuing years affect common citizens like the boatman those sentiments, encounters, or the existence of validity of these but their presentation lends credence to the stereotype Africa of as backwards. By drawing attention to a well-known source of racial Indi towards intolerance postcolonial case this (in Africa in tension quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------53 . Yet iron Yet . 9

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle Medical and teaching skills were not lacking in Africa, Africa, in not lacking Medical and teaching skills were But the will to countries like Malawi. even in distressed Further condemning African civilization, Theroux’s perceives perceives African civilization, Theroux’s Further condemning Echoing the observations of other postcolonial writers from Gra from writers postcolonial other of observations the Echoing would choose this particular interpretation; however, this would examplechoose this particular however, interpretation; clearly demonstrates that Theroux views his guides as subservient and himself as a colonial master. Africa’s problems: African elite as unwilling to solve the imagines that he might like to retire to Africa to run a school if not a school Africa to run to imagines that he might like to retire This 289). (p. him about say would America in back people what for con overall his upon based troubling particularly seems daydream exam worrying most the However, aid. international of demnation a African who runs meeting with a South ple involves Theroux’s farm in rural Mozambique. In this the encounter, South African asks, those “are your chaps?” when buys Theroux his guides some this question in colonial terms: “It was a interprets soda. Theroux significant question, the moment when one muzungu sized up an other’s workers. Africans ‘My are better than Africans’ your was a serious colonial boast […]” (p. 342-3). It is unclear why Theroux stereotypes Africans. about By presenting these encounters as fresh evidence African of life from his American “unbiased” perspective, about stereotypes colonial the relearn to readers his entices Theroux Africa. ham Naipual, Greene Theroux to observes V.S. how Africans have colonizers European their than oppressors worse become delights in the colonialist lifestyle. He comments on Theroux ically, how he feels like a Orientialist real while sitting beside the pyra mids at night (p. 81). Later when he catches up with an old British Theroux motives, good man’s the for admires he who servant, civil continent’s exotic animals while simultaneously dehumanizing dehumanizing animals while simultaneously continent’s exotic the people. Theroux continues on this topic when describing his in a truck the countryside during a ride through comfort and safety carrying Although cattle. physically uncomfortable, Theroux relays Af than the life of cattle is worth more since at rest how his mind is rican human life. He assumes the driver will likely be extra careful thereby insuring his personal safety (p. 154). Again, this point con firms Theroux’s low opinion African of civilization and humanity colonial era of older while also demonstrating his regurgitation quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 54 - - -

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle in vivid prose, but he also recounts--often in their own own their in recounts--often also he but prose, vivid in Themeets. he whom Africans the of hardships words--the from he passes through towns, villages, and open lands remem he places the resemble hardly Town Cape to Cairo bers so Everywhere fondly. he goes he finds devastated of vio and the threat fear, petty dictators, villages, hunger, lence. despite Yet the depressing realities of this changed Africa he of the tells his stories and those Africa, Theroux and compassion, as a solo traveler with honesty, explores gusto, leaving the reader glad to have shared his journey. (Barth, 2003) Theroux Theroux is a curmudgeon, a brave traveler and a skeptic, honestly portraits readers offering of cruel post-colonial hopeless desperate and poverty, heartbreaking tyranny, ness. For anyone wanting an unfiltered picture of early eye- be will account Theroux’s Africa, century twenty-first his own adventures opening. Not only does he detail use them was often non-existent. The question was, should was, question The non-existent. often was them use outsiders go on doing jobs and taking risks that Africans (p. 298) refused? For readers seeking tyranny, poverty, hopelessness, hunger, devas hunger, hopelessness, poverty, seeking tyranny, For readers tation, and fear, violence, Theroux’s perspective is a compatible the fact that these conclusions of this nature, choice. For reviews come from a well established writer and include the evidence of Ther validate to enough be to seems Africans with interviews some as an inde work is presented Theroux’s oux’s claims. Furthermore, pendent American prospective, however; he is actually perpetuat Africa are prone to take Theroux’s observations as fact. When read When fact. as observations Theroux’s take to prone are Africa ers, like the author of the following book take review, Theroux’s observations as accurate and unproblematic, then the stereotypes reaffirmed: Africa are of Although it is difficult to criticize his firsthand knowledge, this sort this knowledge, firsthand his criticize to difficult is it Although of circumstantial and anecdotal presentation, combined with his the agenda supports Africa, in aid international of condemnation for African reproving self-management. The result of this partial blame based on anecdote readers unfamiliar is with that Western quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------55

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle , Theroux is both attracted to and repulsed Colonial Desire During his journey, Theroux admits Theroux that the idea During of his findingjourney, his For example Theroux’s hatred for aid-workers in Africa can be inter preted as the following: (1) his belief Africans that are currently inca pable of supporting themselves and need to learn responsibility with complex the about awareness of lack his (2) aid, Western of crutch the ity of how international aid functions in Africa, or (3) an astute com ment about how international aid is being misused. works fictional his from examples additional discover may study Future set Africa in Fong and the Indians (1968), Jungle Lovers (1971), and 1 2 despite the thousands of miles traveled and the countless personali and traveled miles of thousands despite the ties he meets along Theroux’s journey the is way, an self- interior, towards feelings personal his and past the of exploration conscious andexploration personal for zone a as Africa using Basically Africa. fallsAfrica, Theroux of failing to attempt an objective interpretation into Achebe’s archetype of the colonizer using Africa to discover unconscious or (consciously Theroux will. his challenge or himself ly) consistently emulates colonial paradigms under the guise of an American. innocent and detached Notes oux’s penchant for finding his predetermined authentic Africa: for forward for Africa, in responsibility American disavow to desire his sexual of international aid, and for playing out his ing his mistrust fantasies. Falling into the same colonial paradigm as de Young scribes in by Africa because it operates as the binary opposite of his Western the resembles least what is Africa of best the Therefore, self. of sense (the pre-modern bush), West and the worst Africa of is the modern This binary African thinking people extends as to well, African city. Africa while sexual women of feels attracted to the raw, as Theroux at the same time he is revolted by the inhumanity and chaos. Yet ing common European colonialist assumptions about Africa. This This Africa. about assumptions colonialist European common ing type of interpretation tends to treat the journey itself as the most important element of the work rather than the findings; which is a Af mind using the familiar theme of the Western point that echoes ground. rica as a proving own personal rejuvenation in Africa is another one of his “African fantasies” (p. 198). This rare moment of confession seems to admit that many of these observations Africa about say more about Ther quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk . ------The 56 (1965) (a

. Grove Press: . Press: Grove The Harvard Clas The Harvard Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume (1979). 04 The Comedians , a work that fictionalizes and fictionalizes that work a , Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle A Bend in the River A Black Skin, White Masks White Skin, Black Mother to Mother Framing the Sign: Criticism and Its Institu Dark Star Safari: Overland From Cairo to Cape Cairo Dark Star Safari: Overland From . Vol. 18, no. 4 (Winter 1977), pp. 782-794. 18, no. 4 (Winter . Vol. 1999. The Tourist: A New Theory of the Le A 1999. The Tourist: The Social Origins of Violence in Uganda, 1964-1985 The Social Origins of Violence 1988. 2003. 1953/1967. . Magill Book Reviews. . University of Oklahoma Press: Norman. . University of Oklahoma Press: . Vol. . 32 Vol. Ed. Charles Eliot W. LLD. New PF York: Collier and Son Town tions York. New Berkeley. Class. University of California Press: isure In 1998 Sindiwe Magona, a native of the township Guguletu where the the township Guguletu where In 1998 Sindiwe Magona, a native of took place, wrote murder the famous murder. recreates A. B. K. See Kasozi, 1994. McGill-Queen’s University Press, Montreal: Prominent examples would include Greene’s novel that Theroux recently wrote an Introduction for in the Penguin Classics series) and Naipaul’s mouth is natural (205). As noted elsewhere, see Achebe, Chinua. “An Image of Africa.” Massachusetts Review I am aware that this line of argument could be interpreted as a sort international the of aware well am I Although Mugabe. of defense of condemnation of Mugabe’s government, I wish to draw attention to high I Therefore, Africa. in percussion white with fixation Theroux’s pattern of atten to demonstrate a criticism in order light Theroux’s Africa, while admitting that instances cruel and corrupt tion towards like Mugabe’s policy or the slaying of white farmers are, of course, reprehensible. My Secret History (1989) to determine how his vision of Africa and re Theroux to study the reception as well as constructed is Africans his hosts. ceives from Renan. Ernest Races.” Celtic the of Poetry “The See, sics Company 1910. As well as, “On the Study of Celtic Literature.” Mat Arnold. 1866. thew implication that For a similar line of thinking, see his universities are illogical in Africa whereas dwelling in mud huts and living hand-to- Barth, Melissa E., Jonathan., Culler, Franz., Fanon, MacCannell, Dean., 7 8 9 References 5 6 3 4 quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - 57

Thomas F. Halloran F. Thomas Volume 04 Middle Class America in Africa in Class America Middle Colonial Desire: Hybridity in Theory, Cul in Theory, Hybridity Desire: Colonial Dark Star Safari: Overland from Cairo to Cape Cairo Overland from Dark Star Safari: 1995. . Routledge: New York. York. . Routledge: New 2003. . Houghton Mifflin Company: Boston. . Houghton Mifflin Town and Race ture, Theroux, Paul., C. J., Robert Young, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

All Writings Great and Small Reading James Herriot’s Stories as Travel Literature

John S. Vassar Associate Professor & Chariman of the Department of Fine Arts, Foreign Languages, and Humanities Book: Recalling a Story Once Told: An Intertextual Reading of the Psalter and the Pentateuch (2007)

The world of James Herriot has expanded far beyond its British beginnings. The stories of this Yorkshire veterinarian and his work in the fictitious town of Darrowby, have reached around the globe. His works have been translated into dozens of languages and read in numerous countries. By 1991 over 50 million copies of his books had been sold while two films and a television series had also been produced (Brunsdale 1). This popularity is all the more impressive for an author who began writing at the age of fifty and wrote sto- ries primarily about animals. Despite (or perhaps because of) his popularity, there has been lit- tle critical examination of Herriot’s literary corpus. With a hand- ful of exceptions, the Academy has largely turned a blind eye to his efforts. Part of the reason is likely a common misconception that Herriot’s work should be considered children’s literature. But before we consign Herriot’s work to the children’s section, we should first consider an alternative genre. This essay suggests that we reread this popular author and explore the possibility that when we encounter the stories of life in the Yorkshire dales, we are in fact, encountering an important work of travel literature. Following a brief examination of his life, this essay focuses on themes in Herriot’s books that share much in common with other works of travel writing.

Volume 04 58 . ------59

If Only They If Only They John S. Vassar John Volume 04 All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings It Shouldn’t Happen to a Vet a to Happen Shouldn’t It , followed two years later by later years two followed , In 1966, at the age began of writing 50, down Wight his experi In 1941 Wight married Joan Danbury (Helen Alderson) Alderson) and be married Joan Danbury (Helen In 1941 Wight Wight completed his veterinary training in 1938, during the the completed his veterinary training in 1938, during Wight to 1966 he remained working as a veterinarian in the dales except working as a veterinarian in the dales to 1966 he remained for two brief occasions when he traveled with animals overseas, in 1963. once to the U.S.S.R. in 1961 and to Istanbul, Turkey ences as a country veterinarian and tried unsuccessfully to find a book first his 1970 in Finally 245). (Wight, years four for publisher of recollections was published under the title of Talk Could Thirsk (Wight, 94). It is located in the heart of the Yorkshire dales dales Yorkshire the of heart the in located is It 94). (Wight, Thirsk in northern England. immediately Wight grew to enjoy the sce nic beauty and the delightful characters who he encountered in his day to day activities. later, years Two 128). Sinclair’sin (Wight, partner practice a came Wight volunteered while with Joan their was firstpregnant child, and was called up for training. His par Air Force for the Royal ent’s home in Glasgow had been bombed during a Luftwaffe at tack and this motivated to Wight join. was Wight discharged for 1950 From 144-53). (Wight, 1945 in R.A.F. the from reasons health In high school, after listening to a presentation by the principal of of principal the by presentation a to listening after school, high In that vet was convinced College, Wight the Glasgow Veterinary erinary practice would be his vocation. Upon graduation from Col was accepted at the Glasgow Veterinary high school, Wight 45). lege (Wight, and was fortunate to get a job in the prac height of the depression, of Donald Sinclair (the character Siegfried Farnon in his tice sub community agricultural an Thirsk, of town the in books) sequent with a population around a few thousand. In his fictionalized for Darrowby name the substituted Wight stories, these of telling Biography James Herriot is the pseudonym for James Alfred (Alf) Wight. The distinction Alf between and Wight James Herriot is difficult personal Wight’s autobiography to and draw. fictionalized ob servations all too often converge. In his biography of his father, almost inter Alf Wight and even uses James Herriot Jim Wight Sun in 1916 October 3 on born was Wight 1). (Wight, changeably derland, England. Three weeks after his birth his family moved city in Scotland. in that largest was raised to Glasgow and Wight quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------60

John S. Vassar John is a coming of Volume 04 in the United States covers the variety of All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings progresses, Herriot moves Herriot moves progresses, All Creatures Great and Small Great Creatures All All Creatures Great and Small Great Creatures All All Creatures Great and Small Great All Creatures All Creatures Great and Small Great All Creatures , Herriot explains his initial attraction to animal work and, Herriot explains his initial attraction . All Creatures Great and Small Great All Creatures ACGS Herriot begins his job after arriving in the 1930’s, a key turning Probably the most dramatic occurrence in the history of veteri As In The success of ACGS) point for the traditional life in these farming communities. It was point for the traditional life in these farming communities. It was changing, veterinar traditions are of the older a time when some to cows and like horses traditional animals shifting from are ians As Herriot later wrote small animal care. an It is horse. the draught of the disappearance was nary practice almost incredible fact that this glory and mainstay of the profes to early 1941. through an initial period of self-doubt to some measure of confi dence in his own abilities. By the end of the book he has devel oped as a veterinarian, but more importantly as a person. This change is brought about in him by his environment, and by peo ple. Herriot is particularly impressed by the farmers of the dales from themselves. Rossi suggests that the change in Herriot results “the people, places, and situations he encounters. Herriot speaks conclu and impressions first shares and them by affected being of sions about them.” (Rossi 33). who grows into an accomplished, caring professional. As Michael into an accomplished, caring professional. who grows Rossi has demonstrated, age story (Rossi 32). his first encounter withYorkshire dales. the He is a newly minted to ready and resolve of full of school, out fresh veterinary surgeon, discovers Herriot rounds, his begins he as But work. animal change nothas school veterinary his of knowledge book theoretical the that him for the daily encounters that he always adequately prepared has Yorkshire. in 1938 from years, few first his in Herriot young beset that experiences That same year, in 1972 both books were combined and published and combined were books both 1972 in year, same That with the title in the United States ( was an enormous surprise to Wight and his publisher. Wight ex who had among those to carry only a mild interest pected his works Wight unconsciously, perhaps But dales. of the knowledge some a theme common to world literature. succeeded in expressing instantly taken with the idea of the young, clumsy vet Readers were quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 61 - - - -

John S. Vassar John 160) Volume 04 ATBB, ATBB, All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings at an episodic pace. With few exceptions, the few exceptions, the at an episodic pace. With

proceeds And now, in less than three years the stream had dwin had years the stream in less than three And now, dled, not exactly to a trickle but certainly to the stage final dry-up was in sight. ( the where When I first came to Darrowby the tractor had already be already had tractor the Darrowby to came first I When agricultural the in hard dies tradition but over, take to gun Armed horses around. still a lot of were world and there with my firing iron and box of blister I plunged deter minedly into what had always been the surging main veterinary life. of stream Siegfried and Tristan Siegfried Farnon are and brothers who Tristan work with Herri The four main characters are James Herriot, Siegfried Farnon, Siegfried Farnon, James Herriot, The four main characters are ACGS has the ability, has which the hindsight ability, so often provides, of seeing the changes through situations. Herriot humor in various awkward out the book as he and matures gains much confidencegreater in himself and in his profession. ot. Siegfried is Herriot’s employer and has worked as a veterinary for years. Siegfried is more of a comrade in arms than a boss. He was high and he con Herriot at a time when unemployment hires pany young Herriot on his visits, making the rounds with him in making the rounds pany young Herriot on his visits, four are There dales. the of roads back the along car antiquated his in this play an important role important exceptions that not only as well.book, but in the succeeding books from all told The stories are Alderson. Farnon, and Helen Tristan the first person perspective, and thereader’s sympathies lie with himself as an young Herriot. The country veterinarian presents animals and people both treats who individual caring empathetic, with respect and compassion. His flaws and are relatively few, He clumsy. somewhat and inexperienced is he Mostly harmless. In addition to the disappearance of the draft horse, new drugs and of the draft horse, new drugs In addition to the disappearance dis to scene the on come to beginning just were methods treatment care. place traditional methods of animal Most only exist in that individual chapter. characters encountered self contained units, completing an encounter within chapters are to accom is for the reader The effect the context of one chapter. sion just melted quietly away within a few years. And I was one of one was I And years. few a within away quietly melted just sion to see it happen. there those who were quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------62 All Crea All

John S. Vassar John . Tristan is Sieg . Tristan Volume 04 ACGS All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings concludes with the description of their mar Over the next twenty years Wight published over a dozen more Over the next twenty years Wight Helen appears to be unattainable for Herriot. The young veteri We are introduced to a new element of Siegfried’s behavior whenbehavior Siegfried’s of element new a to introduced are We The fourth major character is Helen Alderson. She is the attrac Siegfried possesses a complex, though kind, personality. He ex He kind, personality. complex, though a possesses Siegfried moon was spent testing cows for tuberculosis. moon was spent testing cows for tuberculosis. with encounters various his and Herriot of life the narrating books the story of the denizens of the dales. These works carried forward II War World in Force Air the Royal with his time Heerriot through In 1995 and into various veteran trips to the USSR and Turkey. Alfred died Wight of cancer in his home where he at had Thirlby, moved after fifty years of veterinary work in Thirsk. riot. to wear slacks in a day when it was still uncon Her decision Much of James and nature. ventional suggests her independent Her by expressed actions foolish of comprised is courtship Helen’s deal of grace demonstrated by Helen. riot followed by a great narian must overcome a series of obstacles (including competitive heart. Helen’s win to order in mistakes) boorish own his and suitors It is only after both and Tristan Siegfried encourage Herriot to his lady’s heart. wins the attempts at courtship that the hero and Small Great tures riage. The final chapter of the work describes how their honey his brother Tristan arrives his in brother Tristan chapter six of veteri passing, yet not but attending, is and brother younger fried’s behavior of also brings out the most boisterous nary school. Tristan his drives that combination lazy—a but clever, is Tristan brother. his Tristan’s cleverness is Siegfried into fits of madness. brother In fact, of the narra his laziness. Most most explicitly through expressed calledthat take place at the center of the veterinary practice, tives Skeldale interacting with one another. House, involve these three tive daughter of a local farmer and the object of affection for Her sistently pays him more than market value. Siegfried demonstrates than more sistently pays him veterinarian’s support for Herriot on the young compassion for and very first case. Herriot orders the destruction of a valuable, but Herriot the manager of the farm is outraged. diseased, horse and his diagnosis. and a postmortem confirms puts the horse down cels though at he behaving does inconsistently, not himself see that His inconsistency. obliviousness to his own actions delights the of his behavior. the reality who is all too familiar with reader, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - 63 had a boy a had

Huckleberry (1986), not to not (1986), John S. Vassar John Volume 04 All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings If Only They Could Talk Talk They Could Only If James Herriot’s Dog Stories James Herriot’s might serve as an important analogue of travel literature that literature travel of analogue important an as serve might Lastly, Herriot has published Lastly, books exclusively for children and The same is true of their designation as “animal stories.” While of their designation The same is true But this simple classification of Herriot as a children’s writer is But these genres need not be mutually exclusive. A characteris A But need these not genres be mutually exclusive. does lovingly describe animals, it is almost always in the context ofcontext the in always almost is it animals, describe lovingly does ruleold the about theories develops he example, For owners. their and vice versa. Thus the home, the smaller the dog that the larger illuminates carefully of animals in these stories even his treatment their owners. has published abridged additions of these stories which contain (e,g, stories. cat or dog only animal as an “Awd bugger!” or utters the expletive “Bloody ‘ell!” it‘ell!” “Bloody expletive the utters or bugger!” “Awd an as animal is problematic to conceive of these books exclusively as children’s might literature to children’s stories. The assignation of these stories be more a result of marketing strategies than based on the actual Originally, works. these of content holding a horse’s on reins the cover and that led many bookstores 363). (Wight to put it in juvenile literature. background a inhabit creatures these animals, contain certainly they describing time more spends Herriot themselves. than larger is that the people and the landscape than he does the animals. When he mal boundaries. Reading Herriot’s work as children’s literature be could It well. as classifications other from it disqualify not does could still comprehend. that children travel literature Finn to a younger audience. is of interest in the works many adult themes present are incomplete. First, there of Herriot, from personal situations like courting, marital difficulty, and drunkenness to societal issues like euthanasia and the difficul the language farmer ties of wasAdditionally, of the Yorkshire war. often a bit rough for children. As often as a character refers to an Reading Herriot as a Travel Writer Travel as a Reading Herriot There are at least two writings reasons why have Wight’s not been adequately addressed as travel literature. The primary obstacle in reading these texts as travel literature is likely because they have The stories. animal or children either considered been traditionally Academy has not often deemed stories about children and pigs as worthy of critical investigation. traditional for is that it transgresses tic of exceptional literature quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 64 - (1984) and (1984)

John S. Vassar John (1995). He has He (1995). Volume 04 All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings Moses the Kitten James Herriot’s Favorite Dog Stories Favorite Dog James Herriot’s (1985). These titles demonstrate that Wight was

cucumber and other assorted vegetables jostling each oth each jostling vegetables assorted other and cucumber er in a powerful mustard-vinegar sauce. It was the work fork with the mass, my loaded to smother of a moment quickof couple a gave my mouth, into it popped I then chews and swallowed. It was a start and I hadn’t tasted a thing except the piccalilli…Looking back, I realise it was one of the bravest things I have ever done. I stuck to my task dipping unwaveringly, again and again into the jar, Feverishly I scooped a mound of it on to my plate. It Feverishly I scooped a mound of it on to my plate. It seemed to contain just about everything; onions, apples, Wight notes that, “Another obstacle [for Herriot] was the learning the was Herriot] [for obstacle “Another that, notes Wight Several elements of Herriot’s stories convey his traveler’sSeveral elements eye for the Yorkshire dialect.” (Wight, 97). Sometimes Herriot’s writing dialect.” (Wight, Yorkshire the stranger caught in a strange land,sounds very much like that of a encountering strange customs and food. On one occasion he was two pieces Herriot She offered dining with a farmer and his wife. torn was He fat. white pure, of consisted which of each “bacon,” of between offending the hospitality of his hosts and eating some the handle to how about despaired he When thing unappetizing. so situation, he spotted a jar of piccalilli. James Wight, in a memoir of his father, writes that Herriot “was fas in a memoir of his father, James Wight, uncov people, [Yorkshire] the of traditions and ways the by cinated studyingwas qualities…[Herriot] other and humor warmth, ering them.” (Wight, 98). Herriot observed the farmers in the dale from Scotland, having left the He arrived from the position of an outsider. and thus had a perspective that Glasgow, of area metropolitan large at perspective, This Darrowby. of community the from different was integrate into this alien society. times, made it difficult for him to ‘wick’and ‘marra’ ‘garget’, ‘felon’ like Words “language.’ new a of of mysteries the unravel to attempted he as brain his bombarded also published several children’s stories children’s several published also Only One Woof of genre. of the distinctiveness aware travel writing in of good terrain. Indeed, a hallmark unfamiliar extensively Herriot wrote cludes telling tales of alien surroundings. of customs, food, religious of the dales and included descriptions practices, rites of passage and (obviously) how they their treat pets. be confused with confused be quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------65

John S. Vassar John Volume 04 All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings 315-316) ATBB ATBB keeping my mind a blank, grimly refusing to think of the horrible thing that was happening to me.… But at last I long a swallow, and crunch heroic final A end. the to came was The thing the plate was empty. gulp at my tea and accomplished. ( Ultimately it is not only the people who fall underneath this Ultimately it is not only the people who fall underneath this James’ role as a veterinarian also offers him unprecedented ac him unprecedented as a veterinarian also offers role James’ But in this interaction, Herriot excels at recalling the voices of the voices of at recalling But in this interaction, Herriot excels Herriot was able to observe so carefully because of his profes liar perspective allows for a rich fleshing out of characters and the and characters of out fleshing rich a for allows perspective liar twin rather private ways that they interacted with their pets. This life of the people in the professional and perspective on the home dales demonstrates Herriot’s eye for a good story. Yorkshire traveler’s eye. Herriot quickly Wight’s succumbed to the enchant country itself. occasions, On Her numerous ment Yorkshire of the a of location social the from lives he which in land the describes riot of the people in the dales. A veterinarian obviously deals exten and other livestock on the sively with the sheep, cows, horses Herriot’s day had to work with dales. In addition, vets during large corporate farms, as well as small family farms. Herriot ob eked have who farmers as landscape financial changing the serves out a living in the dales and moors and must continue to scratch to continue to survive. and claw in order cess to the interior lives of his patients’ owners. Because Herriot began to branch out into small animal work early in his practice, dale families. This pecu he saw the inner workings of numerous those who are often marginalized by contemporary societies to societies contemporary by marginalized often are who those day. Sanford Sternlicht observes that Herriot hears and trans for and re people who cared mits “the lost voices of a landed and life, of way their and beasts, their land, ancient their spected (136). Critical to of the a writer role of most of all, each other.” is the writer’stravel literature the unique and dis eye toward tinctive of the local provides veterinarian as a position Herriot’s point. sional vantage lives as well as the professional a unique perspective on the home Herriot thus encounters an experience so common to travelers, of Herriot thus encounters an experience ten torn between partaking in disconcerting customs or offending hosts. generous quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------66 -

John S. Vassar John Volume 04 All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings 67) ACGS The higher up the country, the more I liked them. At the I liked them. the more The higher up the country, where it bottom widened of into the the valley, plain, the farmers were like farmers everywhere, but the people the land heightened, and in the as interesting more grew Itops bleak the near farms isolated and hamlets scattered found their characteristics most marked; their simplicity independence and their hospi their rugged and dignity, ( tality. Wight’s work is Wight’s obviously autobiographical. In fact, the line be Numerous literary critics have noted the importance of a second literary critics Numerous Ultimately, Herriot sees the people of the dales as connected inex the people of the dales as connected Herriot sees Ultimately, tween author and protagonist is so liminal as to tween be almost author and indistin protagonist interestingly it makes device narrative important an But guishable. two narrative voices are these stories, there complex. Throughout James young the voice, narrative first his In reader. the to speaking Herriot is exploring this new land and making these new acquaint wiser James Her ances. But in the second narrative voice, an older, riot is reflecting on the incidents of his youth. As an example, in As Herriot progresses through As these through Herriot books, progresses he notes that the farm ways. important many in him change to begun have dales the of ers books. these in journey important second a exemplifies change This journey in travel writing. The best examples of travel writings in clude a journey of discovery that transcends geography and in As Michael Kowalewski cludes the development of the writer. notes: “while andtravel writing usually consists of part sociology it has part also natural traditionally history, gone beyond “mere” ethnography by being insistently autobiographical” (8). social location. Even within the dales, Herriot notes different per dales, Herriot notes different social location. Even within the the individuals live. sonalities depending on where visitor. He visitor. clearly fills therole of a city dweller who is enraptured him. that surrounds by the natural beauty tricably to the dales themselves. The farmers and farm-wives in animals and the land. This connected with the some ways merge ness between people and land is a central theme running through people and this land as inex out these works. Herriot views these tricably linked. This close connection between people and land our affects always location geographical our that notion the reflects quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - 67 - -

John S. Vassar John 19). Volume 04 ACGS All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings he and Siegfried fondly notice a fine collection of medicine but to an interior, a sentimental or temperamental voyage, temperamental or sentimental a interior, an to but which takes place side by side with that outer one; ... the us, indeed, a triple opportu ideal book of this kind offers nity of exploration—abroad, into the author’s brain, and braina possess therefore should writer The own. our into cour the and … life of philosophy some exploring; worth age to proclaim it and put it to the test; he must be naif 15) both child and sage.” (Fussell and profound, the reader of a good travel book is entitled not only to an exterior voyage, to descriptions of scenery and so forth, James Herriot became a more complex literary character literary complex more a became Herriot James intended. Herriot might originally have creator than his perspective that the author supplied the grandfatherly a self, experiences on his youthful recorded his anchored character who might have begun as a humble observer, but matured and became much more interesting as the (28) books progressed. Good travel writing must include a focus upon the inner self of As Richard Gardner observes, this complex dual structure makes structure dual complex this observes, Gardner Richard As panies Herriot throughout these books. As the young Herriot of the of Herriot young the As books. these throughout Herriot panies narrative world slowly transforms into the wise author reflecting fondly on the past, we accompany Herriot through that journey. dales, but Yorkshire travels not just to the the reader a result, As through life as well. The journey is inward as important to the the overall writer. nar that: Norman Douglas wrote rative as the journey outward. awareness.”(Beacham 635) Brunsdales agrees and adds: agrees 635) Brunsdales awareness.”(Beacham accom that growth of sense the demonstrates also observation This ACGS bottles which they are to use. “The two of us stood gazing at the and idea that it was nearly all useless without any gleaming rows Soon they nearly over. the old medicines were that the days of would be hustled into oblivion by the headlong rush of the new ( would never return.” discoveries and they like made more narrative. “The young man is interesting a more ofyears additional thirty narrators the with blended being by able quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------68 is now

John S. Vassar John himself Volume 04 All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings It is a fascinating irony that other travelers have now written trav that other travelers It is a fascinating irony There There is also a final irony inherent to the travels of James Her This last connection between Herriot and travel writing is the Travelers learn not just foreign customs and curious cuisines and identified exclusively with the Yorkshire land. Yorkshire identified exclusively with the of center the as stands today Thirsk Darrowby. Herriot’s to guides el a tourist industry as farm houses have been transformed into Bed and Breakfast homes. plan Tourists trips to Thirsk and journey to lived. he where home the and worked he where office veterinary the many of them Dales area, 8 million visitors a year visit the Around 7). by Herriot’s books. (Brunsdale lured tempts to learn from them. Herriot proves a compelling pro a them. Herriot proves tempts to learn from tagonist, seeking. Fussell notes that, always learning and always “ unfamiliar beliefs and novel forms of government. They learn, if they humility” are (14). lucky, That humility might be the distin guishing mark between traveler and tourist. riot. His of process travel writing has itself Yorkshire the remade land. It this foreign Dales. Herriot the traveler has now affected is as true in travel as it is in quantum mechanics: the observer af fects the observed. Decades after his books, Wight perspective might also contribute to Herriot’s honest portrayal of the in ethnography, occurs often As own faults and mistakes. his observed has culture now and disappeared largely exists only in the writings of this initial observer. modesty of his self-portrayal. His modesty comes through the nar rative in numerous ways. Part of the popularity of this series is his made mistakes, he occasions where frank description of numerous misunderstood the local farmers, or exercised poor judgment. Not every chapter ends in a successful tale of a solved problem or an his mistakes and at animal healed. But Herriot acknowledges But Herriot’s books offer another changing protagonist, one that that one protagonist, changing another offer books Herriot’s But them dales Yorkshire the Herriot: alongside matures and grows the perspective of one does so from As Herriot writes, he selves. later: As his son wrote over decades. stretching who has experience “The world that James Herriot wrote about has all but disap now few in num family farms…are and the countless peared… ber” 363). (Wight about Writing events forty years after the fact a temporal perspective that illuminates the past while provides providing the author with a perspective from a fixed point. This quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------69 . New

. Lexington: John S. Vassar John . Oxford: Oxford Oxford Oxford: . Volume www.HerriotCoun 04 . New St. York: Mar . New York: W. W. Nor W. W. . New York: All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings , vol. 3 (Washington: Beacham (Washington: 3 vol. , . New York: St. Martin’s Press, Press, Martin’s St. York: New . . New York: St. Martin’s Press, . York: New . New York: . St. New York: Martin’s Press, . New Yord: Twayne Publishers, 1997. Publishers, Twayne Yord: New . . New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1992. St. Martin’s Press, York: . New The Oxford Book of Travel Stories of Travel The Oxford Book The Norton Book of Travel of Book Norton The James Herriot All Creatures Great and Small Great All Creatures Travel Literature and the Evolution of the Novel Literature Travel Travel Literature Through the Ages: the An Anthology Through Literature Travel . Herriot brought film, books, and ultimately tourists to Every Living Thing The Lord God Made Them All All Things Bright and Beautiful All Things Wise and Wonderful All Things Wise Publishing, 1988), 635. tin’s Press, 1972. tin’s Press, 1973. 1977. 1981. York: Garland Publishing. 1988. York: Popular Fiction in America Beacham’s 1996. University Press, 1987. ton & Company, University Press of Kentucky, 1983. of Kentucky, University Press Tourism has proven lucrative for the region, bringing in $8 mil $8 in bringing region, the for lucrative proven has Tourism is complete to the point of changing of the dales This remaking impor of the dales all offer His works, his stories, his remaking ______. ______. ______. ______. ______, ed. Beacham, ed. Walton, “James Herriot (James Alfred Wight).” in Mitzi. Brunsdale, ed. Patricia, Craig, Fussell, Paul, ed. Herriot, James. tant reasons to consider Herriot’s work as an impressive example example to consider Herriot’s work as an impressive tant reasons of travel writing the genre should enlarge We of travel literature. and bring Herriot in as well. As Percy Adams writes, “The li no since so, much too not but gigantic, is literature travel of brary (Adams reader.” any for or world, this for large too be can library a trip to the is vast enough to include travel literature xi). Surely dales. Yorkshire References Percy. Adams, lion to Thirsk from 1978-1988 (Brunsdale 132) (Brunsdale 1978-1988 lion to Thirsk from travel at aimed carefully name new area’s Yorkshire The name. its ( website with complete Country, Herriot is ers try.com) dales, the the and Yorkshire dales paradoxically, exist in its truest state only in his books. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - 70

. New York: York: New . . Ann Arbor: . Ann Arbor: John S. Vassar John . Westport, Con . Westport, Volume 04 All Writings Great and Small and Great All Writings Tourists With Typewriters: Typewriters: With Tourists Temperamental Journeys: Essays on the Mod the on Essays Journeys: Temperamental . Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1992 Press, Athens: University of Georgia . All Things Herriot: James Herriot and His Peace James Herriot: A Critical Companion James Herriot: A . Syracuse, NY: Syracuse University Press, 1995. Syracuse University Press, . Syracuse, NY: The Real James Herriot: A Memoir of My Father The Real James Herriot: A Ballentine Books, 1999. Critical TravelReflectionsWriting on Contemporary 2000. Press, University of Michigan of Travel ern Literature 1997. Press, necticut: Greenwood able Kingdom Wight, Jim. Wight, Rossi, Michael J. Sternlicht, Sanford. Holland, Patrick and Graham Huggan. ed. Michael, Kowalewski, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk quarter

academic

Aalborg Universitet kvarter akademisktidsskrift for humanistisk forskning

Journeys in history/ historical journeys akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

The Hammock and the Colonial Journey of Conquest Reminiscences of British Colonialism among the West Niger-Igbo of Nigeria

Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe is Senior Research Fellow/ Lecturer at the Institute of African Studies, University of Nigeria, Nsukka, Nigeria.

The Beginning Igboland, particularly east of the River Niger has quite a few navi- gable rivers, of which the Niger forms the major artery of commu- nication. The others include the Anambra, which is a tributary of the Niger, the Ezu, which connects to the Anambra; the Ebonyi, which flows into the Cross River; and the Imo which drains into the Bonny Creek of the Niger Delta. The same could be said of the Ig- boland lying west of the Niger, except that the few navigable rivers that flow from the hinterland not only lie within the Niger Delta basin, but cover short courses before gravitating into the Niger. These include the Adofi, Umomi, Oboshi, Ubu, and Iyioji. Most of these rivers, apart from running through the geo-periph- ery of Igboland form part of the web of tributaries of the Niger, thereby eventually draining into the Atlantic Ocean. Thus the great- er part of Igbo land are left without the utility of river transport. In other words, the bulk of the numerous over-land travel networks connecting the various communities of independent petty village group states were undertaken by foot and head-porterage, since the use of such beasts of burden as horses and donkeys were unknown among the people. This is not, however, to say that the use of these animals as means of transportation was entirely unknown to the Igbo. The fact is that

Volume 04 72 - - - - - Og 73 and

Volume 04 Otigbu-Enyinya Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe T. Dr Nwankwo which kills these animals within The Hammock and the Colonial Journey Colonial and the The Hammock of Conquest trypanosomiasis,

title known variously as . The horse is symbolic of the highest status of the Ozo (Horse-killer). Ozo Such a titled man, when dead, equally required a good number good a required equally dead, when man, titled a Such don of use the to relates it as Igboland in situation the was Such Socio-political statues among most Igbo sub-groups are based based are sub-groups Igbo most among statues Socio-political The second factor is the prevalence of the highly deadly sleeping The second factor is the prevalence animals these of use made never Igbo the that say to not is this But of horses as part of the requirements for his traditional burial rites. burial traditional his for requirements the of part as horses of members surviving the among shared thereafter were horses Such horses served Among these people therefore of the title society. different purposes other than that of being used as a means of transportation. earlythe at and before transportation of means as horses and keys importantly however the use of the horse as a symbol of socio- of high of the tail as part regalia political title status and the use subgroups. Igbo Niger West and Northern the among dignity social mainly on a form of graduated social title system generically known as of Aguleri groups Nkanu, Nsukka, and system among the title slaughter the Here, Igbo. Niger West of Illah the and communities, for anyone initiating ing of horse forms a principal requirement into the apex bu-Enyinya sickness disease a very short time. This no doubt is taken as another major reason for the non-domestication of these non-resistant savannah species zone of which Igboland forms of a animals part. in the Thusforest purposes other for Igboland into brought when even animals such did not often last long. They sooner or later died of sleeping-sick ness infections. for other purposes. In fact horses and donkeys when available are Most people. the to cattle the like protein of sources important even though they were fully aware of the animal’s utility as beasts of beasts as utility animal’s the of aware fully were they though even burden, the prevailing circumstances could not permit their use for such. The dominant rainforest vegetation of Igboland with its often winding tracks narrow which often are infested with thick and out- suchof use the for suitable not was branches tree and shrubs grown highly mobile beasts such of high burden. Moreover, density forest at against sudden defence effective less afford also terrain could tacks by such wild animals as leopards, tigers, elephants and wild and their riders. pigs on the beasts of burden quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------74

Volume 04 Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe T. Dr Nwankwo the Igbo term for Portuguese Potokri people, The Hammock and the Colonial Journey Colonial and the The Hammock of Conquest Olaudah Equiano, the Igbo freed slave author and abolitionist, Travel in Travel pre-colonial Nigeria in general and Igboland in par It was in answer to this ominous situation that the idea of convert to this ominous situation that the It was in answer and his sister was lucky enough to be sold into slavery rather than The 1996). (Edwards, sacrifices for immolated or meat as eaten being same is also the case of the millions of members of African descent Americas and the whose descendants now paint the faces of Europe black. Descendants of some domestic slaves who although be treated to up called being of danger in remained but society, the of part as used as beasts of sacrifices, survived today as full citizens of the so thanks to British intervention. ciety, the danger of being caught by cannibals and having one’s different body parts soup-pots distributed and in eaten different as beef or one’s having of danger the was there Again animal. edible other any title- of rituals of purpose the for head-hunters by off chopped head trav distance long for factors inhibiting constituted these All taking. els among pre-colonial Igbo people in particular and Nigeria in victim general.A The incidence of slavery was the most prevalent. of slavery could be lucky enough to either end up as a domestic servant or being sold to slave traders then. lonialism. But the introduction of the hammock was not accepted by accepted not was hammock the of introduction the But lonialism. the people hook, line and sinker; hence it was trailed by accounts of and Thesubsequent British policy of resistance enforcement. strong security situation the prevailing ranged from resistance for reasons of the idea of interpretation of the period to associated customary carrying a living and healthy person. ticular was fraught with enormous The danger. danger of being even or slavery, into sold caughtor killed and neighbours hostile by by slave raiders themselves. There was equally the danger of being caught by neighbours and used for human was alsosacrifice. There period of colonialism. The early European visitors, who were not were visitors, who The early European period of colonialism. incomprehensi found it therefore long distances, used to trekking introduce to attempts several after it, to adapted get to them for ble these animals into Igboland had failed. Thus it became necessary the problem. means of confronting to find an alternative into that of a stationary apparatus of leisure ing the hammock from a mobile train powered by human energy Thus,became necessary. the hammock was to become identified with a symbol of British co quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - 75 - (Ayandele, (Ayandele,

Volume 04 Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe T. Dr Nwankwo The Hammock and the Colonial Journey Colonial and the The Hammock of Conquest C’est le signal de la derniere cruaute que la plume ait plume ait la que cruaute derniere la de signal le C’est echauffes gens, jeunes Les peoples. des l’histoire sur ecrite specta eclaves, les sur precipitant se palme, de vin le par pour les pousser au lieu de la scene, teurs inconscients sur l’akpu et esclave est couche leur supplice. Un premier The records make it abundantly clear that in spite of theirof spite in that clear abundantly it make records The slave- 1891 until remained Egba the professions moralistic holders, slave dealers and slave-hunters. In fact human capital their Abeokuta in publicly performed was sacrifice 1966, p. 6) as late as 1887. (Ayandele, But it was one of the the S.M.A Missionary agents among the West Missionary agents among the West But it was one of the the S.M.A Ironically some of these domestic-based slaves were much luckier much were slaves domestic-based these of some Ironically The cases of cannibalism and human sacrifice were even more ness account of the high level of cruelty which attended the practiceness account of the high level of cruelty of human sacrifice among the people. Reporting on this manner of Igbuzo, of town the in century 20th the of turn the at sacrifice human isincidentally which Igboland, Niger West- in Ibusa, spelt presently author’sthe present hometown, the Roman Catholic Missionary in French: wrote Niger Igbo, the Reverend Father M. Friedrich that gave an eye-wit Ayandele went further to narrate how the Ijebu sacrificed 200 men 200 sacrificed Ijebu the how narrate to further went Ayandele of their invasion in propitiation and women on the eve of British forces British invading the defeat them enable to deities to rise to stardom through the dint of hard-work and spirited ad- venturism, like the case of king Jaja of Opobo, who evolved from in kings powerful most the of one become to slave domestic a being (Cookey, Nigeria of conquest British of dawn the at Delta Niger the some 1974). of Equally, these domestic slaves who defiantly em braced Christianity and the education accruing Western were to of pioneers the became subsequently who families those to rise give western education. Christian missionary activities and dangerous than and one quite being a sold number into of slavery, slaves were bought and kept for the purpose of sacrifice to deities or used for burial rites. Picturing this chaotic situation E. A. Ayan Abeokuta: city of Yoruba this concerning the dele wrote 1966, p. 6). quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 76 ------

Volume 04 Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe T. Dr Nwankwo The Hammock and the Colonial Journey Colonial and the The Hammock of Conquest was to gradually erode these fears and the atten these fears and the was to gradually erode Britannica

Was bewildered Was to discover that the zealous Christian converts of Brass felt no twinges of conscience when in 1885 they ate their human enemies, and that all the pun Archdeacon ishment Crowther prescribed to the canni bals was deprivation of Holy sacrament for sometime. 1966, p. 211) (Ayandele, dence. Quelquefois il est deja en decomposition. Les es car il s’agit maintenant prits des assistants sont echauffes du grand acte de ‘a ceremonce. Au milieu du tumulte met on tombe, la dans esclaves generalde un I’ onpousse le cadavre dessus et le second esclave encore par-dessus; et la fosse est com avec la terre le tout recouvre on puis blee 1907, pp. 103-4). Fredrich, (P.M. le maitre de la ceremonie lui tranch la tele des que le sang lui tranch de la ceremonie le maitre de contentemeutse repercutent coule, des cris percepts se mele aux cris. La et une danse effrence dans l’assistance terr au millieu du vacarme in par roule tete de l’esclave tandis l’akpu de pied au enfoui est corps son descriptible; les pour satisfaire est plaute sur un piquet chef que son instincts sauvages des paiens. On amene ensiute des autres esclaves. Helas! quelle mort les cruelle attend! La du tombe chef est prete. Son cadaver est place en evi Pax This was the state of affairs in pre-colonial Southern Nigeria that The imposition of people unsafe. made traveling for the ordinary the dant dangers. But it did not disappear at And a even blow. when the fear of being enslaved or eaten as beef gradually disappeared, car Hammock, the of fear the fear, another with substituted was it rying the White man on the hammock over a long distance. Ijaw and Efik/Ibbibio neighhours. Professor Ayandele once de Ijaw and Efik/Ibbibio neighhours. Professor can “Veritable as group ethnic Ijaw the of people Okrika the scribed 1966, p. nibals” 90). (Ayandele, Even at Brass, another Ijaw town, Commissioner Johnston, that the British High wrote Ayandele While human sacrifice was widespread among the Igbo of the West While human sacrifice was among widespread the Igbo of the Niger like in the case of their Edo and neighbours Yoruba to the west, cannibalism held sway among the East Niger Igbo and their quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 77 meaning

Volume 04 Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe T. Dr Nwankwo Wa adieji ofu ubosi eje Idu; adieji ofu ubosi Wa The Hammock and the Colonial Journey Colonial and the The Hammock of Conquest A A British officerwanting to make a journey within the territory however near or distant the destination might Describing the humiliating pattern of enforcing the carriers policy carriers the enforcing of pattern humiliating the Describing Among the carriers, some were to carry goods while others were to carry goods while others were Among the carriers, some were against the faced with either revolting therefore The people were Today, this same which Today, journey, covers a distance of about 120 The conquest of Niger the Igbo West by the British was piece At the end the latter option prevailed, that practice of levying young levying of practice that prevailed, option latter the end the At men by the various towns became a standing official policy of the colonial administration. on the people, Dr Felix Nwanze Obi wrote: to carry the White Officers on the hammock. In the process some of some process the In hammock. the on Officers White the carry to towns who home. Those killed and did not return the carriers were agreed to provide the carriers for the White man were branded as collaborators. On the other hand, those who refused to provide se of the White man and had their rulers as enemies treated were punished. verely kins besieged their of support in man White the of powers superior the fact that they were consequences, or accept men and face the dire a conquered people willing to do the biddings of their conquerors. kilometres, takes an average of one hour thirty minutes to cover. cover. to minutes thirty hour one of average an takes kilometres, and occasions on undertaken were journeys distant such Obviously, not on regular basis. They were also undertaken in groups and the slave- neighbours, hostile against defence in well-armed travellers raiders or head-hunters. pacifi several elicited This spontaneous. was revolt their but meal, use the meant also which forces, Colonial the by expeditions cation pacified already communities those among from natives several of as carriers for the army. The West Niger Igbo and the British Conquest Niger Igbo and West The Among the Niger West Igbo, the nature of long distant travels is saying, Igbo this in up summed that one does not travel to Idu (Benin City) in one In day. fact, in those days, it took on average of seven-day journey on foot over a bank West the at Asaba from travel to one for track bushy winding of Oba all-powerful the of seat the city, Benin to Niger, River the of potentate then over the whole territory Benin kingdom, the great Niger Igboland. of West quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - 78 - - - - -

Obi Egbuna Volume 04 Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe T. Dr Nwankwo The Hammock and the Colonial Journey Colonial and the The Hammock of Conquest age-set, which is the work-force age–set among among age–set work-force the is which age-set, 1888 by Rev. H. Johnson, to Bishop Crowder. H. Johnson, to Bishop Crowder. 1888 by Rev. nd Egbuna Ofili, a local Red-cap Chief from Ibusa, then 87 then Ibusa, from Chief Red-cap local a Ofili, Egbuna Obi Okwulagwe safety one of the British officers ordered the first of the natives to speak, to be blown to pieces with explosive bullets, so as to teach the rest of the party a lesson. This dated letter his in to referred and described was incident 22 March (Obi, 1976, p. 68) riers and the man ordered to carry out the punishment to carry out the punishment riers and the man ordered (Obi, 1976, p. 6) should he refuse. In 1888 when on such a journey the carriers traveling with the officer of the Royal Niger company to Igbuzo, from Asaba refused to go further for reasons of their be, would not go on foot neither would he use any of the of any use he would neither foot on go not would be, com and commandeered were Natives burden. of beasts theyand hammocks in heads their on him carry to pelled they showed any dis If careful. must do that extremely the human load, and tried to assuage comfort with their pain by shifting the pressure to another spot, thus caus ing a slight jolt to the man on top of their heads, the con sequent penalty was a good flogging byor the at officer, car the against both ready the at gun his with orders, his Under this state of chaos arising from the dangers of carrying the the Under this state of chaos arising from Ogwashi-Uku kingship dispute of 1909 many Ibusa people died in died people Ibusa many 1909 of dispute kingship Ogwashi-Uku the of process doing the job of carriers for the British ( Ofili, 1987). with those men, young able-bodied many load, his and Whiteman in the Niger Igbo the began West to flee into the bush,resolving rather located miles were in their farmlands which unwillingly to reside Thus, just as Asaba people were used as carriers Asaba to Ibusa, people were so Ibusa Thus, just as and his loads to other used to carry the Whiteman people were towns. inBritish intervention the in 1987 that during reported years old, Dr Nwanze Obi further reported how in 1888 one of the carriers Asaba, his from hometown, was blown to pieces on the orders of a British Officer forrefusing to go further on a journey to Igbuzo As he put it: (Ibusa), for fear of his safety. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------79

Volume 04 title. Among these com these Among title. Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe T. Dr Nwankwo Eze (Obi, 1976, p. 68).

-title (Red-cap chief) did that in or first put at two shillings per a person a per shillings two at put first

Eze The Hammock and the Colonial Journey Colonial and the The Hammock of Conquest acted as the social spring-board to political influ title, a position which exempts such men from manual which exempts such men from title, a position Eze title itle-takers in order to discourage people by way of making it Ogbuu Among those towns operating monarchical system of govern system Among those towns operating monarchical In Asaba this involved imposing a permit levy on all intending The second policy was to try to impose traditional monarchy on The second policy was to try to impose traditional monarchy The first policy was torestrict the number and frequency of The wealthy ones or those whose parents were rich had to take were or those whose parents The wealthy ones and later increased to two pounds when the former amount did not to two pounds when the and later increased appear to make adequate impact where towns the Okwe, and Okpanam, Ibusa, Asaba, of people the traditional Igbo In republicanism 1923, held the sway. British au four towns to immediately elect their respec these thorities ordered Inconfirmation. for authorities British the to present and kings tive their reactions, the people of Ibusa, Okpanam and Okwe defiantly ment, the enforcement of the Hammock policy was less difficult, since it was easier to hold the monarch responsible for any trans with case the not was This community. his of members by gression the towns of Asaba, and Ibusa which did not have strong central Og as fringe western their on towns such like structure leadership others among Agbor, and Iselle-Uku Ubulu-Uku-Uku, washi-Uku, leaderships exist. monarchical strong where Eze t expensive. The levy was more another means to get these young men back into their carrier duty. another means to get these young titles that exempted them from young men taking such traditional manual labour or acting Among as the carriers. towns thesewhere no traditional were there highly developed, and where titles were Ibu and Asaba which of British, the with directly deal to monarchs sa, the policy aimed the principally at number restricting of people initiating into the prestigious Red-cap munities whose socio-political framework in was struc republican the ture, ence and leadership. away from the town in order to avert being conscripted as White man’s carriers. the irrespective labour, of their age. Those who had come of age and the high cost of could afford a to rise give to was This carriers. as drafted being avert again to der needed to carry the hammock.temporary shortage of young men devise to were officials British the shortage, apparent this Following quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 80 head of Paramount

occupied by de juri variously known Asagba Volume 04 customarily of the respective towns of the respective Diokpa, Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe T. Dr Nwankwo Diokpa Diokpa is as the case may be, is held by the oldestthe by held is be, may case the as - the traditional ceremonial heads of the The Hammock and the Colonial Journey Colonial and the The Hammock of Conquest Diokpa Okpala- Ukwu or Okpala The pattern of carrying out the duty involved having each set ofinvolved The pattern of carrying out the duty The third policy was the change of the original practice of em The third In other words, the position of In other words, the implementation of colonial policies Under such circumstance Among the West Niger Igbo, the title of title the Igbo, Niger West the Among concerned with the orders would therefore summon a meeting of would therefore concerned with the orders the leaders at which the carriers were selected. Often, in order to the from selected were carriers the that either was it equity, ensure made constituting villages of the town at a time, or the villages were turns. in journey particular a for men of group whole the provide to to wait at the respective the attending communities carriers from borders of their towns at where the hammock and the associated therefore convinced that the only possible therefore solution to this was to kings.cause these communities to elect one particular town to go through ploying the same set carriers from several towns in journeys several that communities. This covered was to avoid the incidence of attacks on the carriers by members of rival communities often on their way back home. In dealing with be messages send would officials British traveling the policy, this communities and request of his plan to travel to particular forehand to levy carriers of his destination ed all the towns lying on the route for the purpose of carrying him and his luggage. Each community hold the status of a ceremonial king, who rules the town through the town through king, who rules hold the status of a ceremonial and age-grade associations.the Council of elders and chiefs, kinship Igbo of level every at descendant surviving male oldest the structure - from the through extended the family, village, town, to of powers political effective therefore, situation a such In clan. the soci age-grade and title Chiefs, Elders, of Council the on rested ten eties, and decisions often by consensus unlike in was those cumbersome towns and with slow, centralized anchor of leadership by represented their kings. The British was presented their presented strictly Asaba adhered towns to the authorities as their kings. Only to the orders and subsequently introduced the king of the town in 1925. title as the traditional as the remains village or town, who man in a family, like the casesAt the town level, the particular level of government. of Ibusa, Okpanam and Okwe, the quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------81

Volume 04 Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe T. Dr Nwankwo The Hammock and the Colonial Journey Colonial and the The Hammock of Conquest December, 1898, Section 3, for example, we find that find we example, for 3, Section 1898, December, th The missionaries themselves, also enjoyed the same ride virtues of Africans’ heads. The ever too professed on the long-suffering, humility and service to those ministered unto, were not applicable to the relations between the African natives. In dispatch No 18 missionaries and the of 5 T.J. for carrying Rev. required men were hammock more (Obi, 1976, p. 67). Denis of the Onitsha mission station. Only the dead, lame, or those unable to walk as a result of injury of result a as walk to unable those or lame, dead, the Only hu living healthy, a carrying of idea the therefore, people the To It should be noted that this policy of converting the Black African Black the converting of policy this that noted be should It that carrying such a person as if dead portends bad omen of invit ing sudden death for both the person being carried and the carrier. ac as appear them made only not practice this also, people the To complices to this customary crime, but also debased them to the tradi obnoxious many the of one was It burdens. of beasts of status Thiswith. live to made were Igbo the which Whiteman the of tions the before hammock, the of introduction the to reaction first the was came into force. fear of the danger of facing death in the process In speaking of the many signs of British imperial power among thepower among imperial British many signs of of the speaking In Igbo, particular the Niger West Igbo people, one cannot avoid to these people, the idea of car mention the hammock. In fact, among rying a living and healthy human being on the head as if he is a commodity or object was incomprehensible. or Even sickness meant the were to sickbe carried in that manner. of instead back the on carried were people the among lame the and being carried on the head like the dead or luggage. man being was a taboo. Part of this taboo revolves round the idea in these words. luggage were handed over in the manner of a relay-race team handing over the baton. This policy was to persist until the intro cars.duction of motor colonialBritish the to restricted not was burden of beasts to natives professed who themselves, missionaries early The alone. officials mere the by enthralled equally were kinds, human all of equality Nwanze work, his to note foot a In hammocks. in carried being of act Bible and sword the of policy conflicting of paradox this reveals Obi quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk 82

Volume 04 Essex: Heinemann. Dr Nwankwo T. Nwaezeigwe T. Dr Nwankwo 2, 103-4. Jaja of the Niger Delta: his life and times 1821- Jaja of the Niger Delta: his life and times Equiano’s Travels, Travels, Equiano’s

The British Occupation of the Niger Territories Territories the Niger Occupation of British The The Missionary Impact on Modern Nigeria 1842- The Missionary Impact King Anthropos The Hammock and the Colonial Journey Colonial and the The Hammock of Conquest Egbuna Ofili, c, 87 years, Red-Cap Chief, Ezukwu Ezukwu Chief, Red-Cap years, 87 c, Ofili, Egbuna London: Mercury Press, 6. Press, London: Mercury Obi London: Longman. New York: Nok Publishers Ltd. York: New Ibouzo(Niger)” (1830-1914), 1891, Quarters, Ibusa,August 28, 1987. 1914, Edwards, p. (ed.), 1996. Edwards, 1907. Fredrich P.M., “Description de l’ Enterrement d’un Chef a 1976. Nwanze Obi, F., of Evidence Thus, far from being the Whiteman’s burden, colonialism seen through the spectacle of the hammock became, in one respect the Black man’s burden. References 1966. E.A., Ayandele, S.J.S., 1974. Cookey, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

”En disposition, form og orden” Fællesskabets form i engelske koloniseringsfortællinger, ca. 1610

Johan Heinsen Ph.d. stipendiat ved Institut for Kultur og Glo- bale Studier ved Aalborg Universitet med pro- jektet ”Rejsens politik – Maritime hierarkier, sømænd og deres stemmer fra 1589 til 1790”.

Efter nogle turbulente år i starten af det 17. årh. blev Jamestown i Virginia set som værende i et presserende behov for autoritet. Den- ne opfattelse kom til udtryk i propagandistiske pamfletter, rejsebe- retninger og lovtekster. Disse tekster kredser om et forhold imellem loven, ordene og en forestillet geografi eller topografi over fælles- skabets steder. Det er for nyligt blevet argumenteret, at sådanne ko- loniseringstekster knytter autoritet og suverænitet til geografiske og spatiale troper (Benton 2010). Indeværende artikel bygger videre på denne grundantagelse og undersøger teksterne om den engelske kolonisering omkring år 1610. I disse tekster fortælles fællesskabet som en positivitet med et indre og et ydre. Men dette skel effek- tueres kun igennem talehandlinger og performances af loven, som derved fremstår som et formgivende element1. Suverænitet er så- ledes synonymt med evnen til at forme fællesskabet. Jacques Ran- cière har i en analyse af politiske fortællinger identificeret en hand- ling, han kalder for ’distributionen af det sanselige’ (Rancière 1999, 29). Med dette begreb mener Rancière den måde, hvorpå en given diskurs om fællesskab bliver en fordeling af stemmer og talere - et forsøg på at afmærke hvad Judith Butler i et lignende argument har kaldt ‘the domain of the sayable’ (Butler 1997, 133). Følges denne tanke om konstitueringen af talen, må beskrivelser af det politiske undersøges i den æstetiske dimension, der prøver at definere, hvem

Volume 03 83 ------84

Johan Heinsen Johan . I beskrivelsen I . 2 Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, En sådan forklaringsstruktur, der lokaliserer bestemte parter somparter bestemte lokaliserer der forklaringsstruktur, sådan En Artiklen falder i to dele. Den første griber fat i beskrivelserne af beskrivelserne i fat griber første Den dele. to i falder Artiklen 1974, 302). Fællesskabet er således det, som finder sted. fællesskabets blokering og knytter denne blokering til en ’forkert’ bevægelse, præger også fortællingerne fra 1610’erne, hvor den blev tid koloniens i figur ledende en Smith, John ekspliciteret. yderligere fokuseret fast som værende autoritet sin egen konstruerer år, ligste på koloniens fysiske velvære og kontrasterer denne stedslige be vidsthed til en skadelig mobilitet på kanten af fællesskabet: kommer til udtryk i beskrivelsen af rum. Thomas Harriot, hvis fortælling kom til beskrev at fællesskabet stå som som autoritativ, splittet imellem en lokaliserbar situeret, suveræn, der bar en rest fra London, og og forordninger af kongemagten igennem patenter modsat en overskridende bevægelse, der knyttedes til begærets hersken iblandt sømændene (Harriot 1588). Havet (og kaperkri og sted udsete deres fra væk sømændene lokkede Caribien) i gene fik dem i stedet til at bevæge sig. Koloniseringens historikere har ufrivilligt gentaget denne modstilling eller mindre sidenhen mere af et stedsligt forankret fælles bedste og en irregulær og skade lig mobilitet skabt af fortrin begærets over autoriteten (eks. Quinn søges det vist, at den forestillede topografi er uløseligt bundet til I den anden del skifter scenen af autoritet og lov. konstruktionen Den koloni. nødstedte den til vej på skibbrud et om narrativ et til ne fortælling er særligt interessant, da man deri finder spor efter ud autoritet, men hvis denne på en gang udfordrer der stemmer, fordring samtidig omskrives til at udtrykke autoritetens beher skelse af sit territorium. sted Utidige bevægelser og fællesskabets i koloni i Roanoke kortlevede den første historien om Allerede suverænitet om forestillinger hvordan demonstrerer, 1580’erne der i en given topografi over fællesskabet befinder sig hvor og der rum der begreb, et som tænkes her må Æstetik hvad. sige kan med tildeles normalt det end betydning, stærkere en mer af en topografi over fællesskabet tildeles politiske talehandlinger således deres rette Det steder. er sådanne som fordelinger, jeg for og engelske koloniseringstekster tidlige disse i at lokalisere søger og geografi. imellem suverænitet af forholdet beskrivelser deres i fællesskabets en række rum tekster om Jamestown. Dermed for quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------85

Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 (Smith 1624, 242) 1624, (Smith ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, into a body, rule or order, vnlesse both honesty, as well as vnlesse both honesty, or order, rule into a body, assist experience. authoritie and money, euery one so regarding their priuate gaine, that it is hard is hard their priuate gaine, that it euery one so regarding to effect any publike good, and impossible to bring them All this time our old taverne, made as much of al them al of much as made taverne, old our this time All by and desired; bee could as ware or mony either had that mean (I sides all on perfect so become were they time this Souldiers, Sailers, and Salvages,) as there was ten-times trade, private and damnable their maintaine to care, more necessary. things that were for the Colony then to provide (Smith 1612, 417) Smith portrætterer sig selv som undtaget fra denne undergraven sig selv som undtaget fra Smith portrætterer Dette er ifølge Smith blot en af Også sømandens misgerninger. karakter, karakter, en almindelig figur i tidensreligiøse søfortællinger om der folk, de til dermed overføres rejserne, i indgriben guddommelig har havet som sted (ibid., 461. For om mere søfortællinger, religiøse se Sievers 2006). Det utilregnelige hav står således i modsætning til der - som et sted for de private interesser, sfære koloniens offentlige fælles bedste. muligheden for udfoldelsen af det negerer der han som sfære, offentlige den i kun eksisterer Han mobilitet. de Udvekslingerne i fællesskabets margin forstyrrer den legitime han legitime den forstyrrer margin fællesskabets i Udvekslingerne del med indianerne ved at ødelægge bytteværdien af de ting, som kan skaffe de afgørende fødevarer (Smith 1612, 390). Dermed un dergraves kolonien af en bevægelse - en irregulær udveksling, der gør sømændene og soldaterne lig med den ‘vilde’. Smith spiller Her fortæres. kolonien, til medbringes som provianten, Havets opslugende og kalder havet for en ’glutton’. igen på ordene old taverne’, som derved bliver et lukket rum udenfor autoritetens udenfor rum lukket et bliver derved som taverne’, old marke alle grupper, disse bliver Dermed offentlighed. beherskede ret af deres bevægelse, identiske i deres negation af fællesskabet. Sømændene tager knive, redskaber og våben og bringer hemme ligt disse til indianerne for at bytte sig til der varer, kan sælges i som der i en privat og hemmelig sfære, England. Det hele foregår og som varetager som Smith sfære, med står overfor den offentlige når Smith erklærer: sættes lig med orden, Den private handel finder sted i stedet for det utilstedelige - ’our quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------86 Sørø-

Johan Heinsen Johan De sværger: ”by ”by De sværger: Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, A Trve Declaration. Denne tekst Trve A ”Yet some ”Yet bad natures will not Denne strategi låner fra blandt andre Har andre blandt fra låner strategi Denne A Trve Declaration efterfølgende går langt for at af Trve A (Smith, 1612, 372). 1612, (Smith, to slander the Countrey, that will slovenly spit at all things,all at spit slovenly will that Countrey, the slander to Modstillingen imellem begærets mobilitet og fællesskabets sted Smith benytter en lignende strategi, som også synes at sætte den med synes at give krop og synlighed. Denne undtagne, retfærdige synlighed. Denne undtagne, retfærdige og krop med synes at give illustreres selv som partikulært medlem udviskes, tilstand, hvor han i en passage, hvor der bygges boliger i den lille koloni. Som den ek bolig en bygge at helt Smith negligerer foregangsmand semplariske til sig selv (Smith 1612, 385-386). I stedet for at sin varetage egen in arbejder teresse han udelukkende for det fælles bedste, som her be ens lære derved og slide at - rum vildnissets i sted et etablere at i står således er bedste fælles Dette 450-451). (ibid., experience’ by ‘lecture at kende stedet lære til forsøget på at og sådan til stedet som knyttet for derved at beherske det. Dermed udviskes Smiths partikularitet fra sin historie og han bliver som den synlige bærer af det fælles helt. bedste i stedet historiens entydige Virginia- af publiceret tekst kort en i rolle afgørende en også spiller kaldet populært 1610 i kompagniet gærets udsigelse konstrueres som en forbrydelse imod fællesska sværger og båd en stjæler rejsende de af gruppe En helhed. sin i bet imellem sig at blive ”professed pirates, with dreames of mountai implicit.her er sproghandling en er også sørøveri At gold”. of nes sørø for genstanden er der håb, men værdier, ikke heller da er Det veriet (”so and far piracy priviledge as trechery, to rob us of our hopes”). Da disse ’scum of men’ fejler i deres mobilitet irregulære gør (’wilde de roving’), endnu en talehandling. the land, to to discredit all in one report, mutuall oath, to agree that this their comming awaie, the famyne, and to protest deplore desperate from proceeded necessitie” (Anon. 1610, 37-38). vernes talehandling er således netop at tale imod stedet som sådan - historier som riot, der angreb de, som havde skæmmet koloniens ry ved at gøre kategoriserHan fællesskabet. på angreb et for udtryk til talen selve viser, hvordan begæret er begæret knyttet hvordan til og selve sproget, hvordan be viser, sticke especially in company where they can find none to contradict them” vise som ”scandalous reports of a viperous generation” talt af ’ve generation” talt af a viperous of reports ”scandalous som vise nemous tongues’ (ibid., 39-40). om private, private tale i modsætning til stedet, når han erklærer cirkulerende og mobile rygter: quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------87 - A Trve Trve A ([Haklu

Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, I samme ombæring beordres det: ”Suffer no man Kontrollen med bevægelse og kontrollen med or 3 , der knytter sømandens bevægelse og dertilhørende tale dertilhørende og bevægelse sømandens knytter der , ”for seeing a liuely pattern of industry, order, and comli and order, industry, seeing a liuely pattern of ”for euery man ouervaluing his own worth, would his and others va euery man vnderprising Commander: be a lue, denied to be commanded” (Anon. 1610, 34). Historien om de talende sørøvere er bare en blandt flere i Det retfærdige fællesskab er i denne om diskurs en en Det forestilling retfærdige organisk helhed, hvori subjekterne indtager deres ‘rette’ pladser. Efter en oration gjort af autoriteten kureres ’the idle and restie dene er på denne måde også i denne autoritative diskurs bundet laster. imod sømandens uløseligt sammen og rettet Declaration til en undergravning af selve fællesskabet. Dette resulterer i en si men hvor alt i ste tuation, hvor en mand ikke har sin sande værdi, ’blandet’: det fremstår med indianerne. to return but by pasport from the president and Councel nor to may Discourage others.” write any Letter of any thing that yt] 1969, 53-54). object” (Strachey 1612, 38). En orden er et mønster, der står for øjet.for står der mønster, et er orden En 38). 1612, (Strachey object” og Denne lovtekst synes at knytte fortællingen om stedets orden mobilitetens overskridelse til en autoritativ magtdiskurs. En sidste forbindelse understreger denne relation. Iblandt de som papirer, Smith og de andre kolonister havde haft med sig, da de rejste fra Virginia-kompagni af skrevet instruktioner række en var England, denne utryghed ved sømænde et. En af disse skrivelser udfolder i hierarkiet på en måde, der får Smiths fortælling til at stå nes rolle for at regnes der oftest Forfatteren, som opfyldelsen af en profeti. være Richard Hakluyt, advarer imod sømændenes mobile tilbøje ligheder - at de vil stikke af med skibene og ødelægge handelen således en skadelig taleform, som kun kan trives der, hvor den ikke taleform, som kun kan trives der, således en skadelig en på bygger forestilling Denne 6). 1972, (Harriot ’gainesaide’ bliver implicit topografi lig Smiths, hvor den skadelige tale altid foregår på afstand af det retfærdige - f.eks. i sømændenes ’roving’. Stedet skulle tværtimod forstås som en under orden udarbejdelse. En tid på en der orden, denne hvordan fortæller, lig lovtekst fra kolonien eksem dens igennem øjet på virke skal politisk, og materiel er gang plaritet: nesse, wee are all of vs rather swayed vnto the same by a visible quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------88

Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, Grundet denne udfordring har Stracheys tekst været genstand genstand har Stracheys tekst været denne udfordring Grundet Fællesskabet er på denne måde en distribution af forskellige ste neder kunne rejse videre. Det er begivenhederne på Bermuda, somBermuda, på begivenhederne er Det videre. rejse kunne neder af en række hændelser, da autoriteten her udfordres er interessante, hvor folket handler imod fællesskabets orden. lit- og historikere marx-inspirerede iblandt opmærksomhed stor for Linebaugh og Rediker 1988; Greenblatt 1978; (Canny teraturforskere 2000; Netzloff 20034). Men hvor disse analyser forsøger at indskri ve tekstens beskrivelse af modstand i en socio-økonomisk sam proto-pro som sømanden (med klassekonflikt tidlig af menhæng udfolder teksten hvordan undersøge, at forsøge her jeg vil letariat), Det formgivende sværd fortælle at på forsøget til relation dennes og topografi Fællesskabets Stracheys A tydeligst i William en historie om autoritet er måske Reportory - et True langt brev sendt hjem fra der Virginia, fortæller om Sir Thomas Gates rejse til kolonien i 1609-1610, og som blev trykt af Samuel Purchas i 1625. Gates var en del af kompagniets forsøg på at genetablere autoritet bl.a. gennem nye, militære love. tilkolonien ikke omgang første i ekspedition denne kom Imidlertid undsætning, da den led skibbrud på Bermuda og først efter 9 må diseases’ i kolonien igennem ’unity’. At autoritetens tale tager formAt autoritetens tale tager igennem ’unity’. diseases’ i kolonien overbevi at på henblik med folk et foran tale en altså – oration en af Denne humanisme. tidens fra arv åbenlyse teksternes på peger – se som består i kendskabet oration til bringer det arbejde en rette kur, - det, som hører til hver mands plads i en reguleret offentlighed: the same with and dischargeth his charge, ”every man knoweth en i plads en - sted et tildelt fået har mand Hver 48). (ibid., alacrity” topografi, som er udsagt af suverænen. som kan der, indtages af de Og retmæssige denne subjekter. regel be det hvor passage, indledende en over lys nyt kaster mæssighed mærkes: ”There is a great distance, betwixt the vulgar opinion of Denne 1). (ibid., men” wise of apprehension judicious the and men, spatial distance som en forestillet, distance må således også forstås imellem det gode fællesskabs af styret tale, offentlighed, lederens og den vulgære menings private forførelse iblandt de mobile klas ser i fællesskabets periferi. Den sidstnævnte kategori knyttes også tide “the som iscenesættes ombæring samme i den når havet, til her of vulgar opinion” (ibid.). quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------89 -

Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, (Purchas 1625, 4:1754) (Purchas the Lord Gouernour, and Captaine Generall, deliuered Generall, deliuered and Captaine Gouernour, the Lord blames many laying Company, the vnto words few some ear Idlenesse, their and vanities, many for them vpon nestly wishing, that he might no more finde it so, least to Iustice, of sword the draw to compelled be should he he much rather, which he had delinquents, such cut off from them draw in their defence, to protect protested, iniuries. Stracheys tekst er således kongruent med den forestilling om om med den forestilling Stracheys tekst er således kongruent Jeg derfor hævde, at vil Stracheys tekst kan et forsøg læses som len, identisk med sværdet, der kan give fællesskabet, hvad Smith kalder: “a disposition, og meget rammende passage i tilsvarende (Smith 1624, 187). forme and order” Virgi om tekster samtidige de i findes der form, en som fællesskab form denne som udfordringerne af beskrivelser tekstens Men nia. lys gør os i stand til at kaste yderligere givende handling møder, topografi. over denne forestillede fællesskabets indre og ydre. Sværdet som formgiver kendes både fra bibelske fortællinger og fra Hobbes, der bruger sværdet som figur forretfærdigheden, der skal holde folket “in awe” (Hobbes der er en offentlighed, konstituere skal således Sværdet 1999, 112). be implicit mere en også passagen selve udøver Imidlertid statisk. om loven, skæring. Det er netop i autoritetens tale og dens trussel at - et fællesskabet tildeles sfære sted, en som er offentlig fælles, fremkom den tale hvis den igennem tilhører alligevel som men Fællesskabet mer. har dermed strengt taget kun et fælles sprog, såfremt talen af dette sprog er nøje fordelt imellem den, der taler af ta er det netop orationens fordeling Således og de, der lytter. Det er således sværdets beskæring, der drager grænsen imellem denne konflikt imellem autoritet og subjekt i termer, som er knyttet er som termer, i subjekt og autoritet imellem konflikt denne til en topografi over fællesskabet Opgaven og er dets at steder. un en suverænens magt som konstruerer teksten dersøge, hvordan er autoritet også i Stra ord opdeling. Med andre formgivning eller cheys tekst knyttet til evnen til at udstede steder og dermed defi fællesskabets grænse. nere på at gøre noget ved en æstetisk form. Og denne handling lignes væk: fællesskabets excesser der skærer med et ’sværd’, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------90 - - Folket Her afslø

Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, De plotter om at ville bryde ”from the society of the Colony, men of such distempered bodies, and infected mindes, good of either eyes, their before daily examples no whom im habituall their from deterre can punishment, or nesse pieties, or terrifie from a shameful death (Purchas 1625, 4:1750). Ved at gøre fællesskabets grænse til en konkret grænse imellem et imellem grænse konkret en til grænse fællesskabets gøre at Ved Med sig får disse irregulære sømænd en mindre forsamling, og iforsamling, og mindre en sømænd irregulære disse får Med sig Bermuda viser sig som en paradisisk ø, der frister sømandens ap som en paradisisk ø, der frister Bermuda viser sig forhold til den orden af synlighed, som disse fortællinger kredser af synlighed, som disse fortællinger kredser til den orden forhold om, er det desuden klart, at i skoven er netop synet ofte blokeret. Og i konteksten af de koloniale beretninger fra samtiden er dette det Ligesom territorium desuden uløseligt knyttet til indianeren. at irregularitet sin i dermed sømanden er Smith, hos tilfældet var ligne med den ‘vilde’. fæl holde tekst Stracheys kan geografi sin hver med ydre et og indre tige for det fælles bedste, der her består i arbejdet med de skibe, Virginia komme kan Gates autoriteten at for, nødvendige er som til undsætning. denne er der folk, som er ’seditious’ og ”sectary in points of religi on”. and like into outlawes the retired woods” (ibid., 4:1743). må vi udfordring Stracheys spatiale strategi sig. Den politiske rer ses som tilhørende et territorium, der ikke er sted for fællesskab tidspunkt dette på har vildskab for trope en som Skoven sådan. som I 167-171). 2011, Nielsen 136; 1988, Goff (Le historie lang en allerede beskrives derfor som: da Fællesskabet selv lider, eksemplet, som skinner for øjnene af plads. sin kende ikke folket kan Dermed forstået. bliver ikke folket, I stedet sømændene strejker og formår derfor ikke at sig gøre nyt petit. Selve skibbruddet figurerer som en udjævning af fællesskabets af udjævning en som figurerer skibbruddet Selve petit. hierarki, der ødelægges af havet. Og Strachey forsøger ihærdigt at tale. I denne knytte af hierarkiet til sømandens denne udviskning gerning fortæller han om den tale, som cirkulerer iblandt de sø mænd, der ikke længere føler sig bundet til skibets hierarki, da nød det lokker tale Sømændenes bølgerne. af opsluges selv skibet stedte fællesskab, og denne cirkulation af fortællinger står i direkte regelmæssig. som er visuel og modsætning til den orden, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------91 -

Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, At Hopkins åbner citeres imid . Imidlertid er der hurtigt andre, der i det hemme . Imidlertid er der hurtigt andre, 5 the authority ceased when the wracke was committed, was committed, the authority ceased when the wracke gouernmentthe from freed then all were they it, with and of any man; and for a matter of Conscience, it was not bo therein were we much how meanest, the to vnknowne his owne family. for himselfe, and und each one to prouide 1625, 4:1744) (Purchas [Hopkins] alleaged substantiall arguments, both ciuill and ciuill both arguments, substantiall alleaged [Hopkins] diuine (the Scripture falsely quoted) that it was no breach the to decline from conscience, nor Religion, of honesty, obedience of the or Gouernour, refuse to goe any further, since themselues) pleased so it (except authority his by led Komplottet opdages, og mytteristernes straf er at blive eksileret or impious so euer” (ibid., 4:1744). er lertid Stracheys diskurs. Som Judith Butler har argumenteret, daambivalens, til kilde potentiel en transgressive det af citationen konteksten for citationen ikke endeligt er i stand til at fastholde citatets læsning (Butler 1997, 147-153). Dette citat er ikke anderle des. I Hopkins ord høres andet end blot den uvidende sømands at vi her har at gøre Strachey indrømmer da også, egeninteresse. sig med en tale, som er særlig farlig. Den synes at have maskeret Hopkins tale synes at inspirere sømændene, for Strachey fortæller, sømændene, for Strachey fortæller, Hopkins tale synes at inspirere ’giddy’ komplot: ”conceiued that our i et lovløst og at en gruppe ex in put to authority had nor durst, neither Gouernour indeede ecution, or passe the act of Iustice vpon anyone, how treacherous for fællesskabet for lige planlægger Iblandt lignende disse gerninger. er en ung mand meget ”knowledge in the Scriptu ved navn Stephen Hopkins med res”. Hopkins tjener som præstens degn, men synes også at have ideer: irreligiøse lesskabet identisk, imens ‘det andet’ tildeles sit eget ikke-sted. Der følgen af konkurrerende forvirring, der ville være ved udviskes den af tale gøres Flerheden ytringer om fællesskabet indenfor dette selv. og offentlighed, ren er som fællesskab, et imellem modsætning en til fællesskabet som sådan. udenfor en tale, der figurer på en lille naboø, hvorved forstærker straffen afstanden imellem folk får dermed det ønske, som Strachey til Disse de to grupper. skriver dem opfyldt. De kommer bogstaveligt talt til at leve uden quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------92

Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, Denne læsning er imidlertid kun mulig, hvis Stracheys forsøg påDenne læsning er imidlertid kun udgrænser en andethed til den gode taleorden. Den radikalitet man udgrænser en andethed til den gode taleorden. der eder, Paines i derfor forsvinder argument Hopkins i skimte kan udvisker det sagte for til at fordel betragte talemåden og dens rela tion til fællesskabet. Det ender da også med, at denne tale ophører autorite at Hopkins siger, evne den af demonstrationen selve ved Paines bliver ord i stedet ten ikke selv har. genstand for en ’pub fælleshed, en i eksempel et til Paine gøres Dermed discourse’. lique hvori stemmerne er nøje fordelt og svarer overens med fællesska Dette gøres blandt andet ved at ækvivalere Hopkins tale med en veltalende per en langt mindre anden oprørsk stemme tilhørende taler og kommandør sin angriber Paine Paine. Henry navn ved son ’evill language’, som da Strachey dens imidlertid ’vnreu afbryder, hvis denne too much”, the modest eare tearmes’ ville ”offend erent at fra således Strachey viger Her phrase”. owne his ”in udtrykt blev i stedet at give sin for meget lyd og vælger give disse argumenter egen udlægning af ordenes regering ved at citere noget af Paines evne til at fælde der igen er en afvisning af autoritetens argument, let the ”and therefore med: dom. Strachey lader passagen slutte ukvemsordet om løftet hvorved &c”, kisse, hee) (said Gouernour lemik om, hvad autoritet som sådan ‘er’. For citatets brug af ordet fin ellers man autoritet, af forståelse den til ikke svarer ’authority’ både til båndet af givet og evig er denne hvor tekst, Stracheys i der Autoriteten er i Hopkins argument gud og kongemagten i London. begrænset. af dennes ord bundet, og derfor er virkningen at omskrive Hopkins argument suspenderes. Og netop tekstens som knyttet til de spatiale troper, forsøg på containment er uløseligt tekst koloniseringsfortællingerne. Stracheys forsøger strukturerer af at give denne tale en fast plads i en symmetrisk orden således er et fast indenfor/udenfor. lydighed/ulydighed, som samtidig som en lærd tale - en af den type taler, som ellers tilhører netop her synes Stracheys symme Allerede offentlighed. den regulerede triske modsætninger derfor at blive udfordret af ord, som han i sin citation forsøger at omforme. Og tilskrivesselvom argumentet en misfortolkning af Guds ord, er der også mere på spil end blot til afvej en – mands ikke relateres religiøse mindst når argumentet solida diffus af udtryk efterfølgende de og strejke foregående den ritet iblandt sømændene. Den symmetri af lydighed/ulydighed, som Strachey forsøger at forskydes etablere, derved af citatets po quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------93

Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, . 6 Sømandens solidaritet vises dermed som enSømandens solidaritet vises dermed En af disse har slået en anden sømand ihjel og I fælleshedens sfære slutter passagen således med, at slutter I fælleshedens sfære Smith præsenterer i en enkelt passage en tilsvarende konstruk i en enkelt passage en tilsvarende Smith præsenterer Dette får de sidste modstandere til at flygte ind i skoven. Hermed skoven. i ind flygte at til modstandere sidste de får Dette Konklusion Denne læsning af koloniseringsteksterne om Jamestown har været et forsøg på at vise, hvordan beretningerne om koloniseringen er denne suverænitet fortællinger om suverænitet, der portrætterer som magten til at forme fællesskabet. Denne formgivning kan på denne vis knyttes til et forhold imellem ord, lov og topografi. At være autoritet betyder således at varetage et fælles bedste, der ud hele afvisningen af autoriteten i det opløste fællesskab og gør den fællesskabets sted. tilhører til udtryk for noget, der slet ikke som den ganske håndfaste evne tion. Her vises autoritetens sværd ordenen. på sig forbryde måtte som de, forvise at ordet igennem til I forsøget på at få folket til at arbejde til stedets fælles bedste befa day as much as I doe, not every ler han således: “one that gathereth banished be ever for and river, the beyond set be shall daie next the Transgres 447). 1612, (Smith starue” or there liue and fort, the from geografiske fællesskabets af side forkerte den på sig finde vil soren sværd. af autoritetens demarkationslinje – afskåret kun finder sted udenfor fællesskabetsrum. Da derejsende endelig overra der ikke en lille gruppe, forlader øen, efterlader de således skende er sømænd. er dømt til hængning, men iblandt sømændene hærger en irreg ulær solidaritet: ”in despight and disdaine that Iustice should bee shewed vpon a and Sayler, that one of their crue should be an ex ample to others, [...] they cut his bands, and conueyed him into the 4:1746). (ibid., Woods” imod selve lovens virkemåde i eksemplets synlighed. Sø reaktion og denne negation tilhører mændene afviser selve eksemplariteten, Strachey omskriver Dermed territorium. vildes den flugt deres med bets topografi. topografi. bets guvernøren ”who had now the eyes of the whole Colony fixed 4:1744-1745). 1625, (Purchas døden til Paine dømmer him” upon Dermed ophøjes fællesskabet igennem autoritetens sværd i en ret færdig eksemplarisk distribution af tale og syn. Fællesheden tilhø aktør igen historiens retmæssige rer gøres det radikale opgør med autoriteten til fællesskabets diame illegitime det hvor fællesskab, over geografi en i modsætning trale quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------The 94

Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, . kelt skib i kolonien, og at dets anker holdes på land. Ingen må kunne dertil. Se [Hakluyt] 1969: 50-53 forlade kolonien uden ret er Teksten desuden kendt for at være et muligt forlæg for Shakespeares Tempest Agambens læsninger af Carl Schmitt synes at melde sig som en mu Giorgio sig sin rekonstitution som her forestiller lig fortolkningsramme for den lov, som magten til at forvise. ’Performances’ skal her forstås som der handlinger, fremviser fælles skabets lov for øjnene af et publikum. Derved skaber de en opdeling loven og de, som er underkastet den. imellem de, som bærer deli a is “It dimension: æstetiske denne af definition en giver Rancière speech of invisible, the and visible the of times, and spaces of mitation and noise, that simultaneously determines the place and the stakes of 2004, 13) politics as a form of experience.” (Rancière I samme ombæring Hakluyt opfordrer til, at der blot efterlades et en 4 5 Notes 1 2 3 og et ydre, der tilhører transgressoren. Derved og bliver et der transgressoren. loven ydre, tilhører knyttet til evnen til at en etablere geografi af forskel imellem den tale, som hører hjemme indenfor autoritetens territorium, og den tale, som for metafor som figurerer Sværdet dette. udenfor eksistere kan kun eksi at for stedet I fællesskabet. på form give at til evne denne selve stere i fællesskabets rum bliver sømandens laster og mobilitet der anden den på skovene, - sted andet et tilhørende som fremstillet for i tale retfærdige den til evnen da Og ø. forladt en eller floden af side findes som offentlighed, den til knyttet er således forestilling denne i fællesskabets sted og arbejdet for det fælles bedste, bliver disse steders stemmer ulæselige i den koloniale magtdiskurs. perifære folder sig i en synlig offentlighed, hvor suverænen har alle øjne fik øjne alle har suverænen hvor offentlighed, synlig en i sig folder seret på sig. Dette kan forstås som fællesskabets sted. Forstyrrelser af denne orden fremstilles som irregulære bevægelser og udveks linger i fællesskabets margin. Og talen knyttes til disse to modsat suverænens magt Dels er der orationen, der som lokaliteter. rettede for udtrykket der er dels Og sfære. offentlige synlige den behersker begæret, der ligesom mændene cirkulerer i en privat sfære, der er fortæl i skema dette udfolder diskurs Denne fællesskabet. udenfor skellet imellem et entydigt indre linger om lovens håndhævelse af quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 95 London: New York: New York:

Johan Heinsen Johan The Westward En The Westward Volume . Oxford: Blackwell . Oxford: 04 . New York: Palgrave York: New . . Oxford: Oxford University Oxford Oxford: . ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, New York: Cambridge University Cambridge York: New The Jamestown Voyages Under the First Char Under The Jamestown Voyages London: William Barret London: William Glasgow: The Hakluyt Society. 1:49-1:54 Glasgow: The Hakluyt Society. Shakespearean Negotiations : The Circulation of of Negotiations : The Circulation Shakespearean England’s Internal Colonies : Class, Capital, And the England’s A Search For Sovereignty: Law and Geography in Law and Geography in For Sovereignty: Search A The Elements of Law : Human Nature and De Cor Nature Law : Human The Elements of A Briefe and True Report of the New Found Land of the New Found Report of True Briefe and A Medieval Civilization 400-1500 . 2 bd. Oxford: Oxford University Press Oxford Oxford: Excitable Speech: A Politics of the Performative. Excitable Speech: A Trve declaration of the estate of the colonie in Virginia : vvith in Virginia declaration of the estate of the colonie Trve . Liverpool: Liverpool University Press. s. 17-44 Press. . Liverpool: Liverpool University pore Politico. pore Colonialism Modern English Early of Literature Macmillan terprise : English activities in Ireland, the Atlantic, and America 1480- the Atlantic, and terprise : English activities in Ireland, 1650 England Renaissance in Energy Social Press red.. Philip Barbour, ter 1606-1609 : The complete 1590 Theodor De Bry Edition. Virginia Dover Publications Press Routledge trol in English settlements in Ireland and 1550-1650. Virginia I: K.R. Andrews, N. Canny Hair og red.. P.E.H. a confutation of such scandalous reports as haue tended to the disgrace a confutation of such scandalous reports of the by aduise and direction of so worthy an enterprise. Published Councell of Virginia. 1400-1900. Empires, European Lauren Benton har i sin diskussion af forholdet imellem geografi og lov de såsom en henrettelse hvordan selve det, at udøve en lovgerning monstreret, (Benton 2010, 57). på at lægge krav på et territorium kan læses som et forsøg Dermed kan beskrivelsen af Paines henrettelse læses som en performance af gøre Bermuda engelsk. suverænitet, der skal Hobbes, T., Hobbes, 1999: T., J., 1988. Le Goff, M., 2003. Netzloff, Greenblatt, Greenblatt, S., 1988. [Hakluyt, R.], 1969. Instructions given by way i of Advice. Trykt 1972. Harriot, T., Benton, L., 2010. J., 1997. Butler, con social of problem the frontier: permissive The 1978. N., Canny, 6 Referencer 1610. Anon., quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk . . - - I: 96

The William The William Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 . London: Verso ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, The Many-Headed Hydra : The The Jamestown Voyages Under the The Jamestown Voyages . London: Walter Burre . London: Walter . Minneapolis: University of Minne of University Minneapolis: .

Crusading and Chronicle Writing on the Writing Crusading and Chronicle . Aldershot: Ashgate, 157-178 Aldershot: . . Cambridge: The Hakluyt Society. 2:327- Society. Hakluyt The Cambridge: . 63:4, 743-776 For The Colony in Virginea Britannia. Lavves Di Britannia. Virginea in Colony For The England and the Discovery of America 1481-1620 England and the Discovery The Politics of Aesthetics : The Distribution of the of : The Distribution Aesthetics of The Politics Disagreement Haklvytvs posthumus, or, Pvrchas His Pilgrimes. In Pilgrimes. His Pvrchas or, posthumus, Haklvytvs The Generall Historie of Virginia, New-England, and New-England, Virginia, of Generall Historie The . 4 bd. London: H. Fetherston . 4 bd. London: H. . London: Continuum the Summer isles with the names of the Adventurers, Planters, and Planters, the Adventurers, the names of the Summer isles with 1624 present this to 1584 An: beginning first their from Governours uine, Morall and Martiall, &c First Charter 1606-1609 464 Marek Tamm red.. m.fl., Tamm Marek sota Press London: Michael Sparkes Sensible Atlantic Hidden History of the Revolutionary and Mary Quarterly Religion. and Government People, Commodities, The Covntrey, red.. Barbour, Genoptrykt i: P. Medieval Baltic Frontier Five Bookes Allen & Unwin Ltd. London: George Smith, J., 1624. 1612. W. Strachey, Rancière, J., 2004. Rancière, M. Rediker, og 2000. Linebaugh, P., Sievers, J., 2006. Drowned Pens and Shaking Hands. Smith, J., 1612. A Map of Virginia. Vvith a Description of the Nielsen, T. K., 2011. Henry of Livonia on Woods and Wilderness. and Wilderness. Livonia on Woods Henry of K., 2011. Nielsen, T. 1625. S., Purchas, Quinn, D.B., 1974. 1999. J., Rancière, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Death or taxes Choosing itineraries between the Persian Gulf and the Mediterranean in the mid-18th century

Eivind Heldaas Seland (born 1975) works as a postdoctoral fellow at the University of Bergen, Norway. His main academic interest is in pre-Islamic trade between the Mediter- ranean and Indian Ocean, but with a strong side in- terest in comparative history and the long-term pat- terns of premodern trade, travel and communication.

Abstract In the 18th century, the fastest passage between Europe and the In- dian Ocean was by way of Syria and Iraq. Travellers were faced with the choice between a number of routes across the desert and along the rivers, each with advantages and disadvantages in terms of price, time and security. This article discusses the choices made by a selection of European mid-18th-century travellers utilising perspec- tives from New institutional economics, arguing that their decisions must be interpreted in light of the their status as outsiders and the socio-economic structure of the societies they moved through. 18th-century travellers in Syria and Iraq As the 18th-century statesman Benjamin Franklin pointed out, “in this world nothing can be said to be certain, except death and taxes” (1833, p. 619). Valid as this observation might be, sometimes there is a choice between the two. Before the start of steam-service in the Red Sea in 1830, the swiftest passage between Europe and India was by way of Syria and Iraq. Ships needed at least six months for the journey around Africa, but couriers, diplomats and individual travellers frequently utilised the shortcut between the Mediterra- nean and the Persian Gulf, following either the large Mesopotami- an rivers or the merchant caravans crossing the Syrian Desert be-

Volume 04 97 ------98

Death or taxes Death (1978), research (1937). Mohamad Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind 04 Orientalism (1929), which also contains an The Syrian Desert Desert Route to India Modern academic interest in these early travellers has been more more been has travellers early these in interest academic Modern age of the “other” both in the sense of 18th-century Middle Eastern Middle 18th-century of sense the in both “other” the of age 1990, pp. 292-3) and in the sense of the histori society (Murphey, landscape cal of the distant Oriental past (Ooghe, 2007; Sancisi- however, argues, Murphey As 1991). Drijvers, and Weerdenburg although most pre-industrial European travellers in the Middle East were clearly biased, this was before aristocrats had extended their grand tours to the include the Middle East, and before west superiority erners had developed a clear idea of their own perceived Christina Phelps Grant depended heavily on travel descriptions for her published dissertation, and summary of known Ali Hachicho has compiled a catalogue English travel books of the eighteenth which century, also covers works by travellers who went to India by other routes, thus also including the riverine and maritime alternatives to the desert route posi the emphasise all contributions early These 1964). (Hachicho, tivist question of what contribution these early travellers made in collecting and disseminating knowledge about the Middle East in Saids In the wake of Edward Europe. shaping the western im on travellers’ part in turned to focus more experience of a selection of such travellers in light of theory from from light of theory travellers in experience of a selection of such New Institutional Economics. The aim is to better appreciate why the mostalways was not safer itinerary or the cheaper shorter, the among the plurality of routes attractive alternative when choosing the Persian Gulf.between the Mediterranean and coun aristocratic 20th-century early and 19th- their in than limited Car Douglas Lawrence. and Bell Digby, Burton, as such terparts ruthers published three of the travellers’ reports utilised in this article in his travellers and their accounts, and overview of other European tween Aleppo, Baghdad and Basra. While the river-routes offered many nevertheless for the traveller, and infrastructure provisions Reports of the desert. 30 days haul across the strenuous preferred travelogues and letters, which in diaries, preserved their travels are of dif on the advantages and disadvantages contain considerations an opportunity to look provide sources travel options. These ferent for travelling rarely were who people by made decisions the behind for the safety concerns who had to deal with very real and leisure, the – death and taxes. This article approaches of life and property quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------99

Death or taxes Death Beschreibung von von Beschreibung Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind 04 Reisebeschreibung nach nach Reisebeschreibung (1774/1778). His diary con diary His (1774/1778). (1772) and to his published diary, Niebuhr describes four main itineraries (fig. 1): (1) a caravan Niebuhr was a conscientious Although man. he was originally a across Aleppo, the by and across organised desert merchants protected to by Bedouin tribes, (2) an upriver passage to Baghdad followed by caravan to Damascus protected by Ottoman authorities, (3) a jour Aleppo from over to ney on and along the Euphrates, crossing Northern through Tigris the along voyage a (4) and Syria, Northern Iraq and reaching Aleppo Southern by Turkey, way of Mosul and The theBaghdad-Damascus were caravans, he reports, Diyarbakır. sentations could be found. member of the subordinate expedition and although Mesopotamia was not its the main information objective, he recorded carefully report, expedition official the to lead would that Arabien Arabien und andern umliegenden Ländern tains not only information on his own travels, but any information he thought could be of use to European travellers following in his the and Gulf Persian the between routes the on including footsteps, Mediterranean. aimed to, but to better understand the problems and priorities of advice in writing. the travellers who put down their Difficult decisions In late 1765, 32-year old Carsten Niebuhr found himself in Basra the sole survivor of the Danish in southern Mesopotamia. He was almost out set had which Arabia, Southern to expedition scientific five years After earlier. making hisway from India, up the Per sian Gulf and through Iran. Niebuhr now had to decide how to cover the next leg of which his was journey, a ca 1400 km haul repre European Aleppo, where and Syria to Mesopotamia across towards other groups. Western travellers in the region were gener were in the region travellers Western other groups. towards moving soldiers and artisans, men, mostly merchants, practical ally landscapes. cases hostile and dangerous what was in many through Their decisions could ultimately become matters of survival, and back cultural their by influenced certainly although writings, their this in a generally practical, fact-oriented and open- reflect ground, 1990). minded The approach (Murphey, practical vein in 18th-cen tury travel literature can be utilised, not in order to thereconstruct Middle Eastern society of the period, as most pre-Said scholarship quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - cara 100

Death or taxes Death Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind 04 was honest and providing that was honest and providing caravanbashi caravan leader, was auctioned by the Ottoman author Ottoman the by auctioned was leader, caravan had deliberately arranged the plundering of their own Carsten Niebuhr was one of the few western travellers who Crossing the desert The desert route between northwestern Syria and Southern Meso in terms of distance, but as the shortest route potamia was perhaps Niebuhr’s advice implies, it was not necessarily the easiest. Desert provisions most bring to and animals with arrange to had travellers directions they and dependedfor water, For a safety, long journey. on cooperation with the nomadic Bedouin population, whose terri were considerations That such through. passed tory the caravans could live up to most of these personal requirements to individuals requirements could live up to most of these personal in sojourn His route. desert the of way by passage safe a for opting Egypt and had his made journeys him in Yemen familiar with the taken up local diet and clothing.language, and he had gradually For outside his control. As for the political conditions, they were reasons of safety he settled for the Tigris route (1778, p. 334), and spent six months Aleppo, underway albeit to with extended stops pas a on Diyarbakır, and Mardin Mosul, Baghdad, as such cities in sage he could have covered in 25-50 days if times had been more stable and he had been lucky enough to catch a caravan. among them, as he several times mentions Bedouin raids along theamong them, as he several times river (1778, pp. 243-5). He would have preferred the desert route, because it was but faster, no caravan was due to leave for Aleppo Persian the in conflict political by disrupted been has trade because as safe, quite as route desert the describes He 235-6). pp. (1778, Gulf long as there was no war among the Arab tribes or between them and the Ottomans, the and was used to living according the traveller spoke the language to local customs, but as he comments himself, these circumstances (1778, p. 237). coincided rarely most expensive and least safe option. This was because the role of caravanbashi, alsoinvestment; his good make to had bidder highest the and ities, than cooperation with rather guards on hired these caravans relied the Bedouin tribes and thus had to pay more protection money. where incidents several been had there claimed, he Moreover, vanbashis caravans (1778, p. for 238). notNiebuhr his does reasons not reveal continuing along the Euphrates, but security seems to have been quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------) used 101 kellek

Death or taxes Death Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind 04 One of the most thorough descriptions of the desert passage waspassage desert the of descriptions thorough most the of One While Niebuhr never attempted the desert crossing, others did. others crossing, desert the attempted never Niebuhr While so in this case the desert was not necessarily the fastest alternative.fastest the not necessarily was desert the this case in so used, frequently Niebuhr’smost the as describes he route northern but he dismisses it in his own case, because he found the detour to Mosul too long, and because the rafts of inflated skins ( downriver on the had Tigris a reputation for accidents (Beawes, 1929, p. 5). The passage along the Euphrates, which was not explic itly Beawes considered by deemed Niebuhr, the easiest and most authori local by probably impositions, to exposed but comfortable, at firstconnected with the founding of the Levant Company and later in the employment of the East India Company appear from trav German and Dutch Italian, xix-xxx). pp. (1929, onwards 1580 also attested (1929, pp. xvi-xxx). ellers are trav Englishman unknown otherwise an Beawes, William by made elling by this route on his way to India in 1745. with Together his travel-companion, he Robert approached Golightly, the English for advice on and local travelling merchants Aleppo community in the routes. different Going in the opposite direction from Niebuhr, rafts, or boats on passage downriver swift of option the had also he thers, 1929; Grant, 1937). In antiquity, the desert route seems to have to seems route desert the antiquity, In 1937). Grant, 1929; thers, been created by political tension between the Parthian and Roman empires and political fragmentation in the Euphrates valley (Gaw likowski, 1994, p. 27; Gawlikowski, 1996, p. 139; 1998, Millar, pp. 126-7). Related factors seem to have played a role in the Ottoman period: the extortion of local and government officials, and the Bedouin raids in the desert as well as along the rivers. of threat Portuguese couriers started using both the Euphrates and desert six the in India and Lisbon between despatches urgent for routes teenth century (Carruthers, 1929, pp. xvi-xvii). English travellers, important is best illustrated by the fact that from the Bronze Age toAge Bronze the from that fact the by illustrated best is important was always the Valley the Euphrates early twentieth century, the and Gulf Persian the between communication of corridor preferred are There 32). p. 1994, Gawlikowski, 1969; (Finet, Mediterranean the two exceptions to this: The first three centuries AD, when trade de the the Euphrates valley towards from seems to have deviated sert city of Palmyra (Gawlikowski, 1994; Gawlikowski, 1996), and the sixteenth through eighteenth centuries, when biannual cara vans crossed the Syrian Desert between Aleppo and Basra (Carru quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 102

Death or taxes Death Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind 04 Bartholomew Plaisted travelled from Basra to Aleppo in 1750. He1750. in Aleppo to Basra from travelled Plaisted Bartholomew Our fourth and last traveller was John Carmichael, who trav main options for travel three between were Summing up, there ties, and also to robbers (1929, pp. 5-6). Beawes also describes an than two more close to the Euphrates, with never overland option two varieties of were and villages. Then there nights outside town to downriver and Euphrates the Hit on either to desert route: the Aleppo to Basra, from directly or there, from Baghdad and Basra the route preferred by Beawes (1929, pp. 6-7). Considerations of and he when important most the been have to seem safety and time opt for the desert option.his travel-companion decided to he planned to complain to where was on his way home to England, of the East India Company after losing his post as engi the directors Plaisted51-52). pp. 1929, (Carruthers, Calcutta in surveyor and neer chose the desert route because he arrived in Basra in late April, when the seasonal flood in the Euphrates caused the passage to Baghdad to take an estimated 40 days (Plaisted, 1929, p. 64), more he was told that a desert caravanthan twice the normal time, while as premature, be to proved however, This, shortly. depart to due was governor, the Turkish from the caravan had to wait for permission and Plaisted was not underway until early June (1929, p. 59, p. 68). cheaper than was faster and desert route He states that the direct to or caravan by Aleppo to there from and Baghdad of way by going Mosul as Niebuhr did, but that the desert traveller risked meeting with robbers or dishonest travel companions, and had to make do food (1929, pp. 102-3). with bad water and without fresh back way his on Plaisted, after year the Basra to Aleppo from elled Com India East the to complaint unsuccessful an after India to does not go into details in London. Carmichael pany’s directors but did, Beawes and Niebuhr way the in routes different the about states that both the Euphrates and routes were the Mosul-Tigris (Carmichael, leisure” and money “having those for options better 1929, p. 177). All the travellers, by the were way, also concerned and they passed underway, remains and ancient with the ruins (1929, Beawes and 103) p. (1929, Plaisted 177), p. (1929, Carmichael p. 6) all mention the possibilities for sightseeing and antiques hunt along the road. ing northern Syria and southern Mesopotamia in the mid 18th centu ry (fig. 1), both with several variations and combinations: quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------103

Death or taxes Death Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind 04 , rafts used for crossing and downri , rafts used for crossing kellek As for the motivation of the travellers, they were concerned with As for the motivation of the travellers, they were 2: Riverine passage on the Euphrates. This is described by Car 3: Riverine passage on (downriver) or along (upriver) the Tigris 1. Desert passages between Aleppo and Baghdad or Basra, alter Beawes (1929, p. 33) and Plaisted (1929, p. 103) both comment Em on region. the in travel to connected expenses low comparably the on avoiding taxation and keeping pro is placed phasis, however, for of the main reasons one tection money at a minimum, probably the operation of the desert route (Carruthers 1929, pp. xxxi-xxxii). also Time seems to have been important. Carmichael and Plaisted complainto order in England voyage to long the undertaken had about conceived injustice experienced in the service of the East In and considered the “common” itinerary by Beawes (1929, p. 5). Its local security and uninterrupted main advantage was its relative for travellers and animals. Both access to water and provisions concerned were about the possibil however, Beawes and Niebuhr, neitherand road, the of stretches certain along robber-attacks of ity had a high opinion of the ver passage (Beawes 1929, pp. 4-5; Niebuhr 1778, p. 348). Comfort, sight and comfort, sights and scenery. time, cost, security, scenery are mentioned, but never given All priority. the travellers discuss costs, although they travelled in relative affluence, and advises travellers from Basra to proceed via Baghdad if they can, in via Baghdad Basra to proceed advises travellers from order to keep the Tigris option open if the waiting time before the next westbound caravan is too long. michael (1929, p. 177) and Beawes (1929, p. 6) as a fast, scenic and comfortable downriver alternative with good access to food and but water, travellers were exposed to impositions by authorities the desert. None of our travellers discuss and Bedouin raids from for the upriver journey. the use of this route Niebuhr, by taken route the was This Aleppo. to overland Mosul, to natively between Damascus and Baghdad (Niebuhr). The direct de direct The (Niebuhr). Baghdad and Damascus between natively sert passage is described by all our travellers as faster and by most oftimes departure on depending but options, other than cheaper as as robbers to exposed and desert the in conditions political caravans, of desert travel. Niebuhr (1778, pp. 238-9) andwell as the hardships Plaisted (1929, p. 103) both report that passage with the caravans expensive than with those leaving from Baghdad was more from Basra, and Niebuhr less (ibid.) safe. deemed Still, this Plaistedroute quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------en 104

Death or taxes Death Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind 04 between Basra and Aleppo, he never lingered longer than he The North American discourse on taxes, which Benjamin Franklin Benjamin which taxes, on discourse American North The was a part of, was concerned with legitimacy and representation. In was a part of, was concerned with legitimacy and representation. the Ottoman Empire his contemporary travellers moved through, no one could have As cared less. Peder Bang points out in his com parative study of premodern empires, the line between taxation, beyond cases many in thin, was predation and money protection discernment (2008, pp. 202-238). Douglass C. North and his col conceptualise this and by difference Weingast leagues divid Wallis economic theory would have explained the choice of routes in in the choice of routes economic theory would have explained terms of transaction costs (cf. North 1990, pp. 27-30). This is the extended an in albeit argument, taxes and death the of part taxes Although difficultsense toof calculate,the theword. rational trav to give the lowest which he perceived eller would choose the route total costs including taxes, transport, sustenance, security costs and misses the death part of the argu however, so on. This approach, not) or lethal (whether violence for opportunity real very the – ment Institu New of field the from insights Here property. of seizure and andidiosyncrasies the behind look us help might Economics tional sources. by our short term considerations preserved siderations of security had This priority. caused Niebuhr to stay the Baghdad caravans and Carmichael and Beawes away from comfortable comparably a to voyage desert strenuous a prefer to paying the same ironically downriver passage on the Euphrates, for river the along robbery of threat a represented who Bedouins in the desert. protection Which way to go? Organisations, protection and predation institutions, anything reveal stories individual of collection this can then How about the of nature early modern trade and travel? Neo-classical dia Company, and naturally had little inclination to linger under had little inclination to and naturally dia Company, are not informed We about Beawes’ business, way. but it is likely that he was also on his way to India. Niebuhr was heading home after a and long although journey, he spent almost six months route had to in order to find a caravan, so that he did not have to travel cara no was there because route Tigris the chose only he and alone, van heading from Basra when he arrived and because he did not con For all travellers, however, Baghdad. the caravans from trust quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------105

Death or taxes Death Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind 04 The most important difference between these eighteenth-century these between difference important most The ing societies into the minority of “open access societies”, such as such societies”, access “open into the minority of ing societies “nat of majority the and America of States United young Franklin’s ural states” or limited access societies, such as the Ottoman Empire traitsAmong the century and many modern states. of the eighteenth form to right the of distribution wide the are societies access open of imper on foundation of social relationships and the organisations states Natural etc. rights property law, of rule as such variables sonal one the other hand are dominated by ruling coalitions restricting person on relationships basing and organisations forming to access al variables such as friendship, kinship ethnicity etc (North, Wallis, 2009, Weingast pp. 11-12). North et al. also state that all societies have to cope with the problem of violence, and that they do this by way of organisations and institutions, organisations being “groups and individual goals”, common of individuals pursuing a mix of interaction that and institutions “the patterns of govern and con strain the relationships of individuals” (2009, p. 15; North 1990, pp. 4-5). In the landscape between Aleppo and Basra in the mid-eight we here, discussed literature travel the in described as century eenth find a number of such organisation, notably the Ottoman govern ment, Bedouin tribes tribes, and Kurdish the These Safavid Empire. in the con specialising competing political organisations all were tainment and use of violence with the aim of raising revenue by taxation and money, protection means of institutions such as gifts, various in revenue for demands the with comply to Failure robbery. and in many cases forms would lead to the withdrawal of protection the containment of violence to the – from the transition to predation actual use of violence. travellers and the nineteenth-century and travel leisure adventure in this emphasis on in the Middle East is perhaps lers and explorers Beawes, Plaisted, security: Carmichael and their many colleagues to, had they because but it, of experience the for travelling not were and although they always acted with imperfect information, they in explorer only the was Niebuhr risk. minimise to tried always also re preliminary and results the but travellers, of selection small this he now and ahead, sent been already had expedition his from ports was going home, and was under no obligation to take risks. As Euro until today, the age of imperialism Murphey points out, from pean travellers in the Middle East by have virtue been ofprotected quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------106

Death or taxes Death Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind 04 , typically a respected and expe , typically a respected for the and whole this journey, is if they preferred to travel in com if they preferred caravanbashi caravanbashi caravanbashis The discussion above is based on the reports of four travellers est, est, while travellers going by way of the would Tigris have to deal with local or Ottoman authorities in a number of places and deal with a number of pany with others, as Niebuhr did. In this way they only had to the protection/violence dealing in interact with one organisation business rather than several. representative, are they because selected been not have They only. ans, to act as interpreters and take care of practicalities. Importantly, Importantly, of practicalities. and take care ans, to act as interpreters by joining caravans, they also joined a sort of organisation, in the under themselves placed they this Doing al. et North by used sense of the the protection (Beawes merchant 1929, rienced p. 13; Plaisted 192, pp. 98-100; waspaid had they Niebuhrfees the for return in who 238), p. 1778, property, and life to harm from them safeguard to obligation under By other organisations. their interaction with of care thus taking did, they could as the British travellers choosing the desert route, single a deal with cheap the considered was route this why reasons the of on probably and as outsiders they lacked the social relationships integrating the relationships and as outsiders they lacked the social an disadvantage thus at and were societies they travelled through, insti local the of means by individuals other with interacting when tutions. The reports of our travellers must be read in this light. In cope with their exposed position, they teamed up with to order and depended on the advise they met underway, other Europeans oflieu in Niebuhr, travellers. seasoned and countrymen resident of of travellers in a Jewish company enrolled company, European (Niebuhr 1778, pp. 334-335), thus joining up with another ofgroup Middle servants, typically from outsiders. The travellers also hired Armeni or Georgians Greeks, such as Eastern Christian minorities their nationality. For the 18th-century European traveller, his status his traveller, European 18th-century the For nationality. their as an outsider and Christian was primarily a problem. European and Empire Ottoman the to superior militarily not still were powers neither capable of nor interested in operating in the Middle East consul Danish the or Aleppo in factory British The 294-7). pp. (1990, could of their hosts, and operated at the mercy in Constantinople do little to help their countrymen if they got into trouble. In the terms of organisations and institutions outlined above, our travel with, deal to they had the organisations from excluded were lers quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------In: 107 27-33. , London: London: 1-206. 56 , Les Annales

9 Death or taxes Death Philadelphia, Iraq, London: The Hak The London: vol. 1, Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind

04 37-48. , The Desert Route to In 19 139-144. , London, A. & C. Black. London, Die Welt des Islams, Die Welt XLII London: Hakluyt Society. , Cambridge: Cambridge University Cambridge Cambridge: , The Desert Route to India being the Jour being India Desert Route to The Austin, M., Harries, J. & Smith, C. (eds.) In: The Desert Route to India. The CARRUTHERS, D. (ed.) Memoirs of Benjamin Franklin The Syrian Desert, In: The Roman Bazaar London: The Hakluyt Society. East in the Eighteenth Century. East in the Eighteenth Century. Annales Archéologiques Arabes Syriennes, Annales Archéologiques Arabes Syriennes, Archeologiques tance trade by land. Rickman. Modus Operandi: Essays in Honor of Geoffrey Univer InstituteAdvanced Study, of Classical Studies, School of sity of London. luyt Society. between Desert Caravan Route by the Great nals of Four Travellers Aleppo and Basra 1745–1751, M’Carty & Davis. Press. April 1745. dia. Carruthers, D. (ed.) Grant, C. P. 1937. Grant, C. P. Hachicho, M. A. 1964. English Books Travel about the Arab near 1998. Caravan cities: the Roman Near East and long dis F. Millar, Carruthers, Carruthers, D. (ed.) 1929. Mesopotamie. la de Commerciale Route L’Euphrate, 1969. A. Finet, Franklin, B. 1833. Centre. Trading a as Palmyra 1994. M. Gawlikowski, Trade. Caravan its and Palmyra 1996. M. Gawlikowski, erations influenced the decisions ofmodern travellers in this early considerations did. part of the world as much as economic References 2008. P. Bang, to Basra in Aleppo Journey from 1929. Narrative of a Beawes, W. Aleppo to Basra in 1751. Journey from A Carmichael, J. 1929. but because they shared their thoughts on the challenges of early This have wider interest. they also this, however, modern travel. In was information deemed useful and important by the people who it and by those and who recorded in read some cases published it, hardships into the practicalities and sometimes thus giving insight glimpsed in the summary itineraries travel rarely of early modern that followed. In travelogues periods or the romantic of preceding possibilitythe on also but (taxes), costs on only not emphasis their of violence (death), they highlight how social and political consid quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

- - - - 108

Death or taxes Death 291-303. , . Leiden, Eisen Violence and Social Violence Through Travellers’ Travellers’ Through Journal of the Royal of Journal 110 Volume Eivind Heldaas Seland Heldaas Eivind 04 . 17 (3), 231-252. The Desert Route to India. rijvers 1991. rijvers D Institutions, Institutional Change and Economic Change and Economic Institutions, Institutional Carruthers, D. (ed.) , vol. 2, Kopenhagen, Nicolaus Möller. , vol. 2, Kopenhagen, Reisebeschreibung nach Arabien und andern nach Arabien umlie Reisebeschreibung In: . Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. Cambridge, Cambridge University Journal of the American Oriental Society, Journal of the American History, History, on Lower Mesopota lers and the Development of Knowledge Nineteenth Century. Sixteenth to Early mia, Britain & Ireland Asiatic Society of Great April 1750. London: The Hakluyt Society. travellers on the Iranian monuments Eyes. European brauns. of Pre-Colonial English and on European the Writing Middle East. genden Ländern Performance Recorded Human Framework for Interpreting Conceptual Orders. A ancisi-Weerdenburg, H and J.W. J.W. and H ancisi-Weerdenburg, S Ooghe, B. 2007. The Rediscovery of Babylonia: European Travel in Aleppo to Basra from Journey a of Narrative 1929. B. Plaisted, Murphey, R. 1990. Bigots or Informed Observers? A Periodization Periodization A Observers? Informed or Bigots 1990. R. Murphey, C. 1778. Niebuhr, North, D.C. 1990. 2009. and B.R. Weingast. North, D.C, J.J. Wallis quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

The Parthians between Rome and China Gan Ying’s mission into the West (1st century AD)

Leonardo Gregoratti, PhD, is Post-Doc fellow at the University of Udine. In 2010 he was DAAD fellow at the University of Kiel, Germany in order to work on the publication of his PhD thesis : Between Rome and Ctesiphon, Roy- al authority and peripheral powers along the trade routes of the Parthian kingdom. Most of his work concerns the Roman Near East, Palmyra, the long distance Trade and the Parthian Kingdom.

Abstract Following the expansion westwards of the Chinese Han Empire at the end of the 1st century AD the Parthian kingdom entered Chi- na’s political horizon. Gan Ying, a Chinese envoy was at the head of a diplomatic mission charged with establishing direct contacts and business relationships with the Roman Empire, the final destination for most of the goods they were exporting to the West. Gan Ying was able to reach Arsacid-controlled south Mesopotamia. Although very close to the Roman territory he did not manage to go further and accomplish his task. The Parthian leaders, well aware of the commercial role they played between Rome and China, dissuaded him from trying to proceed. This largely unknown but extremely interesting episode in the ancient history of Asia provides direct evidence concerning the political and commercial role of Parthia, Rome’s fierce enemy, in central Asia and along the Silk Route.

At the beginning of the 1940s the sinologist Homer H. Dubs specu- lated on the possibility that the small unit of one hundred men in “fish scale” formation which, according to Chinese sources was crushed by the Han cavalry at the Talas River battle in eastern Ka- zakhstan (36 BC), may have been formed by Roman legionaries cap-

Volume 04 109

, ------2 110 . 4 Xiongnu . 3

Leonardo Gregoratti Leonardo county, north-west county, Volume 04 several years before (53 before years several Yongchang Yongchang , , these soldiers crossed the Eu crossed , these soldiers The Parthians between Rome and China Rome and between The Parthians Dubs battle of Carrhae of battle Liqian village during the According According to . 1 and used as mercenaries by Zhizhi, a chieftain of the It is thus much more understandable the interest aroused by the Despite the fact that that hypothesis was soon considered as mere was soon considered Despite the fact that that hypothesis of the eagle and that of the dragon Rome and China, the Empire possibility of contact among and those interchange political giants, and Far two cornerstones of historical experience in the West the the concerning sources western by provided information The East. the from importation of silk and other goods to the Roman Empire East prove that indirect trade contacts undoubtedly took place. that network of routes exchanged among traders along Goods were active along this The merchants later known as the “Silk Road”. de a along goods transporting for responsible normally were route the “Empires” par excellence in the modern minds of Westerners in the modern minds of Westerners par excellence “Empires” the They and Asians were the respectively. first states able to unify all the different local subjects in one stable political structure, deeply influencing the culture and civilization in those two parts different alive remained has state of model their reason this For world. the of over the centuries in both Europe and Asia as a source of inspira to tried which and succeeded which subjects political the all for tion their historical heritage. themselves as legitimate heirs of present still today incarnate and the Celestial Empire The Roman Empire state structure and historical model for every the archetype Chinese and moved to China. his and culture Chinese that interest general the with conjectural, ly tory aroused in recent years in Europe, Dubs’ idea has also found new supporters. In the ern China, where the inhabitants “Roman claim Roman ancestry, Re Tourism. of Office local the by regularly organized are Festivals” up this fascinating idea using itcently some modern writers picked setting for some quite successful novels as a background two main states of the ancient world. They still constitute the were tured by Parthians by tured BC) barbarians phrates of the Roman domains following marking the edge frontier the in prisoners Taken BC). (54 Parthia conquer to attempt Crassus’ Arsacid town Asian to the central sent they were disaster at Carrhae as of stated Merv by (in nowadays Pliny eastern Turkmenistan), and employed as mercenaries by local tribes. Finding themselves again on the defeated they side were later at by recruited Talas the quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - of 111 century Mu-lu rd

, was the fun 7 Leonardo Gregoratti Leonardo Volume 04 in the Chinese sources) was sources) Chinese the in 6 . 5 century BC). The Arsacid rule rule Arsacid The BC). century nd Anxi The Parthians between Rome and China Rome and between The Parthians . 8 Since then for more than three centuries Rome’s expansionist expansionist centuries Rome’s than three Since then for more a rich and populated metropolis The city of Selucia on the Tigris, In Merv, the Silk Route, leaving the Arsacid domains, forked into the Silk Route, leaving the In Merv, The kingdom of the Parthians ( plateau. Past them, beyond the extreme foothills of Arsacid the territory, lay the boundless Asian steppes. Heading north the road the Merv, and Nisa Rhagai, Ekbatana, toward proceeded Chinese sources two distinct branches, to the north and south of the Taklamakun near the desert they remerged Having crossed desert respectively. Altaj the Mountains and thereby entered the territory controlled by Gulf and the Indian Ocean to the south and the Caspian Sea and the and Sea Caspian the and south the to Ocean Indian the and Gulf Caucasus to the north. the by opposed fiercely were East the in and Mesopotamia in goals Parthians. Arsacid kingdom of the close to the most vital centres andmen of of movements point in the sphere damental reference Ro and Asia central provinces, Parthian Eastern the between goods headed north the route the Hellenistic metropolis, man Syria. From wards to the ancient Parthian capitals of the Northern Iranian BC), BC), in central Asia, close to the remotest borders of the Seleucid Empire. Its monarchs were members of the Arsacid dynasty and were able to gain the best advantages from the weakening of the huge and the consequent disintegration of that house of Seleucos over large their control to spread Hellenistic state. They managed territories of Southern Asia. The Parthian mounted armies, after overrunning the whole Iranian plateau, Babylonia and Mesopota western mia, stopped on the eastern bank of the Euphrates river, Arsacid limit expansion of (2 the stretched from the Euphrates to north-western India, including Persianthe between lying territories the all and Iran Mesopotamia, termined portion of Usually the they itinerary. were supported by the political subjects lying on the routes traffic which considered and East between trade distance long the from goods of taxation the of income source an important West The most important and powerful of these political subjects lying connecting Roman territories on the route in a strategic position with China was the Parthian Empire 3 Alexander’sthe (in death after decades few a established quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - in . The 11 112

Hsiung-nu Leonardo Gregoratti Leonardo Volume 04 The Parthians between Rome and China Rome and between The Parthians . . His narration was later collected in . His narration was later collected in 12 13 . Very . likely Very the merchants, subjects of the 9 . As . is easily understandable, in it was necessary, 10 But Ban Zhao’s plans were even more ambitious. Around 97 AD, 97 Around ambitious. more even were plans Zhao’s Ban But With the campaigns to the West and the ensuing extension of the and the ensuing extension the campaigns to the West With Of course many merchants were active along those trade routes na and the Parthian Empire Ban Zhao placed an important dignitary named Gan at Ying the head of a diplomatic mission charged to do all that was possible to establish contacts and business relationships with that realm which the Chinese knew well to be the final destination for most Da of Kingdom the - West the to exporting were they goods the of Quin: the Roman Empire frontier of the Han state, operated by the Chinese General Ban Zhao Ban General Chinese the by operated state, Han the of frontier (between 91 and 101 AD) and by his son Ban the Yong, Parthian of the Celestial Empire the political scene entered Kingdom along the Asian leader was to extend Chinese control goal of the Central-Asian commercial routes in order to preserve their effi ciency and impede the nomadic tribes (like the Huns, by West the with connections the interrupting from sources) Chinese which Chinese silk the reached Parthian or border the Indian ports. After some major military campaigns the Chinese were able to reo Chi between land by contact direct a restore and Route Silk the pen and some of them provided information about the remote lands andannalists Chinese the as well as Roman the which visited, they geographers needed for their works. One of the most valuable by provided account the is unknown, largely being despite sources It a concerns Chinese the envoy. travel undertaken by an official Chinese diplomatic mission which was able to reach regions no Chinese diplomat had been able to visit before. The report consti tutes one of the few first hand evidences from a traveller along the Silk Route and sheds light on the fundamental role played by the communications for obstacle political insuperable an as Parthians between the two Empires. the Authority Chinese Turke Eastern from transport the for responsible were King, Great stan to Seleucia of such activity and the massive the continuation to ensure order profits for the Arsacid administration, to impede anyrelationship avoid and Rome, and China partners, trading main two the between a trade agreement between the two Empires, which would exclude trade. the long-distance caravan from the Parthian merchants quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------some 113 . , the Ar 15 22

(the Arsacid (the , the official Anxi Leonardo Gregoratti Leonardo , a political situa 17 Volume 04 Naturalis Historia Naturalis Hou Hanshou , which most modern scholars most which , . 19 states: «Later on, The Parthians between Rome and China Rome and between The Parthians Tiaozhi . . 14 20 . As the Chinese seemed to know well know to seemed Chinese the As . 21 Hou Hanshou . Anxi . In antiquity that land was known as being the seat seat the being as known was land that antiquity In . 17 16 From the dates reported by Ban Zhao’s envoy it is possible to con to possible is it envoy Zhao’s Ban by reported dates the From According According to report it Gan Ying’s seems that in those years the Gan seems Ying to record a precise political situation. The Ar Gan Ying states that the westernmost place his mission was able was mission his place westernmost the that states Ying Gan and topographic characteris The exposition of the anthropic tion also reported in the earlier Chinese historical descriptions in the earlier Chinese historical descriptions tion also reported of the region enforced. been had country the over control King’s Great Parthian passage in the A sentative in the area. Given the goals of Gan Ying’s mission it would it mission Ying’s Gan of goals the Given area. the in sentative predictably have been unfruitful, in search of collaboration, to turn fulcrum the Ctesiphon, in class Arsacid ruling the of members the to of State the of the between contact facilitated have never would leadership sacid world, one the pro powers of the known economic two greatest of most of the goods that trav purchaser, the other the main ducer, Arsacid territory. elled across sacids seem to have militarily occupied the entire area, transform area, the entire sacids seem to have militarily occupied ing Mesene into a Parthian Satrapy and nominating an Army of ficial asresponsible for the points of major economic interest: the cities and river harbours clude that the gap of monetary emissions of the independent king dom Characene that took place in those years was due to a military or even political occupation of the client potentate. Characene har authority the and harbours Arsacid become period that in had bours that regulated and controlled the commercial traffic and transac King or on his military repre on the Great tions depended directly years earlier years vassal kingdom of Characene Arsacid of the kingdom) conquered, and subjugated Tiaozhi (Characene). They to supervise all the there have, in fact, installed a Senior General J.E. Hill) small towns» (Transl. the more general historical work, the general historical the more Hans annals of the Later of the country was to reach ar Gulf, Persian the of shores northern the on Mesene, as identify subcontinent the Indian from sea routes rival point of the tics of the region provided by Gan Ying shares some elements with the description of Mesene in Pliny’s quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------114

Leonardo Gregoratti Leonardo Volume 04 The Parthians between Rome and China Rome and between The Parthians . 23 He reached Tiaozhi next to a large sea. He wanted to cross He wanted to cross sea. next to a large Tiaozhi He reached it, but the sailors of the western Anxi frontier of (Parthia) said to him: “The ocean is huge. Those making the round In fact, the report of Gan Ying continues: Ying of Gan In fact, the report In the occupied lower-Mesopotamia it is In likely the that occupied the lower-Mesopotamia officials It is easy to comprehend how it would have seemed more rea more seemed have would it how comprehend to is easy It For the Great King it was vital, not only that the two states not be not states two the that only not vital, was it King Great the For the relationships between the the – relationships the two by dip Empires preventing the possessed nonetheless he but – territory his crossing from lomats fail. their mission to means for causing, discreetly, Ying Ying and his explorative mission, upon their arrival in Mesene, had who troops King’s Great the by occupied been had region the apogee and to a phase of wide put an end to the Characene trade political autonomy. was in contact were with whom the Chinese mission and merchants informa provide to trained properly men or agents governmental tion and answers in line with Arsacid interest. The Great King Pa corus II ()?, perhaps the most attentive of all the monarchs to the economic revival of his kingdom, anxious to re-establish fruitful risk the degeneration of could not contacts with the Celestial Empire them of their role as mediators and of the high earnings related to as mediators and of the high earnings related them of their role Arsacid the and costs, purchase and sale the between difference the crown of the substantial revenue derived from the taxation of the transported goods to gain collabo sonable, to Ban Zhao and his entourage, in order turning to mer the Roman territory, ration in the attempt to reach who classes of a Kingdom, that of Characene, chants and ruling open considerable a demonstrated had years previous the during economic initiatives, as well as a conspicu foreign towards ness Unfortunately for Gan Arsacid directives. ous independence from able to entertain reciprocal diplomatic relationships, but it was ex merchants the that possible, as much as avoid, to important tremely meet. If that had happened should the two Empires coming from the tangible risk would have remained, in the light of the impres would states two the which means inexhaustible and resources sive the between collaboration direct a and agreement an that had, have merchants Parthian the excluded have would Chinese and Romans from the long-distance trade between East and depriving West, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 115

Leonardo Gregoratti Leonardo Volume 04 . century BC during the era of Em 24 nd The Parthians between Rome and China Rome and between The Parthians . 25 trip can do it months in if favourable.three the winds are you, it can if you encounter winds that delay However, take two years. That is why all the men who go by sea to men urges ocean vast The years. three for take stores of and get homesick, and some think of their country, J.E. Hill) them die (Transl. Deterred Deterred from continuing by such nefarious news, Gan Ying Recent historical research has been Recent able historical to research substantially improve Modern scholars dealing with the Parthian state managed to Therefore, the informants exploited to their advantage the absolutethe advantage their to exploited informants the Therefore, ignorance of the maritime routes to Roman Egypt, about which Gan was Ying asking, deliberately multiplying the days necessary Chinese of the not to inform the and making sure for the crossing, Euphrates the following simply by - land via reaching of possibility - of Syria. the Roman province with the nearby border what had hap to his homeland and report to return resolved pened. After pened. the failed attempt of Ban Zhao, the Chinese leader already Parthians the with agreements the renew to decided ship 2 the of end the at established our knowledge of the Parthian Empire. The contribution of Chinese of contribution The Empire. Parthian the of knowledge our sources in general and Gan Ying’s report in particular has been relevant. It seems evident that the Parthian leadership conceived a well-defined policy concerning the long distance trade thorough me of its role Asia, a policy which aimed at strengthening central diation between Rome and China. kingdom Arsacid and the policy of the shed light on the structure sources. western by provided description stereotyped the beyond thus gradually emerging of ancient history is the shadows From another powerful Empire lying between the Roman and Chinese antagonist trade cunning a and former the to enemy bitter a ones: for the latter. peror Wu (145-87 BC), accepting the proposal that the Great King King Great the that proposal the accepting BC), (145-87 Wu peror had presented during the ambassadorship in 87 AD. seal To the renewed business Pacorus harmony, II, remembered in Chinese sources with the name of Manju - Mesene sent the from birds a and lions were series which among of ruler, Chines gifts to the AD) marshes (101 quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

- - - - 116 , (2005) Chaumont Chaumont

and Gardiner Gardiner and , XV, 44; XXXIV, 44; XXXIV, , XV, , written between Hack, Jacobs and Leonardo Gregoratti Leonardo Volume 04 ., VI, 122; Paus., I, 6. 3. 6. I, Paus., 122; VI, ., Nat. Hist. , c. 88. 2918; Empire of Dragons Empire 1907, 177-178; Grosso 1966,

Nat. Hist Nat. 1907, 149-151; Leslie

Loewe 1971. (2007), about the journey of a Roman

Hou Hanschou The Parthians between Rome and China Rome and between The Parthians

., 32; Plin., 32; ., The Annal of the Later Hans , VI, 54-55; ; Chavannes Crass ., c. 7-14; 2001. The merchants met in a place called “Stone 2001. The merchants

177-178; Posch 1998, 361. , VI, 125; 136. , VI, 47. Nat. Hist. , c. 88. 2918; 1906, 216-245; Chavannes 1906, 214

1907, , ,

2004, 153-154. The Parthian Interpreter Mans. Parth 2010. http://americanhistory.si.edu/collections/numismatics/par Nat. Hist. Nat. Hist. 282-284. Hou Hanschou mainly imperial of AD utilising as sources the 4th and the 5th century ficer’s reports from the previousChavannes periods of the dynasty. Han 1984, Chavannes ; Walser 1985. 1973 ; Walser Choisnel, 2004, 63-65. Parthia imported slaves, raw silk, steel, Plin., high esteemed the horses of Media, Among the exportations were 145. in China where they were called “celestial horses”. Haussig 1992, 126- 130; J. Wiesehöfer, Plin., Tower”, Chavannes 16; Choisnel 2004, 147-149, 152-153. 1993, 157-161; Wolski 1966, 163-167. Chavannes, 1906, 228-233; Grosso Choisnel Isidor. Isidor. Plin., Starting a quite successful tradition of comparative historical studies: Starting a quite successful Roberts, 2003; Edwards, 2005; Hui, 2008; Mittag, Mutschler, 2008; Scheidel, 2009. thia/frames/pamaec.htm In general on the history of the Parthian Kingdom: Debevoise 1938; Schippmann 1980; Bivar 1983; Dabrowa 1983; Frye 1984; Wolski 1993; Wiesehöfer 1994. On the sources the recent Weber, Plut., 5; 2. XVI, Strab., Dubbs, 1941; Dubbs, 1942; Dubbs 1957. Dubbs, 1941; Dubbs, Plin., Massimo Manfredi’s For example Valerio by the Valerian with Emperor along captured soldier about a Roman Persians and his journey to China after he escapes and Michael E. An derson’s, Au Marcus of reign the during China to slave Parthian his and senator relius.

14 15 9 10 11 12 13 8 16 4 5 Map: 6 7 Notes 1 2 3 quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , - - - - , 50, , 50, 117 . Syria T’oung pao

Grosso Grosso 1966, ; facteurs qui la con la qui facteurs , Paris Leonardo Gregoratti Leonardo Volume 04 S. av. J.-C.), av. S. er -I e 176-177; Grosso 1966, 167- 1907, 177-178

1907,

The Parthians between Rome and China Rome and between The Parthians Chavannes The king of this country [DaQuin = Roman is a dynastic chronicle written in the 1st cen written is a dynastic chronicle Chavannes , Cambridge, III, 1, pp. 21-99 politique de l’état parthe à l’égard de Rome – d’Ar Shiji . , 8, pp. 149-234 Les Parthes et la route de la soie Les Parthes et la route The Cambridge History of Iran, The Seleucid, Parthian 3163; 1907. Les Pays d’Occident d’après le Heou Han , cap. 88. 2918; , c. 88. 2918. , c. 88. 2919: «

, and Gardiner 1984, 268-270; Posch 1998, 357-359; Tao 2007, Tao 357-359; 1998, Posch 268-270; 1984, Gardiner and , c. 4. 168 , 6, pp. 47-68 T’oung pao and Gardiner 1984, 287-288. and Gardiner Leslie , cap. 123. Orientaux (Pan Tch’ao (32-102 p.C.); – son fils Pan Yong; – Leang – Yong; Pan fils son – p.C.); (32-102 Tch’ao (Pan Orientaux chou), Han Heou du LXXVII Chapitre p.C.). (112 K’in 7, pp. 210-269 chou, les et è.) n. de 79 ca – 11 (ca I Vologèse à II taban Parthica E., Yarshater and Sasanian Periods (III Arsacides premiers des résidences 1973, pp. 197-222 169; Tao 2007, 99-101. 169; Tao Hanschou torians mixing them with new accounts. torians mixing them with new accounts. Hou Hanschou (Parthia), Anxi but Han, the to envoys send to wanted always Empire] wishing to control the trade in multi-coloured Chinese silks, blocked [to China]» [the Romans] getting through to prevent the route Alram, 2004, 55. Hanschou Hou Concerning Characene remain fundamental : Nodelmann 1960 Concerning and Characene remain Schuol 2000. Shiji tury BC by Sima Qian; 169; 88-92. Hou Hanschou careful really be must scholar the sources Chinese the with Dealing since later writers used to information re-elaborate given by early his References Coins, in reflected as Road Silk the of History The 2004. M., Alram, in: Arsacids, the under Iran of History Political The 1983. D.A., Bivar, Chaumont, M.-L., 1973. Études d’histoire parthe II. Capitales et 25 Chavannes, E. Chavannes, Choisnel, E., 2004, La 1983. E., Dąbrowa, Chavannes, E., 1906. Trois Généraux Chinois de la dynastie des Han des dynastie la de Chinois Généraux Trois 1906. E., Chavannes, 21 Leslie 22 23 24 17 18 19 20 quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - -

118 Berytus, Pacific Eco-

. Chicago Leonardo Gregoratti Leonardo , The China Society, , The China Society, Volume 04 42, pp. 322-30.

Quellen zur Geschichte des Quellen zur Geschichte des ,

, LXVIII, pp. 254-308 , Franz Steiner Verlag, Stutt- , Franz Steiner Verlag, - West Knowledge of Chinese , Sutton Publishing: Stroud Conceiving the Empire: China and Conceiving the Empire:

: Aspects of World Trade in the Trade Aspects of World :

and the Balance of Power: China’s 1982. The Parthians between Rome and China Rome and between The Parthians 36, pp. 64-80.

, : Oxford University Press Oxford Die Geschichte Zentralasiens und der Seidens

, Federalism

Cambridge University Press: New York New Cambridge University Press: Rome and China: comparative perspectives comparative on an- and China: Rome : Oxford University Press Oxford

, , 14, 1, pp. 1-21 A Roman City in Ancient China A A Military Contact Between Chinese and Romans Contact Between Chinese Military A

An Ancient Military Contact Between Romans and Between Romans Ancient Military Contact An , War and State Formation in Ancient China and Early Ancient China in and State Formation War

T’oung Pao

American Journal of Philology American Journal

and Gardiner K.H.J., Gardiner and The complete history of China

., 2003. The Fall of the Roman and Chinese Empires Com ., 2003. The Fall of the Roman and Chinese Empires Das Partherreich und seine Zeugnisse, Beiträge des internationalen Das Partherreich D.D. , trasse in vorislamischer Zeit, Darmstadt Atti del Convegno sul tema: La Persia e il del Convegno sul tema: Atti in le fonti cinesi, verso Accademia , aprile 1965) Nazio 11-14 (Roma mondo greco-romano nale dei Lincei, Roma, pp. 157-176 cient world empires Rome Compared fer Colloquiums. Eutin (27.-30. Juni 1996) gart, pp. 355-364 , Uniwersytet Jagiellonski, Rozprawy Habilitacyjne Rozprawy Jagiellonski, Uniwersytet ditionnaient, 74. Kraków pared, first seven Centuries of the Christian Era, JRAS, pp. 167-169 Han and Tang Dynasties and the Roman Empire. Dynasties and the Han and Tang Chinese. in 36 B.C., Modern Europe nomic Review . Göttingen Partherreiches London ern Asia during the Han, T’oung pao ern 13, pp. 83-121 Roberts, J Roberts, A Political History of Parthia 1938. A Debevoise, N.C. 1941. H., Dubbs, Haussig, H.W., 1992. Haussig, H.W., Scheidel, W., 2009. W., Scheidel, Hui, V.T., 2005. Hui, V.T., Loewe, M., 1971. Spices and Silk eds., 2008, F., A., Mutschler, Mittag, Edwards, Edwards, R.A., 2009. III, 7. München , HAW Frye, R.N., 1984. The History of Ancient Iran 1966. Roma e i Parti a attra fine I inizioF., Grosso, II secolo d. Cr. Hackl, D., U., 2010. Jacobs, B., Weber, Dubbs, H., 1942. 1957. H., Dubbs, Leslie Nodelman, S.A., 1960. A preliminary History of Characene, of History preliminary A 1960. S.A., Nodelman, Wiesehö J. in Parthern, den zu Quellen Chinesische 1998. W., Posch, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

, - - - 119 Die Seiden

, Darmstadt, , Darmstadt, the Parthians,the Franz Steiner

Leonardo Gregoratti Leonardo Volume 04 The Age of Age The , Acta Iranica 32, Leuven, 1993 Acta Iranica , Oriens et Occidens 1, Occidens et Oriens The Parthians between Rome and China Rome and between The Parthians Das antike Persien. Von 550 v. Chr. bis 650 n. Chr. 650 bis Chr. 550 v. Das antike Persien. Von Die Charakene, Ein mesopotamisches Königreich in mesopotamisches Königreich Die Charakene, Ein Grundzüge der parthischen Geschichte Grundzüge der parthischen , vol. II, I.B. Tauris, London- New York, pp. 87-104 pp. York, New London- Tauris, I.B. II, vol. , L’Empire des Arsacides L’Empire 2001. Griechen, Iraner und Chinesen an der Seiden 2001. Griechen, Iraner und Chinesen

, 18, 1985, pp. 145-156 in U. J. Hübner, Kamlah und L. Reinfandt,

, Asien und Afrika 3, Hamburg Asien und , 1980 hellenistisch-parthischer Zeit, Stuttgart Verlag, Stewart, S. and Curtis V.S. in Records, The Idea of Iran AMI N.F. München, Zürich, 1994 straße, straße. Handel und Kulturaustausch in einem eurasiatischen Wege netz Wiesehöfer, J., 1994. J., Wiesehöfer, J., Wiesehöfer, J., 1993. Wolski, Schippmann, K., Schippmann, K., Schuol, M., 2000. Historical the of Re-examination a China: and Parthia 2007, W., Tao, Iran Charax durch von Isidorus G., 1985. Die Route des Walser, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk quarter

academic

Aalborg Universitet kvarter akademisktidsskrift for humanistisk forskning

Literary journeys/ Journeys in literature, film and theatre akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey to The Land of Mist

Jørgen Riber Christensen associate professor at the Institute of Communica- tion, Aalborg University. Among his publications are Medietid 2.0 (2009) with Jane Kristensen and Marvellous Fantasy (ed., 2009), and articles with- in the fields of cultural analysis, the media, market- ing, museology and literature. Editor of Academic Quarter.

Arthur Conan Doyle employed the quest narrative structure in his Professor Challenger novels and short stories. The themes that were embodied in the journey form were imperialism, positivist science, the male role, evolution, degeneration and atavism. How- ever, in the last of this cycle, The Land of Mist (1926) the Victorian quest romance does not go to a lost, prehistoric world in the Ama- zonas. It takes on a surprising form as now the journey is to the realm of the dead. This destination can be regarded as a result of Doyle’s deep interest in spiritualism, but the article will seek to ex- plain this in the context of its contemporary epistemology. It is the hypothesis of the article that doubts and problems of faith, both religious and ideological, could not be answered in any other way than by converting the narratological device of the quest journey into a statement of faith. Yet the positivist and imperialist metaphor of the journey of exploration imploded into morbidity and domes- tication as a result of the transformation, which sought to reconcile positivist science with the existence of the supernatural or paranor- mal of the spirit world. The double world-view and its narratologi- cal consequences will be explained by the article through its use of Michel Foucault’s concept of the episteme.

Volume 04 121

------. In. 122

The Poison Belt The Poison The Poison Belt The Volume 04 (Doyle, 1926), and he and 1926), (Doyle, Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen (1912), taking place many years later The Lost World (1926), and two short stories: “The Dis The Land of Mist establishes the ensemble. There is a journalist, a is There ensemble. the establishes The History of Spiritualism Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur The Land of Mist The Lost World to be only a coma. In coma. a only be to journalist The deceased. now Challenger’sare and wife Summerlee Challenger’swith together Malone re making is Enid daughter be They spiritualism. about series article newspaper a for search com can spirits that and afterlife an is there that convinced come inspirit a witness they Roxton Lord With living. the with municate like with meet they and séances, in part take they house, haunted a as exposed are who frauds, with also but mediums, honest and able known part of the Amazonas to prove the existence of prehistoric prehistoric of existence the prove to Amazonas the of part known dinosaurs, and they manage to bring back a living andpterodactyl in reappear characters The London. to diamonds Challenger warns the others that the Earth is this novel professor and with ether, a cosmic cloud of poisonous going to pass through Challenger’sbut wife, Professor with together they oxygen of tanks in his home. room in a sealed without his servants, take refuge the end of civilization the panorama window they witness Through they survive the and the extinction of mankind. Nearly suffocated ordeal, and after 28 hours the people who have not been killed by runaway machines and fires start to wake up from what appeared that the third group of his writings, the Challenger novels gains novels gains of his writings, the Challenger group that the third significance, in the ownright as entertaining works of fiction, but primarily they can be regarded as documents of the epistemology conceived and writ they were and ontology of the period in which novels: three are ten. There (1913) and integration Machine” (1928) and “When the Screamed” World (1929). and Summerlee, and Challenger professors, Malone, two Edward of men is John Roxton. This group Lord an aristocratic adventurer, to go on an expedition to an un challenged for various reasons The Challenger novels The Challenger falls into distinct phases career Arthur Conan Doyle’s writing Sir sur Holmes novels and cases have His Sherlock and groupings. are historical novels and romances his many vived him, whereas he the last part of his life, however, During unknown today. largely For in and money to the cause of spiritualism. devoted much time published he stance Australia and the U.S.A. Britain, went on several lecturing tours in context this in is It afterlife. spiritual a in belief the of advocate an as quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------123

Volume 04 Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen is about Darwinism and sur The Lost World Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur Thematically the fiveChallenger texts deal withresponses to gendered one about the male role. Edward Malone joins the evolu the joins Malone Edward role. male the about one gendered man his prove to order in Amazonas the to quest scientific tionary, hood to his fiancée Gladys, who will not have him unless he can Again, Doyle’s societal cri qualities. heroic display some manly, tique is apparent. When Malone returns a better man to his Lon don suburb it is only to find that his Gladys has married a solici tor’s clerk, “a little ginger-haired man, who was coiled up in the deep arm-chair” (Doyle, 1995, p. 167). ward ward to earlier the atavistic “the forms. greatest Ironically, brain almost is himself, professor the 438), p. 1995, (Doyle, Europe” in physically identical to the chief of the ape-men on the inaccessible plateau in the Amazonas. Challenger as the so-called higher de generate (Lombroso, 1876: Greenslade, 1995) is described by the (Doyle, suit” lounge a in cave-man primitive “a as Malone narrator, that has 1912/1995, p. 438), and it is his primeval aggressiveness can turn all his dreams that equipped him with “a driving force basic of lack the which in here, critique societal Doyle’s facts.” into social skills paired with superhuman abilities becomes an instru ment of survival, is again combined with another discourse, the with science. Professor Challenger has formed the hypothesis that a he has hired and living organisms, the Earth and other planets are skilled artesian-well engineer to sink a sharp drill into the core of the Earth. Challenger is right, and the Earth reacts to the stabbing from fluid and secretions an organic and by erupting by screaming the hole. erupt Volcanoes all over the globe, and the professor is celebrated as a scientific genius. aspects of modernity. vival of the fittest,or more precisely about degeneration theories that claim that evolution in and nature in society may move back such. Professor Challenger is aggressively and sceptically opposing sceptically and aggressively is Challenger Professor such. the spiritualist movement, but after his dead wife has shown her self to him in spirit form, and Enid has shown her abilities as a Disintegration he too is convinced. In “The spiritualist medium, his infernal Nemor demonstrates Theodore Machine” an inventor, machine to Professor Challenger and Edward Malone telling them that he will sell it to the Russians as a weapon to be used against and machine own the inventor into his Britain. Challenger tricks is concerned Screamed” Also “When the World disintegrates him. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------124

The Land of Mist of Land The Volume 04 Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen continues the scientific and scientific the continues The Poison Belt Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur Thematically, the last of the Challenger novels, Challenger the of last the Thematically, The apocalyptic novel The apocalyptic his way into the otherworld. In some cases the hero is killed at this his way into the otherworld. In some cases the hero stage, and the otherworld becomes the land of death. After the form the in tests various to subjected is hero the threshold-crossing con The dismemberment. or battles dragon battles, brother e.g. of tinued journey can change into abduction, the so-called night-sea journey quest the of point this At journey. underground or journey its clearly symbolic nature becomes apparent, where the other world resembles unconscious of structures the mind. Other varia myths and religions, and it has been a recurring and relatively un relatively and recurring a been has it and religions, and myths in phenomenon in cultural history with manifestations changing e.g. medieval romances, fantasy and popular films (Campbell, circular, is It journey. a is quest The 1995/1999). Vogler, 1949/1975; and may be compared to the folktale structure of at home – out – foreign to a mission on is sent hero questing the as home again, can save his homeland. some kind of an elixir that parts to retrieve is called to adven certain steps. The hero through The quest runs cross to has then He away. lured or abducted is he sometimes ture; and the is guarded, The threshold of adventure. the threshold must guard be defeated or the may hero have to trick or negotiate is a combination of discourses; but now science is combined with framework narrative the within combination this is it and religion, of this article. of the rest that is the subject of a quest structure scientific quest The quest romance and the of the Sherlock Holmes cases was highly Conan Doyle’s production in its narrative pattern, repetitive formulaic, almost mechanically timeits in successful and original highly was concept the though Also in (Christensen, the 2010). Challenger novels the same narra tive structure was employed by Doyle. The quest has its root in evolution discourses in combination with an imperialist one. The same the in everybody affect not does ether the of effect poisonous its to respond to first the been have races developed less “the way: Aus the and Africa, from accounts deplorable are There influence. tralian aborigines appear to have been already exterminated. The power than the resisting greater Northern races have as yet shown Austria is down, while the of Southern… The Slavonic population p. 194). (Doyle, 1995, been affected.” has hardly Teutonic quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------King King 125

1895). One Volume 04 The Man Who Would Would The Man Who Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen The Time Machine, The Time , 1881), H. Rider Haggard (e.g. , 1885), Rudyard Kipling (e.g. Kipling Rudyard 1885), , Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur Treasure Island Treasure , 1888) and H.G. (e.g. Wells The Victorian quest romance is a particular instance of the gen quest romance The Victorian Victorian quest genre per se with science fiction. With forerunners forerunners With fiction. science with se per genre quest Victorian the territorial quest could examine the future such as Jules Verne in the genre of science fiction. it However, is in its very journey form the quest narrative in itself embodies the search for empiri cal knowledge when the quest is for the confirmation or verifica con formally also theme is a as Empire The truths. factual tion of nected to the quest narrative as this genre reflects the imperial expansion and its consequences. Not only the fate of the British Solomon’s Mines Solomon’s Be King the dis together was quest novels theme that tied these authors’ was part The very genre role. cussion of the changing male gender of this discussion as the relatively short and action-packed quest three- prevalent the to opposition in themselves defined romances volume realistic novel with its largely female readership (Fraser, highly top were quest romances Victorian male 3). These p. 1998, at is science Positivist too. respects, other in thematics their in ical the production, which surface is of often H.G. labelled Wells’ as the connects quest scientific The quest. scientific the subgenre, the the he hero becomes maya have god-like figure. More negatively, to steal the prize he came to win and the homeward journey be some, in elixir an is home brings hero the reward The flight. comes symbolic or literal form, which can cure the ailing kingdom from which he set off. In itself the homeward journey is filled with ob stacles, but the hero returns home a changed and wiser person or heals his native country. which also improves with the elixir, above. briefly described been has it as pattern narrative quest eral R.L. Ste Conan Doyle its literary practitioners were Apart from venson (e.g. tions are the wonder or journey, the hero may be swallowed and enter the whale’s or monster’s Both before and belly. during the assortment an with allied is and encounters hero the journey quest the of end the At ability. special a possess each may who helpers, of farthest away home, from the meets hero with the goal of journey, reward the get and test ultimate the pass to has now He quest. his sexual hero’s the be may reward The pains. his and journey the for reconcilia or / and otherworld, the of goddess a with gratification may even be apotheosis, and reward The tion with a father-figure. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------126

. In the formerIn . Volume 04 Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen . There is the morbidity withmorbidity the is There . The Land of Mist Land The almost follows the narrative quest almost follows the narrative quest £200,000 worth of diamonds. The Land of Mist is a step towards the rather special way Doyle the rather special way Doyle is a step towards The Lost World Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur Two points Two are notable in the use of the quest narrative leading The Poison Belt ute”, which kills all humans on its way. The quest structure is actu The quest structure ute”, which kills all humans on its way. land of death and the the otherworld is the ally followed as here questerswhen the near the end of the novels is resurrection return at a time when the ether has passed. out of oxygen, but have run on to its further use in the apocalypse and the seeming extinction of mankind as it is de picted in the chapter called “The Dead with World” a journey of the two the call to adventure from Challenger to Malone, Roxton Challenger to from of the two the call to adventure and Summerlee is merely to join him in his comfortable home out with a view to a surroundings side London on a hilltop in pastoral place takes action the of bulk the and line, railway a and course golf supplemented only professor’shome the in sitting-room sealed a in with a flow of telegrams from all over the world as the apocalypse win outside the large quite dramatic occurrences are strikes. There The England. of part this reaches also ether poisonous the as dow questers do not have to journey in this novel as they cross the in the way that it comes to them in the form of adventure threshold min a miles million “some of speed a with ether of belt poison a of personal development. The classic quest elements are represented: represented: quest elements are personal development. The classic The call to adventure, an assortment of helpers, an abduction of an and plateau, the to up journeys wonder ape-men, by Challenger underground journey down again, dragon battles with dinosaurs, sexually attractive native women, the battle brother between Chal lenger and his alter ego, the ape-man chief. The questers did not they but roles, male and characters own their into insights gain only could also return to London with a scientific discovery in the form and of a living pterodactyl in quest romance the Victorian used male colonial administrator and his journey overseas, but also the also but overseas, journey his and administrator colonial male a Darwinist in regarded sometimes was which cultures, of clash of the novels. stable ingredients light, were of the quest romance The reformulation Mist The Land of in Conan Doyle’s of men departed for un a group Basically, to the letter. structure of knowledge, wealth, honour and known destinations in search quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------127 The Land of

as Roxton specifies Volume 04 The Land of Mist and Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur The late date of 1926 in the genre history of to necessary been has it that sign a itself in is form narrative The in the history of the British Empire becomes apparent when Lord Roxton has to insert an advertisement in a newspaper to find new be to seems now structure quest the in adventure to call The quests. so low that it can hardly be heard. He has exhausted the “sporting to worlds fresh “seeking is and globe”, terrestrial this of adventures conquer” (Doyle, 1995, p. 319); but these so-called worlds fresh are gloomy than those in The Poison Belt even more of the Victorian this reformulation them as a haunted house, thus in The quest do domestication romance is combined with morbidity. through a through post-apocalyptic London, and is there the domestication has moved into a closed, claus the action where of the quest genre in an English home. room trophobic mestication of the quest is stressed when its goal, the so-called sci sphere, intimate the in right discovered is afterlife an of proof entific as it is the relationship between a husband and wife that provides home – out way the structure the sought for evidence, and in this – The otherworld is at home, and the home again has imploded: geographical quest has become psychic research, or a “psychic this of aim The 341). p. 1995, (Doyle novel the in called is it as quest” the of guides and helpers the and afterlife, an of verification is quest traditional quest narrative have now become spiritualist mediums, of the dead for further investiga who open the way into the realm adven of threshold the private-living-rooms in séance the and tion, ture. Has the quest formula then become a scientific quest? And answer could be that the word “science” together with “scientific” has 52 instances in the novel, but there are numerous other indica novel Challenger new this writing for motivation Doyle’s that tions the existence of the su positivist science with is a wish to reconcile pernatural or paranormal of the spirit world. Challengerother the of narrator The genre. quest the reformulate some and one impersonal omniscient, an been primarily has novels of narrator the but Malone, Edward journalist the times Mist becomes more and more an intrusive one, and this to the ex- are status fictional its also but formula, quest the only not that tent dismantled. In his attempt to verify spiritualism the voice of the narrator is taken over by Doyle himself. He asks the reader rhe to added are appendices and lengthy and notes torical questions, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------The The The 128 Spiritu (1921), (1923), Pheneas Pheneas (1922),

(1920), Life After Death (Doyle, 1995, p. 1995, (Doyle, (1925), Volume 04 Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen (1918), The Early Christian Church The Early Christian Church taphychique é What does Spiritualism Actually What does Spiritualism Actually ), Our American Adventure Psychic Experiences (1924). Our Reply to the Cleric The Wanderings of a Spiritualist The Wanderings . The missing link “either an ape-like (1922 (c.1927), (Doyle, 1926), and some of his other spir The New Revelation (1925), (1919), Doyle’s carries the idea of physical evolution Doyle’s carries the idea of physical (1920), (1928), and in Doyle’s autobiography he writes he autobiography Doyle’s in and (1928), is situated in the context of Doyle’s many spiritu is situated in the context of Doyle’s many Bulletin de l’Institut M Bulletin de l’Institut Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur Spiritualism The Lost World The Vital Message The Vital (1927), The Land of Mist slow upon the physical plane, at it is slow also on the spiritual at it is slow also on the spiritual slow upon the physical plane, heaven to heaven until the destiny of one…we shall evolve from imagi of eye the whither glory of blaze a in lost is soul human the II, p. 110). Vol. (Doyle, 1926, nation may not follow.” alist works, which are not fictional. His main spiritualist oeuvre is The History of Spiritualism into the afterlife, when he writes that “evolution has been very Case for Spirit Photography Our Second American Adventure and Modern Spiritualism Speaks and Stand For? Teach in its last chapter that the psychic question has come to absorb the his wife “have now trav of his life, and that he and whole energy have spoken face elled a good thousand miles upon our quest. We itualist publications are: (1918), alism and Rationalism Answers Spiritualism—Some Straight Questions and Direct bating sections are inserted into the action of the novel, in which given spiritualist movement are scepticism of spiritualism and the words, only to be refuted again and again. Positivist science and “spiritualist science” is used fused when the term spiritualism are 1995, (Doyle, setting laboratory a in described are experiments and the only not is experiments these of results the of One 361-370). pp. verification of an afterlife, but also of the theory of evolution with echoes from man or a man-like ape” is summoned during the séance. In History of Spiritualism the novel. These appendices may contain passages such as: “The appendices may contain passages the novel. These personal drawn either very closely from are scenes in this chapter experi trustworthy and of careful the reports from or experience Pithecanthropus of account “The or 416) p. 1995, (Doyle, menters.” the is taken from 419). The text of the novel itself is interrupted by directions to the Ap vide in this chapter appendices: “For the incidents recorded pendix.” (Doyle, 1995, p. 352). The comments of the intrusive nar rator are part of the rhetorical pattern of the novel. Prolonged de quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------The The 129

Volume 04 Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen : Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur How does one seek to explain this very often sincere, but also apparently desperate and incredibly credulous attempt to believe believe to attempt credulous incredibly and desperate apparently positiv in and ectoplasm materialize could which spirits, in both ist science, which rests on hypotheses that can be tested by em the of one into rephrased be can question This knowledge? pirical that two systems con it seems epistemology of the period, where con Foucault’s Michel spiritualism. in co-existed, also but flicted, cept of epistemes is a possible way to understand this complex epistemology. tive nor fanciful. On facts and facts alone, open to the whole world through an extensive and probably unlimited system of medium strict of ground the on psychology substantial a upon builds it ship, est logical induction. Its truth, cardinal imperishably established on the experiments and experiences of millions of sane men and wom world of spirits, and the is that of a en, of all countries and creeds, the mo continuity of the existence of the individual spirit through mentary eclipse of death; as it disappears on earth reappearing in ever-aug the amid inhabitant an becoming and world, spiritual that 1892, p. 645) menting population of the spiritual universe. (Wallace, If scientific of proof this kind could to be presented the irrefutably world the cause of the spiritualist movement would obviously demon be could afterlife an of existence the and it, from benefit strated; but also positivist science and religious belief could be Instead of same world picture. and united within the reconciled science overthrowing faith, spiritualism could in other words be regarded as an experimental science about a natural continuation super the and belief, religious a as only not and death, after life of natural could become natural. This attitude is expressed in London Spiritual Magazine specula neither is it facts; upon solely based science a is Spiritualism to face with a quarter of a million people.” (Doyle, 1924/2007, pp. 342-343). In his letters Doyle writes about his many and successful public lecturing tours about spiritualism, but also about his per mem family deceased with contacts of séances at experiences sonal 2008, p. 654). his dead son Kingsley (Doyle, bers, especially with A rupture of epistemes? and the movement of spiritual The ultimate aim for Conan Doyle spirits. the empirical evidence of contacts with to produce was ism quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------130

both mani with its evolu Volume 04 . In these two Chal Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen The Land of Mist of Land The The Lost World (Foucault, 1969/2011) Foucault 1969/2011) (Foucault, The Land of Mist The Land can be understood and explained. and in and Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur The Land of Mist The Archaeology of Knowledge The Archaeology The Poison Belt Though one episteme may supplant another, this does not neces does not this supplant another, may Though one episteme This article has described how the territorial journey of the quest the of journey territorial the how described has article This In his or supernatural of the episteme that had already been ousted and ousted been already had that episteme the of supernatural or the best of two worlds. supplanted, and thus attempting to merge narrative as used narratologically in tionary scientific, epistemological discourse was transformed in both lenger novels Conan Doyle domesticated the geographical quest, with an the novel genre and in the latter novel he also disrupted epistemological effort is an instance of double epistemes in the sense the in epistemes double of instance an is effort epistemological in depicted also is it as spiritualism that fested a full acceptance of the positivist scientific, modern new, world the episteme of a pre-secularized world and also retained appar the that way this in is It it. of go let to yet ready being without ent contradictions in the movement and in one of its fictional mani festations The best of two worlds Conclusion: useto quest a on was novel Doyle’s in described is it as Spiritualism religious the maintain to episteme new a of world-view scientific the change rapidly, or one episteme may replace another. This change This another. replace may episteme one or change rapidly, in itself, valid knowledge what is considered fundamentally affects discourses changes. and the very content of scientific sarily mean that the take-over is complete and all-embracing. There that writes Foucault and epistemes, two of contemporaneity be may “one can, on the basis of these new describe rules, and analyse phe p. 1969/011, (Foucault, repetition” and return continuity, of nomena drift is a sort of great rupture 191), and one may not imagine “that that carries with it all discursive formations at once (Foucault, p. 193). It is the point of this article that 1969/011, spiritualism as an describes how the epistemology of a certain historical period is based on unconscious assumptions, beliefs and values with accom factors and concep systematic shaping rules, panying formational tual, possibilities about specific fields of knowledge, e.g. the human the mind, body, the natural world Foucault or calls economy. these systems epistemes. an Negatively, episteme sets up boundaries for thoughts about a scientific subject in a period. This archaeology of as an episteme may and rupture, knowledge includes discontinuity quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , , ------Fest : , Pen 131 . Sphere . Sphere , Cambridge

, Wordsworth , Wordsworth , Routledge: , Routledge: , Amazon: Kindle Volume 04 Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen Northcote House: Plym House: Northcote Darwin to Einstein Primary . A Bibliography of A. Conan Doyle Conan A. of Bibliography A 1900: A Fin-de-siécle Reader 1900: A . , The Open University Press: Burnt Mill. Burnt Press: University Open The , 1999. Memories and Adventures An Autobiography Memories and Adventures The Hero with a Thousand Faces The Hero The Archeology of Knowledge The Archeology . Aalborg Universitetsforlag: Aalborg, pp. Aalborg, Universitetsforlag: Aalborg .

The Lost World and Other Stories Other and World Lost The Degeneration, Culture and the Novel Degeneration, Culture (eds.), A History of Spiritualism Vols. I-II Vols. Spiritualism of History A Fingeraftryk Studier i krimi og det kriminelle The Lost World , Harper: London. Victorian Quest Romance Victorian Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur , W., 1994. , W., , R.L. and J. M Gibson, 2000. , A. Conan, Lellenberg, J., Stashower, D. and Foley, C. (eds.), 2008. (eds.), C. Foley, and D. Stashower, J., Lellenberg, Conan, A. , , A. Conan, 1995. , A. Conan, 1926. Conan, A. , 1924/2007. Conan, A. , , N. G. (eds.), and 1980. Hall, V.M.D. London. Hudson House: Boston. University Press: Cambridge. guin: Harmondsworth. 387-405. and Belief on Science Sources edition. Hertfordshire. Ware Literary Lives: Wordsworth Life in Letters A Hertfordshire. Ware Classics: Books: London. outh. of the Sher Reproduction Six Napoleons» and the Mechanical lock Holmes Formula Han in Christensen, J. Riber and K. Toft 2010. (eds.), sen Agger Gunhild til skrift Foucault, M., 1969/2011. Foucault, M., 1969/2011. Green Doyle Doyle Doyle Doyle Greenslade Neve M. and M. Jay, Coley References Campbell, J., 1949/1975. R., 1998. Fraser, Christensen, J. 2010. Riber, Conan Doyle’s «The Adventure of the intrusive narratorial voice and appendices that again and again that again and again narratorial voice and appendices intrusive stressed a scientific approach to the subject of spiritualism. The contradiction inherent in this simultaneous fictionalisation of two Foucauldian epistemes had its costs. One, as pointed out, was the gen the was another romance; quest Victorian the of break-down eral apocalyptical and morbid atmosphere and sense of loss and novels that contrasts strongly pessimism of the two last Challenger with the sense of epistemological victory and triumph in the first Challenger novel, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - 132

Criminal Man, Volume 04 Jørgen Riber Christensen Jørgen Mythic Structure for Story for Structure Mythic

London. The Writer’s Journey Writer’s The , Conan Doyle Arthur Sir on Essays Critical G.K. Arthur Conan Doyle’s Quest Journey Land of Mist to The Doyle’s Conan Arthur and G. 1876/1972. Lombroso-Ferrero, , H. (ed.), 1992. Hall & Co.: New York. Hall & Co.: New tellers and Screenwriters. tellers and Screenwriters. , N.J.: Montclair. Lombroso of Cesare According to the Classification in Coley and Hall, pp. 50-58. Vogler, C., 1992/1999. C., Vogler, Lombroso, Lombroso, C. Orel , pp. 645-648pp. 1892. Spiritualism, Chambers Encyclopaedia, A.R., Wallace, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Livet ude af balance Den økotopiske rejse hos Callenbach og Cameron

Kim Toft Hansen er studieadjunkt ved Institut for Kultur og Globale Studier ved Aalborg Universitet. Han har senest udgivet bogen Mord og metafysik (2012). Han er medansvarshavende redaktør for Akademisk kvarter og an­svarshavende­ re- daktør for formidlingstidsskriftet Kulturkapellet. Hans seneste udgivelser handler om krimi og metafysik, den kinesiske krimi, religion i skandinavisk krimifiktion og den erotiske vampyr.

Abstract Artiklen analyserer Ernest Callenbachs roman Ecotopia (1975) og James Camerons film Avatar (2009) som to beslægtede fortællinger under fællesbetegnelsen økotopi med særligt fokus på rejsen som erkendelsesmiddel. Økotopien forstås her som en særlig mellem- position mellem utopien og dystopien. Samtidig tegner artiklen en kort historisk udvikling fra naturreligioner, over modernitetskritik, til nutidens litterære og filmiske fokus på naturen.

De to fortællinger, Ernest Callenbachs roman Ecotopia (1975) og James Camerons film Avatar (2009), har nogle bemærkelsesværdige ligheder. Begge handler om en persons rejse til en fremmed kultur, begge bearbejder menneskets forhold til naturen, og begge forsø- ger med hård hånd at mane til besindighed over for menneskets forbrug af naturen som en uudtømmelig ressource. Deres brug af genretræk fra særligt science fiction er også et prægnant fællestræk, hvor handlingen er trukket frem i tiden, så konsekvenserne af nuti- dens handlinger kan fremdrages. Denne artikel analyserer disse to fortællinger med særligt fokus på rejsen som et erkendelsesmiddel. At interessen for menneskets omgang med naturen har nogle hi- storiske rødder, der går langt tilbage, understreger, at tankegangen i sig selv ikke er ny, men den store succes og eftervirkning, som

Volume 03 133 ------134

Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim Livet ude af balance Livet Volume 04 . Det interessante ved disse to fort- ved disse to . Det interessante har haft, at viser, den brede populær Ecotopia Avatar Avatar , som står på skuldrene af Ernest Callen af økotopi, som står på skuldrene ), eller hvor dyrene får menneskelige evner (som i ikke kun formidler drømmen om menneskelig kon ikke kun formidler drømmen om Avatar kultur også har inddraget denne vinkel på den menneskelige om denne vinkel på den menneskelige kultur også har inddraget populærkulturelt et som film denne læse vil Jeg naturen. med gang udtryk for et offentligt fokus på natur- og miljøkrise ved at analy den som en sere bachs klassiske roman 1. som erkendelse Rejse Hjemme: Rejsen har gennem kulturhistorien stået stærkt som et narrativt virkemiddel. Det gør den stadig. Vladimir Propp viste, hvordan rejsen er et konstituerende element i russiske hvor folkeeventyr, helten sendes ud på en rejse for senere at vende forandret hjem. hjem mens (39), transference” spatial ”a for udrejsen kaldte Propp James Camerons film vendelsen er ”a surmounting of space”; begge dele implicerer en rejse, hvor blot retningen – ud, hjem – er forskellig. Dette bevæ går ind i ro gelsesmønster står så stærkt, at det fra folkeeventyret der på en interessant mantikkens forkærlighed for kunsteventyret, med romantikkens sammenhæng måde spiller ind i en kulturel er in filosofi Schellings Friedrich naturfilosofien. af opprioritering teressant i sin kobling af det åndelige og naturen, hvor naturen Ander H.C. 1988). (Schelling, ånden af aflejring synlige den bliver kun af opelskningen mellem møde biografisk interessant et er sen i sin Andersen hvilket naturfilosofi, romantiske den og steventyret selvbiografi også antyder ved beskrivelsen af sit møde med Schel ling (Andersen, der 2004). er I den fantasy, moderne - videreudvik også en nærmest sakral fastholdes derfor ling af kunsteventyret, Tolkiens J.R.R. i (som levende bliver ofte der naturen, med omgang Ringenes herre ællinger er, at ællinger de er, begge indbefatter en geografisk forflyttelseaf om alternative omgangsformer mennesket for at kunne fortælle med naturen. På den måde bliver rejsen ikke kun en fysisk bevæ som et kritisk erkendel fungere gelse, men den kommer også til at sesmiddel. Efter analyserne af Callenbachs og Camerons fortællin- eftersom rejserne, på perspektiv religiøst et inddrage kort jeg vil ger filmen takt til og bæredygtig omgang med naturen, men den motiverer indbefatter der forestillinger, religiøse moderne til brugerne også mentale rejser til forestillede Først verdener. et par bemærkninger og erkendelse, dernæst en indføring i økotopien. om rejser quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

. ------gået gået 135 Avatar

Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim Livet ude af balance Livet Volume 04 . Lige fra George Mé rejser (1968), til Andersons Paul W.S. (1902), over Stanley Kubricks og Arthur Arthur og Kubricks Stanley over (1902), mod en konklusion. På samme måde er , handler ofte om rum (1997) spiller den lange rumrejse på forskellig vis også for eksemplerne her. Begge fortællinger hand også for eksemplerne her. 2001: A Space Odyssey 2001: A skride fremad skride fremad Avatar disse idéer”, hvor ”overfladen som af defineres diskus gælder Litterære rejser. Poetik og erkendelse i danske digteres rejsebøger Poetik og erkendelse i danske digteres rejser. Litterære Le voyage dans la lune Det Idéen om rejsen som et erkendelsesmiddel indfinder sig ikke erhvervelse af ny viden, eller som handler om bekæmpelse af mod af bekæmpelse om handler som eller viden, ny af erhvervelse hænge at til kommer således viden og Fortællinger argumenter. hvor det gode (argument)sammen med eventyrformlens struktur, helst skal vinde over det onde (modargument), mens vejen frem opbygges og forstås kan der rejse, en udgør konklusion denne til som en diskussion. i sig etablere at formået har der sted, fremmed et til rejse at om ler lestrækket mellem rejse og lestrækket erkendelse fremtrukket i titlen på sin bog (Handesten, 1992). og Lakoff George Mark Johnson viser også, i forbindelse med viden og diskussion rejsemetaforen hvordan ”fokuserer på indhold og forløb” (Lakoff & Johnson, 2004: 114). Eksemplet implicerer hos dem også bevægelse, fx: ”Han er dybt ind i sionens vej, dækker et område, og indholdet er det område der dækkes En af diskussion diskussionen” eller (ibid., et 116). argu ment kan om handler som fortællinger, i indgår der fælleselement, et rejsen ponent i liès C. Clarkes Event Horizon dette er fiction science i som fantasy såvel I betydning. central en impli ofte der dannelsesromanen, fra reminiscens interessant en cerer en dannelsesrejse, hvor hovedpersonen skal bringes ud af for af Antallet visdom. med hjem vende at for rammer trygge de der er rejseromaner, selvbiografiske skrevet har der fatterskaber, Adam Andersen, som H.C. for også stort, og omfatter forfattere fæl tematiserer Handesten Lars Baggesen. Jens og Oehlenschläger C.S. Lewis’ Narnia-fortællinger). Fantasy er på den måde et popu et måde den på er Fantasy Narnia-fortællinger). Lewis’ C.S. som en levende fastholdelse af naturen udtryk for en lærkulturelt for efter sig underlægge kan blot ikke mennesket som organisme, modernitets en som indirekte fungerer Fantasy godtbefindende. hvilket denne kritik gennem en rejse, kritik, der ofte narrativiserer og Lewis. for både Tolkien således også gælder kun i eventyrformatet, der også genremæssigt benyttes i relevante der genrekom Science erfiction den som anden genre, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------136

Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim økotopi, der er Livet ude af balance Livet Volume 04 filosofisk, under økofilosofisk, en række stater havde løsrevet havde stater række en hvis , men signalerer også en sproglig også en sproglig hjemsted, men signalerer . Den handler om journalisten Weston, der rej . Den handler om journalisten Weston, økotopisk fiktion. the ecotopians, økotopierne. Det andet spor er Westons Ecotopia foregår således godt nok i ’vores’ verden, men den er ikke verden, godt nok i ’vores’ således foregår Weston er først fremstillet som snæversynet person med selvtil er først fremstillet Weston en økofilosofisk som genrekategori, jeg vil trække med fra Callen bachs fortælling til Camerons film. At den er filosofisk,handler i metafysiske om, at den stiller grundlæggende, udgangspunktet den er At eksistens. til menneskets spørgsmål som er i fokus. til naturen, menneskets forhold at det er streger, harmoni med naturen. Dette leder til betegnelsen 2.til Ecotopia Rejsen Ude 1: kendetegn ved økotopien udstikkes i Mange af de genremæssige Callenbachs ser fra USA ind i landet Ecotopia. Kontinentet ser politisk anderle ind i landet Ecotopia. Kontinentet ser politisk ser fra USA en række vestkyststater for 20 des ud, end vi kender det, eftersom stat. egen sin danne at for stater forenede de fra sig løsrev tilbage år Ecotopia fremtidsfortælling kontrafaktisk almindeligt genkendelig. Det er en ud, se ville verden hvordan om, hvor han beskriver nøjere mødet med private dagbogsoptegnelser, forskellige personer og oplevelsen af økotopiernes levevej. Det er ske, mens det første fungerer særligt i de sidste, vi ser en udvikling til dagbladet. som en rejsebeskrivelse iro skriver Han hverdag. økotopiernes til holdninger strækkelige indrettet har økotopierne måde, som den nedsættende om nisk og oggrøn af præg stærkt bærer der tilværelse, En på. tilværelse deres økologisk tænkning. De har erstattet det kapitalistiske system med et bæredygtigt system, hvor de er selvforsynende inden for egne De landegrænser. gør det har meste en selv, kort arbejdsuge på 20 og timer, har oprettet en lang række juridiske der rammer, tvinger indbyggerne til at tænke økologisk og grønt. Heraf navnet på lan det Ecotopia. Stavelsen ’øko’ betyder ’hjem’, mens ’topia’ betyder det betyder Samlet ’sted’. sammen isammenhæng til utopien og til økologien, som er trukket denne sammenhæng. Bogen har derfor også lagt navn til den gene betegnelse relle sig. Romanen er bygget op gennem to forskellige Det spor. ene er Disse dagblad. sit til hjem sender Weston som avisartikler, række en hverdagen, vinkel antropologisk og journalistisk en fra beskriver måder at leve på for de politiske sammenhænge og almindelige indbyggerne, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------137 Brave New

sammen. Det Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim Nils Klims under Nils Klims (1982). Økotopien (1982). Livet ude af balance Livet Volume 04 , hvorved romanen i , hvorved romanen Ecotopia Ecotopia Blade Runner med fokus på, at formen er kritisk, nedbry (1516) og Ludvig Holdbergs Holdbergs Ludvig og (1516) Utopia (1741), mens dystopiens protagonist oftere er en per radical ecology (1932) eller Ridley Scotts film Scotts Ridley eller (1932) Før Callenbach fandtes den såkaldte økokritik selvfølgelig i lit Beskrivelserne i romanen fungerer som videnskabstunge forslag dende og emancipatorisk i sit sigte (Garforth, 2006: 10). naturreli i rødder den har Bevidsthedshistorisk medier. og teratur moder på reaktion slags en som opdyrkedes igen den mens gioner, Steiners interesse som Rudolph niteten inden for såvel romantikken i biodynamisk økologi i forbindelse med antroposofien (Gilhus & Mikaelsson, 1998). Det er en vinkling af økologismen, der er blevet formuleres århundrede 20. det af løbet i som og økosofi, som omtalt Økotopien fungerer på denne måde som en interessant mellemting på denne måde som en interessant Økotopien fungerer er heller ikke uvanligt, at utopienmellem utopien og dystopien. Det indbygger rejseskildringer i fortællingen. Det gælder utopien i Thomas Mores jordiske Rejse Houxleys Aldous fx på indersiden, hvilket gælder son World er utopisk i sit ønske om at ville redde verden fra menneskeskabte mens den er dystopisk i sit syn på konsekvenser naturkatastrofer, ne, hvis dette ikke lykkes. Lisa Garforth kalder derfor også økoto pien for I knew where it might lead. It led me home” (Callenbach, 1975: 181). 1975: (Callenbach, home” me led It lead. might it where knew I igennem i sit møde med økoto går Den omvending, som Weston kend sit fra sig bevæger han fordi ham, for mulig kun bliver pierne, te miljø ind i det ukendte land kaldet høj grad trækker på eventyrets struktur og dannelsesromanens er kendelsesvej. Forskellen er blot, at i den velkendte hjemme-ude- så falder hjem-struktur, de sidste to topoi i roma af understreget – ham for sig viser til, rejser Weston som ’ude’, ’hjem’. være – at sidste ord nens sidste sætning, sågar romanens siden Callenbach Økotopien Mellemlanding: 3. til, hvordan et på til, samfund grøn hvordan baseret vækst og teknologi kan op bygges. I begyndelsen er dette system læst gennem sar Westons selv objektiv, en fra sig tilgang hans udvikler langsomt men kasme, skildring til retfærdig en indlevet mere og subjektiv beskrivelse af til virke til øko – faktisk ser ud for Weston ting, der – overraskende sine noter sender Weston Afslutningsvist tilfredshed. topiernes store ”But romanen: der får lov til at afslutte med ordene, til sin redaktør assignment, when neither you northank you for sending me on this quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk . ------138 (1982), (2011). Al (2011). rumrejsen

Ice The Day After (2010), Travis Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim Livet ude af balance Livet (2006) er endnu et Volume Koyaanisqatsi 04 , der er en metafysisk metafysisk , der er en Arctic Blast Arctic – målt på box office indtje økologiske og menneskeskabte menneskeskabte og økologiske , der omfatter (2002), og som udelukkende gen udelukkende som og (2002), Avatar dybdeøkologi , hvis titel på Hopi-indiansk betyder Disse film danser på – og i flere tilfælde

An Inconvenient Truth An Inconvenient Truth (2011) og (2011) Nick Copus’ tv-serie Naqoyqatsi Qatsi-trilogi Koyaanisqatsi (1988) og (1988) (2004), Brian Trenchard-Smiths 2012: The Ice Age I samme periode udgiver Godfrey Reggio den første dokumen I samme periode udgiver Godfrey Gennem det seneste årti har vi – som en videre populærkulturel populærkulturel Gennem det seneste årti har vi – som en videre Gores Gores dokumentarfilm at gør vi noget, kan det godt eksempel, hvor konklusionen også er, stadig nytte (utopien), men undlader vi at gribe ind, kan jorden bukke under (dystopien). I den undergang. også over – grænsen til apokalypsen, verdens om handler der film, af bølge ne Camerons er James katastrofer, ning – ultimativt den mest populære. neskelig undertvingelse og kraftfuld kapitalisme, men vender til kapitalisme, men vender til neskelig undertvingelse og kraftfuld sidst tilbage til Nu vender rumraketten. fascinationens fortegn om, eftersom rumrakettens eksplosion får lov at slutte filmen. Menne naturen og vingerne end højere, – Ikaros anden en som – flyver sket symbolsk Menneskets visualiseres kan fornemme bære. fremdrift rumrejse. som en afbrudt udvikling – set en bølge af film, der på ny diskuterer naturkata hvor oplagte eksempler er Roland Emmerichs strofer, Tomorrow Forts tarfilm i sin såkaldte Powaqqatsi nem billeder og musik skildrer en menneskeskabt naturkatastrofe. Den første film ’livet ude af balance’, er den skildring dystreste af konsekvenserne højere i den hvorved naturudnyttelse, og forurening menneskelig af grad læner sig opad den dystopiske side af økotopien. Filmen be frem der indledningsvist gynder med opsendelsen af en rumraket, hæves som den ypperste menneskelige frembringelse: men af mødt blive områder naturskønne filmen viser Undervejs skarpest af den norske filosof Arneskarpest Næssaf (Næss,den 1976). norske Hanfilosof kalder for også den rammeforståelse ramme om naturen, hvor ”well-being and flourishing of human and nonhuman life on Earth have value in themselves” (Næss, for inden udvikling en på 80’erne i pegede Nielsen A. Erik 37). 1986: gestaltede en fuldendt der indvarslede – men ikke dansk litteratur, bevægelse af Peter en Lützen – i økologisk om realisme. retningen ogkrisesituation en på svar ”litteraturens som tendens denne taler (Lützen, 2002: 209). samfundets omgang med naturen” quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------som 139 Ecotopia

Avatar Avatar Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim Livet ude af balance Livet Volume 04 ex-marine, der rejser til . The white man’s burden The white man’s . Jake Sully er en handicappet handicappet en er Sully Jake . – en ny tankegang hos frem hovedpersonen. I begge fort Ecotopia Avatar Den nye verden mødes med fordomme, og det er disse fordom og det er mødes med fordomme, Den nye verden Filmen har flere mytologiske betydningslag, fx navnet Pandora. navnet fx betydningslag, mytologiske flere har Filmen 4. Rejsen til Pandora Ude 2: ligheder og karakterologiske strukturelle har en lang række Avatar med me, der langsomt skal krakelere. Langsomt vinder – i både og planeten Pandora for at træde i sin afdøde tvillingebrors sted som og sig bevæge kan som krop, genmanipuleret en – avatar en af fører trække i vejret planetens luft. Sully er indledningsvist ikke specielt interesseret i at lære noget om Na’vi, indbyggerne på Pandora. I stedet allierer han sig med militæret, der ønsker insider-viden om Na’vierne, så de kan få fat i det værdifulde grundstof Unobtanium (betydning: uopnåelig), som findes på planeten. Denne selvtil- indgangsvinkel minder meget om den strækkelige og selvtilfredse måde, som hos Weston Callenbach tænker: Hovedpersonen kom mer fra den civiliserede verden, og ved bedre, hvilket desuden.fun hvilket bedre, ved og verden, civiliserede den fra mer og vestlig som en postkolonial kommentar til kolonisering gerer imperialisme: ællinger er der indbygget navnesymbolik hos hovedpersonen. Will - repræsen at Weston og signalerer, navn er indlysende nok, Westons terer ’the will of the west’, vestens vilje. Jake Sully benyttes om vendt, antyder den vending, som han kommer til at gennemgå iog fortællingen: Jake betyder ’mand’, mens Sully kommer af Solomon, der betyder ’fred’: fredens mand. Han kommer med fred. Det er til de handlinger, kommentar selvfølgelig indledningsvist en ironisk krig mellem til en regulær som fører som han er med til at udføre, til at sende menne menneskene og Na’vierne. Men Sully er med skene væk fra planeten, og er på den måde med til at bringe fred. Pandora var den første kvinde i græsk mytologi, skabt af Zeus i trods mod Prometheus, der havde givet menneskene ilden – og dermed en skabende magt på Dette jorden. benyttes i en modernitetskritik af menneskelig skaben. Zeus sendte Pando ondskab indeholdt som æske, Pandoras hun havde sig med og ra, det men håb, også dog der var æsken I menneskene. til sygdom og er først helt til sidst – efter alle lidelserne – at håbet slipper ud af struk filmens til overføres opbygning mytologiske Denne æsken. hvor menneskene, der tur, rejser til Pandora, bringer lidelse, men til sidst er der en antydning af håb for indbyggerne på Pandora. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------140

, peger Na’vi Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim Livet ude af balance Livet Volume 04 Koyaanisqatsi samme visuelle montage ved at vise den uspolerede natur ved at vise den uspolerede Avatar Avatar Koyaanisqatsi er, at der skal en kvinde til, før hovedpersonen skal en kvinde til, før hovedpersonen at der er, Avatar og Det grundstof, som er så værdifuldt for menneskene (og fuld Menneskets behov for naturdominans står i stærk kontrast til om natten. Langsomt går det derfor op for Sully gennem filmen, at han er med til at udnytte og udvinde noget meget, meget værdi fuldt. Værdien er blot en helt anden end den kapitallogiske. Som trilogien, i film første Reggios til parallel moder Eywa ikke tager sig i, på, at planetens en, som Sully forelsker Eywa sider. ”perfects only the balance of life”. Eywa holder livet i balance, mens mennesket med dets moderne naturforbrug bringer livet ud af økobalance. få fat på. Na’viernes måde at leve på. Ikke nok med at de tilbeder naturen, for det, den har givet naturen holder den hellig, og hele tiden takker dem. De har også et helt bogstaveligt fysisk I link deres til naturen. hår findes en biologisk vækst, der kan forene dem med dyr og na Når de tur. rider på går forskellige Na’vierne dyr, i bogstavelig fu tings alle – Eywa med kommunikerer de når og dem, med sion moder – sker det også ved, at deres hårvækst binder sig til et træs som en levende organisme, er fremstillet At naturen lysende grene. kraftigt understreges af, at skovbunden lyser op, når den betrædes stem. Indledningsvist benytter Indledningsvist stem. Reggios teknik som Vi destruktivitet. menneskenes af mødes dernæst der Pandora, på visuelt den af billeder CGI-programmerede række en tidligt møder betagende planet. Disse afbrydes på et tidspunkt af en bulldozer, der begynder at vælte sig vej gennem er skoven. i Naturen denne ting, der er en det – varetages skal der organisme, optik ikke en økonomisk for behov kapitalistiske menneskets underlægges skal vækst og navn rigdom. Grundstoffets ’unobtanium’ virker i ud naturvi for inden er det men metafor, banal en som gangspunktet at svære er der materialer, forskellige for betegnelse en denskaben Og måske på sigt for mennesker, der formår at leve i overensstem i leve at formår der mennesker, for sigt på måske Og Endnu et fællestræk mellem luner. organiske melse med naturens Ecotopia lærer dette budskab: både og Weston Sully forelsker sig i lokale, indfødte kvinder. for Na’vierne), er en nærliggende metafor for stændig værdiløst olie. olie Ikke rundt; er nok også til med krige at verden olie fører et af der de er brændstoffer, med til at forstyrre jordens økosy quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------141 (Danielsen,

er en økolo Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim Livet ude af balance Livet Avatar Volume 04 , hvor Sully er splittet Avatar har medvirket til det, Avatar . Han peger også på Avatar Avatar på . Han peger også fiktionsbaseret religion fiktionsbaseret Star Wars Star også opbygget som en økotopi, der fast Avatar Avatar På den måde er trækker kraftige veksler på økotopiens mere spirituelle og trækker kraftige veksler på økotopiens mere Avatar 5.Astralrejser Ude 3: be fysisk en som primært forstået været hidtil har ’rejse’ Betegnelse vægelse fra et punkt til et andet. Undervejs i denne bevægelse har jeg peger på, at protagonisten i økotopien går gennem nogle faser. forståel- hvor en selvtilstrækkelig position, Først fastholder denne sen af den alternative levemåde er yderst sparsom. Dernæst begyn møder med de lokale lang der hovedpersonen gennem forskellige denne ser sig men sit syn på samfundsindretningen, somt at ændre Det ser vi fx i selv mest splittet i sin rolle. mellem militæret og sin arbejdsgiver på den ene side og Na’vierne og videnskaben sidst på vælger den hovedpersonen anden. side Til og understreger med naturen for den økologiske omgang til fordel øko et til rejsen er Dermed bedre. som løsningsmodel denne derved topisk land også knyttet til en erkendelsesmæssig bevægelse. historiske beskrevne allerede de har der komponenter, mytologiske er en adgang til og omgang med naturen Den meget direkte rødder. Friedrich som tankegang, den af visualisering populærkulturel natu og transcendens åndelig mellem mødet i beskrev Schelling immanens. rens Den ikke sete åndelighed er aflæselig i naturen, Derfor naturvisualiseringer. filmens i udnyttes bogstaveligt hvilket er det måske ikke så overraskende, at ud der praksis, religiøs en som jedismen er eksempel Hans 2010a). springer af filmene i serien som Markus Danielsen kalder for som Markus Danielsen kalder som et eksempel på denne form for moderne, mediebaserede reli holder det tvedelte svar, som gives i økotopien. som gives i økotopien. svar, holder det tvedelte betydning overført i der naturen, af udnyttelse til kommentar gisk fra fiktion til virkelighed peger på, at hvis vi gør som menneskene i filmen, ender det i en dystopi,en menneskehedens og naturens med af Na’viernes måde at leve i pagt vi derimod endeligt. Lærer udgang hvor mennesketdet i en utopi, en glædelig ender naturen, lever i kraft af og ikke på trods af naturen. Et liv i balance og ikke et liv ude af balance. (Jeg vil i denne sammenhæng undlade at gå dybere ind i, at denne kapitalismekritiske film var verdens hidtil film, dadyreste den blev indspillet, og at den var en bedst af årets med penge.) sælgende film – og indtjente styrtende quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------142 eywaisme

Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim Livet ude af balance Livet er gået skridtet vi Volume 04 . Metoden er interessant nok igen . Metoden er interessant er den astrale projektion et spring fra ved at påstå, at de eksisterede før fil The Navi Movement Avatar Avatar Avatar The Way of Eywa The Way , for – ligesom i filmen – dernæst at vende hjem til egen krop krop egen til hjem vende at dernæst – filmen i ligesom – for , Davidsen peger på, at andre tilhængere af den såkaldte af den såkaldte tilhængere Davidsen peger på, at andre helst skulle gemmes væk i privat regi (Hansen, 2012). Derfor er deter Derfor 2012). (Hansen, regi privat i væk gemmes skulle helst blive at på forsøget mod genmæle til tager religion at nok, naturligt gemt væk. Dog er eywaismens religiøsitet i høj grad en privat sag, eftersom dens erkendelser fås gennem personlige drømme, men det fælleskulturelle element frembringes af, at et populærkulturelt på, mens de mere tæres det visuelle materiale, der medie leverer politiske der idéer, indgår i økotopien og i økokritikken i høj grad tager denne type forestillinger ud af det At private se regi. en film, krop til krop, mens astralrejserne indgår i mange af verdens religio verdens af mange i indgår astralrejserne mens krop, til krop i eywaismen er måde den På sjælerejser. for form særlig en som ner der indgår i såvel øko tråd med de modernitetskritiske elementer, modernitetskri rødder og i religiøsitetens romantiske topiens mere et skisma, indbygget et som haft, har Moderniteten elementer. tiske problematisk forhold til religion, der i denne forståelseshorisont sine drømme. I dette tilfælde rejser den troende gennem drømme til drømme gennem troende den rejser tilfælde dette I drømme. sine planeten Pandora for at indgå i der de er omgivelser, visualiseret i Avatar parallel til Jake Sullys inkarnationmed ny viden. En meget præcis I krop. af en fremmed noget, og det dystopiske, hvis vi ikke gør noget (The Navi Manife fra at sammenhæng samme i forsøger bevægelse Denne 2011). sto, til vriste sig relationen oplevelser. på deres baseret mens tilblivelse, og at filmen er James instruktøren anser derfor og Pandora, til astralrejser på tager tilhængere kalder diskussionsfora I profet. være at for Cameron for denne religion nogleaf udspringer der rejse, en det er tilfælde dette i men rejse, en hinduistiske rød som har sine rødder i avatar-begrebets teknikker, vælge at forsøger selv enkelte den hvor projektion, astral nemlig der, gion (Danielsen, 2010b). Det mytologiske og religiøse lag er fra star fra er lag religiøse og mytologiske Det 2010b). (Danielsen, gion ten tilindbygget deni referencer græske filmen mytologis gennem fortælling om Pandora samt hinduismens begreb om ’avatar’, der er en betegnelse for som de kan guden inkarnationer, tage.Vishnu bevægelse webbaserede Den dere og erklærer en ny metafysik: believe ”We that humanity and Arne i tråd med one”, hvilket i øvrigt er helt are the environment Næss’ dybdeøkologi. Bevægelsens manifest peger på nogle af de hvis vi gør der udspringer af økotopien: det utopiske, samme teser, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------. I 143 Ecotopia

Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim Livet ude af balance Livet Volume 04 udkommer på et tidspunkt, mere end end mere Avatar , som i stedet trækker på et my trækker i sin fokusering Avatar har nydt, der på fleremåder – under højdepunktet af en grøn Avatar Ecotopia Ecotopia nærer et nærer tæt slægtskab Avatar i den narrative udvikling og Fortællingerne udkommer på hver sit tidspunkt, men begge ud Denne artikels hovedfokus har været at tolke to populære fort tolke to populære at Denne artikels hovedfokus har været der bringer kritisk information med sig, er på mange måder en helt en måder mange på er sig, med information kritisk bringer der elementær projektion (når filmen vises på et lærred), og fungerer i videre forstand som der en kan budbringer, overføres til den visu elle bank, som praktiserende af den eywaistiske astrale projektion på. kan tære 6. Konklusion Hjem: Ecotopia såvel som tematiseringen af en potentielt forestående økologisk potentielt forestående såvel som tematiseringen af en katastrofe. De trækker begge to på nogle elementer fra science fiction, hvilket i noget grad gælder sidstnævnte er det opfindelser, som hjælper den økologiske hver er remedierne mens det i førstnævnte snarere dag, der tematiseres, (rumskib, avatarprogrammet), som skal bringe menneskene i kon takt med Na’vierne, der er i fokus. fantasy- på naturen med omgang og til tilgang direkte meget en på ikke gælder hvilket genren, tologisk grundlag fra indianerkulturer. Slægtskabet er med andre fra grundlag tologisk indianerkulturer. iøjnefaldende i tema og narrativ udvikling. mest ord fokus på potentielle økokri givelser sammenfalder med et forøget ser. Callenbach udgiver sonansbund under fortællingen. bølge i 70’erne, hvor FN’s ’Conference on the Human Environment’ Environment’ Human the on ’Conference FN’s hvor 70’erne, i bølge i 1972, også kendt som Stockholm-konferencen, var et vendepunkt. Slut-60’ernes og start-70’ernes stærke interesse for en påpasselig også en re fungerer inden for hippiekulturen omgang med naturen katastrofer, miljøtopmøder og nærmiljøets økokriser. Særlig interes Særlig økokriser. nærmiljøets og miljøtopmøder katastrofer, sant er den popularitet, som Avatar en viser – videreførelse religiøs som og publikumsmagnet som både vis kulturel interesse denne udvikling. Om udviklingen igen sætter livet i balance, er ikke inden for denne artikels rammer at vurdere. måde, men med tydelige fællestræk, te der på hver sin ællinger, matiserer menneskets problematiske naturdominans. Sigtet har været at koble formidlingen af dette budskab til seeren gennem brugen af rejsen som en metafor for erkendelse og erhvervelse af hvor miljø, økologi og grøn tænkning igen for alvor er kommet på natur omkring af særlig medieopmærksomhed i kraft dagsordenen quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------. Gyl 144

Kulturens re Kulturens Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim . Det teologiske Livet ude af balance Livet Volume 04 , 55, s. 3-21. , Aalborg Universitets . Akademisk forlag, Kø Akademisk forlag, . Hverdagens metaforer . Gyldendal, København. Bantam Books, New York. Bantam Books, New . Fiktionsbaseret Fiktionsbaseret religion – fra Star Wars Ecotopia Mord og metafysik – Det absolutte, det gud – Det absolutte, og metafysik Mord Litterære rejser. Poetik og erkendelse i danske rejser. Litterære Søvnløshed – Modernisme i maleri, digtning og Mit livs eventyr . Samfundslitteratur, Frederiksberg. . Samfundslitteratur, En verden af medier – Medialisering af politik, En verden af medier – Medialisering af politik, Et billede at læse med C.A. Reitzel, København. , 3, s. 5-26. Religionsvidenskabeligt tidsskrift , Universitetsforlaget, Oslo. . Centrum, København. . Centrum, Religion 2.0. Tendenser og trends i det nye årtusind og trends Religion 2.0. Tendenser Universitet, Århus. fakultet, Århus Spaces of Utopia James Camerons film “Avatar”. I René Dybdal Pedersen (red.). (red.). Pedersen Dybdal René I “Avatar”. film Camerons James sprog, religion og leg religion sprog, København. dendals bogklubber, benhavn. musik fortrylling rejsebøger. digteres dommelige og det overnaturlige i krimien Aalborg. forlag, til jedisme, Hjarvard, Hjarvard, Stig, 2008. 2004. Mark Johnson, & George Lakoff, Lützen, 2002. Peter, A., 1982. Nielsen, Erik Garforth, Lisa, 2006. Ideal Nature: Utopias of Landscape and Loss. and Landscape of Utopias Nature: Ideal 2006. Lisa, Garforth, Gilhus, Ingvild Sælid og Lisbeth Mikaelsson, 1998: Hannesten, Lars, 1992. 2012. Hansen, Kim Toft, trale fortællinger i Rej spørgsmålet om rejse, erkendelse og natur. til nye indsigter om sen leder i disse økotopier hovedpersonen til naturen. menneskets forhold Referencer Andersen, H.C., 2004. Callenbach, Ernest, 1975. Markus, 2010. Danielsen, Danielsen, Markus, 2010. Genfødt og blå – religiøsitet baseret på ny viden. Rejsen fungerer her som en erfaringsbaseret socialantro erfaringsbaseret en som her fungerer Rejsen viden. ny forståelse af en alternativ levemåde, en pologi, der indkredser som erfarings fungerer udvikling religiøse mens den i den videre projicering gennem indsigt får troende de hvor religiøsitet, baseret der vil Der er naturligvis aspekter, parallelverden. af selvet ind i en kunne uddybes videre. Økologismens filosofihistorie, som jeg her trækker på, kan udfoldes mere, mens fortællingernes genrebase ring – ud over økotopien – også kunne fortjene yderligere fokus. Men i dette tilfælde har hovedmotivationen at været koble to cen quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - 145

. Cambridge. . University of Kim Toft Hansen Toft Kim Livet ude af balance Livet Volume 04 , Universitetsforlaget, , Universitetsforlaget, [besøgt: 12. december 12. [besøgt: [online] Tilgængelig på [online] Tilgængelig , 8, s. 10-31. Ideas for a philosophy of nature The Morphology of the Folktale of The Morphology , “The Navi Manifesto”. Økologi, samfunn og livsstil samfunn Økologi, Philosophical Inquiry 2011]. http://navimovement.com/manifesto/ Oslo. cal Aspects. Austin. Press, Texas Cambridge. University Press, Næss, Arne, 1976: Arne, Næss, Philosophi Some Movement: Ecology Deep The 1986: Arne, Næss, 2001. Vladimir, Propp, Schelling, Friedrich, 1988. The Navi Movement quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Sin Nombre Skæbnesvangre rejser og fortællinger

Pablo R. Cristoffanini er lektor ved Institut for Kultur og Globale Studier, Aalborg Universitet. Cand.mag. og Ph.d.: kultur- analyse, Latinamerika og Spaniens kultur og inter- kulturel forståelse. Interesser er møder og konflikter mellem kulturer, forbrugskultur især i Latinamerika og film som værktøj til forståelse af sociale og kultu- relle problematikker og sidstnævntes betydning for forståelse af film. Endvidere forsker han i de proces- ser som skaber en global kultur.

Introduktion Film er ikke nødvendigvis kun underholdning og æstetisk nydelse, ofte repræsenterer de vigtige samfundsmæssige, kulturelle og inter- kulturelle problemer. Til at skabe disse repræsentationer benytter film fortællinger, billeder og musik, og ved hjælp af disse har dens frembringelser en mægtig appel. Repræsentation er et vigtigt begreb for kulturstudier, men også for samfundsvidenskaber i al alminde- lighed. Da alle begreber kan udfyldes med forskellige meninger, vil jeg kort præsentere en forståelse af repræsentation, der er tæt knyt- tet til en fortolkende tilgang og til semiotik og diskurs som teorier og metoder. Jeg hævder i artiklen, at når filmen repræsenterer vigtige pro- blemstillinger i den faktiske verden, gør den det ofte og samtidig på en ideologisk og utopisk måde. Derfor opridser jeg to centrale til- gange til forståelse af ideologien, og hvordan den opererer og eks- pliciterer på, hvilken måde filmen samtidig indeholder ideologiske og utopiske elementer. Den empiriske genstand for min analyse og fortolkning er filmen Sin nombre (spansk: Uden navn), der repræsenterer to af den globa- liserede verdens grundlæggende spørgsmål: a) den illegale emigra- tion fra Syd mod Nord, i dette tilfælde fra Mellemamerika gennem Mexico til USA og b) ungdomsbanders vold, kriminalitet og paral-

Volume 03 146 ------147 Sin Nombre

Sin Nombre, Sin Nombre, Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo eller dødens tog, som fragttoget, der som fragttoget, der eller dødens tog, beast Det er min påstand, at hvis man ikke har en tilstrækkelig viden Ud over at se filmen som repræsentation, ideologi og utopi vil jeg vil utopi og ideologi repræsentation, som filmen se at over Ud elementer. Det er min hensigt at påvise, at det for at forstå disse ele disse forstå at for det at påvise, at hensigt min er Det elementer. og kulturelle sociale, bredere den inddrage at nødvendigt er menter historiske kontekst. Især når det handler om film som påpeget, rent æstetisk er af høj kvalitet. lyd Farver, og de intense scener støtter en god fortælling. analysere den ved hjælp af sociologiske begreber som risiko og transnationale bander.(Ruiz, 2003) Jeg ønsker at vise, hvordan Fukunagas af den navnkundige Mara Salvatrucha repræsentation Mexico gør gennem til USA og emigrationen fra Mellemamerika på en farverig og følelsesmættetdisse samfundsfænomener levende der karakteri Geertz har påpeget, er det dette, måde. Som Clifford ideologien serer som symbolsk system i modsætning til videnska utopiske, også men ideologiske, andre på ind også kommer Jeg ben. transporterer de illegale immigranter fra Mellemamerika gennemimmigranter fra Mellemamerika de illegale transporterer ikke er Filmen 2010) kaldt.(Rudzki-Weise, bliver USA, til og Mexico den tager vigtige samfundsmæssige og kun vedkommende, fordi kritikerne har den, som op, men også fordi eksistentielle spørgsmål have negative konsekvenser for de sociale og etniske grupper, der have negative konsekvenser for de sociale og etniske grupper, bliver repræsenteret. ideologi og utopi repræsentation, som Film betydning giver Vi meningen. til knyttet tæt er Repræsentationen tæn og mening til tingene ved at anvende dem: hvad vi siger, ker og føler om dem. Desuden giver vi mening til begivenheder, vi som systemer, symbolske de gennem genstande og mennesker hvor der eksisterer prototyper og situationer i den virkelig verden virkelig verden og situationer i den prototyper hvor der eksisterer for i filmen. vi bliver præsenteret og situationer, for de karakterer vil om man disse risikere at kontekster, forbigå ideologien og uto pien i filmen og på denne måde bekræfte dominerende diskurser, og kultu i samfundet og medierne om de sociale eksisterer som relle spørgsmål, som filmen tager op. Disse diskurser kan give en ensidig og partisk forståelse af vigtige samfundsproblemer og lelkultur. Filmen udkom i 2009 og er instrueret af den amerikanske Filmen udkom i 2009 og er instrueret lelkultur. filminstruktør Cary Fukunaga. Fukunaga foretog en grundigre i search form af interviews med og risikofulde ophold blandt de to grupper, som filmen beskæftiger sig med, ogrejste selv gennem Mexico i det berømte quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------148 Sin Nombre

Volume ”any object, act, event, 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo (Geertz, 1973: 91) eller Tegn symboler kan

I repræsentationsprocessen bruger vi tegn (Eco, 1977 og 1968/1999) og 1977 (Eco, tegn vi bruger repræsentationsprocessen I Kulturen beskæftiger sig specifikt med produktion og udveks der vi den marxistisk inspirerede ideologiforståelse, der udsprin der vi den marxistisk inspirerede ger af Marx og Engels’ som skrifter, har påvirket bl.a. Althusser, ideo til tilgange disse betegne kan Man Eagleton. og Eco Barthes, logien som kritiske. Her vil jeg nøjes med at gengive nogle ideer Umberto Eco. fra Eco den semiotikker fremtrædende og forfatter, og usammenhængende verdens at ideologi er et partisk mener, argumen og ord af valg i - skjule at ved karakteriseret er som syn, af ude er Ideologien relationer. og betydninger alternative - tation er der mere end én betydning, når det begiven gælder personer, betydnin om sted kamp en er der finder Ofte genstande. og heder Den måde, ger. vi kategoriserer verden på, vi de til betydninger, er det en vigtig derfor adfærd, lægger tingene, kan påvirke vores problemstilling, hvilke sociale eller betydninger, kulturelle fæno og kulturelle af vigtige sociale repræsentationer I deres mener får. som problemer, fx ungdomsbander og migrationen fra Syd mod kan film have ideologisk og utopisk indhold. Da der fin er, Nord des forskellige tilgange til ideologibegrebet, er det nødvendigt at præcisere det. Overordnet kan man hævde, at der findes to for skellige retning mht. til forståelse af begrebet. I den ene ende fin eller symboler som Clifford Geertz forstår dem: forstår Geertz Clifford som symboler eller as a vehicle for a conception-the conception which serves or relation quality, meaning.” is the symbol’s således være ord, lyde der eller optræder billeder, i stedet for et be andet i virkeligheden. eller greb ling af og betydninger, derfor kan vi sige, at medlemmer af en måde, hvilket ikke på samme kultur har tendens til at se verden at betyder, en kultur nødvendigvis er præget af konsensus, når Tværtimod, i enhver kultur det gælder betydninger og meninger. placerer placerer dem i. Disse symbolske systemer kan være kunst, reli gion, æstetik, videnskab eller idelogi (Geertz, 1973). Derfor kan og økonomiske fæ sociale grupper, af personer, vurdering vores ”virke selv om vi taler om den samme forskellige, nomener være ved personer og genstande mening får ting, lighed.” Endvidere den måde, vi repræsenterer dem på, de billeder eller den musik Film de er historier lige vi præcis fortæller. vi et bruger, mægtigt og musik fortælling, kombinerer de fordi repræsentationssystem, repræsentationer. billeder i deres quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------149 Sin Nombre

sociale og psykolo og ​​ sociale Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo Men film er ikke kunrepræsentation og ideologi. Ofte indehol I denne artikel vil jeg bruge begge forståelser af ideologien. Dvs. Repræsentanter for denne tilgang er Karl Mannheim (1960) og I den anden ende, når det gælder opfattelser af ideologien, finder ideologien, af opfattelser gælder det når ende, anden den I der de en utopisk dimension. Faktisk mener jeg, at Geertz’ forstå else bringer os nærmere denne dimension. Stuart Hall gjorde alle rede i “Notes on desconstructing The Popular” opmærksom på, at dobbelt en observere kan frembringelser populærkulturens i vi bevægelse. De samme produkter, der udtrykker de herskende ofte elementer af modstand og op drømme, indeholder gruppers til disse drømme. (Hall, 1981) rør i forhold videnskabens tempererede sprog, at symbolet kan udtrykke mere læsning lægger op til.komplekse betydninger end dets et orienteringssystem i for som at for mig kan ideologien fungere hold til problematiske virkeligheder: hvordan kan det være, at de ekstremt er der bander, i ind går Mexico i og Mellemamerika i unge begi hvorfor Eller det? for livet risikere at til parate er og voldelige ver unge fra disse områder sig ud på en rejse fuld af risici for at udengå også kan orienteringssystem dette Men USA? i ind komme for dens er som virkelighed, problematiske den af sider vigtige om tolkende genstand. den amerikanske antropolog Clifford Geertz (1973), som har været været har som (1973), Geertz Clifford antropolog amerikanske den en imod drejning samfundsvidenskabernes bag hovedpersonerne tilgang. For Geertz er ideologi et fortolkende eller hermeneutisk tilbyderDen virkelighed. problematisk en over kort foreløbig slags af tilrettelæggelsen for plan eller skabelon en os ideologien i kraft af ma forklarer som De retninger, giske processer. mangler ifølge Geertz eller psykiske spændinger, terielle interesser en hvordan forståelse De symbolske for, tager systemer opererer. ikke i betragtning, at symbolet kan udlede sin styrke fra dets evne der undviger og formidle sociale realiteter, til at opfatte, formulere stand til at redegøre for den kompleksitet, der findes i modstri Eco, 1977:457-472) (Eco, 1968: 156-183; felter. dende semantiske Dvs. måde. på ideologi på en ikke evaluerende vi dem, der tænker man udtaler sig ikke på forhånd om et fordrejet, forvansket eller som tilslutter sig denne ideologien. De teoretikere, falskt indhold af symbolske eller ideer overbevisninger, som ideologi forstår tilgang, Indholdet af systemer. disse overbevisninger og ideer er ikke nød vendigvis negativt eller problematisk. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------150 Sin Nombre

Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo 1 eventyr og rejseafstand. Desuden har de fantastiske teknolo fantastiske de har Desuden rejseafstand. og ​​ eventyr Videre ser vi Casper komme ind i en kollektiv taxa og få penge få penge og taxa i en kollektiv Casper komme ind vi ser Videre Film som medie har mange muligheder, når det gælder om at få har mange muligheder, Film som medie imidlertid ikke vanskeligt at afkode tegnet, der står for, at han har imidlertid ikke vanskeligt at afkode tegnet, der står for, dræbt en modstander eller fjende. ejeren fra penge modtager han da sker, samme Det chaufføren. af os men vi kan slutte ved det ikke med sikkerhed, af en kiosk. Vi til, at pengene gives for beskyttelse, og at La Mara lever af det. Filmen beskriver livet i banden som værende hårdt og brutalt, regeret af selvskabte regler og med en rig symbolverden. Fra de ro, der kendetegner en person, som har affundet sig med det liv sig med det liv en person, som har affundet der kendetegner ro, landska Der er noget meditativt over situationen, som han lever. tatoveringernetil mærke lægger Vi understreger. musikken og bet på hans arme og mave og, da han resolut rejser sig, ser vi, at han men de også har dem på ryggen. Der er adskillige tatoveringer, virker ikke frygtindgydende, som dem vi ser hos bandens leder, Casper da brat, brydes stemning rolige den og Stilheden Lil’Mago. kommer ud på gaden, hvor musikken og gadelarmen markerer, på hans ansigt at vi er i det sydlige Mexico. Kameraet fokuserer kan ikke og afkode en disseny tatovering under øje. hans Vi højre For de indviede er det vi ikke kender La Maras koder. tegn, fordi Casper, Smiley og La Mara Salvatrucha Casper, Filmen tegner et billede af den berømte og berygtede bande gen nem miljøer personer, og situationer og er centreret omkring to også kal som han eller Willy, Den ene ”Casper” hovedkarakterer. des, er medlem af banden La Mara i i byen det Tapachula sydlige Mexico. Han bliver kaldt Casper af sine ”homies” (kammerater) i banden, mens han overfor folk udenfor og især overfor de piger, han kommer i kontakt med og for at beskytte dem, giver sig til I begyndelsen kende af som filmenWilly. ser vi derroligt Casper, og sørgmodigt betragter et efterårslandskab, mens han ryger en stoisk vis af en karakter er præget om hans Det er som cigaret. os til at tænke, overveje om forestille os en bedre fremtid os på til en at kri fremtid tænke, os overveje en om bedre forestille en ver Appellen tisk af måde. billedets ornament, lysende display, af den der den forbedrer magiske fortælling, som kan giske muligheder, have et utopisk indhold. Filmen kan som en dagdrøm, åben, med udgør Den latent. er der hvad forudse, opfindsomhed fantastisk en et forskønnende spejl. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------151 Sin Nombre

Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo

2 La Mara viser ingen nåde overfor medlemmerne af andre bander. bander. andre af medlemmerne overfor nåde ingen viser Mara La Konflikten mellem Lil’Mago og Casper idet eskalerer, lederen Casper har et forhold til en pige, der hører til i et andet kvarter, til i et andet kvarter, en pige, der hører til Casper har et forhold forsøger at voldtage Marta, og da hun gør modstand og forsøger at er, hun hvor om, spørgsmål Caspers Til ihjel. slået hun bliver flygte episode denne Efter hende”. tog ”Djævlen svare: at med han nøjes beordrer lederen Casper og Smiley at deltage i plyndringen af de illegale emigranter fra Mellemamerika, der har krydset grænsen til Mexico, på deres rejse mod USA. Her forenes de to hovedperso ners historier. medlemmerne. efter at han har overstået indviel Smiley, Således tvinges drengen sen, til at dræbe et medlem af en anden bande ved at skyde ham i par liget bliver Bagefter våben. et til fortjent sig gøre at for hovedet Smiley og fortæller trøster og hundene får kødet. Lil’Mago teret Mara er der for evigt. Nu sig, men at La ham, at smerten vil foretage en i med du er ”Nu grænser: uden fællesskab et i indgå drengen vil familie og har mange tusinde Uanset brødre. hvor du tager han, er for dig.” der nogen, der sørger drengen Smiley. Begge lyver drengen Smiley. overfor banden for at skjule, at Ca Casper mellem Modsætningerne Marta. med tid sin tilbringer sper på den ene side og Lil’Mago og banden på den anden kommer til udtryk/udløses for første gang, da bandens leder indkalder Smi skal gennemgå ud på, at drengen ley til indvielsesritualet, som går og tildeler medlemmer sparker De andre en kollektiv afstraffelse. ikke er tæller til 13. Da sidstnævnte slag, mens lederen ham hårde styrken af slagene gentager han det samme tal. Mens med tilfreds til at ritualet gennemføres Lil’Mago nyder situation og kræver noget ubehag, føler Casper at tilskuere, som vi ser prikke, og punkt som muliggør en identifikation mellem tilskuerne og ét af bande tatoverede kroppe og ansigter til det specielle kropsprog, som som kropsprog, specielle det til ansigter og kroppe tatoverede ”los homies” anvender. Marta. Han skjuler dette forhold for banden og dens leder Lil’ hvor kvarter, det fra banden med krig i er banden fordi Dels Mago. hun hvis hende, med sex kræve vil lederen fordi dels og bor, Marta skal være en del af banden. Forholdet mellem Casper og Marta er risikabelt, det indeholder en potentiel og farlig konflikt mellem Casper og bandens Desuden leder. er Casper en slags mentor for quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------152 Sin Nombre

Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo for ham. Han ved udmærket, the point of no return falder i søvn, men Sayra advarer ham. Der opstår et bånd mellem hjælpe at med ved Sayra bliver advarsler farens af trods på og to, de også forsøger at slippe hende. Da Casper manden, der har reddet væk fra Sayra, for at hun ikke skal komme til at dele hans skæbne, har hun fordi Casper, efter følger og onklen og faren fra hun flygter forelsket sig i ham. Resten af filmen ser vi Casper og Sayras vilde alle i netværk et har der Mara, La af forfulgt tættere og tættere flugt slutningen lykkes Ved byer. det for Sayra med hjælp fra Casper at rer, at rer, et uvejr nærmer sig. Næsten samtidig med den voldsomme regn begynder Lil’Mago, Casper og Smiley at overfalde de rejsen de. Mens de tre er i gang med vold at tage penge og ejendele fra den smukke Sayra og forsøger atimmigranterne, opdager Lil’Mago Situa afmægtige vidner. og onklen er hende, mens faren voldtage tionen bliver alligevel for meget som for har Casper, friske minder om voldtægten af hans kæreste, og han slår lederen ihjel med sin machete. Dette er at han fra det øjeblik er dødsdømt; La Maras kodeks kræver det. Derfor sender han Smiley tilbage, for at denne sidste ikke skal dele hans skæbne. Nogle emigranter forsøger at slå Casper ihjel, da han over for hende, at i Honduras er der ikke nogen fremtid for hende: der ikke nogen fremtid over for hende, at i Honduras er tager sted, og vi ser dem Sayra”. De tre ”Du har ingen muligheder, gå mange timer gennem plantager for til sidst at krydse en flod på Da de kommer ind i Me grænsen mellem Guatemala og Mexico. xico, bliver mange af dem straks anholdt af politiet, som tager alt hvad med de Al sig har og af tvinger værdi dem til at tage tøjet af. at gemme som har prøvet det hele før, ligevel lykkes det for faren, Sayra, at af toget, fortæller faren nogle penge. Mens de venter på alle der de starter immigranter, rejsen, når halvdelen aldrig frem. gennem sætter i gang og kører med immigranterne på taget Toget indike vanddråber og Vind landskaber. drømmeagtige og smukke Sayra og rejsen mod Nord Sayra og rejsen Honduras. Hun bor sammen Sayra er en ung pige fra Tegucigalpa, der har Faderen, stiftet familie i USA, er blevet med sin bedstemor. hun var som han ikke har set, siden igen datteren, udvist og møder barn. Han vil gerne have sin bror og datteren med til New Jersey, hvor hans nye kone og to små døtre Sayra bor. er en meget selv stændig og selvbevidst ung pige. Denne information bliver genta hun hvis at onkel, sin hun svarer Således filmen. i gange mange get ville tage nordpå, kunne hun gøre det alene. Onklen understreger quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------153 Sin Nombre

Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo Sayras onkel og far er i filmen symboler på de illegale immigran illegale de på symboler filmen i er far og onkel Sayras lederen. Der er ikke plads til et privatliv. Ritualerne, reglerne, de reglerne, Ritualerne, Der er ikke plads til et privatliv. lederen. af folk, kræn den sadistiske vold, afpresningen kroppe, tatoverede immigranterne, fra tyveri og børn af afstraffelsen kvinder, af kelsen fra ofte og uforståeligt fremmed, noget som forekommer dette alt vi fordi Men historien virker, stødende for den almindelige tilskuer. kan identificere os med Casper og De delvis utopiske med Smiley. elementer i filmen udtrykker sig gennem Caspers ubehag ved ri tualerne og gennem hans handlinger: han bryder med reglerne på den findes der hvor antikke adgangen indvielsesritualer, til fælles skabet går gennem smerten. Lederen og de andre medlemmer er mishandle at nok ikke det er dem For ubarmhjertige. og grusomme og henrette medlemmer de af giver andre bander, deres kød som mad til hundene og viser på den måde barskhed og foragt. De af stjæler presser, og Medlemmerne voldtager. rekrutteres som børn, attil kommer banden og Smiley, karakteren gennem det ser vi som udgøre en stor familie med medlemmer på tværs af landene (Mel lemamerika, Mexico og USA). Man kan altid regne med fælleskab og beskyttelse, hvis man tilhører La Mara. Men prisen er høj: af straffelse eller døden, hvis man bryder reglerne eller ikke adlyder verne MS i underlæben som anerkendelse af hans bedrift. verne MS i underlæben som anerkendelse Onklen bliver ter. fanget og deporteret tilbage til Honduras af det mexicanske politi, mens idet faren dør, han flygter fra det samme politi og falder ned imellem vognene i toget, en skæbne som også i virkeligheden rammer illegale immigranter. ideologi og utopi i filmen Repræsentation, Filmen skildrer La Mara som en bande, der har skabt en parallel verden, ’Destroyer’ hedder det sted i filmen, hvor banden huserer, ver denne I virkning. Maras La for metafor udmærket en er det og krydse grænsen til USA og få kontakt med sin papfamilie i New Jer og få kontakt til USA krydse grænsen Rejsen slutter sey. lykkeligt for hende, som symbolet på de mange der har held illegale til immigranter, at komme ind i det forjættede der dræber sin tid land. Casper bliver indhentet, og det er Smiley, hæv er under anklage, idet han ikke han selv fordi mentor, ligere slå Casper og At opspore med det samme. på lederen nede mordet at ihjel banden ham er accepterer igenden pris, han skal betale for, og for at blive fuldt hvordan medlem. han ser, Vi ved slutningen af filmen får en smertefuld, men æresfuld tatovering med bogsta quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------154 Sin Nombre

Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo På den rejse, som migranterne fra Mellemamerika påbegynder påbegynder Mellemamerika fra migranterne som rejse, den På Skuespillerne er alle latinos og taler spansk med socio- eller re Hvis Casper er undtagelsen mht. de prototypiske medlemmer de prototypiske Hvis Casper er undtagelsen mht. Filmen virker også, fordi den viser andre sider af La Mara. Vi ser sider af La Mara. Vi den viser andre fordi Filmen virker også, rejse (Philipsen, 2010). Det er på sin plads at huske, at migranter og migranter at huske, at plads sin på er Det 2010). (Philipsen, rejse flygtninge er med til at give globaliseringen dens karakter af be karakter anden helt en af er bevægelighed denne men vægelighed, eller fod studerende akademikere, end den, som forretningsfolk, Derfor vil jeg bruge det snarere sociologi boldspillere praktiserer. ”risiko” for at forstå fænomenet. ske begreb der gennem Mexico, møder mennesker, til USA for at nå frem og Mexico. mange af gionale dem dialekter, er uden erfaringer fra filmverden. im og Mara La hos research Fukanagas med sammen skaber Dette og troværdigt. realistisk migranterne et værk, der forekommer den sociale verden og Filmen Den farefulde rejse, som emigranterne begiver sig ud på, er et af klassificere at malplaceret mig forekommer Det temaer. centrale de denne som rejse, de illegale emigranter fra Mellemamerika foreta dannelses en som Mexico, gennem USA til hjemland deres fra ger engageret i medlemmernes liv. For drengen Smiley betyder bandens betyder Smiley drengen For liv. medlemmernes i engageret accept og anerkendelse alt. gælder det samme for Sayra, når af La Mara i den sociale verden, stærk og en som Hun fremstilles til immigranterne. man refererer bange er ikke som og, meninger egne med kvinde ung selvstændig Fukanaga har ønsket dem. sin far og onkel og forlade for at trodse at gøre op med det billede der af fremstiller latinokvinder, dem livet er at tage sig og hvis formål med uselvstændige passive, som af Sayra så mændene repræsenterer og tilfredsstille deres behov. ledes et håb om en bedre fremtid for kvinderne i Mellemamerika grund grund af sin kærlighed til en pige fra et andet kvarter og dræber at voldtage en ung pige. Hvis han forsøger fordi til sidste lederen, Casper i filmens univers er den, som bærer fortællingen set fra et et atypisk er er han en undtagelse, idet han sociologisk perspektiv, og oprørsk medlem. musik sam kvinder i gang med at spise eller høre de unge og deres omsorgs filmen i han er grusom, være kan lederen om selv og men, han er desuden og armene; i bærer ofte han som søn sin overfor fuld quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------155 Sin Nombre

præsenterer os præsenterer Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo Sin Nombre ) begge ting samtidig. De mest Sin nombre Når vi ser på den socioøkonomiske baggrund i disse lande, kan vi kan lande, disse i baggrund socioøkonomiske den på ser vi Når Desuden vil migranterne på deres odyssé møde andre forhin i fattigdom. (DeCesare, 1998:5). I Honduras lever 47,7 % i ekstrem ekstrem i % 47,7 lever Honduras I 1998:5). (DeCesare, fattigdom. i Kvinderne måneden. om dollars 60 under indtægter med fattigdom diskri graviditeter, udsat for fattigdom, tidlige i Honduras er mere mination i og uden for familien og for seksuel chikane inden og udenfor uddannelsesinstitutionerne (Nihil Olivera :5). Med denne piger, unge de at hævde, at ironisk lidt det virker mente in baggrund som Sayra repræsenterer i filmen,rejser til USA på dannelsesrejse, sådan som Philipsen hævder i sin analyse af filmen. for, og de motiver, folk har for at emigrere eller for at leve det barske det leve at for eller emigrere at for har folk motiver, de og for, I El Salvador ud lever. som medlemmerne af La Mara liv, og usikre lever børnene af ¾ og befolkningen af halvdelen næsten unge de gør området mellem Guatemala og Mexico kendetegnes af en tæt flo og overvinde, og krydse skal migranterne som bjerge og floder ra, Faunaen udgør også en det udsætter de sig for fare. ved at gøre og er årsagen til malaria der moskitoer slanger og af form i risiko Endelig ved den at gule i rejse feber. fragttoget de risikerer at mi ste en legemsdel eller at blive klemt. filmen som fænomener, to de forstå bedre 2003) I filmen ser vi, hvordan Sayra, hendes far og vær deres onkel alle aflevere bliver og af tøj deres tage at til tvunget og fanget er De private modstandere digenstande til det mexicanske politi. sider begge på opererer der Salvatrucha, Mara La som banderne, af grænsen, og andre bander som stjæler eller nogle voldtager, gange (som det vises i udsatte blandt de illegale migranter er børn og De kvinder. risi at kerer bliver bortført og solgt til adoption eller til i prostitution Mexico eller USA. (Ruiz, 2003:15) Grænse tab. og skader dem påføre kan hensigt uden der dringer, udgør en trussel eller fare, og som kommer til at skade dem fy og som kommer til at eller fare, udgør en trussel sisk og psykisk, bringer dem i fare eller ødelægge deres projekt. som en fortælling, Man hvor kan vi anskue kan rejsen se forskel og scenarier for os. Fra det øjeblik, hvor migranterne lige aktører forlader deres hjem, findes der modstandere, der ønsker at på kunne inddele dem i officielle og private. De Vi føre dem skader. kom på forskellige niveauer, første er myndighederne i Mexico penge ud af migranterne, presser munalt, føderalt og nationalt. De bestjæler dem og sætter dem i fængsel uden vand og mad. (Ruiz quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------156 Sin Nombre

Disse diskurser Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo tough in crime. fremstiller La Maras vold som et samfundsfænomen, La Maras vold fremstiller Bander og kliker udviklede sig i fattige storbyer i Mellemameri Ungdomsvolden og banderne i Mellemamerika har som bagrund som har Mellemamerika i banderne og Ungdomsvolden Mellemamerika af unge, der i midten af firserne for protesterede at unge var medlemmer Deres byer. store de i transport billigere kræve butikker og forretninger. som plyndrede eller studerende, arbejdere sek de protestantiske hvor og moderne enklaver, ka, som havde få analfabe funktionelle var Mange unge. de blandt især voksede, ter og der ter, var store arbejdsløshed blandt dem. Banderne tilbød de samfunds nyliberale den som usikkerhed, den til alternativ et unge dominerende samfundsdiskurser. dominerende de politiske nederlag, samfundsprojekter som venstreorienterede oplevede i Latinamerika i 70’erne og 80’erne. De blev erstattet af og tilbage, sig trak staten at betød som eksperimenter, neoliberale den I gennemført. blev politikker økonomiske og finansielle barske ne som kontekst tog ungdomskulturen afspejlede i de nye former, de ikke som tilhørsforhold, søgen efter identitet, referenter, deres kunne finde såsom i skolen, traditionelle kirken institutioner, og fa milien. Disse tilbød ikke passende alternativer til den krise, som samfundet oplevede. Som prototype startedes ungdomsbanderne i og de risici som immigranterne udsættes fof. Man kan ikke forståog de risici som immigranterne den betydning som ungdomsvolden har fået uden at sætte den i relation til der de har diskurser, skabt social frygt og en legitime ring af nødvendigheden af at være ungdoms fænomenet forenkle og dæmonisere at til med har været offentlige den af bearbejdning med bidraget de har Desuden vold. krænkerder løsninger, autoritære af accept en imod hen mening La 2005) (Reguillo, demokratiet. skader og menneskerettighederne og immigranter lider af disse politikker, Mara er delvis et produkt disse sammenhænge i sin re at udelade Ved under dens effekter. filmen reproducerer samfundsfænomener to disse af præsentation Transnationale bander i en globaliseringstid Transnationale Sin Nombre del af Mellemamerika og i den sydelige og trives i der eksisterer Mexico. Emigrationen til USA, hvis årsager kun hentydes (ingen fremtid for de unge), og den hårdhændede behandling af immi der også er granterne af i Mexico som fremstilles problematikker, grænset til de ovennævnte lande. I den sociale verden er begge har de amerikanske regeringer fænomener tæt knyttet til USA, og via deres politik haft en betydelig rolle mht. La Maras udvikling quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------157 Sin Nombre

Den mest oplagte Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo Spanglish. . La Mara er blevet mere udviklet og sofistikeret i forhold til den en os for konstruerer fortælling og repræsentation Fukanagas I 1992, efter optøjerne og urolighederne i Angeles, Los begyndte La Mara Salvatrucha, der hærger i Mellemamerika (El Salvador, følge heraf voksede narko kriminalitet i området betydeligt og sam og betydeligt området i kriminalitet narko voksede heraf følge volden. tidig eskalerede aktiviteter: kriminelle deres til og (AK-47) besidder de våben af type narko, biltyveri, lejemord, beskyttelse og transport af immigranter Arana, 2005) ne, m.fl. (Reguillo, 2005; re Denne problemer. sociale presserende af fortolkning foreløbig tragtet, som dem der var med til at fremme urolighederne. Den kri urolighederne. at fremme tragtet, som dem der var med til minelle lavalder blev sat ned, og børn og unge kom nu i fængsel. Mel til dem deportere at man begyndte fængselsophold endt Efter eller havde var født i USA lemamerika, selv om de nogle gange skærpet, sanktionerne blev Samtidig statsborgerskab. amerikansk kun spirituskørsel eller tyveri som forbrydelser små selv at således ne medføre udvisning. Som resultat af denne politik blev omkring udvist slumkvarterer Angeles’s Los op i vokset var der unge, 20.000 og kendte, knapt de som lande, til sendt blev De Mellemamerika. til mange af dem talte kun engelsk eller mulighed for dem var at tilslutte sig de fungerende Som bander. lem militæret lem og militæret oligarkiet, der i 1980erne bekæmpede et bondeop der rør, tog form af en guerillabevægelse. De børn, der kom til Los Angeles sammen med deres forældre som flygtninge, havde set fa miliemedlemmer eller venner blive mishandlet og af henrettet mili overarbejde, havde der forældre, med familier i op voksede og tæret ofte med traumer og/eller Ofte alkoholproblemer. ignorerede eller undgik fællesskabet dem. I banden fandt de beskyttelse imod vol afroamerikan organiserede og etablerede de imod og hjemmet i den ske og mexicanske bander. politiet at have en ”get tough”- tilgang til banderne, der blev be orden og vilde kapitalisme havde skabt. De unge fandt hos dem endem hos fandt unge De skabt. havde kapitalisme vilde og orden alternativ socialisering, tilhørsforhold, levevej og en parallel sym mod solidaritet, fælleskab, ære, hvor verden, værdimæssig og bolsk eksi det på svar et de var måde denne På nøgletegn. var respekt og unge. og et alternativ for de skuffede politiske vakuum sterende del af Mexico i dag, har sineHonduras, Guatemala) og den sydlige rødder i USA. Den opstod blandt børn af flygtninge fra borgerkri gen i El Salvador; en borgerkrig, hvor USA støttede alliancen mel quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------158 Sin Nombre

Sin Nombre Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo er et kulturelt objekt skabt af Cary Fukunaga. Den ud Den Fukunaga. Cary af skabt objekt kulturelt et er Gennem filmen forstår vi, hvordan dens banden vær fungerer, dier, normer og ritualer. Vi følger karakteren Casper forstår hans følger karakteren Vi normer og ritualer. dier, ind Vi ihjel. slår senere han som Lil’Mago, lederen med konflikter der fra at være ser den betydning, banden har Smiley, for drengen kommer Caspers også ven til ender at med for at slå ham ihjel. Vi til det i forhold verden La Mara udgør en parallel stå, hvordan samfund der omgiver den. Men vi får ikke noget at vide om, hvor og risici. Det samme gør et liv med vold for disse unge accepterer Sin Nombre gør en repræsentation ved at indeholde historier og der billeder, og farlige af den aggressive forståelse til at påvirke vores kommer Mel fra emigranter illegale de af også og Salvatrucha Mara La lemamerika, som rejser gennem Mexico til USA. Som fortælling rejse, en i forenet bliver skæbner forskellige to fordi filmen, virker Den ene er Casper, to unge menneskers liv. ændrer afgørende som betaler og lederen dræber og oprør gør der banden, af medlem det med livet for det. Den anden er Sayra, en ung pige fra Honduras, der sammen med sin far og onkel vil ind i USA. Projektet lykkes som hjælperen. der virker Casper, for hende takket været lerede i Mexicos sydelig grænse og ikke kun i grænsen mellem Mexicos sydelig grænse og ikke kun i grænsen mellem i lerede sidste de i firedoblet blevet er grænsepatruljer hvor USA Mexicoog årtier og hvor siden 1995 end er mere 5000 lige af immigranter ble nemt for de amerikanske eller europæiske vet fundet. Det er relativ at forstå og føle med de stakkels migranter fra Mellem tilskuere amerika der i deres rejser gennem Mexico blev bestjålet og mis handlet af den mexicanske politi og banderne, men i immigranterne rolle til USA’s undgår at stille spørgsmålstegn skæbne og ungdomsbanders udvikling. Afsluttende betragtninger præsentation er ideologisk i den forstand, at han ikke kommer indideologisk i den forstand, at han præsentation er på den rolle, som USA har haft i Mellemamerika: i borgerkrigene, libe nye af etableringer ulighederne, af bevarelsen undertrykkelse, sig til forholde ikke at har svækket staterne. Ved rale politikker der eller eksotiserer virkelighed naturaliserer den del af den sociale Fukanaga La Maras vold. Ligeledes får vi i filmen intet at vide om for at slå ned på migranterne på Mexico siden 1980’erne pres USA’s fra andre lande, der rejste gennem Mexico til USA. Det vil sige at immigranterne al apparat møde og immigrations politik USA’s quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------159 Sin Nombre

Nacla Repport on Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo engene der tilhører kvarteret. engene der tilhører , Vol. 32 Issue 1. , Vol. , March 20. , March Times ping Journey” The New York the Americas , Vol. 84, Nº 3. Affairs, Vol. i Foreign Til gengæld indeholder filmen også utopiske elementer i form af Til Se http://mx.answers.yahoo.com/question/ index?qid=20070717214149AAlC8S7 Homies stammer fra “home boys”: dr

De Cesare, Donna (1998). “The children of war” i i war” of children “The (1998). Donna Cesare, De Referencer Ana Arana (2005) “How America” the Central Street Gangs Took Train-Hop in Crisscross Lives “Desperate (2009). Manohla Dargis Notes 1 2 sig gældende mht. migranterne. Vi kan godt føle med dem og sæt kan migranterne. Vi sig gældende mht. te os ind i, hvordan det må være at gå mange timer gennem uende at være det må te os ind i, hvordan blive bestjålet af og politi chikaneret krydse floder, lige plantager, forfulgt og bander af angrebet fragttog et af taget på dage i rejse et, af andre politikfolk. Men filmen giver os næsten ingen viden om, hvorfor disse mennesker indlader sig på en så farefuld rejse, og filmen det fungerer at gøre hvad det er der driver dem til det. Ved disse samfundsfænomener: som ideologisk, idet den naturaliserer tilskuer sidder man tilbage med det indtryk, at alt det, som de re og me af mellemamerikanernes et produkt må være præsenterer, programmering. xikanernes kulturelle med hovedpersonerne. associerer som vi og handlinger, de værdier Caspers ubehag og tøven stillet overfor den ekstreme vold i indvi Hans oprør og af modstandere. elsesritualerne eller elimineringen af sidstnævntes forkærlighed for at på grund af lederen henrettelse hans voldtage hjælp piger, til Sayra for at hun kan sit realisere mål mm.af ”lati en ny type Sayra for sit vedkommende repræsenterer tør trodse som stærke meninger, na”, en ung pige med sine egne og Hendes mod, eller faderens der onkelens ideer eller beslutninger. red der mand, den følge at ved tager hun beslutning, den i sig viser og også i dede hende, og som hendes fælleskab frygter og foragter, den beslutsomhed, som at gør, hun er den eneste i familien, for til USA. I den forstand udgør hvem det lykkes at krydse grænsen utopien. hun et symbol for dem, der realiserer quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------Cali La al 160 . Barce Mord og Sin Nombre Document

. Boston, MA: . New : York Basic Volume 04 Barcelona : Lumen. 1977. Barcelona Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo . Barcelona : Paidós, 2005. Paidós, : Barcelona . www.grin.com/ http://dissidentvoice.org/2009/05/ 200. , London : Arnold. , London : , London : Routledge, 1960. People’s history and socialist theory People’s Cultures and Societies in a Changing World, World, Changing a Societies in and Cultures London: Sage, 1997.Hansen, Kim Toft, Sage, 1997.Hansen, Kim Toft, London: Ideology and Utopia. An Introduction to the Socio to Introduction An and Utopia. Ideology The Interpretation of Cultures The Interpretation Representation: Cultural Representations and Signi Cultural Representations Representation: Ideología. Una Introducción Tratado de Semiotica General, de Semiotica General, Tratado La Estructura Ausente. Introducción a la semiótica Introducción La Estructura Ausente. Nueva Sociedad Film Studies , Aalborg Universitetsforlag, 2012. Aalborg , http://imprasc.net:29572/PerfilesNacionales/Documents/ v, 10. v, http://www.comparte.org/docs/Dossier%20Honduras.pdf un perfil del riesgo en la migración indocumentada internacional” indocumentada migración la en riesgo del perfil un i M%C3%A9xico/F06.pdf i Nombre” Sin Fukunaga’s in tation V163359. Nr. logy of Knowledge i Review of Sin Nombre” i the-dangers-of-not-thinking-politically-a-review-of-sin-nombre/ nummer 36. exceso” i fying Practices, i det overnaturlige og guddommelige det absolutte, Det – metafysik krimien Books, 1973. 2008. Press, fornia: Pine Forge sentación e ideología. Notas para un abordaje crítico” i jaba lona : Lumen, 1968/1999. Williams, muel, R. (ed.), Routledge and Kegan Poul. Ruiz Olivia (2003) “La Migración centroamericana en la frontera sur: frontera la en centroamericana Migración “La (2003) Olivia Ruiz Jannis Rudzki-Weise (2010). “Without a Name – Latino Represen Mannheim, Karl, Mannheim, pobreza” de sentencia una “Honduras, (1998). Mauricio Olivera Nihil Nevins, Joseph (2009). ”The Dangers of Not Thinking Politically: A Philipsen Heidi (2010). “Home – out – homie”. I 16:9, 8. Årgang, el con afiliación y contingencia Mara: “La (2005). Rossana Reguillo Hall Stuart (ed.), Geertz, Clifford, Wendy, Griswold Paula Imagen, (2006). Cine repre y estudios de Laguarda género: Eagleton, Terry, Eagleton, Terry, Umberto, Eco Humberto, Eco, Linda& Gledhill Christine I “Dream/Factory” (2000) M. Jane Gaines, Hall Stuart (1981) “Notes on deconstructing ‘The Popular’. I Sa quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - 161 Sin Nombre

Volume 04 Pablo Rolando Cristoffanini Rolando Pablo Multiculturalismo, cine y medios de comu de medios y cine Multiculturalismo, Barcelona: Paidós, 2002, (1994). Barcelona: nicación, Shohat Ella & Stam Robert, Stam & Ella Shohat quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Writing the Mists of Memory The Narrative Journeys of Henri Michaux and Nicolas Bouvier

Lénia Marques is a Lecturer in Imagineering at the Academy for Leisure, NHTV Breda University of Applied Sciences (The Netherlands). She holds a PhD in Comparative Literature from 2007 at the Universidade de Aveiro (Por- tugal). In 2012 she was co-editor of Intercultural Crossings: Conflict, Memory and Identity (P.I.E. Peter Lang). Her current research focuses on Comparative Literature, Cultural Tourism and Cultural Projects and Management. Recent publications include papers on literature and the arts, travel literature, literary tourism and creative tourism.

The narrative journeys of Henri Michaux and Nicolas Bouvier are the fruit of complex and dynamic processes that deal in first in- stance with memory. If imagination plays an important role in their writing, and mainly in Michaux’s, the blanks in the memory, these holes that make episodes misty are important not only in the forget- fulness they represent, but also by the re-construction exercise they motive in a more or less inventive way. The act of writing is here understood as an act appropriation and transformation of time and of space, with resource to Deleuze and Guattari’s notions such as rhizome, lines of flight, (de)/(re)territorialisation, and smooth and striated spaces. Beyond the difficulties and often the pain inherent to the act of writing lies the significant change of the writer who experiences therefore a metamorphic process through the exercise of writing and memory.

Henri Michaux (Namur, 1899 – Paris, 1984) and Nicolas Bouvier (Geneva, 1929-1998) are two travellers who write about their experi- ences between the real and the imaginary.1 Each journey motivates new experiences and consequently provokes significant changes at various levels. Writing is subsequent to travel and it entails, there- fore, a mnemonic effort. Memory has indeed a main role in the act of

Volume 04 162 ------163

Lénia Marques Lénia Ecuador was one of Volume 04 Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing Whilst both adventurous and con- 3 Their stories of travel reflect their own personal paths as trav as paths personal own their reflect travel of stories Their 2 In this paper, I propose to analyse the metamorphosis motivated to analyse the metamorphosis I propose In this paper, Franco European two are Bouvier Nicolas and Michaux Henri 1. Stories of travel in the humanity that marks the evolu is an act inherent Travelling storytelling and writing becomes not only a filter of experiences, but experiences, of filter a only not becomes writing and storytelling that follows its own of also course, re-construction an more exercise past.the to belongs that experience real the of independently less or by some journeys of the writers, enhancing the difficulties, often the we will look into of writing. Firstly, to the act the pain, inherent come to life, in which context travelling and analyse how stories between out the differences and with which motivations, pointing the physical and geographical journeys and those that are more we will look into the threads Afterwards, mental and imaginative. as survival of forgetfulness of memory and the necessary presence transfor and appropriation the in creativity for sphere a as also but will look into the challenge we mation of time and space. Finally, and resistance of both writers to the boundaries imposed by lan geographies look mental how understanding memory, and guage for constant deterritorialisations. have journeys These today. is it what species our makes which tion always had different objectives and have therefore served distinct portraying the adventures purposes. The primitive cave paintings of hunters are the Westernfirst signs written that bear witness to great stories of journeys. For centuries the same need for storytell ing, in particular surrounding journeys, has continued: in distinct means though the need for sharing and different ways and through dissemination in space and time seems to be similar. phone travellers of the 20th century whose writing skills particu their of literature travel the of panorama the from emerge larly time. temporaries they had never met although only 30 years separated to Bouvier and them. Michaux was a reference the latter’s most prominent bedside books. Often he recited by heart the verses written by Michaux depicting a poetical way of et vieille une Dans / caravelle, une dans “Emportez-moi departing: ellers, artists and, of course, human beings. Their nomad spirit wasspirit nomad Their beings. human course, of and, artists ellers, attracted to the East with Michaux having a special connection to China while Bouvier to Japan. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

- - - - - 6 Ecua 164 (Roger, (Roger, Voyage en Voyage ] [1933], he Report from Report from

[ Lénia Marques Lénia Au pays de la Au pays de la Other journeys . , in fact based on a Le Poisson-Scorpion Volume 04 ] (1936), ] (1967), which became ] (1975) In Michaux’s works, theworks, Michaux’s In Ici, Poddema 4 Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing Ecuador

5 ] (1963), ] A Barbarian in Asia A Japan [ 171). [ Japon ] (1941) or Japanese Chronicles [ Voyage to Great Garaban to Great Voyage (1981) and Un Barbare en Asie Un Barbare

The Way of the World The Way [ ] [ can be read “à la lumière de l’époque où génocides, où l’époque de lumière la “à read be can 7 ] (1946), ] In the Country of Magic [ Chronique japonaise Chronique , which is presented as a frustrated attempt of a travel journal, The case for Michaux was a bit different. He also travelled a lot, This journey will end about four years later in Japan and it will be will it and Japan in later years four about end will journey This The Scorpion-Fish The Magie Poddema grandes purges et autres purifications ethniques révélaient un sys tème d’esclavage généralisable à l’ensemble de l’humanité” Poddemaïs, are inspired Poddemaïs, and inspired are nourished by the geographical jour neys actually done by Michaux. It is in this sense that Jérôme Roger imaginary places, such as the narratives of that points out Grande Garabagne later first this Bouvier’showever in life, present been have narratives and until his last days.long journey would act as a marker but after his second work based on a physical experience of travel, to birth gave which abandoned the idea of writing based on particular trips (with more narrating real Therefore, characteristics). or less traditional or trendy journeys, places and people was cast off and from that moment on he dedicated his time and writing to imaginary worlds. However, these imaginary places and people, such as the Émanglons or the more more than twenty years apart from the journey that proved essen writer Swiss work. In 1953, the tial in Nicolas Bouvier´s life and to travel friend, Thierry Vernet, decides, together with his painter point the described Bouvier and made is decision The East. towards as follows: “Nous avions deux ans devant nous et de of departure de dans mais vague, était programme Le mois. quatre pour l’argent 2001, p. 12). est de partir” (Bouvier, l’essentiel affaires, pareilles described in roughly three narratives with different characteristics: du monde L’Usage [ p. 1967a, (Michaux, caravelle” douce are defeat of journey unshaped endless an of idea the and downfall images since his recurrent in Already firsttravel narratives. dor “Un homme qui ne sait ni voy preface: the following one can read ager ni tenir un journal a composé ce journal de voyages. Mais, au moment de tout signer, à coup pris de il peur, se jette la première (Michaux, 1929, pierre. Préface). Voilà” physical experience real of travelling, is published in 1929 which is quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - The - - - - 165 Passages]: [

Lénia Marques Lénia 9 Passages Volume 04 161-162)

Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing ) furent commen Pays de la Magie) furent The characters of these imaginary places and the and the these imaginary places of The characters 8 107).

Hence the written journey presents itself differently to the 10 pas le contact […]. (Michaux, 1950, pp. pas le contact […]. (Michaux, 1950, mettais l’affaire, celle de jouir et de souffrir, des gens et des et gens des souffrir, de et jouir de celle l’affaire, mettais compo étaient Eux-mêmes hostiles. et étrangères choses des dessus sens tout remuer et peu un ficher s’en pour sés (du mages les Ainsi sous. [sic], mecés le lendemain de mon arrivée à Rio-de-Janeiro séparant si bien de ces Brésiliens, avec qui je ne trouvais Mes “Emanglons”, “Mages”, “Hivinizikis” furent tous tous “Mages”, “Hivinizikis” furent Mes “Emanglons”, (Plume voyage. le par suscités personnages-tampons des disparut le jour même de mon retour de où Turquie il était né.) […] C’est pourquoi le pays étranger était une occasion, une provocation à personnages, auxquels dès lors je re geographical journey, even though both geographical are experienced journey, and led written the is object the when way, same the In subject. same the by nary the writers’ imaginaries were always fed by real experiences. the ways in which time and space this leaves unanswered However, memory into the and transposed through articulated, organized are act of writing. ways different from moment to moment, trip to trip. The journey is no longer the same. It is another journey that begins with writ ing: “Il [the written journey] a vécu sa vie” (Michaux, 1967b, Pré face). magic and supernatural elements also come onto theScorpion-Fish magic and supernatural elements with glimpses of a dark novel.scene making this work a narrative Regardless of whether the journeys and places were real or imagi 2. space and memory design Time, is writing of act the and travelling actual the between moment The lived in a kind of limbo. It is a moment of passage which entails attitudes and expectations although it is al emotions, different In Michaux, the imaginary comes to make the real bearable and is the In Bouvier, and integrate the differences. also a way to interpret in although writing, of object proper the fact in are journeys real 2000, p. anonymous narrator are essential pieces in the transference of emo pieces in the transference essential are anonymous narrator Michaux states in As tions, pain and dilemmas. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------14 same 407) 166 revenir revenir a place 13

11 407), Lénia Marques Lénia ” (Bouvier, 2001, Volume 04 Et puis pourquoi s’obs Et puis pourquoi “ ” (Bouvier, 2001, p. 2001, (Bouvier, ” Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing 16 407). The difficult dilemma ” (Bouvier, 2001, p. 2001, (Bouvier, ” ces souvenirs qui ont séché récit fantôme , à ce trou de mémoire , à ce trou (Bouvier, 2001, (Bouvier, p. 12 , he states: “Voyant une grosse année réduite à si à réduite année grosse une “Voyant states: he , ” Ecuador Significant experiences which lose life, mobility and there and mobility life, lose which experiences Significant 15 Château des Païens des Château The imprints in memory are not similar for everyone nor are not similar for everyone nor are are memory The imprints in If Michaux’s artistic attitude is positioned in an everlasting re The same feeling immediately comes to the surface in Bouvier’s immediately comes to the surface The same feeling the end of bien encore passé s’est il Sûrement ému. est l’auteur pages, de peu que Mais il ne rencontre choses. / Le voilà qui cherche. d’autres voix une prend il embarras, son masquer pour Alors / brouillards. de pédagogue” (Michaux, 1929, p. 181). they the same for every person involved in the exact same experi devel subject each and time, and space own its has Memory ence. numerous notebooks, memory can be a dark and terrible place that place terrible and dark a be can memory notebooks, numerous “ to harder and harder strives which subject, the upon closes au and faces only with “ p. 408). by all the meaning they seemed to have before the attempt to put them into writing. similar memory holes seem to strike him, lentless countercurrent, namely in the attempts of telling his physical travelling experienc near situated souvenirs”, quelques à “Préface a calls he what In es. ing everything and the moreover impossibility of sharing his exact emotions, dialogues and perspectives on those episodes. Once it is a part of the contextual again, time is quite important since writing: and travelling both of framework tiner et jeà parler de ce voyage? quel rapport avec ma vie présente? aucun, n’ai plus de présent between what has been lived and what is being lived of the journey causes anguish and leads to an inescapable void. The nar “ a then becomes rative as them tell to order in episodes the rebuild to seeks memory where they were (or as they Nevertheless, are remembered). despite the journey, time is no longer journey, measured in terms of the length of time relationship the through rather but travelling, of act physical the of between the subject writer and the narrative in a very particular (Michaux, 1967b, p. [11]). ce livre” timeframe: “Il date, first and book. By the end, when seemingly having some problems he narration, his ending of manner the and timing the about doubts is with confronted an ambivalent feeling and the need of telling tell of impossibility the faced He silent. being simply or everything quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - The The - - 167

Lénia Marques Lénia Volume 04 Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing 37), that is that the human being has an “in : and still he risked his life in the mountains and later in and still he risked his life in the mountains and later in ness, no gladness, no hope, no pride, no real present, present, pride, no real ness, no gladness, no hope, no finds who animal very this But […] forgetfulness. without it necessary to be forgetful, in whom, in fact, forgetful ness represents a force and a form of robust health, has reared for withhimself an a opposition-power, memory, kept incertain instances, in is, help forgetfulness whose check. (Nietzsche, 2003, pp. 34-35) the utility […] of the active forgetfulness […] is a very […] is a very utility […] of the active forgetfulness the and etiquette; repose, order, psychic of nurse and sentinel exist no happi can there is that it why shows at once this Memory is also in this sense a present evocation of the past. If, on evocation Memory is also in this sense a present and they lead to a part of the process therefore The mists are Often enough this pain is not only psychological, but also physi also but psychological, only not is pain this enough Often oldest (unfortunately also the longest) psychology in the world” (Nietzsche, 2003, p. (Nietzsche, mnemonic” potent most its pain in found which stinct 2003, p. 37). inas well as experience travelling the in participates body The cal. the writing experience. Michaux since had before health problems Ecuador In fact, the need of the writer to remember represents an effort If we continue with Nietzsche’s and is often indeed a painful act. thoughts, we what he can stress considers to be “an axiom of the is also more or less an active part of the act of writing. or less an active part of the act is also more moment, and a present to the one hand, memory is always related narration, on the other of with the present complies discourse in hand, “[t]he process of remembering integrates present, past and 2008, p. 7). in a single task” (Achugar, future mist, the keeps one either itself: writing of act the by entailed choice other places, such as the Amazonia. Bouvier had several problems problems several had Bouvier Amazonia. the as such places, other on his journeys and he severely felt his long walks in his legs. In memory its and compromised also is body the process, writing the ops strategies to evoke memory. At the same time, memory holesmemory same time, the At memory. evoke to strategies ops human for strategies oblivion are about complain writers both that beings to be safe. Forgetting is an integral and internal process of in his Nietzsche argues as accurately, or more safeguarding, Genealogy of Morals quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------168 that is,that 18

Lénia Marques Lénia Volume 04 Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing , which lead the reader right , which lead the reader Michaux refuses then to touch his then to Michaux refuses 17 14). It is in this way that Bouvier will seek to It is in this way that Bouvier will 19 The Scorpion-Fish The relationship between real travelling and writing is a com plex one (Martin, 2005; Jakubec, 2010) which are characteristic of both authors. However, as we have discussed, this complex and the is It act. creative the originates and birth gives process difficult arises. that creativity imaginary and memory interstices of real, These holes of memory and the consequent effort of re-construc for new forms of inventiveness in writing, the driving force tion are but also in painting (for Michaux). On the other side of the game means mere a beyond photography uses Bouvier memory, by played uninterruptedly, and with ina order to perpetual flowuninterruptedly, of whisky, recreate, as far as it would be possible, the thorny and weighty atmosphere of Ceylon. to transpose them into in order awaken the episodes in his memory “overworked” and its struc The text was, in his own words, words. was ture perfectly in thorough detail, the from number of chapters Until his last days, he was seek in each of them. the revelations to the in always Michaux, life. his of part this regarding liberty the ing his from also seeking new forms of getting free was countercurrent, (and others’) limitations. into the heart of magic. It is indeed because of this general impres that image, inner the in and ambience the in both blurriness, of sion Bouvier takes his time to be able to write about his stay in Ceylon. can he until filled be to has which vase a like wait to has he feels He no silence, his break to has and himself to it keep to stand longer no of act particular this reason, this For be. can that painful how matter playing Debussy with later, years 23 only possible becomes writing the place, as are the people, do not seem to be worthy of incorpora of worthy be to seem not do people, the are as place, the of Ceylon All is the like atmosphere a dream; writing. tion through hazy and untouchable, a bit like the figure of Père Álvaro or of the great in grocer-Circe or chooses oblivion or yet one reconstructs that particular episode. or chooses oblivion or yet one that reconstructs particular episode. exercise an through rewriting impossibility; an seems writing Often of revisited memory far more: “Ici, barbare on fut, barbare on doit (Michaux, rester” 1967b, p. when travelling through in the preface, At the time, as he states text. people those he had, so he states, the impression India and China, 13), p. 1967b, (Michaux, réels” d’être mériter parurent “me to be depicted as accurately as possible on some To paper. extent, Bouvier’s his stay in Ceylon is the opposite, since attitude regarding quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - Ec- 169

Lénia Marques Lénia The writer / artist The Volume 04 20 81). Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing

In this sense, there is also a metamorphosis of metamorphosis a also is there sense, this In 84).

, consisting in both exterior and interior and exterior both in consisting dépaysement, turns up to become an outsider that has to be annihilated and, in this in and, annihilated be to has that outsider an become to up turns to has writer the creator a being from – loss a represents also it sense, to interesting is act. It the creative prior to inner self his grieve over miliar territory makes them outsiders, sometimes in their own spac miliar territory makes them outsiders, to seem They emerge. figures Michaux’s where paper the in like es, jump they page the of territory the occupying start and life, to come out of and make their creator an outsider vis-à-vis his own work parmi moi [sic] Choisis pas de lettres. qui ne reçoit dat sur le front eux, pour ma grande Parle-moi anxiété alors, et je mon grand désir. t’en prie, j’y compte” (Michaux, 1929, p. displacement. For Bouvier, writing is also a construction of identity writing is also a construction displacement. For Bouvier, faced be to obstacles of full taken, be to has that path a 2006); (Laurel, and fears to be confronted. This permanent departure from the fa p. 1985, (Michaux, the originated author, by his own works. When the creative act like in Barthes’ death has to disappear, comes to its end, the creator of the author (Barthes, 1984). This process described by Michaux would be therefore the performed death of the author; a death that is not an end in itself but it is a part of a more complex process of since metamorphosis. The fear of disappearance is also present jour, quelque lire, vas me qui toi sur lecteur, toi, sur compte “Je uador: sur toi lectrice. Ne me laisse pas seul avec les morts comme un sol 3. of (de)territorialisation The Metamorphosis defy the limits, unearth emotions The willingness – or the need? – to both made identities, enriched and renewed constantly build and outer space. The exploration of writers look further down in their new uncomfortable spaces outside the familiar corresponds to a deep state of to help memory in the writing act after the travelling episodes. the travelling episodes. memory in the writing act after help to Photography is also a panacea for all the difficulties oflanguage paint Furthermore, 2008). Guyon, 2006; Guennoc, 1994; (Marchetti, of these in the artistic development photography appear and ing the in space and time of management the to contributing authors, memory mainly as potential escape routes. Pushing themselves constantly to their limits, Michaux and Bouvier joggle with the 2010) (Dupuis, images ghostly and awareness imaginary, the real, in a field of inventiveness where immediacy and memory exer to gain artistic expression. cises struggle quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 170

Lénia Marques Lénia Volume 04 Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing -1). When a multiplicity n dimensions having neither subject nor object, which object, nor subject neither having dimensions +1). It is composed not of units but of dimensions, or dimensions, of but units of not composed is It +1). n n rather directions in motion. It has neither beginning nor end, but always a middle (milieu) from which it grows overspills. It constitutes linear multiplicitiesand which it with which from and consistency, of plane a on out laid be can the One is always subtracted ( of this kind changes dimension, it necessarily changes in nature as well, undergoes a metamorphosis. (Deleuze & Guattari, 2004, p. 23). the rhizome connects any point to any other point, and connects any point to any other point, and the rhizome not necessarily linked to traits of the same its traits are signs, of regimes different very play into brings it nature; neither reducible is rhizome The states. nonsign even and to the One nor the multiple. It is not the One that be comes or five,even etc.directly three, Two four, It is not add is One which to or One, the from derived multiple a ( ed 244-245).One should however take into account that in their battle field for types different of line: “First, arelatively supple line of interlaced codes and territorialities […]. Second, a rigid line, which brings about a dualist organization of segments […]. defined and quanta by marked flight, of lines several or one Third, by decoding and deterritorialization” (Deleuze & Guattari, 2004, pp. different actions they can be parallel, complement themselves or collide, “[i]t therefore would be more accurate to say that there is This horizontal chaotic structure – the rhizome – is the nourishing – the rhizome This horizontal chaotic structure inherent inherent identity construction processes surrounding it can be seen rhizome: in the dynamic composition of the note, however, that in Bouvier’s to come struggles works the word note, however, often pages, in fill they when Even silence. imposing the beat and up many years after the real journey that originated them, the subject char the and episodes the behind disappear and hiding be to seems acters that live in them. The poetics of disappearance (Hambursin, 1997; Ridon, 2002) takes shape, bearing witness to the biggest dan ger of them all, the death of narrative by birth. In fact, this becomes model, we look at Deleuze and Guattari’s rhizomatic when clearer the and writing the both fact, In emerge. line of types different where quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------171 420). Con 420).

Lénia Marques Lénia Volume 04 Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing 524). The most important element What interests us in operations of striation and smoothing us in operations of striation What interests forces the how combinations: or passages the precisely are at work within space continually striate it, and how in the and emits course of its striation it develops other forces and slow speed […] Movements, new smooth spaces. a smooth space. sometimes enough to reconstruct ness, are The narrative becomes also multiplicity, which The is narrative “composed becomes also multiplicity, the as well as spaces different between transference of kind This The lines of flight express then the gestures that seek for deter for seek that gestures the then express flight of lines The keyword in Michaux’s work): keyword gy of Deleuze and Guattari. Indeed, “sedentary space is striated, is striated, “sedentary space gy of Deleuze and Guattari. Indeed, nomad while enclosures, between roads and enclosures, walls, by space is smooth, marked only by ‘traits’ that are effaced and dis p. 2004, Guattari and (Deleuze trajectory” the in placed of creation the since other the without be not could one sequently, nomadic spaces (smooth spaces) is limited and aroused, to some extent, by the borders of the sedentary spaces (striated spaces) (Deleuze and Guattari 2004, p. lively nomadic a rhizome, the metaphorical the functioning of in multiplicity (which can be incarnated, for example, in the writing (a “passages” the or interactions, the is journey), physical the in or and almost went mad. When passing it to writing, no matter how it to writing, no matter how and almost went mad. When passing of internal an exercise was, there painful the process and hard extent, to a at least to a certain which corresponds, organisation, reterritorialisation. trans continually is […] and symbiosis, in terms heterogeneous of forming itself into a string of other multiplicities” (Deleuze & Guattari, 2004, p. 275). symbiosis and transformations at are the heart of the complex re lationship between smooth and striated spaces, in the terminolo a space in which the three kinds of closely intermingled lines co of closely intermingled lines kinds the three a space in which Guattari, 2004, p. 245). exist” (Deleuze & famil the outside spaces unknown for penetrating ritorialisation, iar zones of comfort. This however implies conflicts, confronta tions, struggles, battles and defeats where the risk can be death wit clear a is Poisson-Scorpion Le in described journey The itself. and enter the to defy the limits of the urges ness of the strength problems health severe had Bouvier so, doing in silence: of zones quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------172 Emergenc [

Lénia Marques Lénia Volume 04 Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing Émergences Résurgences Émergences (1968, p. 216) follows him as a permanent chain chain permanent a as him follows 216) p. (1968, 21 ], he found in painting and drawing a freedom im ], he found in painting and drawing a freedom Of course, smooth spaces are not in themselves liberatory. liberatory. themselves in not are spaces smooth course, Of 2004, p. 551) (Deleuze and Guattari, Hence, for Michaux, the escape gate, and his main source and and gate, and his main source Hence, for Michaux, the escape pearance on paper. The consciousness, the constant awareness awareness constant the consciousness, The paper. on pearance and the embedded habits related to language were considered that he in That is also the reason limitations in Michaux’s view. Aubert, 2007; (Parish, symbols and alphabets illegible several vented 2008; Kawakami, As 2011). for which Bouvier, sees in photogra phy a quicker possibility for the apprehending exterior world than writing, the tendency to what Charles-Albert Cingria definedas “surexactitude” never happens fully nor it replaces completely deterritorialisation never happens fully nor it replaces because the latter is ceaseless in these smooth spaces (Deleuze and Guattari 2004, p. 420). As painting. and drawing was flight, of lines inner for expression discusses in he comprehensively Resurgences es symbols rigid and established its with writing, from get to possible sponta found he trace painted the In 1972). (Michaux, codes and immediate action with a minimal intervention of the mind, neity, contrarily to writing, which was formed in the mind prior to ap In the process, there are therefore different degrees and permanent degrees different therefore are there In the process, reter and deterritorialisation between that sense the in movements ritorialisation, there is detachment and appropriation; input and death. and life chaos; and structure unfamiliar; and familiar output; By memory and writing, the unfamiliar becomes familiar; at the allow new forms of deterritoriali same time, the mists of memory further unfamiliar spaces. Reterritoriali sation in what they create in the moment in which the familiar sation happens afterwards, ele new the to adapted and rearranged be will space striated) (and ments gained outside its borders by the challenges represented by reterritorialisation the space, nomadic in Though, flight. of lines the The nomadic space is a free desert zone; it is the space where the risks inherent the all with can, he whatever finds and goes traveller if it can be felt as a act creative however, of that Writing adventure. will, most of the times imposes its own rhythm and as a space of free space a striated constitutes it sense, that In writer. the on rules and in which the nomadic self has necessarily become reterritorialised. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------173 - “est re

Lénia Marques Lénia Volume 04 Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing

22 [7]).

a habit that he dates back to his child his to back dates he that habit a 24 23 49)

(Michaux, 1967c, p. (Michaux, 1967c, Une habitude très les mienne. circonstances: Voici c’est quand je suis étendu et que néanmoins le sommeil ne vient Alors pas. je me comble. Je me donne en esprit tout tou- personnels faits de Partant d’obtenir. plaît me qu’il ce à doucement j’arrive plausible, si ligne d’une et réels jours de plusieurs pays, ou quelque chose de roi sacrer me faire mémoire. ma que vieille aussi est habitude Cette genre. ce (Michaux, 1929, p. These adventures, misadventures, conquests and fatigues; the The journeys can therefore be elements of change or simply play simply or change of elements be therefore can journeys The constant adaptations, challenges and changes, make them new be identities amongst the multiplicity of the self. ings, with renewed not in the mental illness sense,They live in a complete schizo world, but as Deleuze and Guattari As defend. Brian Massumi puts it, in connec is inventive as a positive process this context “schizophrenia to a Its twoness is a relay tion, expansion rather than withdrawal. From multiplicity. one to another (and another…). […] Not aim of life’s is the enlargement […] Schizophrenia Experimentally. lessly. [1]). p. (1992, concepts” of proliferation pragmatic the through limits rebuilding for and change for need constant a to then corresponds It that puts Michaux and Bouvier on a disquiet self. This is the process the And move. whenever physical the motion is an impossibility, it: mind has its strategies to work on The constant need for deterritorialisation is what makes Michaux own properties, king of his in time and space. For this reason, Bouvier felt this mandatory Bouvier felt this mandatory For this reason, in time and space. need for sedentariness when writing (Bouvier, 2004, pp. 1300, as Michaux states, the author 1380), because, eventually, venu chez lui après chaque voyage. Il n’a pas une résistance in définie” hood and which keeps on existing until his last days. as catalysts in the inner metamorphosis of the writers. Each jour mo physical and geographical the in is it unique, whether is ney of the nec Each step is part tion or whether an imaginary activity. way possible only the yet but risky difficult, is it dislocation: essary other entails which journey of type another just is Writing living. of emotions, while metamorphoses continue to occur. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------174

Lénia Marques Lénia Volume 04 surfaces. Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing afterwards 25 This paper was supported by the Fundação para a Ciência e a Tecno a e Ciência a para Fundação the by supported was paper This logia (FCT/MCTES). The author is grateful to Maria Sofia Pimentel Biscaia and the peer-review committee of the journal for their read ings and comments of this paper. One should note however that, as artists, their go expressions further beyond writing: Michaux’s drawings, paintings and fabulous invent Similarly to other places, Michaux’s invented Poddema, is again a narrative journey that proposes to challenge limits, as it is indeed a narrative journey that proposes a cruel and figurative portrayal of a tornA humankind. grain of meta because blossom, to waiting present always however is hope represent humankind Phoenix, the as and, possible are morphoses ed in Poddema can be reborn from its own ashes: “Un du Conseil des pots m’a dit: ‘Ne nous jugez pas: vous avez vu Poddema sous un signe. Elle a vécu sous Elle d’autres. vivra sous encore. d’autres Métamorphose! Métamorphose, qui engloutit et refait des méta morphoses. Chez nous, un moment ouvre un océan de siècles’” (Michaux, 1967c, p. 240). Notes 1 2 blanks spaces and their correspondent re-construction in the actualthe in re-construction correspondent their and spaces blanks their implied particular appropri act of writing. Dislocations, with per for renewed occasions often the are ation of time and space, the unravelling of difficulty the is as discoveries; new and spectives real external world. This is what is behind the deleuze-guattarian that model gives which constitutes a fruitful concept of rhizome, inher case, this in risks, and dynamics connections, the of account in the act of writing. Moreover, ent to the act of evoking memory beyond the risks and the pain, with the metamorphosis, a promise – of a better – or at least different Concluding remarks Concluding The journey is multiple, as is In identity. the process of travelling, whether by its lively experience or whether by the nourishing of is a constant phenome metamorphosis writing that it represents, non. The articulation between the self, the exterior and the arts is the in which structure as a rhizomatic composed and developed smooth to spaces striated from again over and over switches subject ones and vice-versa. From this analysis it comes into view that the its even when regarding evocation of memory is often painful, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------175

Lénia Marques Lénia Volume 04 66).

Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing boat of once, / Into an old and gen eign country was the occasion, the provocation eign country was the occasion, the provocation 331). of once” (Siegel, 1968, p.

(Michaux, 1994, p. “It has lived its life.” My translation. “It is old, this book.” My translation. core core d’une autre perspective 1987; (André-Acquier, Kawamaki, 2000; Bawin, 2008; Laügt, 2008, 63-89). tle Portuguese boat in his impressions register will also 2007, p. 12). Thierry Vernet vier, with his friend with family during his adventure the correspondence (2010) for the analysis of the See dialogue Topping be (Vernet,2006). in tween the text of Bouvier and the Chinese ink drawings by Vernet du monde. L’Usage “in the light of a time where genocide, big purges or other ethnic puri revealedfications a system of generalized slavery to all humankind.” and history memory, collective on reflection further For translation. My see Huyssen (2003). modernity, “My ‘Emanglons’, ‘Magi’, ‘Hivinizikis’ were all pro buffer-characters Tur from back got I day very the disappeared (Plume trip. a by voked he had been born.) key where […] That’s why the for for characters, to whom I gave the job from then on – both of having things. Theand people hostile, foreign, from of suffering and pleasure and turn every composed so as not to care characters themselves were the ‘Land Thus of Magic’) the Magus was (from be thing topsy-turvy. successfully separating me gun the day after I arrived in Rio de Janeiro, to them” time relating Brazilians: I was having such a hard the from “A man who “A knows neither how to travel nor how to keep a journal has put together this travel journal. But at the moment of signing he is suddenly afraid. So he casts the first stone. Here” (Michaux, 2001, Preface). of us, and money for four months” (Bou had two years in front “We of title the under published and 1948 in gathered were titles three The ]. Ailleurs [Elsewhere ed signs are as important as his writing pieces; Bouvier’sphotographspieces; writing his as important as are signs ed and seizing alterity and of expressing another means of achieving are his inner-subjectivity. Dans de Nicolas Bouvier et de Roland Barthes. Pour Michaux, il s’agit en Portuguese a into away me “Carry

10 11 8 9 5 6 7 3 l’oeuvre dans l’Asie compare (2006) Forsdick Charles étude, son 4 quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

- - - - - 176 ” (Bouvier, ” (Bouvier, ” (Bouvier,

Mes Propriétés Lénia Marques Lénia Volume 04 Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing , back to that hole in my memory , back to that hole in ] (Michaux, 1967b, pp. 95-101). Pagans’ Castle back to the But then why insist on talking about this journey? What bearing does it haveon talking about this journey? What bearing But then why insist My Properties it it goes back t my earliest memories” (Michaux, 2001, p. 38). It seems the same principle lies beneath the writing of [ “One member of the Council of old fellows told me: “Do not take judgment: you have seen Poddema under one sign. It has lived un der others. It will live under still others. Metamorphosis! Metamor one moment opens new ones. Here phosis which engulfs and creates an ocean of centuries.’” My translation. among them if only for my great desire and concern. Speak to me, then and concern. Speak desire among them if only for my great 2001, p. 58). please, I am counting on you” (Michaux, “surexactness” He doesn’t have an re indefinitehome “returned after each journey. sistance.” My translation. out stretched I’m when It’s works. it how is Here own. my all habit “A and for some reason sleep doesn’t come. So I just stuff myself. I give myself mentally whatever U would enjoy possessing. Starting a from plau most themselves are (which facts real always and personal of set sibly arranged), I manage by and by to arrive at a point where I am hab a As sort. the of something or countries, several of king crowned Seeing a huge year reduce to so few pages the author is astonished. to so few pages Seeing a huge year reduce must have been lots of other things. there Surely mists. if not nothing, Nothing. Or, around. So he rummages Finally to mask his embarrassment he assumes a professorial voice” (Michaux, 2001, p. 123). My translation. once a barbarian, always a barbarian.” “Here, My translation. real.” “it seemed to me they deserved to be In his interviews with Irène Lichtenstein-Fall, he discusses this a bit 2004, pp. 1329-1331). further (Bouvier, with Do not leave me alone reader. “I am counting on you, oh future no mail. Choose me from who gets the dead, like a soldier at the front “ have a present I no longer None; anyway, on my life at present? 2007, p. 307). 2007, p. 308) (Bouvier, “ghostly narrative” “ 2007, p. 308). “these memories which have withered on the stalk” 2007, (Bouvier, p. 308). to some recollections “Preface 24 25 21 22 23 17 18 19 20 12 13 14 15 16 quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , . - - - - - Le Œuv 177 Europe: Europe: Oxford: Oxford: . 1249-1388.

Artful Decep La photogra La Lénia Marques Lénia

Les Supercheries Les Supercheries / France, 14, 1, 63-77. 1, 14, France, Volume 04 Écrit(ure)s de peintres de peintres Écrit(ure)s . Paris: Gallimard. . Paris: Payot, 2001. Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing . Trans. . Robyn Trans. Marsack. Écrit(ure)s de peintres belges de peintres Écrit(ure)s The Journal of Romance Studies A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism A . Paris: Gallimard, pp. Gallimard, Paris: . , chambres , claires. chambres , 88, 974-975, pp. 148-159. Œuvres . Paris: Seuil, pp. 63-69. , 16, printemps, pp. 95-102. , 16, printemps, pp. L’Usage du monde L’Usage Le Poisson-Scorpion Modern & Contemporary . Amsterdam: John Benjamins B.V. John Benjamins B.V. Amsterdam: . . Trans. B. Massumi. London: Continuum. . Trans. The Way of the World The Way What We Remember: The Construction of Memory Remember: What We Routes et déroutes. Entretiens avec Irène Lichtenstein- Entretiens Routes et déroutes. Littératures , V, Lausanne: L’Âge d’Homme, p. 216. L’Âge Lausanne: , V, . Bruxelles: P.I.E. Peter Lang, pp. 189-202. P.I.E. . Bruxelles: . In: N. Bouvier, 2004, . In: N. Bouvier, and Schizophrenia China and Japan. er, encounter in François Maspero’s and Balkans-Transit Nicolas Bouvier’s japonaise. Chronique belges 8, 1, pp. 61-75. du et regard du inquiet usage Un Bouvier: Nicolas chez phie monde. In: C. Emerson and M. Scott (eds.), 2006. Culture in French Trickery and Visual tions: Verbal française dans la culture et visuelles: la tromperie littéraires Peter Lang, pp. 49-62. P.I.E. res complètes res on devient romancier. ou comment Nicolas Bouvier, Nicolas Bouvier – Kenneth White Bruissement de la langue Asie. en In: 2008, L. Brogniez (dir.), Peter Lang, pp. 179-188. P.I.E. Bruxelles: London: Eland. Fall in Military Discourse ri Michaux. 2008, (dir.), Brogniez L. In: Michaux. Henri Guennoc, J.-F., 2006. Chambres noires Chambres 2006. J.-F., Guennoc, Deleuze, G. and Guattari, F., 2004. Guattari, F., Deleuze, G. and Dupuis, S. (2010). La chambre-matrice du ‘Poisson-Scorpion’ de Forsdick, C., 2006, ‘(In)connaissance de l’Asie’: Barthes and Bouvi Gorrara, M., C. 2008, and Photography Topping, and the cultural Bawin, J., 2008. Henri Michaux ou les narrations d’un peintre-poète peintre-poète d’un narrations les ou Michaux Henri 2008. J., Bawin, N., 1996/1981. Bouvier, N., 2001/1963. Bouvier, N., 2007. Bouvier, N., 2004. Bouvier, 1968, Cingria, Ch.-A. In: Surexactitude. 1968. Ch.-A., Cingria, References M., 2008. Achugar, d’Hen l’œuvre dans l’Orient de L’appel (1987). G. André-Acquier, Aubert, N., (2008). écrit, L’un l’autre pas. Cristian Dotremont et 1984, Barthes, R. In: l’auteur. de mort La 1984/1968. R., Barthes, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

- - - - - 178 Un bar-

Lénia Marques Lénia Littérature et photo- Littérature Volume 04 . Paris: Gallimard. . Paris: Gallimard. . Transl. . Robin Transl. Mago Europe: Nicolas Bouvier Europe: . Genève: Skira. comme itinéraire iden- , 95, 4, pp. 978-991. La Suisse ouverte: Nicolas Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing , 106, 2, pp. 388-406. . Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press. . Paris: Gallimard. Rêves et dérives chez Victor Segalen, Rêves et dérives chez Victor . Bern: P.I.E. Peter Lang. . Bern: P.I.E. : Lettres Romanes Lettres de Nicolas Bouvier. L’Usage du monde du L’Usage Ecuador, a Travel Journal a Travel Ecuador, Present Pasts, Urban palimpsests and the politics of and the Urban palimpsests Pasts, Present The Modern Language Review 275-287.

pp.

Cadernos de Literatura Comparada 14/15, Textos e Mundos em Textos Cadernos de Literatura Comparada 14/15, The Modern Language Review viations from Deleuze and Guattari viations from tura Comparada Margarida Losa, pp. 185-207. tura Comparada Margarida de Nicolas In: Bouvier. Bridel Y. (coor.). / Northwestern. Press wan. Evanston: The Malboro Bouvier. Cahiers francophones d’Europe Centre-Orientale, 4, A.E.F.E.C.O. 1927-1984 (selected, translated and presented by David Ball). Angeles: University of California Press. Berkeley and Los titaire. titaire. Litera de Instituto / Afrontamento Edições Porto: deslocação, t.1. Henri Michaux et Emile Cioran mont. bare en Asie. bare tier, L. Louvel, D. Méaux et Ph. Ortel (eds.). Ortel Ph. et Méaux D. Louvel, L. tier, 487-495. pp. Rennes, de Universitaires Presses Rennes: graphie. gers du Poisson-Scorpion . Stanford: Stanford University Press. University Press. Stanford memory. Stanford: – Kenneth White, 88, 974-975, pp. 103-112. 51, 3-4, Martin. J.-P., 2005. Henri Michaux. Paris: Gallimard. Martin. J.-P., l’œuvre dans représentation et mémoire Voyage, 1994. M., Marchetti, en Asie Michaux, H., 1967b/1933. Un Barbare Michaux, H., 1967c/1948. Ailleurs. Paris: Gallimard. Michaux, H., 1972. Émergences-Résurgences Michaux, H., 1985. Déplacements, dégagements A User’s Guide to Capitalism and Schizophrenia: De Guide to Capitalism and Schizophrenia: User’s Massumi, B., 1992. A . Paris: Gallimard. journal de voyage Michaux, H., 1929. Ecuador, Michaux, H., 1950. Passages. Paris: Gallimard. Michaux, H., 1967a. La Nuit remue Michaux, H., 1994. Darkness Moves: An Henri Michaux Anthology, Michaux, H., 2001. L’Orient du signe Laügt, E., 2008. L’Orient Laurel, M. A., H. 2006. De Kawakami, A., 2011. Illegible Writing: Michaux, Masson, and Dotre and Masson, Michaux, Writing: Illegible 2011. A., Kawakami, Hambursin, O., 1997. Voyage et de exercice disparition: Hambursin, les O., dan- 1997. Voyage Jakubec, D., 2010. du Les voyage. écritures Kawakami, A., 2000. Barbarian Travels: Textual Positions in A., Textual Kawakami, 2000. Barbarian Travels: Guyon, L., 2008. ‘C’que c’est beau la photographie!’. In: J.-P. Mon J.-P. In: photographie!’. la beau c’est ‘C’que 2008. L., Guyon, Huyssen, A., 2003. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 179 Autour . Amster

Lénia Marques Lénia (special issue on (eds.), 2002, . Lausanne: L’Âge . Lausanne: L’Âge

. Lyon: Presses Uni Presses Lyon: . Volume 04 . Definition Press. , New York: Dover Pub Dover York: New , Writing the Mists of Memory the Mists Writing French Studies French , Genève: Zoé, pp. 120–135. The Genealogy of Morals The Genealogy of Peindre, écrire. Chemin faisant écrire. Peindre, Henri Michaux: Experimentation with Signs with Experimentation Michaux: Henri L’Usage du monde du L’Usage Hail, American Development Henri Michaux: poésie pour savoir C. Albert, N. Laporte, Pouilloux and J.–Y.

las Bouvier’s “New Ekphrastic Poetics”, ed. by S. Harrow), 64: 3 (July 2010), pp. 302-16. d’Homme. lications. dam: Rodopi. In Résonances. de Nicolas Bouvier. de Lyon. versitaires Siegel, E., 1968. in Nico of Travel Images, Images M., 2010. Travelling Topping, T. 2006. Vernet, Nietzsche, F., 2003. 2003. Nietzsche, F., 2007. N., Parish, disparition. comme voyage du poétique une Pour 2002. J.–X., Ridon, J., 2000. Roger, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s

Mikkel Jensen holds an MA in English and History from Aalborg University and works as a teacher. He occasionally reviews books at kulturkapellet.dk and recently pub- lished another article on Douglas Coupland in the journal Culture Unbound.

Mikkel Jensen’s article “A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s” is a close reading of a single short story from Douglas Coupland’s 1994 short story cycle Life After God. The story, “Little Creatures”, portrays a gloomy drive a father takes with his child up to meet the child’s grand- father, referred to as “the golf-wino”. In this story the jour- ney is represented as two parallel narratives of develop- ment as both the father as well as the child faces some truths either about themselves and/or the world which neither of them is ready for. Seeing how the short story chronicles a drive from an urban center through a western Canada countryside, the article comments on – with spe- cific reference to pastoral literature – how this story marks Coupland’s departure from idealizing rural locations.

In 1991 Douglas Coupland hit the literary stage hard with his de- but novel Generation X. Featuring sneeringly ironic narrators who appeared to be somewhat detached from the many stories they tell each other throughout the novel, the novel would soon gain atten- tion for its ironic, distanced and rather world-weary characters, and Coupland’s writer persona would soon come to be associated with the tone of these jaded 20-somethings he portrayed. How-

Volume 04 180 , - - - ­ ­r 181 Life Af- Bildungs

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel Bildungs eise Volume 04 and formation offormation and Bildung A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking nevertheless shows Coupland once again focusing once again Coupland shows nevertheless genre (Sørensen, 2001: 10) and though the short story format story short the though and 10) 2001: (Sørensen, genre I thought of my own likes. I like dogs because they always they because dogs like I likes. own my of thought I stay in love mother with likes the catssame person. Your because they know what they want. I think that if cats were double the size they’d they probably be are now, il- Coupland’s debut overtly thematized roman roman a of portrayals elaborate contain to limited too seems ever, it ever, wouldn’t take long before he took a sharp left into new consequence a as and publications, subsequent in territory stylistic he was excoriated, “presumably for attempting be serious and to were reviewers his when yearning spiritual and depression express expecting more postmodern jollity” (Greenberg, 2010: 7). Using that many people had narrative tone meant different an entirely trouble reconciling their image of the supposedly hyper-ironic – pathos driven and seemingly Coupland with the new Coupland – one could meet in the short story cycle painfully sincere ter God (1994). its literary mode has even noted that character and one researcher the of pastiche of/or subset a –is – novel generational the criminating phone calls with i.e. You-Know-Who”, the mother law with divorce a obviously is up break The 3). 1999: (Coupland, yers being involved and this situation has clearly made the father rather divorce the about thinking either constantly is he distraught; think by it of off mind his keep to trying obviously is or explicitly ing of seemingly random subjects such as “what would buildings the discusses even He animals.” by built been had they if like look with breakup his child in ways roundabout which the child fortu- nately doesn’t seem to understand – at first. During a break from driving they stand in silence watching two bighorn sheep on a drive: their mountain ridge only to soon resume Life After God After Life and life crises. This is perhaps on themes of character formation particularly so in the first short story “Little Creatures” which chronicles a 30-year-old father who, accompanied by his young child, drives up to from Vancouver the city of Prince George in after the father has res story starts in media The western Canada. been living out of suitcase in the preceding month after an ugly up between him and break the child’s mother having “angry re quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------182

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel Volume 04 A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking ) “know what they want.” This parallel reveals how parallel reveals ) “know what they want.” This her (i.e. metaphorically) talking about. The child’s innocence legal. But if dogs even were times three as big as they are (14). be good friends. Go figure they’d still now, As a whole, the short story’s portrayal of the drive is metaphori This passage also seems to destabilize the ontological status of cal for character formation, and as one may expect there are “dan are expect there cal for character formation, and as one may that element of danger is However, gers” in present this journey. not something encountered during but the it journey, is rather fig ured as an element which has been there all along. The big-horn talking father’sabsentminded the only is it and peril, no offer sheep journey story’s short the way this in and child, the endangers which up or even parenting. is metaphorical for the pitfalls of growing at an intended reader who will understand the wider implications” at an intended reader is that a part of the discourse of what the narrator says, meaning oth whereas story the of world diegetic the within understandable 2004: (Sørensen, readership extra-diegetic an at directed are parts er 10). Thus the summarizing way of mentioning his own likes means metaphor comparison cat-dog this understand to is reader the that up. break parents’ the to insight reader the giving of way a as ically, This comparison is made roughly half-way through the story and what the father is is no indication that the child understands there actually at story’s end. compromised seem to be does, however, stop thinking or talking about. Stating that triple sized cats would be illegal (as opposed to dogs) only clarifies how the father bitterly here; importantly more perhaps and – partner former his considers the child’s mother – to be untrustworthy. The of consciousness? speech or stream the narration: is this direct likes, indicating that own of his thought he that that narrator states he is summarizing his thoughts, but the remaining part of the sec As to his child. like a transcript of what he says more tion reads story, the in narratee secondary a “obviously is there notes Sørensen as much of the narrator’s discourse is not directed at his child, but The comparison the narrator draws between himself and dogs il person. That loy understands himself as a loyal lustrates how he who isn’t explicitly is contrasted with the mother however, alty, said to be disloyal, as the narrator leaves it at stating that cats (meaning can’t he whom mother “disloyal” the by betrayed feels narrator the quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

1 - - -

183

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel Cat in the Hat Volume 04 A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking “Except he had a drinking problem,” I replied. “Except he had a drinking problem,” make to able be to pleased said, you Grandpa,” like “Just connection. life a real “I suppose so,” I said. (18 – 19) You persisted You and so I said to you, Doggles “Well, was in the to have had a starring role supposed series of books expect…” “Except what?” you asked. action to this piece of information, which isn’t to ask “What’s a a action to this piece of information, which isn’t to ask “What’s Having Grandpa”. like “Just say to instead but problem?” drinking father’sthe to due parallel knee-jerk this make to conditioned been discussion of the grandfather’sfree alcoholism, the child isn’t con soled by any of the other bedtime stories s/he is told as they all in volve heartbreaking fates too tragic to tell a child, a fact the father than you can dreadful only too late “feeling suddenly more realizes creatures little beautiful these of stories … you told having imagine To tell a child a bedtime story about a fictional dog, who misses out misses who dog, fictional a about story bedtime a child a tell To on career in a book series due to alcoholism, is black humor (and inappropriate) to say the least and the bleak narration of the entire story thus switches upside down here to a tragic, almost gallows- quickly turns to sadness in however, This dark humor, like humor. immediate re child’s most the sees the reader following line as the suitable bedtime stories for his child. Three stories are told, the first the told, are stories Three child. his for stories bedtime suitable goggles” wore who dog the – “Doggles about story the is which of (18). Apart from the rhyming title, the father doesn’t manage to to add to the or humorous come up with anything lighthearted story and he – somewhat tragically - cannot really come up with story: anything for Doggles to do in the Bedtime Stories about are characters principal two the drive, long the of end the At to go to sleep when the child asks the father to tell some bedtime from emotionally both exhausted is father the point this At stories. his chaotic way of as physically from as well the ongoing divorce, by further exacerbated is only which month preceding the in living grandfather’sthe 12 hour drive on the way to the home. The child, refuses to settle however, down before hearing a story and due to any improvise to manage really doesn’t father the exhausted being quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------184

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel Volume 04 is its many drawings. ?” us A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking Life After God ?” he asks (12). His mind wanders pon wanders mind His (12). asks he ?” us While this could be read as a way of characterizing the father as A characteristic visual trait of characteristic A immature or (merely just underlining how distraught he is), I would I is), he distraught how underlining just (merely or immature in terms of charac insight suggest that this aspect yields even more terization. When the father thinks of what buildings built to accom is again called upon to modate animals would look like, the reader be what a Iway second from narratee, though in a slightly different im wider the understand to was reader the where earlier, described both case first the In child. his tells father the things the of plications what makes him fell “more dreadful than you can imagine.” than you can dreadful what makes him fell “more “What is it that makes us on the drive up of the divorce off As mentioned, to keep his mind between differences the ponders father grandfather’sthe the home, traits: human defining some identify to trying animals and humans “What is it that makes us dering how buildings would look if they had been built to accom this way of modate other kinds of animals, and to some readers thoughts the and – trait childish almost an as read be could thinking can indeed seem silly at an initial glance. ple and thealmost childlike style which thus would seem to reflect is put at risk by the This innocence, however, child’s immaturity. father’s unstable When, behavior. at the end of the the child story, demands to be told some bedtimes stories these cheerful drawings lost therefore and compromised be may which innocence the reflect at the end of As the such story. they serve as contrasts to the bed father’s own the his with reflect disappointment which stories time outside of his control. life – how it went south due to circumstances Metaphorically speaking it seems that in the end the father finally of the child’s innocence and “sees” these drawings, i.e. is reminded is for these tragic stories and this realization how s/he isn’t ready who were all supposed to have been a part of fairy tale but who got who but tale fairy of part a been have to supposed all were who lost along the way” the (22). reader these To stories come to reflect father’s of disap a man who has met his measure life and one sees very he sugarcoats story which a life – adversity pointment and to his child. poorly when talking drawings, which in alone contains 17 different “Little Creatures” some instances seem to thereflect child’s understanding of what sim their by supported is reading This him/her. telling is father the quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------(Sløk, 185 2

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel guiding force for guiding force

Volume 04 acknowledges the idea A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking Life After God Another crucial difference which sets humans apart from other which sets humans apart from difference Another crucial the bitter experience of his wife being disloyal to him), which then draws attention to the fact that he expresses his feelings about the dwelling upon the events that led up to and without really divorce caused the break. Not contemplating the events leading up to the to digest the trau suggests that the father hasn’t managed divorce matic events and turn them into a narrative, which he can use as an hesituation of the tool to make sense explanatory and interpretative finds himself in, and as such animals is that which all but defines the protagonist’s life at this par this at life protagonist’s the defines but all which that is animals and sophisticated social as ticular point in time, i.e. the emotional particular to humans, and the fact that the father pects that are his crisis. By so clearly not consid doesn’t even consider this shows father’sthe situation, sad obser his naïve in up ended he how ering how he still is yet to gain some reveal vations on “human nature” him some introspec perspective on his situation, which could offer the fact that the father may also infer from tive insight. The reader (history) from humans’ fundamental difference recognize doesn’t diachronic temporal, these in think doesn’t he because is animals, than (other past the on reflect doesn’t he that suggesting dimensions 2008: 18); a lion’s life today is identical to that of a lion living 200 years ago (aside from its worsened living conditions). On this his Sløk notes that determined cultural aspect of human life torically that becomes into born is one pattern cultural “The behavior which the human being doesn’t hold in its nature” 2008: 18-19, my translation). And an awareness of personal history the narrator of the story is missing,and development is exactly what which he is sadly unaware And of. Coupland highlights this ab sence of temporal thinking by having the narrator make such an be human. outlandish outline of what it is to the reader as well as the father knows what is really the subject of the of subject the really is what knows father the as well as reader the more even understand to is reader the however, case, this In talk. arrive at any It is clear that the father doesn’t than the father does. only activities I what makes humans human: “The useful insights of animal equivalent humans do that have no other could think of that were smoking, body-building and writing” (12). According to the Danish historian of ideas Johannes Sløk, the defining human trait, however banal it sounds, is the fact that we have a history – this is the defining which difference sets apart from other animals (Sløk, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------186 , in which,

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel Volume 04 Generation X Generation A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking that people need their lives to “become the three protagonists live in self-imposed ex self-imposed in live protagonists three the

, Generation X Generation Generation X As a story portraying people living in an urban center who travel who center urban an in living people portraying story a As portant thing to notice here is how Coupland earlier had used this is how Coupland portant thing to notice here in idea core a as contrast geographic of sort places signify 2001: “psychological choices” (Sørensen, different In 250). ile in the middle of nowhere, which can well be read as that novel attributing the pastoral setting with a certain potential in so far as somemake can characters the which in locus a represents space this sense of their lives. So though it is debatable whether “Little Crea stories and ideas it isn’t ready for. stories and ideas it isn’t ready the old literary for invokes Creatures” country side, “Little the to earliest forms the pastoral form mat known as the pastoral. In its of the “simple” shep and portrayal was contingent on the presence said Marx Leo critic American the pastoral” no shepherd, “No herd; about this format which has been known for its idealizing (though portrayals of a “simple” rural often quixotic and condescending) usage inclusive more a in However, 1). 1999: Gifford, in (quoted life an with country the describes that literature any “to refers term the im The 2). 1999: (Gifford, urban” the to contrast explicit or implicit As a whole, “Little Creatures” is a story about growing up and par and up growing about story a is Creatures” “Little whole, a As enting, and its journeys of development are figured physically in Canada. Here, western through the drive the two characters take the story’s portrayal of a journey mirrors the transitions both the setting they and as such the rural narrator and his child go through, of this development. Seen in thisenter is an external manifestation perspective, the mountains they pass on their way symbolize how the father sees his future as an insurmountable task. journey A of fers, by definition, an unstable setting, and this underlines the sto ry’s transitional and unstable situation, and all in all this setting il exposing a child to waters of prematurely lustrates the precarious expressed in expressed 1991: (Coupland, them” through get to way no just there’s or stories, protago his condone always doesn’t though Coupland And 10). empathetically as he often portrays them nists’ actions or priorities, father’sthe where here, case the is unsuitable and reasoning flawed portray a as psychologically understood best perhaps are parenting al of a lost individual in distress. A trip to the countryside quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------is . 187 , far re

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel Bildungsroman, Generation X Generation X Volume 04 depravity >< purity . abandons the “dream , meaning that the por , is a form of A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking Generation X Generation X Life After God as a metaphor of Generation X is often sad and sometimes painfully sin city >< land Life After God Sørensen notices that the rural wilderness of wilderness notices that the rural Sørensen In this perspective it is interesting how there in “Little Creatures” in “Little Creatures” how there it is interesting In this perspective negated, as both the home and away settings only offer tragic and challenging circumstances for both the young child and the father: is the alcoholic and away there is the messy divorce At home there As mentioned, grandfather. land” of Mexico one finds in “fix-all” the without approached now is life contemporary of trayal disenchants Creatures” “Little as romanticism, solution of pastoral locations. So though while there the literary topography of the rural word: the in solutions be may there world” the “in fixes easy no are the tone of Coupland goes to and findthis theseems hopeto hebe where cere where Mexico in hotel the of version idealized his in saw once emotional recuperation. In other words, “Little Creatures” then then Creatures” “Little In other words, emotional recuperation. ide of the notions of pastoral serves as Coupland’s deconstruction alism, which had characterized hectic urban centers, was moved portrayed as from a form of iden for to in their search which the characters could turn tity reservoir meaning and identity (Sørensen, 2001: 258-270) and as mentioned this way of attributing rural settings with such a psychological po This could seem to sig in “Little Creatures”. tential is readdressed thissee could also one though Coupland, jaded increasingly an nal development as as a mature meaning that it by definitionportrays developments of character – traditionally in an edifying manner; and this is a perspective in in Coupland’s writing. In which we can identify a development compromised being innocence child’s the with Creatures” “Little develop the character his wrongdoings, and the father realizing ments uplifting aren’t (only sad) and as such driving to a rural set ting is asfigured a meaningless for venture identity formation and tures” is a pastoral per se, the fact that Coupland had earlier em earlier had that Coupland the fact se, per pastoral a is tures” braced pastoral ideas establishes this literary mode as a relevant context in which to discuss “Little Creatures” by virtue of it por char thematize to order in setting rural a through journey a traying which also was a central theme in acter formation, is absolutely nothing pastoral or idyllic about the portrayal of the seeing setting the characters end up in. The pastoral way of rural the dichotomy of quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------Life Life 188 (2009)), embodies

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel Volume Generation A 04 Life After God certainly invites readings fo certainly invites readings A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking , the character Dag says: “I don’t , the character Dag says: “I don’t continues the moral vein which has 4 So while there has always been a hope 3 Life After God Generation X , at least in part, now stands as an introvert intermezzo an introvert as now stands part, in , at least seek elsewhere than “generational, familial and religious” than “generational, familial and religious” seek elsewhere Ethical concerns, however, are very much present in the story, in the story, present very much are Ethical concerns, however, At one point in story “1000 Years (Or Life After God)”. (Or Life Years story “1000 as the way the father in “Little Creatures” jeopardizes his child’s Coupland’s sense this In tale. cautionary a as figured is innocence mode of postmodern literature the earliest from been days present of per postmodern literature, moral “postmodern atheistic the in noticeable strongly most haps post of vein own Coupland’s In 2006). (Davis, Vonnegut Kurt ist” familial relationships with the father realizing his shortcomings as his with the father realizing familial relationships a this parent, story seems to be a way concrete of turning to the in pick up hisAnd though Coupland would eventually timate sphere. own challenge to write really about the immense issues of contem in concerns environmental as (such life porary After God Life dealing with sadness, life crises and interpersonal relationships. Though while a title as cusing on spiritual themes (which especially Andrew has Tate fo cused on 2002 (Tate & 2007)), this short story cycle, does however, final the in prevalent ones spiritual than other aspects other contain know …whether I’m just upset that the world has gotten too big – way beyond our capacity to tell stories about it” (Coupland, 1991: move then, is Coupland’s 5). Seen in this light, “Little Creatures”, withand issues grander on narratives create to trying from away close of traumas emotional harrowing the surfing Creatures” “Little prevalent in his earlier narratives which engaged more strongly in strongly in his earlier narratives which engaged more prevalent a generational discourse. fulness to be found in Coupland’s fiction, lie in a narrative sincerity thatthe notion that hopefulness may well in his earlier work. wasn’t very prevalent peopleCoup where place The lodging. for pay to stories use could ideal from thus seems to have changed land gets his hopefulness ized places to a new tone in his fiction. Sørensen has noted that the where spaces’ ‘free “potential with operate texts generational cultural choices of the characters can unfold” (Sørensen, 2005: 21) but Sørensen has also noted elsewhere that the characters of After God As 10). 2004: (Sørensen, lives” their in cohesion create “to narratives space seems more free rural such Coupland’s use of the idealized quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------(rath 189 seeks reli

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel showing Volume 04 Life After God A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking offspring from these realities. Sadly, that realization comes much that realization Sadly, realities. these from offspring grandfather as “the golf to the child’s too late as the narrator refers suggest story, short the of sentence first very the in already wino” is and that of what a golf wino is aware ing that the child already As such, the innocence the child may his/her grandfather is one. seem to lose at had, the in been begin fact, compromised already ning of and the dismally story, the father’s self-awareness comes much As too such, late. the double tragedy of the story lies in the strives for 2010: psychological 17), (Greenberg, realism and seeing method of that this short story’s use of the dramatic of its characters, the moral poten er than narrating) the inner lives tial or appeal of this story thus lie in the believable and plausible mode of Coupland’s characterizations, and thus it does not depend on the (fallacious?) validity of any grand narrative. In Closing that his role “forgotten that he had The fact that the father realizes shows 11) 2004: (Sørensen, child” his of innocence the protect to is that he is capable of assessing how he should have protected his that the narrator of the final short story of gion; the moral message isn’t spelled out as much as it is demon strated. That the father’s behavior robs his child of innocence is something that this character realizes by himself and though his the validity of Coupland’s imagination, the product thoughts are in authorial au isn’t grounded or authority of this moral message thority but very simply in its artistry; in its way of conveying this message. That the message can be moral in a believable manner is in believes and accepts reader the whether on contingent fully thus the father’s disappointment with himself and doesn’t dismiss it as mere bathos. As Louis Greenberg has noted, Coupland generally modern moralism, this however, morality seems to be concerned Coup though even because sphere, intimate the of issues the with version idealist an in believing by offered solutions abandons land of a rural setting, he does affirm that morality and even moralist the world he in this cultural setting, though has a role literature portrays sometimes seems rather As bleak. Sørensen puts it, Cou pland is best described as a cautious though sometimes wavering writ Coupland’s in vein moral The 135). 2001: (Sørensen, optimist factthe of spite in narrative grand any in rooted isn’t however, ing, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------about 190

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel (2000) and that that Volume retningsgivende vejled 04 den Miss Wyoming A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking was published in 1994. The hope this in his novel Generation X Life After God With the With ugly break-up as the background its for por this story, literature and literature ning for adfærd, som mennesket ikke ejer i sin natur.” By 1995 it seems that Coupland had had enough of the Generation X media frenzy and tried to put it behind him (see Coupland, 1995 and Sørensen, 2001: generational on comment later would Coupland that argued have I 153-157). novel can be read as Coupland’s treatment of, and reconciliation with, what hap what with, reconciliation and of, treatment Coupland’s as read be can novel pened with the Generation X phenomena in the early 1990s (see Jensen, 2011). As Mark Forshaw has noted “Coupland has never been a postmodern writer for example, or Donald Barthelme, Auster, in the sense that we think of Paul as being postmodern writers. Nevertheless, he is a novelist who writes distaste for both its with increasing and he has done so of late postmodernity 2000: 53). cultural and its economic manifestations” (Forshaw, At the top of the page where the story of Doggles’ begins, there is a drawing At the top of the page where the story of Doggles’ happy dog wearing goggles. of a frisky, mønster man fødes ind i, bliver “Det kulturelle 3 4 Hey Nostradamus!. Notes 1 2 fiction when pastoral romanticism would have offered as consolation is absent centers on the not short story of the the psychological realism and very self-aware protagonist, whose distress is demonstrated to the reader through his haphazard thinking about his life, as well as such, As child. his with issues grown-up too discussing his through this despair and emotional exhaustion sets a bleak initial tone for seri this short story collection which still is yet to receive of the rest exception),an being 2004 (Sørensen criticism analytical detailed ous endeavor seeing how Coupland’s out which does seem a relevant put continues to remain interesting, a prime example being 2003’s father realizing how he has exposed his child to something it isn’t exposed his child to something how he has father realizing at his most fragile child coming to see the father and the for, ready from his child the father should have protected state at a time when As divorce. despair of his life and ongoing seeing the emotional such, they both face some either truths about themselves and/or for. neither of them is ready the world which trayal of a journey as a metaphor for transition also serves as a dis locale, which was new to Coupland’s enchantment of the rural quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , ------OA Miss , Aal 191 Details http://

Mikkel Jensen Mikkel , 16, 3, 326-338. 3, 16, , Volume 04 London: Scribner.

, London: HarperCollins. Transatlantic - Cultural Text - Cultural Text Transatlantic

, Albany: State University of University State Albany: , , , Copenhagen: Gyldendal. New York: St. Martin’s Press. York: New Heinemann. London: William , A Drinking Problem just like Grandpa’s just Problem A Drinking Literature & Theology Literature , Manchester: Manchester Univer , 3, pp. 455-474. Available at: Available 455-474. pp. 3, , Johannesburg: Johannesburg: University of the Witwa Life After God http://wiredspace.wits.ac.za/bitstream/ , London: Routledge. Faith at the Edge: Religion after God in four nov Faith at the Edge: Religion Generation A, Generation X Hey Nostradamus! Labelling a Generation – Generationing the Text Labelling a Generation – Generationing , 12, 3, 39-58. Pastoral Kurt Vonnegut’s Crusade: or, how a postmodern harle a postmodern how Crusade: or, Vonnegut’s Kurt Douglas Coupland Gud, Menneske, Kosmos Culture Unbound Culture . (eds. Andrea Birch & Camelia Elias), Aalborg: Aalborg Aalborg Aalborg: Elias), Camelia & Birch Andrea (eds. 62, Odense: SDU Press. New York Press. York New Critical Survey that mean you have to pay for it for the rest of your life?, your of rest the for it for pay to have you mean that University Press, 21-39. University Press, Douglas Coupland’s Fiction. sity Press. Wyoming www.cultureunbound.ep.liu.se/v3/a29/cu11v3a29.pdf Studies. Cultural International and Language for Institute borg: Coupland. Douglas J.D. Salinger and of the Short Stories SIS of Generational Texts. Topography Studies 2 quin preached a new kind of humanism quin preached els by Douglas Coupland, at: tersrand. Available handle/10539/10459/Louis%20Greenberg%209100531P%20 PhD%20-%20FINAL.pdf June issue. Tate, A., Tate, 2002. ‘Now – Here is my Secret’: Ritual and Epiphany in A., 2007. Tate, Sløk, J., 2008. B., 2001. Sørensen, Sørensen, B., and 2004. Innocence Youth Constructs as in Textual Readings in the Transatlantic B., 2005. Images of Europe: Sørensen, Forshaw, M., 2000. Douglas Coupland: In and Out of ‘Ironic Hell’. ‘Ironic of Out and In Coupland: Douglas 2000. M., Forshaw, 1999. T., Gifford, L., 2010. Greenberg, Jensen, M., 2011. Miss(ed) Generation: Douglas Coupland’s References Coupland, D., 1991. Does 60s. the in born were You X’d. Generation 1995. D., Coupland, Coupland, D., 2003/1994. Coupland, D., 2003. Coupland, D., 2009. 2006. T.F., Davis, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

The Travails of Sal Paradise Jack Kerouac’s On the Road as Narrative Psycho-Geography

Bent Sørensen teaches American literature and culture in the De- partment of Culture and Global Studies, Aalborg University, Denmark. He has published extensively on American literature and culture, for instance Poe, Kerouac and the Beats, Raymond Federman, And Jonathan Lethem. Articles have appeared in The Explicator, Philament, Orbis Litterarum, Liter- ary Research and Contemporary Critical Studies..

In Jack Kerouac’s 1957 novel On the Road1, the central observing char- acter, Sal Paradise, is caught in a double bind. He is explicitly search- ing for ‘kicks’ and an elusive essence of being, which the novel terms “IT,” by traveling incessantly across the American continent, discov- ering its foreignness from within through encounters with eccentric others (eulogized in the novel’s most famous passage as “the mad ones”2 and primarily embodied in his most frequent travel compan- ion, Dean Moriarty); yet simultaneously Sal secretly pursues a more conventional project of self-realization, namely finding the right girl to settle down with. Paradise ultimately fails on both counts in the novel, and his psy- cho-geography can be mapped very directly onto the movements of his physical journeys, as lack of movement and the idea of settling down – with or without a woman –very quickly leads to him suffer- ing a sense of dread and impending death. This theme represents one of two unresolvable paradoxes in Ker- ouac’s life and writing, namely his desire for constant motion while simultaneously requiring order and stability, and his desire to valor- ize deviance and madness positively in others, while deeply fearing it within himself. The journeys in On the Road are thus a metaphor for socially triggered psychological travails3

Volume 04 192 - - - - - The - 193

Bent Sørensen Bent Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails I first met Dean not long after my wife and I split up. I had I up. split I and wife my after long not Dean met first I I won’t bother to talkjust gotten over a serious illness that to do with the misera about, except that it had something And my feeling that everything was bly weary split-up. of the coming of Dean Moriarty began the part dead. With 1957:7) (Kerouac, road. my life you could call my life on the in the following words: “If you really want to hear “If you really in the following words: Bildungsroman Holden, the protagonist of Salinger’s of the protagonist Holden, desire the same has novel, Lost famous most the to similar also is protagonist Kerouac’s This ominous beginning, setting the agenda of psychological tra This ominous beginning, setting Paradise Lost? two central characters features novel On the Road Jack Kerouac’s Para names as “Sal [short for ‘Salvatore’] with such overdetermined might expect withMoriarty”. Contrary to what one dise” and “Dean echoing the evilholy-sounding name and another one angelic and stories, as of Conan Doyle’s Sherlock Holmes criminal mastermind not em- Dean, these two are well as another young, dead [James] each other’s but are any Miltonian antagonistic struggle, in broiled they do not escape Yet halves. best friends, soul mates, even missing each other at the end. In the early betrayals and separation from looking for new beginnings parts of the novel Sal is a protagonist even him miserable, sick, weary, and displacing a past that has made dead. Sal narrates: the very onset of the novel, is clearly similar to another vails from American 1950s fictional beginning, namely that of J.D. Salinger’s of the conventions which famously parodies The Catcher in the Rye the I was want to know is where about it, the first thing you’llprobably born, and what my lousy childhood was like, and how my parents they had me, and all that David Cop occupied and all before were 1951:5) perfield crap, but I don’t feel like going into it.” (Salinger, Of expresses. that Sal speech territory beyond a in past bury his to hav of caught in the insoluble paradox are both narrators course, al ing to say that they don’t want to say certain things, thereby is to learn that there saying too much. Both narrators come ready oth- and lousy childhood misery, their illnesses, no escaping from er ‘Copperfield’-like psychological baggage. Generation Ernest Hemingway’s main character of anti-hero, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - 194

Bent Sørensen Bent Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails gestalt which the completed , Jake Barnes, in his “feeling that everything was dead”was everything that “feeling his in Barnes, Jake , Other than this fling with the exotic the Other, domesticity in in the initial of Dean, as he is introduced Looking now at the role and the After the temporal setting of the past desiring erasure, Sun Also Rises Also Sun man, married a of life the with finished also is Sal 1957:7). (Kerouac, damaged by any apparatus is not permanently (although his sexual (on the to embark on another life and ready war as Barnes’ was) road), but this time with another man as the most important figure with domesticity attempt a form of heterosexual in his life. He does a Mexican girl, but rather perfunctorily dumps her after a Terry, theof the salt of this “Fellahin” member with mixing week or so of other “wild- 1957: 86), and wildcat” (Kerouac, Earth, “a Pachuco buck Mexican hotcat[s]” (88). for always rely by his aunt, on whom he can Sal’s life is represented shelter from “life on the road” and financial aid to get off theroad since Barnes, than wounded definitively less is Sal home. come and whileand him, to available refuge conventional more safer, a has he happiest when among his male he, like Barnes, claims to be the life, his in figure maternal the with off better is he reality in friends, that a male-bonding, moving his aunt. Still, the similarity remains becomes road the on (life novel Kerouac’s by constructed is utopia is life” (199), only to be undermined by Sal’s actual expe “the road riences on said road. sub- as a direct both quote, it is evident that he is presented Kerouac stitute for the wife of Sal, first as the direct successor in time “not in the same manner 1957:7), and also much long after” (Kerouac, that one would expect the next woman to enter Sal’s life, as the and existential crisis. of Sal’s depression albeit temporary, remedy, the sound of the phrase “the coming of Dean Moriarty” Secondly, seems to signal a rather portentous event, not unlike some religious comings or even second comings, certainly signifying new begin the past tense narration inevitably activates a feeling in Yet, nings. already is road” the on could call my life you “life that the reader the past and over at the time of telling, a of the novel indeed bears out. reading thebeen established, has lived by Sal waiting to be (perfect) future of the nov The rest begins. whirlwind narrative of Sal’s many roads pendulate el is taken up with motion and talk as the protagonists for continent in search American the North forth across back and quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------On the 195 in 4

Bent Sørensen Bent Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails What is significant about all these trips and all these roads is the is roads these all and trips these all about significant is What , the eleven stages of the motion of the novel take the protagonist,Road, the eleven stages of the motion of Sal Paradise, fiveYork times to all the way from New across the USA are crossings east. Further to west from other way, San Francisco or the in the too uneventful to be represented planned and aborted, or are thinking schematically gets from narrative, and overall the feeling one at the back-and-forth motion of itsabout the novel is one of dizziness eastward/west swing of the Only once is the rigorous protagonists. in the drive by a penetration into the south replaced pendulum ward to Mexico City – a trip which will be discussed in depth later. manner in which travelling versus non-travelling is figured in the feelings by prefigured are trips of beginnings and ends the All text. heif Sal up with is catching apocalypse if the as nature, a liminal of bigfirst his of end the at Denver in starts It moving. keep not does party with his newfound engages in a major he trip where road At the end of the night, Sal announces in his nar Denver friends. ratorial voice, quite out of the blue: “Everything seemed to be col for his leaving Den lapsing.” (55) This turns out to be the prelude Coast: “My moments in Denver were ver to push along to the West charac a walked her [Rita, it when I could feel I end, an to coming ter Sal has a brief unfulfilling fling with] home, on the way back I with a bunch of hobos, out on the grass of an old church stretched (56) and their talk made me want to get back on that road.” Coast to Coast Fever trips a glance at a list of the road from As will be apparent something indefinable known to them and us only as “IT”, the thing the “IT”, as only us and them to known indefinable something east- After several futile enjoyment. sensuous to have, or “kicks”, of minor characters which a gallery through west-east crossings, the common man, down and out of representatives tend to either be ‘primitive’ races such as or of more around, or downright bumming embark on the ulti Americans, the characters African Mexicans or which is to take them south into the unspoiled heart of mate road by the Mexican jungle. This quest also represented darkness, here the characters then separate andends in sickness and betrayal, and God (“don’t you know that GodSal is left to muse over the state of nobody knows that “nobody, is Pooh Bear?” (291), and realizing going to happen to spiritual] what’s [echoing a well-known negro can never be found. anybody” (291), and that lost fathers quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 196

Bent Sørensen Bent Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails The exact same symptom reveals itself when Sal reaches Califor itself when Sal reaches reveals The exact same symptom emotional or psychologicalAt the end of part II Sal has similar This parade of emotions continues: “It was the Denver night; all he starts mak No sooner has Sal arrived in San Francisco before nia, and finds Terry, the Mexican girl whose life he imposes himself imposes he life whose girl Mexican the Terry, finds and nia, who never accomplish time with her relatives, on. He spends some “Every in his narratorial voice he announces: anything, and again held Terry truck. That night we slept in the thing was collapsing. Of course, he and told me not to leave.” (95) me tight, of course, itabout thinking been had She leaving. was I Terry told “I leaves: to it. [...] She just walked on back to the all night and was resigned plate in one hand. I bowed my head shack, carrying my breakfast again.” (97) I was on the road lackadaddy, Well, and watched her. for domesticity that Sal tries to live out in practice in this The desire episode turns out to be as suffocating as any he might find with a girl, and he is mandated to againwhite, middle-class all-American as a cure. attempt the travails of the road and leaving. The perpetual duality of departure symptoms before stages itself again: “What is thatanticipated arrival at a new goal on they recede people and driving away from feeling when you’re dispersing? - it’s the too-huge the plain till you see their specks to the But we lean forward world vaulting us, and it’s good-bye. is sadness in beneath the skies.” (148) There next crazy venture excitement of the out by the but it is quickly drowned departure, course, that turns out to be an next “crazy” thing in waiting. Of by coming to Friscoother disappointment: “What I accomplished one didn’t care Dean leave; me to wanted Camille don’t know. I was the end; I wanted to get out” (168). [...] It way or the other. none Ultimately, of the locations have delivered on their promise All of ‘kicks’ or craziness in the positive valorisation of the novel. to depart, all that departure is the desire that arrival has produced again. to arrive elsewhere is the desire produces all I did was die” down in Denver, I did was die. Down in Denver, Denver back to Dean in San Fran from he runs (170), and therefore all my bridges any more, was nothing behind me cisco: “[F]or there anything at all.” (171) gone and I didn’t give a damn about were “Everything fell apart in me.” (172) and York, New of way by Dean, with Italy for depart to plans ing the whole thing starts over again. The motion of the characters in quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 197

Bent Sørensen Bent Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails [P]oor forlorn man, poor lost sometimeboy, now broken broken now lost sometimeboy, forlorn man, poor [P]oor my driver the story andghost of the penniless wilds. I told he stopped to tell the old man. on your way west, not east.’ fella, you’re ‘Look here, tell me I don’t know my‘Heh?’ said the little ghost. ‘Can’t I’m Been walkin this country for years. here. way around (101) headed for Canady.’ This is strikingly shown to us in an allegorical scene where Sal This is strikingly shown to us in an allegorical scene where and jungles, some more America has many wildernesses Thus, It is impossible to convince the old man that he is on the wrong old man that It is impossible to convince the he is on the wrong is of course none the wiser himself, although he believes Sal road. between going east and going west, but in to know the difference where difference no makes that it knows is man old what the reality Sal manages a sum you take to go there. you go and which road the novel gradually reveals how the significance of specifics of loca of specifics of significance the how reveals gradually novel the motion for emptied out by the constant desire tion is becoming postponed, an enlight something perpetually away from/towards is very much like found in the novel. One coast enment that is never one like another, is very much one town along the road another, and in fact the very much like any other, is road encounter on the whole is of much the the USA same in this figuration. isThere wil derness everywhere. a little hobo character who meets “the Ghost of the Susquehanna”, to go from night. He wishes American lost in the is irredeemably way. gets lost along the Pennsylvania to “Canady”, but somehow Sal sees him: America was in the mation of sorts: “I thought all the wilderness in No, until the Ghost of the Susquehanna showed me different. West And it is possible to get lost is a wilderness in the East” (101). there An- Los of figuration the with in ties This everywhere. and that, in hot, si night. What brutal, geles as a jungle: “[I] examined the LA the loneliest and most brutal is [...] LA whining nights they are! ren but gets god-awful cold in the winter York New American cities; of in some streets. a feeling of wacky comradeship somewhere there’s is a jungle.” (82-83) LA human than others, but all wild. Later we shall see how images of ill, it makes Sal makes America the Mexican jungle tie in with this. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------198

Bent Sørensen Bent - On the Road as bru Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails ’s Mexican segment, Sal and Dean take off south ’s Mexican segment, Sal and Dean take off Suddenly I found myself on Times Square. I had travelledhad I Square. Times on myself found I Suddenly continent andAmerican the around eight thousand miles and right in the middle of a Square; I was back on Times the ab with my innocent road-eyes too, seeing hour, rush with its York of New solute madness and fantastic hoorair ever for a buck amongmillions and millions hustling for - grabbing, taking, giving, themselves, the mad dream be buried in those awfulsighing, dying, just so they could towershigh The City. Island Long beyond cities cemetery land, the place where of the land - the other end of the is born. (102) America Paper On the Road Both coasts and their metropols are figured in figured are metropols their and coasts Both ward, “‘Officially, Sal, to get a Mexican divorce, cheaper and quick and cheaper divorce, Mexican a get to Sal, “‘Officially, ward, purely seems however, This, 1957:246) (Kerouac, kind.’” any than er but is worth remembering incidental once the trip gets under way, of terms in freer is it that - Mexico to quality of ascription first the as Southward-Ho In While Sal positions himself as the returned outsider who sees things returned While Sal positions himself as the innocence and is outside the general hustling, it is clear with greater following scene that he is no such thing. First, he attempts the from of people, under the feet of the crowds butt from to grab a cigarette to go the minister to get bus fare and then he has to hustle a Greek quickly York any innocence, New last bit of the way home. If he has and mad rush.takes it out of him with its tempo him lonely, it fragments him, and at the same time he needs it to him, and at the same time he it fragments him lonely, coast to coast Sal from round-trips At the end of one of his live. says in summation: cause of his ever imminent collapse of self, which can only be post jour major final the even However, movement. new through poned ney of the novel ends in sickness and betrayal of friendship, despite joys (the protagonists travails and greater its entailing even greater travels. the preceding to finding “IT”) than come closer than before tal constructs that rob a person of his humanity, but on the other a person of his humanity, that rob tal constructs to Sal in the offered hand all chances at meaningful human relations be rejected middle, between coasts and urban wildernesses, are quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - 199

Bent Sørensen Bent Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails [H]ow can homely afternons in Colorado [...] produce a Colorado [...] produce [H]ow can homely afternons in (252) bug like the bug that bit Stan Shepard? and heading for unknown southern lands, were, we Here miles out of hometown [...] a strange feverish three barely into and sent fear corruptions secret from exotic bug rose sinister and doomed.our hearts. [...] It made the trip seem on. (253) drove We Thus, the borderline between the USA and Mexico seems not to is the joy that especially Dean feels as he interesting What is more The trip is figured apparently quite traditionally as beginning in in beginning as traditionally quite apparently figured is trip The “unknown southern towards “homely” Colorado, and moving of fear comes in that the sinister bug is a reversal lands”, but there the trip is not so perhaps corruption”, and “secret “hometown” from trip and the sto As the climes. “doomed” but an escape to healthier marriage legislation and cheaper to navigate than the States. As the the States. and cheaper to navigate than marriage legislation trip gets under way it is figured explicitly as a good occasion for Stan, Sal, Dean, and their friend the protagonists, storytelling, and the trip is beset with their life stories. However, take turns telling that bites Stan, and makes starting with a strange bug omens of fear, Sal wonder: the men encounter signs that Texas, through ry-telling progresses and begun. The heat is “absolutely tropical”, Mexico has already to be Mexican territory indeed.”you “had the feeling all this used town in a entered “We different: (255) The houses seem fewer and wilderness of Mexican rickety southern shacks” (255). up north into Texas, but Mexico stretches follow the actual border, both historically and at the present of telling. Mexico is figuredas a an unusualclear is not become already which as has “wilderness”, USA of dichotomy the Antonio San In text. this in place of figuration togo they clinic The differences. class along depicted Mexico is and things looked more bug bite is “near downtown, where Stan’s for American” (256), yet the clinic is “full of poor Mexican sleek and women, some of them sick or bringing their little sick kids. It was she was doing what and wondered sad. I thought of poor Terry American- and An unsurprising dichotomy of sleekness (256) now.” and Mexican-ness is established. ness versus sickness, poverty, crazi the loves He (256). Antonio” San of “Mexican the streets ‘digs’ quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------200

Bent Sørensen Bent Mañana (89-91), but Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails standing in for the first touch of the of touch first the for in standing 5 These stereotypes have specifically been lodged in Sal’s mind The border still gets invested with “magic” or transcendental quali The border itself is heavily symbolic, and yet tellingly empty of The crossing wonder that is Mexico, finally reached after long postponement ofreached after wonder that is Mexico, finally The scene of course but Mexico looks exactly like Mexico! desire, American index of Mexico the average to the stereotypical refers will have in mind, which is “fellows in straw hats and white pants [...] lounging” (258). who always seem ready relatives his experiences with Terry’s from till getting rich to lounge and loaf and put off here they are to be put to the test. It turns out that the Mexican cops to be they are here are exactly like waiters or hustlers in the USA. One of them says, Mehico. Have good time. “‘Welcome embodying this stereotype: you driving. I say this to you personal, Watch you money. Watch Ask for Red. Eat good. Don’t wor I’m Red, everybody call me Red. Everything ry. fine. Is not hard enjoin yourself in Mehico.’” (259) ness and madness he interprets out of the Mexicans they encounter, out of the Mexicans they encounter, he interprets ness and madness south: “‘I never appetite for further movement and this raises his what Mexico’ll be like! Lessgo!Antonio! Think knew this mad San positive valori in the usual (for Beat texts) Lessgo!’” (257). Madness Antonio, which coupled to the Mexicanness of San zation is ascribed thethat means place, the from gets Dean charge sexual the with psy and sexual with loaded becomes south, unknown the for quest anticipa as the ‘going’ itself gets sexualized through just chic energy, to miles fifty and hundred last the for ready were we now “And tion. (257). the magic border” becomes established as tantamount to a sex ties, as the act of crossing climax to the trip. Thisual entering of Mexico, a long anticipated the border description of Laredo, theme is heavily played out in the that morn was a sinister town libido: “Laredo American town as an heavy the all America where of the bottom and dregs ing. [...] It was specifica near be to go to have people disoriented where sink, villains they can slip into unnoticed.” (258) elsewhere signification: “But everything changed when we crossedthe mys Mex official on rolled wheels our and river the over bridge terious looked with We Mexico began. the street ican soil [...] Just across (258) our amazement, it looked exactly like Mexico.” To wonder. is the bridge “mysterious”, only This is indeed a rich scene. Not and the wheels synechdocally quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 201

Bent Sørensen Bent Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails [T]he road ran straight as an arrow. Not like driving across Not like driving ran straight as an arrow. [T]he road driving like but Illinois; or Arizona, or Texas, or Carolina, across the world and into the places where we would fi of the among the Fellahin Indians nally learn ourselves and unmistakably Indians were people [...] These world of silly civi- Panchos and at all like the Pedros not were not not fools, they were [...] they were lore American lized the grave Indians and they were great, clowns; they were mankind and the fathers of it. (263-264) of source It is clear that for Dean the significance of Mexico is always seen a The attainment of the goal of enlightenment also presupposes Sal can make the comparisons between “civilized American lore” lore” American between “civilized the comparisons make can Sal that he personally authenticity and the observation of greater makes, unlike Dean who still expects the “enormous Sierra Madre expecting a movies, American in look like they do to mountains” and re one to one equivalence between mediated representation Thus blessed, the trio once more get the impatient urge to pen get the impatient urge trio once more Thus blessed, the “And think of the south. Dean cannot wait: etrate further into Sierra Madre with those enormous ahead of us this big continent the way downall jungles and the the movies, in saw we mountains down to plateau as big as ours and reaching and a whole desert What’lldo? we What’ll whoo! where, knows God and Guatemala we do? Let’s move!’” (259-260) in itself whatAmerica he knows, and that in a comparison with the then and it towards first movement the than place the less is matters it. through This never changes for Dean, but for Sal the significance in the otherness of Mexico. Heof place is just about to dawn on him others the while drives he as roads of difference the over muses first sleeping: are as to “learn our what he startlingly formulates Sal desires ality. en for quest a on apparently is the Fellahin”, and among selves and into the sources lightenment as well as a quest of regression the Indian of heavy romanticization This mankind. of fatherhood American than civilized original and primordial other as more which includes this formulation of the ‘Beat’ ethos, man is a core anti-intellectual striving. American uptightness for Sal. He and letting go of the super-ego quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - 202

Bent Sørensen Bent Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails We took off our T-shirts and roared through the jungle the jungle through and roared our T-shirts took off We [...] bare-chested. bitten all of us on Thousands of mosquitoes had already me:to came idea bright a Then ankles. and arms and chest out of the car and stretched I jumped up on the steel roof weath- the life my in time first the For [...] back. my on flat me, me, that caressed er was not something that touched and me, but became me. The atmosphere or sweated froze I became the same. Soft infinitesimal showers of- micro face as I slept, and theyscopic bugs fanned down on my pleasant and soothing. (276-277) extremely were These questions remain unanswered as the trio again are urged urged as the trio again are unanswered These questions remain Thus, the bugs are no longer sinister and poisonous, but rather no longer sinister and poisonous, but rather Thus, the bugs are part of him as he becomes partmingle with Sal’s body and become and takes away all his bodilyof them. The jungle welcomes him benevolent and he becomes one discomfort. Everything is entirely that his to the same level of primitiveness reverting with nature, This Romantic notion ofidolized Fellahin have as their birthright. is organism with the world as one living breathing becoming one of the Beat ethos of striving foran essential image of the novel and location to achieve ancient ‘it-ness’, and Sal has to go to a renewing, with a vision in a highly At the end of the night Sal is rewarded it. and “immense ghostly white horse, a involving allegorical scene to directly (278), trotting and easy to see” almost phosphorescent achieves this in the key jungle scene, which involves the assimila key jungle scene, which involves achieves this in the implications the sinister without now into the body, bugs tion of American bug-scene: of the to bestow some form Dean. The horse seems sent for Dean wards to witness the event of blessing upon him, and Sal as usual is there Whathorse? this was “What wonders: He it. about us to testify and myth and ghost, what spirit?” (278) But the next and go further. to see more to move on by their desire enlightenment Sal has announced the promised day Dean is offered along the line I knew the beginning of the novel: “Somewhere from along the line the be girls, visions, everything; somewhere there’d pearl would be handed to me.” (14) Since Sal has such confidence it is not surprising that such events in that the world is his oyster, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------203 On the On the

Bent Sørensen Bent Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails On the Road does not indicate any permanent escape This crucial exchange is Sal’s high point of knowledge and cer exchange is Sal’s high point of knowledge and This crucial andill falls Sal City, Mexico reach travellers the when However, ouac, 1957:7), but at best a passing of time while waiting around to ouac, 1957:7), but at best a passing of time while waiting around throughout contradicted world-weariness is This old and die. grow it is nar of the prose and insistence the novel by the breathlessness rated in, which occasions us to query whether the haste of the nar Conclusion Ultimately, from the “miserable weary split-up[s]” of the opening quote (Ker the “miserable weary split-up[s]” of from deed unfold, and that they do so in Mexico. What is noteworthy isis What Mexico. in do so and that they unfold, deed is who Sal, for such at not and for Dean, pass to come they that chil observer status. The trio meet some consigned to once more Dean wants one (“no big crystals. rock that wish to sell them dren crystal and smallest “the sweetest and purest ger than a berry”), He the mountain for me” (281). picked from she has personally and as the “pearl” now hasexchanges the crystal for a wristwatch, faceamong them with his ragged been handed to him: “He stood to the looking sky, for the next and highest and final pass, and As they that had come to them.” (281) seemed like the Prophet they follow them, and Dean muses: “‘Would leave the children slow to Mexico City if we drove try to follow the car all the way (281) I said, for I knew.” enough?’ ‘Yes’, insight pertaining to himself. Hetainty in the world, but it is not an among the Fellahin, the prophet has seen the coming of Dean as handing on of the pearl, he has toand by witnessing the act of the all it. Dean has been his prophet an extent personally partaken in “all the way”, he knows thatalong, and as he would follow Dean certainty is the height of others would too. This epistemological affirmation of purpose in the novel, and it is not incidental that it and that it takes place in view in Mexico, takes place in primitivity, represented is place Thus, pass”. final and highest and “next the of in the Mexico scenes of in liminal and apocalyptic terms and girls (albeit in visions Road, especially in this last scene where the with unified become version) immature sexually and purified a gift of the ‘pearl’. follows his libido back by Dean who is summarily abandoned there to the US in search of new girls and more sex. Sal makes his way home alone, as single as ever and now newly friendless as well. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - 204

6 Bent Sørensen Bent Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails In this scheme of things the man who knows time and has ‘it’ and has ‘it’ things the man who knows time In this scheme of tidy message into a neat and to be resolved novel refuses The The of desirous to be saved, mad to live, mad to talk, mad ones who are The experiences described in the novel date back to Kerouac’s road road The experiences described in the novel date back to Kerouac’s trips in 1947, and composition began in 1948. The final draft of the 3-week-period in 1951, but the ver novel was composed in a frenzied sion that came out of those sessions was edited considerably before sion that came out of those sessions was edited considerably before version of the eventual publication in 1957. The 1951, so-called scroll been published, but as 95 % of all Kerouac manuscript has recently to the 1957 version, this is also the edition I refer criticism addresses in this article.

2 the ones, the mad are me for only people “The quote reads: full Notes 1 rative might not be a large-scale displacement of the fear of old age displacement of the fear of be a large-scale rative might not themes of questing and death. The (for meaning), remembering, in a wistful eulogy to madness inscribed are talking, and suffering of illumination. as the ultimate state as ‘the goal’ of “the end” - in both senses, is also the harbinger Thus, it is Dean who has a full- and ‘the conclusion’, presumably. fledgedreligious philosophy complete with salvation,resurrec is temporarily ‘lost’ as to tion and an afterlife, while Sal Paradise might eventually have been He the meaning of this philosophy. it as any disciple must do to initiated into it, and also transcend the chooses to renounce Sal, however, become his own master. path the Beatific, the of path the follow instead and ‘it’, of church is Pooh Bear”, that all is suffer that leads to knowing that “God come to may be life, but also that all roads ing, and that the road come to the end of the road an end, and that all human beings and couldn’t talk any more (the last time Sal meets Dean, “Dean lost it all, life, time, ‘it’). said nothing” (290), having also the and instead ambiguously captures about its central concerns the – America 1950s in males middle-class white many anxiety of fear of by an even greater fear of conventionality is only trumped are everyday life and peer recognition of going mad if the structures in too much. Sal’s psycho-geography equally remains transgressed limbo – standing still is tantamount to death, but movement leads to illness and betrayal, as travel and travail melt into one. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------205

Bent Sørensen Bent On the Road: Volume 04 The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails 1. Trip to Denver. Sal solo; w. Eddie; w. Eddie; w. Sal solo; w. to Denver. 1. Trip . to Denver. Sal solo; w. Henry. Told in brief; Told Henry. Sal solo; w. . to Denver. ginia to N.Y, and back to Virginia, and back and back and back to Virginia, ginia to N.Y, doned; Dean goes alone. mate of manners, cf. OED: “The sense-development (of ‘travail’) has not OED: “The sense-development (of mate of manners, cf. has English in English. Thus and in French course the same followed for which the Old English word not developed the simple sense ‘work’, evolved the sense ‘jour has not has lived on. On the other hand, French Anglo-Norman, and has early in voyager, which appeared ney’ = French the spelling by differentiated is and English, in sense main the become as they continue in use, original senses, so far ‘travel’, while the more the earlier spelling ‘travail’.” retain ers about to set foot on foreign soil. Because the car is their preferred their preferred is car the soil. Because foreign foot on set to about ers 10. Stan Sal/Dean w. whorehouse) Denver to Mexico City (via Gregoria (illness) Laura) aban Home: plans to go to San Fran. (Sal/Dean w. 11. pt. V: whole. the for stands part the where figure rhetorical a is synechdoche A In this case the wheels of their car stand for the whole carload of travel to N.Y. Sal/Dean w. Marylou & Ed; Sal/Dean w. “my aunt”; 6. N.Y. “my aunt”; 6. N.Y. Marylou & Ed; Sal/Dean w. Sal/Dean w. to N.Y. Marylou w. Ed; Sal/Dean w. via New Orleans to San Fran. Sal/Dean vaulting us, and it’s good-bye”, & hitchhikers (“the too-huge world p. I wanted to get out”, p. 168) 148) (“It was the end; via Denver to Fag-Plymouth; The Caddie): 7. (N.Y. pt. III (Gas-share: untold. San Fran.) Sal solo. Largely San 8. 171); p. gone”, were bridges (“my 170) p. die”, was did I (“all (“nauseas”, p. 210), via fag via Denver: Sal/Dean w. York: Fran to New Sal/Dean (“hor jesuit college boys, via Detroit: Chicago: Sal/Dean w. 9. N.Y pt. IV (The ‘37 Ford): There are in all 11 roadtrips, told or described, in roadtrips, in all 11 are There and hitchhikes): pt. I (Buses p. 55); 2. (Denver to Sanbums (“Everything seemed to be collapsing”, 58; 3. San Fran. to Southern Cali- Fransisco) Sal solo: “uneventful”, p. (“Everything was collapsing”, p. 95); 4. Back Terry fornia. Sal solo; w. Sal solo; Ghost of the Susquehanna York. to New pt. II (The Hudson): 5. Vir everything com the ones who never yawn or say a at the same time, can fabulous yellow roman thing, but burn, burn, burn like monplace the you see in middle and the stars across like spiders exploding dles (11) ‘Awww!’” pop and everybody goes blue centrelight etymologically linked in the most inti of course and travails are Travels at dawn”, p. 231) (Plan to go to Italy (Sal/Dean) abandoned) ror-hole

5 4 3 quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

. - - - The 206

Bent Sørensen Bent Book of Dreams South of Our Selves Volume Capturing the Beat Mo 04 (2010). The above piece above The (2010). The Travails of Sal Paradise of Sal The Travails , Scribners: New York. , Scribners: New eat Danish-based American BeatAmerican eat Danish-based , Little Brown & Co.: New York. York. & Co.: New , Little Brown Psychoanalytic Encounters: Inter , Southern Illinois U. Illinois Southern Boys, The Daybreak . [online] Available at: http://www.oed. Available . [online] , Penguin: New York & London. York On the Road, Penguin: New The Sun Also Rises Also The Sun , Southern Illinois U. Press: Carbondale Capturing the Beat Moment: Cultural Politics andCapturing the Beat Moment: Cultural disciplinary Papers in Applied Psychoanalysis: A Report on Know disciplinary Papers in Applied Psychoanalysis: A Belgrade. ledge, Belgrade University Press: In Dimitrijevic et al. eds. 2009 the Poetics of Presence Carbondale Press: com [Accessed 31 December 2011]. North Carolina means of transport, it is to be expected that ’wheels’ and not ’feet’ will it is to be expected that ’wheels’ and means of transport, theirs to touch Mexico. be the first part of much to the gr The paper above owes volume ground-breaking truly whose Stephenson, Gregory scholar Boys Daybreak (1990) was one of the very first attempts to wrest Beat Of the it had been stuck in till then. biographical mire Studies out of the has exchanged ideas with over amany other Beat scholars the author he of the Beat psycho-geography, decade of working with the ideas offiguration the on Sheldon Glenn of work the out single to like would Beats in his book Mexican space in the poetry of the (2004), as well as Erik Mortenson’s recent study, study, (2004), as well as Erik Mortenson’s recent ment: Cultural Politics and the Poetics of Presence Presence of Poetics the and Politics Cultural ment: volumes, for the explicitly to these highly praiseworthy does not refer not consistent with the that they use other terminologies, simple reason author’spresent character-narration of space and reading neo-Freudian in On the Road.

Mortenson, Erik, 2011. Mortenson, Erik, 2011. Jack Kerouac’s Bent, 2009. Beat Dreams. Sørensen, References Ernest. 1926. Hemingway, Kerouac, Jack, 1978/1957. 6 Oxford English Dictionary J.D., 1951. Catcher in the Rye Salinger, , McFarland: Jefferson, , McFarland: Jefferson, Selves Glenn, 2004. South of Our Sheldon, 1990. Stephenson, Gregory, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Heading South in Search of Female Development D.H.Lawrence’s The Lost Girl

Minjeong Kim received her Ph.D in English from the State Univer- sity of New York at Binghamton. Her research inter- ests are, broadly defined, twentieth century British and Anglophone literatures, postcolonial theory, globalization, and gender and sexuality studies.

In this essay, I examine the ways in which D.H.Lawrence’s 1920 nov- el The Lost Girl describes its female protagonist Alvina Houghton’s journey to southern Italy. This novel introduces the motif of journey as part of the female Bildungsroman structure. Alvina travels to Pescocalascio, repudiating the patriarchal restrictions in her paro- chial British hometown of Woodhouse and pursuing development outside home. But the colonial fear and anxiety about what lies out- side European civilization inform the narrative view of the untrod- den southern Italian town of Pescocalascio. Where European civili- zation begins to fade out and sinister primitivism opens its jaw, our female protagonist becomes lost. Hence the representation of Italian primitivism in the novel frustrates Alvina’s pursuit of development, but the foreign landscape and the presence of the colonial Other within Lawrence’s text disrupt the Bildungsroman’s self-contained, teleological structure.

Yesterday Italy was at her best, such brilliant sun and sky…I shall go further south –feel I want to go further and further south – don’t know why. (Lawrence’s letter, 18 November 1919)

Volume 04 207 ------208

Minjeong Kim Minjeong Volume 04 (1996), Simon Gikandi, noting that the motif the that noting Gikandi, Simon (1996), Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading Yet no one has examined in depth Ital Lawrence’s Yet 1 Maps of Englishness Maps of Englishness When viewed in the analytical light that Ouditt provides, an re Recognizing the importance of Italy in Lawrence’s oeuvre, many oeuvre, in Lawrence’s Recognizing the importance of Italy In Harold Harold gets no further than Rome, and ‘nobody travels south of Rome’” (Ouditt, 2006, p. 123). 1920 novel markable is fact that it about Lawrence’s describes its fe male Alvina protagonist Houghton’s trip to Pescocalascio, a region south of Naples and located between Atina present day and Pici this “curious, power few critics have attempted to reclaim A nisco. its from 381) p. 1990, (Balbert, fiction” ambivalent ultimately and ful, ian novels in connection to the colonial discourse of primitivism. discourse to the colonial in connection ian novels text set in literary a Lawrence’s This essay is an attempt to read “south word The primitivism. of the lens southern Italy through of the tourist industry in the ern” is important. The development second half of the nineteenth century transformed southern Eu travelers British for popular destinations the most of into one rope “south does where But century. twentieth the of beginning the by analysis of the his In her recent to, precisely? refer ern” Europe Brit the to that argues Ouditt Sharon writing, travel British of tory ends in northern Italy: typically ish travelers, southern Europe Childe Byron’s Tuscany. beyond barely Forster’sis “[E.M.] ‘south’ sively, to escape from and findsively, an alternative to capitalist industrial But “as early as 1918, Law modernity paralyzing British society. traveled very little yet, had of the world and his experience rence surpris not is It 31). p. 2004, (Ceramella, Europe” to limited still was moved “further and further south” ing, then, that young Lawrence a country lo continent, imagining that Italy, within the European remedy viable a provide would Europe, of end southern the at cated society. northern European by which to ameliorate the ills of critics have analyzed the writer’s southern Euro to the relation pean country. of journey appears frequently in European writers’ work in the years between the two world wars, relates it to the prevalent sense terminal the “state of think that to overcome of crisis. These writers to “a is literary pilgrims who travel what is needed crisis” in Europe, possible sanctuary for the lost souls of civilization” and use its en (Gikandi,civilization European re-vitalizing of purpose the for ergy 1996, p. 179). The work of D.H.Lawrence can be understood in a exten traveled Lawrence his writing career, Through similar way. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------209

as a female Minjeong Kim Minjeong Volume 04 “begins as the story of The Lost Girl describes Alvina’s struggle in a The Lost Girl Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading The Lost Girl but the novel’s representation of “primitive” southern “primitive” of representation novel’s the but 2 makes an important intervention in the tradition of the makes an important intervention Houghton constitutes the focal point of Lawrence’s narrative. In point of Lawrence’s Houghton constitutes the focal its barest outline, for de and her search town called Woodhouse small, provincial velopment. The novel opens by describing Alvina’s father James Houghton. A muddle-headed James dreamer, starts a number of vil the of taste bigoted cheap, the to cater don’t which businesses lagers. His enterprises keep failing, and meanwhile, his daughter Alvina finds herself caught between the rigid expectations ofre the Bildungsroman disrupt the genre’s self-contained, teleological teleological self-contained, genre’s the disrupt Bildungsroman the structure. Suffrage” “Something Better than the Phillip Herring observes that the de Manchester House, prophesying decline and fall of the dram by “ends but England]” [in class mercantile the of struction people escape the prison atizing the way in which extraordinary (Her two” of society a build, to begin or build, to environment of ring, 1979, p. A succinct 11). summary of the novel as it may be, Alvina that clear sufficiently it make not does statement Herring’s the awareness that women’s development requires freedom from from freedom that women’s development requires the awareness half of thisAs I will explain in the second status quo. the patriarchal plan Lawrence’s to describe women’s development however, essay, Alvina encounters in her Italian outside Britain comes to a halt, as husband Ciccio’s hometown Pescocalascio unrestrained primitiv ism. Our female protagonist becomes lost amongst the Italian land fails to achieve what aims to achieve: the he scape, and Lawrence description of a successful pattern of female Bildung. Nonethelss, The Lost Girl Alvina’s in Bildungsroman: early twentieth century British female ability to home return and thus the absence of the typical ending of long neglect, Italy has received insufficient critical attention. My essay isdivided in two parts. In the first part, I will define the motif of introduces that Lawrence text and show Bilduntsroman the Italian journey as part of a female Bildungsroman plot. It is im text for his female Bildungsroman masterplan portant in Lawrence’s to the pattern of devel up according does not grow that his heroine social assimilation as the goal ofopment which designates a youth’s education. In other Alvina’s words, journey abroad is instigated by quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------210

Minjeong Kim Minjeong Volume 04 , the Bildungsroman narrates thenarrates Bildungsroman the , Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading The Way of the World the of Way The However, simply replacing a male protagonist with a female pro a male protagonist simply replacing However, Making a woman character the protagonist of his novel and fo Making a woman character the protagonist tagonist does not warrant the birth of a new genre. The male pro informs which orientation male the of symptom one just is tagonist and her The female protagonist text in entirety. the Bildungsroman pattern of inevitably development, collide therefore, with the Bil The most conspicuous collision male assumptions. dungsroman’s Moretti Franco As development. the youth’s the goal of concerns his in explains youth’s assent to the existing At social the order. beginning of a free from a from domestic free life and establish a public identity for the first And these changes gave rise to the time in British women’s history. the formation of female which represents expectation for a genre The female seems Bildungsroman to fit thesubjectivity. bill, at first the glance: since its conception at the end of the eighteenth century, Bildungsroman has been understood as a genre primarily con cerned with the description of an individual’s subjectivity forma protagonist’s male the portrays the Bildungsroman Typically, tion. wom a describe to appropriated be can genre the but development, an’s development. member of the theatrical group. She is irresistibly attracted to the a of search in always and Italy, of the south from man enigmatic Alvina marries Ciccio and leaves with him new life outside home, for his Italian hometown. Law restrictions, patriarchal cusing on her attempt to escape from for women’s develop feminist effort to the growing responds rence Some Bildungsroman. female the of demand literary the and ment op The expanding this point clear. explanation is necessary to make as well as the achieve portunities for education and employment ment of women’s suffrage in 1928 allowed British women to break spectable middle class women, her father’s dwindling economy father’seconomy her dwindling women, class middle spectable which makes it impossible to meet those expectations, and her indefatigable desire for a life not circumscribed by patriarchal She dates normalcy. with a number of men in town and tries a nar the in point turning A her. satisfies none but careers, of couple an itin when one day, is provided life Alvina’s in rative as well as erant theatrical company called the visits Natcha-Kee-Tawaras This visit Houghton’s theatre. to perform at James Woodhouse the Italian with a chance to meet Ciccio, our heroine provides quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------The crit 211

to reconcile to reconcile Minjeong Kim Minjeong refuses Volume 04

3 deserves our attention. The deserves our attention. The The Lost Girl Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading in existing society and as such, is not ultimately demonstrate this point. Alvina When is desperate to find the patriarchal imperatives of society and the patriarchal participation In this statement, Lawrence reveals his awareness of the limita his awareness reveals In this statement, Lawrence When viewed in this light, Lawrence’s explanation of what he of explanation Lawrence’s light, this in viewed When The problem of then, the The lies female problem in Bildungsroman, the con right to vote helps to build “a new woman-centered political cul Lawrence Yet 6-7). pp. 2000, Holton, and (Purvis agenda” and ture seems to suggest that women’s enfranchisement indicates wom en’s conducive to their development. The following passages from Lost Girl something better the suffrage, the driving engine of her quest is her “extraordinariness.” Lawrence Lawrence composed in December 1912, and in the letter that he sent to his friend shortly after finishing the Lawrence story, pro this a plan to develop the story into a novel. Introducing claims plan, he writes, “I shall do my work for women, better than the 1912/2002, p. 490). (Lawrence, suffrage” soci patriarchal within development pursuit of of women’s tions on the one hand, and the contradictions of the female Bildung ety, It escapes the scope of this essay to discuss in on the other. sroman, the of limits the as well as significance cultural and political the full the achievement of women’s campaigns. True, women’s suffrage tradiction between the Bildungsroman’s demand of a disciplined status of the hegemonic citizenry committed to the reinforcement the status quo. to accept refusal quo and the female protagonist’s development of pursuit in woman modern the differently, Put icizes society, patriarchal from Attempting to gain freedom with them. disrupts text Bildungsroman a of protagonist female the therefore, genre. and the ideology of the Bildungsroman the internal order attempts to portray in novel draws upon “Elsa Culverwell,” a twenty-page story that Bildungsroman text, the youth’s desire for individuality and his so his and individuality for desire youth’s the text, Bildungsroman ciety’s expectation of normalcy are in conflict with each but other, them as his social expectations and accepts as the youth internalizes into and is successfully assimilated with society own, he reconciles larg joining of means by freedom individual of achievement The it. er collectives, or the process of becoming “a subjected subject,” to use Louis Althusser’s 1972, words, (Althusser, p. 181) marks the completion of the youth’s development. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------212 in

Minjeong Kim Minjeong Volume 04 , were detestable, were , work or employment (1938). In this essay, Woolf argues that the that argues Woolf essay, this In (1938). Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading Three Guineas Three than the performing of a set of special actions dayactions special of set a of performing the than …There was no hope for Alvina in the ordinary. If help ordinary. the in Alvina for hope no was …There (Lawrence, 1920/1968, p. 96) (Lawrence, She rebelled with all her backbone against the word job. substitutes, the Even she did not want unbearable. to Emphatically, work for a more be anything Could humiliating. too was It wage. dig fra in day out, for a life-time, in order to receive some shil condition of shame. A Shameful! lings every seventh day. Manchester House, hiding herself as much as possible exalted of juice heady the suck can Men view. public from self-importance from the bitter weed of failure – failures the most conceited of men: even as was James usually are For is another matter. Houghton. But to a woman, failure life own her establish to failure live, to failure means it her And this is humiliating, the ulti on the face of the earth. 1920/1968, p. 98) mate humiliation. (Lawrence, But we protest that Alvina is Ordinary not peo ordinary. extraordi people, extraordinary But fates. ordinary ple, nary fates. Or else no fate at all. The all-to-one-pattern indi is too much for most extraordinary modern system aside. disused them throws or off them kills just It viduals. the extraordinary. came, it would have to come from Hence the extreme peril of her case. Hence the bitter fear and humiliation she felt as she drudged shabbily on in Lawrence makes no direct reference to women’s suffrage in the in the to women’s suffrage reference makes no direct Lawrence his describing by clear issue the on thought his makes he but novel, to work. It helps us at this point to refusal heroine’s extraordinary brieflyWoolf’s studyVirginia argument on women’s work as ex in pressed franchise, the political cause for which the daughters of educated ceded by Alvina’s declaration of a refusal to work. In the face of her father’s ever-decreasing income, she meditates for a moment (95): of work, only to find the idea “hideous” the prospect When the narrative stresses Alvina’s extraordinariness, its mean Alvina’s extraordinariness, When the narrative stresses ing is made clearer when we note that the passage above is pre quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------213

Minjeong Kim Minjeong Volume 04

Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading At the opening pages of the novel, it is not yet clear what Law At the opening pages of the novel, However, Lawrence seems to think that women’s work raises the seems to think Lawrence However, déclassée. She liked feeling an outsider” (135). Alvina is convinced is Alvina (135). outsider” an feeling liked She déclassée. stepping outside the that and the narrative convinces the readers “stand[ing] toward step first the constitutes order given the of grids on her own ground” (135). In this process, Lawrence affirms the idea that he insinuates in the letter – that is, the woman protago to change the exiting attempts nist of the female Bildungsroman for her instead of conforming to it, to make room social order, development. ment, something radically different is needed. ment, something radically different to going is he how and suffrage the than better as envisions rence emphasiz narrative repeatedly it. Instead, Lawrence’s represent when example, For unconventionality. Alvina’s celebrates and es father’s her with flirts and father’s theatre her at piano the plays she protégée her that thinks Pinnegar Miss May, Mr. partner business In the narrator’s our words, tarnishes irreparably. her reputation heroine becomes “déclassée: she had lost her class altogether” call people ordinary what about less care cannot Alvina But (135). “a disgrace’ Instead, (116). “she rather liked it. She liked being she had earned with her own hands herself,” a working woman isshe had earned with her own hands stand and house, private the of shadow the from “issue to enabled world” new the and world old the between lies which bridge the on 1938/2006, p. 20). (Woolf, indicate both as insofar enfranchisement, women’s as question same women’s participation in the male-oriented social By order. means of unhesitatingly defining job, work and employment as “a condi not accept exten that she does declares tion of shame,” our heroine – women’s rights to work and tosion of male privileges to women develop Alvina’s For female development. of a method vote – as men have struggled for the past 150 years, is “in itself by no means no by itself “in is years, 150 past the for struggled have men negligible” 1938/2006, (Woolf, p. 19), but it doesn’t gain its full with connected “mysteriously is vote to right the until significance of educatedsuch immense value to the daughters another right of 1938/2006, is p. referring men” to 19). (Woolf, wom Here Woolf en’s right to earn their living, made possible or facilitated by the Woolf, the truly im to According Act ofSex 1919. Disqualification development is provided, portant stepping stone for women’s sixpence that “the sacred with workplace: women enter the when quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------The The 214 (1974), Je

Minjeong Kim Minjeong Volume 04 Season of Youth Season of Youth Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading (1993), from the seventeenth to the early nineteenth When Alvina travels to Ciccio’s hometown in Italy, her journey journey her Italy, in hometown Ciccio’s to travels Alvina When Upon the arrival of the Natcha-Kee-Tawaras in Woodhouse, the in Woodhouse, Upon the arrival of the Natcha-Kee-Tawaras thought of marrying and filling the niches assigned to them in their in them to assigned niches the filling and marrying of thought 1993, p. 130). society” (Buzard, education of notion the reverberate to appears south European to al travel as discussed by the two critics. But her travel is signifi described as travel of pattern usual the from differentiated cantly returns Bildungsroman the of youth the Bildungsroman: the in home, once his education outside home is complete. The youth’s eley, 1974, p. 17). The educational aspect of journey is observed in ain observed is journey of aspect educational The 17). p. 1974, eley, book his explains Buzard James As reality. in practice similar Beaten Track the dominant form of trips constituted centuries, the Grand Tour men from young unmarried continent. Typically, to the European privileged backgrounds went to the continent “in the fraternal company of tutors and friends” (Buzard, 1993, p. 130) for the pur pose of enhancing their classical minds and getting them to be fa The 110). p. 1993, (Buzard, civilization” of sources “the with miliar in stage finishing “a as Tour Grand the understood travelers young the process of education and maturation, undertaken before they gaze makes the writer engage one of the principal codes of the Bil gaze makes the writer engage one dungsroman, or the motif of In journey. Bildungsro typical a of outlines broad “the abstracts Buckley rome man plot”: “a child of some sensibility grows up in the country or he finds constraints,town, socialwhere and intel a provincial in some imagination….He therefore, lectual, placed upon the free of home atmosphere repressive times at a quite early age, leaves the in independently way his make to innocence), relative the also (and “ed real his There London). usually novels, English the (in city the and – also but career a for preparation his only not begins, ucation” (Buck life” urban of experience direct his – importantly more often novel focuses on the troupe’s most exotic member Ciccio. The Ital The Ciccio. member exotic most troupe’s the on focuses novel answer to seem mobilizes he that journey of motif the and man ian help. an extraordinary Alvina’s call for Triumphantly “Savagely and which Italy, Towards Refuses Our Living Culture” Stressing the impossibility Alvina’s of development within the do mestic turns Lawrence sphere, his gaze This abroad. turning of the quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------215 they they

Minjeong Kim Minjeong dark Volume 04 betrays the expectation of the 1920/1968, p.159-60) Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading The Lost Girl Lawrence, “They like you to touch them.” how “Who?” His eyes kept hers. Curious “The horses,” she said. She was afraid of his long, cat- what? ( was to turn and go away from the stable. But a deeper face, as she said to him: impulse made her smile into his seemed, with only a yellow ring of pupil. He was looking usual self, impersonal. beyond her right into her, like look. she Yet felt convinced of his ultimate good-na ture. He seemed to her to be the only passionately good- him vaguely, man she had ever seen. She watched natured in – him In him. in belief implicit trust, vague strange with He smiled into her eyes as if she understood. She was aHe smiled into her eyes as if she so stable, the of out from her at smiled he as nervous trifle impulse Her derisive. half-mysterious, and yellow-eyed Lawrence’s Lawrence’s novel begins to anticipate the denouement of the gets lost amongst the foreign landscape of Italy and is unable to home. return her In Ciccio. with rapport a establishes Alvina as soon as narrative first meeting of the Italian man, she feels as if “a great instinctive good-naturedness came out of him” (157), but she also finds him unintelligible, and enigmatic: threatening, Bildungsroman’s circular structure. Lawrence’s woman character woman character Lawrence’s structure. circular Bildungsroman’s Alvina’s response to Ciccio demonstrates an uncomfortable admix of dread and development her of source a him in find to hope of ture And over the course of the narrative, Cic his animalistic behaviour. Houghton’s James after particularly intensifies, Alvina to threat cio’s death. Upon the learning of the unfortunate news, Ciccio “gives [to as of summons towards with his head, Alvina] the faintest gesture return to the fold at the conclusion of the Bildungsroman is close of the Bildungsroman to the fold at the conclusion return ly related to his subjectivity formation. Because he grows to be a once youth, the Subject, the to subject and by interpellated subject aberrant, must return to the centered whole structured and or chestrated by higher authorities. The Bildungsroman’s self-con tained teleological structure becomes complete when the young man is into relocated a Howev place proper vis-à-vis the center. the conclusion of er, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------216

Minjeong Kim Minjeong 1920/1968, Volume 04 Lawrence, Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading Her eyes were wide and neutral and submissive, with with submissive, and neutral and wide were eyes Her Her soul started, and died in her. And again he gave thehe And again died in her. and started, Her soul slightest, almost imperceptible jerk of the head, back- him. summoning her towards and sideways, as if wards But in his His face too was closed and expressionless. eyes, which kept hers, there was a dark flicker of ascend And it. knew She her. over triumph to going was He ancy. out away sank It body. her of out sank it if as sank soul her powerless, soulless…. left her there of her body, awful submission as if she had lost her a soul. new, She looked up at him, like a victim. ( p. 197) To Balbert, Ciccio’s enigmatic charm remains an unresolved mys unresolved an remains charm enigmatic Ciccio’s Balbert, To him” (197), and this gesture kills the Englishwoman bereft of father of bereft Englishwoman the kills gesture this and (197), him” ly protection: Commenting about the passage above, Peter Balbert raises a ques tion. First, he notes that an emphasis on an organic vision and a vision and a on an organic tion. First, he notes that an emphasis individ between barriers transcends which consciousness cosmic uals informs Lawrence’s oeuvre. But there is, Balbert maintains, something in Alvina’s response to Ciccio’s first kiss that goes “be 1990, (Balbert, vision” organic Lawrence’s of requirements the yond p.in silently conniving and predatory something is “there 393): advantage of the limitations of Ciccio, something that does take others – in short, something that is not justified by areference to Here darkness. the in wedding necessary long-awaited, Alvina’s and throughout the novel Ciccio remains too unknown, brooding, us of the value of his transform inarticulate to fully convince and Alvina’s assassination appears to negate ingAlvina. For of murder 1990, p. 394). (Balbert, not only her will but also her energy” leavesBalbert that question the resolve can we that think I But tery. unresolved by means of focusing on the southern Italian setting of the novel and also on early twentieth century northern Europeans’ beginning the at mentioned I As Italy. of south the of understanding of travel to the Euro popularity despite the increasing of this essay, territory. an unexplored pean south, Italy south of Rome remained civilization and is If so, southern Italy marks the end of European barbarity. close to the world of non-European dangerously quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------The 217 reveals

Minjeong Kim Minjeong . Indeed, Ciccio isCiccio Indeed, . Volume 04 Death in Venice that Death in Venice in Death . Mann’s view of Venice illuminates and Venice . Mann’s view of Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading Culture and Imperialism Culture I suggest that we understand the character Ciccio and Alvina’s I suggest that we understand the character Ciccio and To support my claim on the meaning of southern Italy as a portalas southern Italy on the meaning of my claim support To come patriarchal restrictions at the beginning is gradually replaced replaced gradually is beginning the at restrictions patriarchal come by the descriptions of the sinister forces of the Italian man Ciccio considered have Herring, Philip as such critics, country, his and Lost Girl as a failed or immature work by Lawrence. In the novel, – that is, the extraor closely related are the two elements however, venue for develop- for an extraordinary dinary woman’s search characterized with reference to the primitive figureresiding at the colonial peripheries. His origin in a colonial backwater and his of point his to back later and first center European the to movement origin establish a ground for a post colonial reading of the novel. over to attempt Alvina’s with concern narrative the that Observing Mann’s awareness that “Europe, its art, mind, monuments, is no that “Europe, Mann’s awareness longer invulnerable” (Said, 1994, p. 188). Then, one of the places in metro Other’s colonial European the the which on impingement politan consciousness begins is “a Venice, southern city but not quite a truly Oriental one, a European but most definitely not are ally exotic locale” (Said, 1999, p. 50). established contexts the in them situating by Italy southern to trip by Said’s postcolonial reading of to a non-European world, I’d like to briefly discuss Thomas Mann’s Thomas discuss briefly to like I’d world, non-European a to 1921 novella Death in Venice is illuminated by Lawrence’s view of southern The Italy. protago nist of Mann’s text Aschenbach, Gustave “too occupied with the tasks set for him by his own ego and the European spirit he repre sented” (Mann, 1921/1995, p. 4), travels to to Venice, relax and to is a of Venice south, the choice In this itinerary toward recuperate. Aschenbach wants antitheti to visit a region of compromise: result also he but Europe, northern in prevailing asceticism rigid the to cal wants to avoid going “all the way to the tigers” (Mann, 1921/1995, over ultimately avoid to wants Aschenbach p.that tigers the But 5). which originates in India and take him in the form of a cholera, Re city. the to visit Aschenbach’s of time the during Venice sweeps postcolonial scholars have shown that the narrative trajec cently, when the fear of the colo tory of Mann’s text points to the moment nial Other’s assault of Europe reinforces the danger of Italy as a convinc Said For example, Edward liminality. space of European in ingly argues quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------218

Minjeong Kim Minjeong Volume 04 Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading the shadow of the by-gone pagan world seemed to come Sometimes she felt she would shriek and go mad, over her. so strong was the influence on something her, pre-world, She seemed to feel in vindictive. and it seemed to her now, had haunted things that the air strange Furies, Lemures, her with their tomb-frenzied vindictiveness since she was Classical Dic over the illustrated a child and had pored Black and tionary. cruel presences were in the under-air. They furtive and were slinking. They bewitched you with afterwards. you hurt to with fangs lurked and loveliness, 1920/1968, p. 372) (Lawrence, And yet their red-purple silkiness had something pre- world about it, at last. The more she wandered, the more Lawrence’s narrative shows that Alvina’s choice to locate a source source choice to locate a Alvina’s narrative shows that Lawrence’s All she can do in the face of the “dark repulsiveness” that her new All she can do in the face of the “dark repulsiveness” (371). world” the of part this of inside the “avoid to is creates town But this is an exhausting, and the narrative implies, losing battle. Alvina’s initial struggle for development is reduced to a battle for mere survival by the end of the novel, and Lawrence’s ambitious goal to describe a successful pattern of female development is not The the out novel accomplished. ends Not abruptly. surprisingly, of development outside Woodhouse turns out an unwise one. She of development outside Woodhouse daringly travels to Pescocalascio, but it is an European heart of darkness, or to use the narrator’s “negative cen one of the words, our liv localities which savagely and triumphantly refuse [or] tres, Ital describes poignantly passage following The (350). culture” ing to annihilate our English girl as well as her ian primitivism’s threat flowers some at Looking center. negative the in entrapment of sense Alvina thinks: in Pescocalascio, ment invites and becomes conjoined with the colonial discourse de Alvina’s helpful for has nothing of If Woodhouse primitivism. outside of development she should locate a source velopment, world the of mapping colonial the in And, boundaries. home the civiliza European the from place of order descending a by marked tion to the non-European primitivism, “extraordinary” may be a euphemism for all center: non-Euro that lies outside the European barbaric and primitive. pean, pre-modern, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - ­ ------219 The Lost perishes in

D.H.Lawrence D.H.Lawrence Minjeong Kim Minjeong Volume 04 . (1982, University of Phila Death in Venice Human Rights, Inc.: the World Novel, Narra Human Rights, Inc.: the World The Lost Girl for its lack of female Bil The Deed of Life: The Novels and Tales of in his The Deed of Life: The Novels and Tales ge Donaldson and Mara Kalnins, Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading The Lost Girl (1963, Princeton University Press: Princeton). (1963, Princeton University Press: include Peter Balbert and Julian Moynahan. See Moynahan’s See Moynahan. Julian and Balbert Peter include D.H.Lawrence and the Experience of Italy D.H.Lawrence In this essay, I have tried to show that the travel motif in Law I have tried to show that In this essay, Examples discussion of Bildungs the for implication its and subject the of meaning dual the For Joseph Slaughter, see roman, See, for instance, Geor in Italy and England (1999, St. Martin’s Press: New Jeffrey Mey York); ers, Philadelphia). delphia Press: D.H.Lawrence

Venice, but Alvina survives the contact with non-European primitiv non-European with contact the survives Alvina but Venice, for search her describe to used structure Bildungsroman the Yet ism. development seems to receive When a the more serious colo blow. nial Other enters the horizon of narrative, the the Bildungsroman its maintain to unable is education of genre European representative form As intact. an open-ended female Bildungsroman text, Bildungsro female the postcolonial the writing of anticipates Girl man by later generations. 2 3 Notes 1 break break of I War World enlists Ciccio and leaves Alvina, pregnant Italian landscape. in the middle of the sinister with a child, alone She begs her husband to promise to her that he will come back at is protagonist female our but promise, does He war. the of end the departure, Ciccio’s describing by concludes novel The assured. not air. Alvina hangs in the of and the future as part of the writer’s is introduced novel rence’s attempt to produce text that does not signify women’s partici a female Bildungsroman The girl who pursues development via society. pation in patriarchal “something better than suffrage” fails to despite develop, however, inten my not is it Nonetheless, Italy. southern to journey fearless her tion in this essay to dismiss by dung. emphasizing I’d instead like that to conclude this essay, intervention in the form of novel makes an important Lawrence’s educationyouth’s earlier that the argued have I the Bildungsroman. to be a subjected subject is essential for the self- Bildungsroman’s by Lawrence, de- the contrary, enclosed, To teleological structure. Alvina’s scribing failure to return to the fold, fractures the Bildung- in Aschenbach structure. closed sroman’s quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , , - - - The The , eds. 220 Twentieth Twentieth

Minjeong Kim Minjeong - Studies in Tra , for Women Votes Volume 04 (1996, Duke University Duke (1996, The Lost Girl. , tr. Stanley Appelbaum. Stanley tr. , , eds. Simonetta de Filippis Volume III Part 2 1916-21 Volume : (2007, Fordham University Press: New Lenin and Philosophy, and Other Essays Lenin and Philosophy, Season of Youth: The Bildungsroman from Dick- from The Bildungsroman Season of Youth: Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading Maps of Englishness: Writing Identity in the Cul Maps of Englishness: Writing The Letters of D.H.Lawrence: Volume 1 1901-1913 Volume The Letters of D.H.Lawrence: , Verso: New York. York. New , Verso: Mosaic, 12, pp. 9-19. The Letters D.H.Lawrence of James T. James Boulton T. and Andrew Robertson. Cambridge Univer sity Press: Cambridge. sity Press: Dover Publications: Mineola. Culture European Lost Girl. Cambridge. University Press: Boulton. Cambridge ed. James T. Gissing and Norman Douglas in Southern Italy. in Southern Italy. Douglas Norman Gissing and , 10, pp. 123-140. vel Writing Routledge: New York. York. Routledge: New Columbia University Press: New York. York. New Columbia University Press: of Colonialism, ture , Harvard University Press: Cambridge. University Press: ens to Golding, Harvard Oxford. Press: 1800-1918, Claredon to Culture, and the Ways and the Literary Genres D.H.Lawrence Napoli. Editore: and Nick Ceramella. Loffredo logy of Sex in the Cambridge Edition of Edition Cambridge the in Sex of logy 381- pp. 4, 36, Journal, and Critical Scholarly A Century Literature: 402. Monthly Review Press: New York. York. New Monthly Review Press: Press: Durham). Durham). Press: tive Form, and International Law tive and Jameson’s Fredric essay “On Literary York), and Cultural Import- from The Case of the Testimonio” World: Substitution in the Third Lain America Discourse in Real Thing: Testimonial , The Viking Press: New York. York. New Press: ---. 1920/1968. The Lost Girl, The Viking 1921/1995. Death In Venice Thomas, Mann, in Bildungsroman The the World: of Way 2000. The Franco, Moretti, ---, 2002. ---, Ouditt, Sharon, 2006. ‘Elemental and Permanent Things’: George Purvis, June and Sandra Stanley Holton, 2000. Lawrence, D.H, 2002. Lawrence, Herring, Phillip, 1979. Caliban in Nottingham: D.H.Lawrence’s D.H.Lawrence’s Nottingham: in Caliban 1979. Phillip, Herring, The Beaten Track: European Tourism, Literature, Literature, Tourism, European The Beaten Track: , James, 1993. Buzard Sun.Mediterranean the for Quest Lorenzo’s 2004. Nick, Ceramella, 1996. Simon, Gikandi, Buckley, Jerome, 1974. Jerome, Buckley, Balbert, Peter, 1990. Ten Men and a Sacred Prostitute: The Psycho The Prostitute: Sacred a and Men Ten 1990. Peter, Balbert, References Louis, 1972. Althusser, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk Death 221

Minjeong Kim Minjeong Volume 04 , A Harvest Book: Orlando. Book: Harvest A , , Vintage Books: New York. York. Books: New , Vintage , 41, 2, pp. 46-54. Three Guineas Three Heading South in Search of Female Development of Female in Search South Heading Critical Quarterly . Culture and Imperialism Culture in Venice Said, Edwards, 1999. Not All the Way to the Tigers: Britten’s to the Tigers: the Way All 1999. Not Edwards, Said, ---, 1994. 1938/2006. Virginia, Woolf, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

The great flood-gates of the wonder-world flung open Om rejsens tema i Moby Dick

Rasmus Grøn Adjunkt ved Institut for Kommunikation ved Aalborg Universi- tet. Medlem af forskningsgruppen MÆRKK (Markedskommuni- kation og Æstetik: Reception ift. Kognition og Kultur). Har skrevet Ph.d. afhandlingen: Oplevelsens rammer: Former og ra- tionaler i den aktuelle formidling af skønlitteratur for voksne på danske folkebiblioteker (2010).

Indledning Den 21. oktober 2011 udkom den første danske oversættelse af Herman Melvilles hvalfangerroman Moby Dick (1851) i 56 år.1 Mel- villes klassiker er, blandt meget andet, også en af verdenslitteratu- rens store rejseromaner, og jeg vil i det følgende søge at bidrage til dens tiltrængte reaktualisering gennem en analyse af rejsens tema i Moby Dick. Moby Dick, som blev negligeret af sin samtid (Higgins & Parker, 1995), men siden kanoniseret som amerikansk nationalepos, har le- vet store dele af sit liv i forskellige illustrerede udgaver, skåret ned til sit basale, suspensefyldte plot: Jeg-fortælleren Ishmael tager hyre på hvalfangerskibet Peqoud under ledelse af den mystiske kaptajn Ahab, hvis egentlige mål med rejsen er at få hævn over Moby Dick, en legendarisk hvid kaskelothval, som berøvede Ahab hans ene ben under en tidligere jagt. Romanen kulminerer i en afsluttende konfrontation, hvor Moby Dick torpederer skibet, som går ned med alle mand undtagen Ishmael. Men denne enkle, lineære plotstruktur modsvares af en digres- siv, encyklopædisk detaljerigdom, hvor handlingen uddybes, ud- sættes, afbrydes og afspores af essayistiske, leksikale og anekdo- tiske passager (Howard, 2006). Det gør Moby Dick til et yderst komplekst værk, der med cetologien som omdrejningspunkt sam- menvæver en lang række ’verdner’ (litteraturens verden, mytens og religionens verden, politikkens verden etc.) i et æstetisk multi- vers, hvilket skaber:

Volume 04 222

------væk Moby - - 223 , den sam eksistentielt,

Johan Heinsen Johan . Volume 04 Artiklens første afsnit komplementaritet er udnævnt til amerikansk ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, er af pladshensyn kun anført er af pladshensyn kun anført Moby Dick. Moby Dick Moby Dick men samtidig etablerer et moderne erfa moderne et etablerer samtidig men spænding mellem plot og digression i spænding mellem plot og digression er et naturligt, genkommende tema i roma er et naturligt, genkommende tema (Tanner, 2000, pp. 63 & 64) (Tanner,

. Og i artiklens sidste afsnit påvises re det, hvordan Melville wants the whole world in - particularly theMelville wants the kulturprojekt, Moby Dick [...] kompositionelle som romanens genre- og udsigelsesforhold genre- som romanens ..an extraordinary feeling of totality - of immensity, range, in feeling of totality - of immensity, ..an extraordinary vast Dick”. The simple geographical clusiveness - in ”Moby trawled as but the oceans of history are ness is unmissable, well. human world. De flertydige sammenhænge mellem karakter, komposition og og komposition karakter, mellem sammenhænge flertydige De Artiklen bygger primært på et bredt udvalg af den eksisteren udsigelse i artiklens omfang, ikke introducere særskilt til denne reception. særskilt til denne reception. artiklens omfang, ikke introducere til passager i Referencer med sidetal. Rejsens labyrint Det kan synes paradoksalt, at nationalepos, da romanens fortælling former sig som en rejse fra det nationale territorium. Romanens indledende kapitler finder såvel den Dick nens meget omfattende Artiklens receptionshistorie. nye bidrag til forstå disse sammenhænge som et pro at vil være denne reception dukt af den konsekvente og paradoksale som kendetegner og gensidige afhængighed, tidige uforenelighed Ahab og Ishmaels erfaringsperspektiver. mellem relationen de Melville-forskning, men vil, grundet de formelle rammer for udgør samtidig, som antydet i citatet ovenfor, grundprincippet for grundprincippet ovenfor, udgør samtidig, som antydet i citatet psy historiske, tematiske, forbinder der operandi, modus romanens i kologiske og kompositionelle lag vil beskrive hvordan romanen iscenesætter rejsen som romantisk amerikansk ringsrum, hvor dette tømmes projekt for metafysisk indhold. Det vil i anden og afsnit tredje danne udgangspunkt for en analyse af for repræsentanter som Ishmael, og Ahab hovedpersoner, romanens to komplementære erfaringsperspektiver på rejsen som subjektivt projekt lationen mellem disse to subjektpositioner danner baggrunden for Denne ambitiøse episke inklusivitet gælder også rejsen, som ud un hvalfangstprofessionen for ramme naturlige den danne at over rejsen Men romanen. I tematiseringer symbolske række en dergår quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

2 ------

224 dog ikkedog

[…] But Johan Heinsen Johan (pp. 93-4) (pp.

Moby Dick Moby Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, . Vand Dick. Moby og Vand land be blev skrevet kort efter at man var trængt gennem til Posted like silent sentinels all around the town, stand thousands the town, stand Posted like silent sentinels all around upon thousands of mortal men reveries. fixed in ocean - tied all landsmen; of weeks pent up in lath and plaster these are to counters, nailed to benches, How then is clinched to desks. here? they do What gone? fields green the Are this? sted i dette territoriums udkant, mens hovedparten af handlingen udkant, mens hovedparten sted i dette territoriums Heroverfor Heroverfor fremstilles havet som det ubundne element, og den oceaniske rejse som den emanciperende åbning af rummet mod Havet bliver et som rejsen ekspansivt eventyr. udfoldelsesrum for ’I’ af pronomenet subjektet, der – med den emfatiske fremhævelse - på bølgen af havets ’magnanimity’: svulmer Stillehavet og havde underlagt sig hele kontinentet, og det ame Stillehavet og havde underlagt quods ufuldendte jordomrejse. Men havet konstitueres i romanen afsætter til landet, der sin metaforiske relation primært gennem i erfaringsrummet for koordinaterne knyttes livsformer: hvor landet to modsatrettede skrives her som det med havet forbindes overfladiske, og trygge domestiske, det til i er Havet mysteriet. og erfaringen fremmede, blot noget, man bevæger sig på, men er som det flydende element også en metonymi for selve rejsens bevægelse, og kernen i relatio nen mellem vand og land skal findes iromanens grundlæggende dikotomi mellem stasis og bevægelse, det fikserede og det flyden modernitets for romanens de. Denne dikotomi udgør også formlen folkemængde storbyens af billede et med præsenteres som kritik, fortabt i oceanisk længsel: Moby Dick rikanske samfund indledte transformationen fra en nybyggerkul tur til moderne Men industrikultur. hermed var verden også ble vet afmystificeret: eventyret var forbi, de store vidder (”the green samfundsrum, klaustrofobisk et af erstattet og forsvundet, fields”) mod den individuelle frihed og iden som en trussel der fremstår og indespærring af konnotationer gentagne verbernes Med titet. sam moderne det knyttes ’clinched’) ’nailed’, (’tied’, fastnagling re- er subjekterne hvor fiksering, tvungen af tilstand en til fundsliv duceret til anonyme og gensidigt isolerede gestalter (’sentinels’). (kpt. 22-135) udspiller sig på havet, under hvalfangerskibet Pe quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------225 to […]

Johan Heinsen Johan He lives on the Volume 04 […] tillige en specifik ame and the distant ship re ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, […] Moby Dick (pp. 159 & 601). også en kollektiv, kulturel dimension som ameri som dimension kulturel også en kollektiv, år rejsens tema i år rejsens Moby Dick vealing only the tops of her masts, seems struggling forward, her masts, of the tops only vealing grass of a the tall waves but through the rolling not through prairie. rolling The Nantucketeer, he alone resides and riots on the sea he alone resides The Nantucketeer, ploghing it as his own plantation and fro sea as prairie cocks in the prairie Gaining the more open water the bracing breeze waxed fresh; waxed fresh; open water the bracing breeze Gaining the more her bows, as a young the quick foam from the little Moss tossed air! - how I spurned How I snuffed that Tartar colt his snortings. dented - that common highway all over that turnpike earth! to ad slavish heels and hoofs; and turned me with the marks of sea which will permit no records. the magnanimity of the mire (p. 155) Med dette dobbelte landkort skaber romanen en symbolsk genåb ning af det amerikanske rum, hvor de der attributter, omspandt genfindes iVesten den oceaniske topografi. Havet bliver hvor dér, ubundne den som fastholdes, kan patos eksplorative pioneråndens rende bevægelse ned ad floderne, ind i skovene, ud på vejene, hen vejene, på ud skovene, i ind floderne, ad ned bevægelse rende 1970) Og rejsens mytologi over 1960; rum havet. Tanner, (Fiedler, i mer en omfattende ”amerikanisering”kansk myte. Det viser sig især i af havets topos (Fussell, 1965), hvor modsætningen mellem vand analogi mellem havet og af en gennemgående og land modsvares metaforik: prærien i romanens rikansk karakter. rikansk I karakter. den europæiske roman står subjektet også ofte fremmedgjort over for det moderne samfundsmaskineri, men her er subjektet samtidig ”society-bound” (Kaul, 1963, p. 57); det er dets erfa i samfundet, som determinerer integreret allerede altid ringshorisont, hvorfor dets livsprojekt nødvendigvis må udfolde I den amerikanske sociale orden. sig inden for rammerne af denne derimod traditionelt som en ydre, denne orden fremstilles roman arbitrær konstruktion, som subjektet frit kan forlade. Den ameri bevægel til knyttet således er dannelsesprojekt romanhelts kanske frigø rejsens i søges selvrealiseringen hvor transgression, som sen erfaringsform f Med denne dyrkelse af ’landlessness’ (p. 203) som ideal livs- og quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------Moby 226 pleated placerer placerer

Johan Heinsen Johan Moby Dick Volume 04 (p. 98; (p. in the air. (p. 455), me hvis dybere (p. 412) (p. ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, the great flood-gates of the wonder- Denne semiotisering koncentrerer sig sig Denne semiotisering koncentrerer er samtidig en moderne roman, som afviser selve som afviser roman, er samtidig en moderne all over obliquely crossed and re-crossed with number with and re-crossed […]..all over obliquely crossed Moby Dick rummer rummer således komponenterne til rejsen som amerikansk Chief among the motives was the overwhelming idea of the overwhelming idea of the Chief among the motives was the whale himself […] great conceits that swayed me to world swung open, and in the wild my purpose, two and two there floated into my inmost soul, of the whale, and, mid most of them, one endless processions grand hooded phantom, like a snow-hill min markering). Men sig her inden for amerikansk, metafysisk tradition med rødder i i sig her inden for amerikansk, metafysisk tradition med rødder såvel puritanismens omni-eksegetiske som verdensanskuelse R. W. Emersons korrespondanceteori, hvor naturen beskrives som et panteistisk hvis netværk indhold af åbenbarer sig symboler, for menneskets intuition. (Emerson, 1982) Ligesom hvalfangerne udvinder den værdifulde spermacet af hva den værdifulde Ligesom hvalfangerne udvinder Dick mytologi. En rejse, som ikke orienterer sig mod en etableret hjem bestemmel ideal en mod bevægelse fremtidsrettet en er men stavn, se. For bevægelse rejsens er i høj grad en mental bevægelse; ’going (Hors rejseroman Melvilles i see’ to ‘going med synonymt er sea’ to at er mål hvis erkendelsesprojekt, et er rejsen hvor 72), p. 1977, ford, ’dybere’ den til frem trænge og verden materielle den transcendere Og fysiske fremtrædelser. metafysiske sandhed bag denne verdens som inkarnationen af det metafysi hvalen iscenesættes i romanen ske mysterium og det symbolske mål for den idealistiske stræben –titelfigur: ikke mindst romanens gennemgående som a riddle verden den ydre fremstilles lens krop, work in one volume to unfold, a wondrous ning man søger at aflæse. især om hvalen, hvis krop genkommende beskrives som: .. with riddles den metafysiske præmis for denne tradition: korrespondancen mel den metafysiske præmis for denne tradition: korrespondancen less straight marks in thick array, something like those in the finest Italian finest the in those like something array, thick in marks straight less hieroglyphical. engravings [...] These are lem sjælen og den besjælede topografi afskrivesromanen i som fra erfarings- transcendent som rejsen overskrives dermed og værende, tømmer det for metafysisk substans. af en tabserfaring, som rum bevægelse og heroiske underlæggelse af naturelementerne. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------227 som for

Johan Heinsen Johan aflæses Volume 04 (p. 541) ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, sine fortolkninger (Horsford, (Horsford, fortolkninger sine (p. 340) kontingente symboliseringer, ’a ’a symboliseringer, kontingente (p. 543) Sandheden forbliver et ‘un et forbliver Sandheden 543) (p. , hvor mening uophørligt produce

Pity if there is nothing wonderful in signs, is nothing wonderful if there Pity indlæser Moby Dick . But in pursuit of those far mysteries we dream . But in pursuit of those far mysteries we dream […] Signs and wonders, eh? wonders, Signs and ..and this round gold is but the image of the rounder globe, gold is but the image of the rounder ..and this round Only through numberless perils to the very point whence we Only through all the time were those that we left behind secure, started, where us before of, or in tormented chase of that demon phantom that, some while chasing all human hearts; swims before time or other, maz globe, they either lead us on in barren such over his round es or midway leave us whelmed. Round the world! There is much in that sound to inspire proud proud inspire that sound to is much in the world! There Round conduct? does all that circumnavigation feelings; but whereto and every which, like a magician´s glass, to each man in turn his own mysterious self. back mirrors Med kløften mellem verden og bevidsthed føres al erkendelse til erkendelse al føres bevidsthed og verden mellem kløften Med kraft, som ikke bunder i en besjælet maliciøsitet, men i dets urør som meningstom formation og og indifferens lige fremmedhed inkar synekdokisk som verden, En 1956). (Poulet, erfaringsrum neres i hvalens anatomi som en tavs, ansigtsløs mur (p. 454). Det en bliver hvidhed jomfruelige hvis Dick, Moby alt for frem gælder menneskets for projektionsflade dumb blankness, full of meaning’ (p. 195) Det får stor betydning semantik i romanen: for rejsens Naturen Naturen bliver en spejlsal, hvor læsningens drift mod en ideal sandhed bag tegnet uophørligt dementeres, idet den kastes tilbage på subjektets relative optik, og menneskets erkendelses- og ero impotens markant en af undergraves verden mod bringsfremstød i mødet med havets dødbringende kastrerende kraft (p. 380). En som producerer den: som producerer bage i bevidstheden: naturens symboler kan ikke løs af gådefulde, overflade en men er tekst, metafysisk en i bundne subjektet hvori tegn, revne 1977): wonders. in significant nothing and graspable phantom’ i res i subjektets hermeneutiske omgang med verden, mens denne mening samtidig forbliver bundet til det subjektive perspektiv, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------228 endless­ tage form the

.. Johan Heinsen Johan Volume 04 (p. 155). Denne inerti af inerti Denne 155). (p. sider vil kort belyse, hvor belyse, kort vil sider må dette projekt ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, følgende mister sin progressive erfaringshorisont til mister sin progressive beskriver således en moderne tabserfaring, der i Georg Georg i der tabserfaring, moderne en således beskriver Moby Dick s repræsentation s af repræsentation rejsens ekspansive rum for subjek Moby Dick. Moby Dick Dick, den hvide hval. I Melvilles ’bricolagemytologi’ (Franklin, litterære, af konglomerat et som Ahab fremstilles 62-68) pp. 1963, mytologiske og Ødipus, (Prometheus, historiske Kristus,referencer en for netop åbner hævnmission idealistiske Ahabs og fl.), m. Faust, remytologisering af erfaringen og fortællingen. Ahab bliver repræ sentant for menneskets promethiske stræben efter at hele sin am pro dens transcendere at ved 2006) (Williams, eksistens puterede metafysiske mysterium til det visoriske kontinuum og trænge frem fordel for en futil cirkularitet, truer det med at for bekræfte en futil cirkularitet, truer fordel ness, yea, the intolerableness of all earthly effort rejses labyrintiske den fikserer som Ahab, kaptajn af imidlertid vises famlen i viljestyret bevægelse med en konkret bestemmelse: Moby af en rejse, som det ’transcendentalt hjemløse’ subjekts søgen efter De bestemmelse. sin realisere at prota rejsende to de gennem form tager – romanen og – rejsen dan gonister i Ahab og Rejsens mytologi i rejsen Når Lukács’ romanteori defineres som selve den mentalhistoriske for mentalhistoriske den selve som defineres romanteori Lukács’ udsætning for romangenren (Lukács, 1916) Ifølge Lukács opstår romanen som den særegne æstetiske form for en moderne post- og der er præget af en splittelse mellem verden mytisk tidsalder, bevidsthed. I romanen fremstilles denne verden i en form, Lukács gestaltes i en am totalitet”, idet den som en ”ironisk karakteriserer er afrundet en udtrykker der totalitet, æstetisk en mellem bivalens forankring i en moderne, faring, og denne totalitets manglende biografisk en er totalitet romanens denne Og verden. kontingent form, idet den er uløseligt knyttet til det moderne individs subjek tive perspektiv og Desuden livsprojekt. Moby Dick indsnævring klaustrofobisk en af således modsvares udfoldelse tets af dette rum. Subjektet er fanget i verden som gold labyrint, hvor rejsens bevægelse bliver en futil cirkularitet. er Verden ”an empty cipher”, et tomt kryptogram, hvorfor rejsens eksplorative patos er bliver Dermed ”sound”. en til reduceres og indhold for tømt blevet rejsen også præget af en evig provisionalitet, som dementerer mu ligheden for et erfaringens slutpunkt. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

- - - på

- 229 that demon that demon

Johan Heinsen Johan malstrømmens (p. 284) fører rej Volume 04

Og efter Pequods afrejse (p. 340), begærets dunkle ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, s rejsen til en metafysisk quest, narrow-flowing monomania , og udstilles som et psykologisk produkt, hvor hvor produkt, , og udstilles som et psykologisk (p. 261) hævnprojekt forvandle I´ll chase him round Good Hope, and round the Horn, and round the Horn, and round Good Hope, and round I´ll chase him round the Norway Malstroem, and round perdition´s flames before I give him up. tense thinking thus makes him a Prometheus; a vulture feeds a vulture tense thinking thus makes him a Prometheus; he creates. the very creature upon that heart for ever; that vulture (p. 303) ..thy thoughts have created a creature in thee; and he whose in a creature ..thy thoughts have created He looked like a man cut away from the stake, when the fire has fire the when stake, the from away cut man a like looked He them, or all the limbs without consuming overruningly wasted their compact aged robustness. taking away one particle from (p. 218) Ahabs selvdestruktive monomane projekt: monomane Ahabs selvdestruktive den skitserer malstrømmen, af benævnelse eksplicitte den over Ud ”round” iterative manisk det med udtrykker Ahab som bevægelse, Drevet Drevet frem Ahabs af sens bevægelse til en markant indsnævring af erfaringsrummet. I sin hengivelse til abstrakt en indre, sandhed rent gennemtrænger Ahab ikke materialitetens men mur, bliver selv en en mur, uindta gelig solipsistisk fæstning – og fængsel. Denne vanviddets lukkede i eksternaliseres som entropi, mental en skaber logik implosive proces, der i romanen sættes som bevægelsesmetafor for Med Ahabs manglen imidlertid af undergraves men denne mytologisering objektivt mandat Ahabs fortolkning af hvalen er en eksternalisering af hearts human al before swims that phantom mål, i et konkret objekt. Og hvalen forbliver i denne fortolkning et ”phantom”, et produkt af Ahab en bliver narcissistisk projektion. revol han orden metafysiske den idet Prometheus, falsk en derved ikke har nogen eksistens uden for hans bevidsthed: imod, terer bag den materielle verdens gådebilleder. ‘genopstår’scenefortællingens på ind træder og kahyt sin fra Ahab af det mytiskes genkomst:som inkarnationen quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------r 230

Johan Heinsen Johan I am tormented nødvendigvis må fører således ikke således ikke fører Volume , som forener cirku , som forener 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, (p. 98). Med ”tormented” un udspringer således af en genkomst fra den malstrøm, fra den malstrøm, udspringer således af en genkomst fremstå fremstå som kontingent. Rejsens drift kommer hos Ishmael derfor differentiere men begæret, af fiksering monoman en i udtryk til ikke og inte det fremmede søgen mod ”things remote”, sig i en diffus percep af verdens encyklopædisk fascination En inklusiv, ressante. tive rigdom, og de meningsfulde mønstre, som lader sig aflæse i verdens overflade gennem interaktionen mellem verden, sprog og 1995, bevidsthed. p. (Miller, 276) Ishmael er en ’comitted relativist’ (Kearns, 2006), for hvem den moderne splittelse åbner for en in lent tilstand, som afspejles i Ishmaels diskurs, som veksler mellem eksistentielle til Denne munterhed. melankolsk spleen og picaresk bevægelse: søgende rejsens til naturligt knyttes stand by an everlasting itch for things remote. for Ishmaels ka disharmonien som udgangspunktet derstreges rakter; at Ishmael Ahab ligesom drives frem af en følt mangel i sin mentale økonomi. Men Ishmaels rejse er grundlagt på en erfaring af idealets tomhed, og dermed i eksistensens retnings- og formåls isig fortaber vis monoman på som subjektet, er Ahab Hvor løshed. subjekt moderne et Ishmael bliver begærsobjektet, i selvspejling sin uden objekt, da ethvert potentielt begærsobjekt som ellers har trukket alt med sig i dybet. Og denne overlevelse an overlevelse denne Og dybet. i sig med alt trukket har ellers som moderne erfaringspo en alternativ, at Ishmael repræsenterer tyder, idealisme, som driver den selvdestruktive sition, der transcenderer Ahabs romantiske projekt. En position, som tager udgangspunkt i den erkendelse, Ahabs som projekt er en fornægtelse af, nemlig og maliciøs, men som meningstom ikke som uretfærdig af verden, og indifferent. Og Ishmael præsenteres som et subjekt uden me tafysiske eller sociale forankringspunkter for sin identitet (p. 195), en hjemløs i livet. Et moderne subjekt, som ubundet af autoritære bestemmelser frit kan vagabondere i verden, men som samtidig er bundet til denne ubundethed, som ”dømt til frihed”. En ambiva i sig selv en malstrøms spiral, fra det gode håb, over det diabolske Ahabs flammer. fortabelsens i ned og malstrømmen gennem horn, af revitalisering som rejsen mytologisk projekt malstrømmen men ind i i transcendensen, ud udslettelse. ned i afslutningens uundgåelige lariteten med faldet, Ishmael og rejsen som proces romanen ikke alt udslettes. Ishmaels fortælling, som udgør Men Moby Dick, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------231 Ishmael

Johan Heinsen Johan Der er ikke blot tale Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, (p. 469). little treatise on Eternity” (p.482) Eternity” on treatise little There are some enterprises in which are There æstetisk form. Men konsekvensen af dette perspektiv Som moderne subjektivt erfaringsperspektiv er Ishmael en form dumb blankness’ – men den er samtidig ’full of meaning’. of ’full samtidig er den men – blankness’ dumb kendelse i en ”a forbliver form narrative den at er, – den afgrænser ikke en ubegrænset virkelighed gennem den sub enogså den bliver dermed Og intervention. repræsentations jektive ”eternal en uendelig, treatise”, uafsluttelig fortællen. Og som en frit flydende gestalt finder Ishmaels identitet samtidig heller ingen fyl Ishmael træder aldrig i karak fremstilling. de eller form i romanens ter; han forbliver knyttet et til perspektiv, det sprog, hvorigennem intensiteter, ligesom overflodromanens af afspejler ord en kredsen intensiteter, 1965) (Brodtkorb, utilnærmelig. forbliver som virkelighed, en om Det bevægelsens som mønster, hermed aftegner sig med denne strategi, er ikke den målrettede rejse mod idealets slutmål, men derimod i hengivelsen til det uafsluttede og ubestemte; til eksi stensen som en flydende, digressiv erfaringsproces, hvis vævende bevægelse ikke søger mod et erfaringens slutpunkt, men derimod undvigelsen af et sådant slutpunkt, i en hengivelse til bevægelsens uendelige, dynamiske princip som den eneste mulige frihed. givende kraft, der formår at bringe den moderne virkelighed til er sætning til Ahabs ”ontological heroics” Ahabs ”ontological bliver heroics” Ishmaels sætning position til en 2000, p. 65), ”ontological hvor ludics” fraværet af (Tanner, en im manent, transcendental orden åbner for en tentativ udforskning af og bevidsthedens verden, frihed til skabelse ordner af provisoriske ud fra relativismens sandhed: at alt lader sig forbinde, fordi intet er forbundet. Og Ishmaels diskurs skaber ikke et narrativt konti situationer som enkeltstående nuum, men er i stedet struktureret og tilbagehenvisninger, stadige af sammen bindes som temaer, eller bevæger sig ekskursivt fra plot til anekdote, dokumentation, myte, spekulation og tilbage til plot. Denne struktur afspejler Ishmaels livsbane som en rastløs bevægelse i en evig nutid af momentane hærent frihed, en subjektets hærent ubundne fleksibilitet i en uafsluttelig søgen efter ekvilibrium med omverden. For Ishmael er verden en ’ således: metode sin selv beskriver true method disorderliness is the a careful metode metodisk mangel på men om en omhyggelig, om uorden, vævestegnene hvor bevægelse, usystematisk tentativ, en orden: og og enhver sikker viden mønstre sammen i stadigt nye, metaforiske uophørligt relativeres i romanens semantiske reversibilitet. I mod quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------tra at the 232 plottets centrifu

Johan Heinsen Johan episke form Volume 04 God keep me from ever God keep me from mellem hvad Franco Mo

”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, , som koncentrerer verdens verdens , som koncentrerer kraft

(p. 284) tillader ingen afvigelse fra skibets fra afvigelse ingen tillader 284) (p. (p. 643) Ahabs projekt er anti-digressivt; hans centripetale (p. 241) (p. 626). Heroverfor står fortælleren Ishmael som centralgestalt, da romanens form udspringer af Ishmaelsaf udspringer form romanens centralgestalt, da der med sine digressive, encyklopædiske udforskninger der med sine digressive, Sameksistensen af disse to principper kommer blandt andet til udtryk i romanen som en stor spænding udtryk i romanen retti kalder ”incidents” og som ”episodes”: bi narrative segmenter, drager til udfoldelsen af fortællingens handling, og deskriptive, dis som afviger fra kursive og segmenter, afbryder plottets lineære 1994, (Moretti, implikationer. handlingens af udvidelse en i forløb pp. 46-47) De to protagonisters positioner knytter sig desuden gen Mens den til heltens status i det moderne. rehistorisk ditionelt er forbundet med en heroisk individualisme, hvor helten gale kraft, udsætter og bringer handlingen ud af kurs for at fordybe sig i de taljens rigdom. Begge positioner kan siges at knytte an til det fler tydige nøglebegreb ”Loomings”, som er titlen på romanens indle dende kapitel: Ahab rejsenshvor fikserer bevægelse i en drift mod knyttes ’loomings’horisont, i toner frem lokkende slutpunktet, som hos Ishmael derimod til undvigelsen af et sådant slutpunkt, til for som aldrig lader del for en uafsluttelig, vævende erfaringsproces, verden eller subjekt fiksere i en fast orden: completing anything. centralgestalt, da romanens narrative bevægelse udfoldes omkringcentralgestalt, da romanens katalysator bliver hævnbegær kaptajnens og hævnprojekt, Ahabs herved bliver Ahab 1984). (Brooks, begær narrative romanens for også fortællingens mangfoldighed i ét punkt, og og plottets driver drama rejsen frem ad som en målrettet bevægelse mod plottets fuldbyrdelse .. time and place. proper monomania narrow-flowing undeviating wake diskursens bevidsthed. Og Ishmael er samtidig romanens sproglige det det anskuer verden; og selv om Ishmael kan siges at handle i og gennem en fuld, ikke form i dette sprog tager han gennem sproget, så papirtynd, forbliver identitet Ishmaels repræsentation. biografisk krop. aldrig kød på hans sproglige at sige; der kommer form Rejsen og romanens Ahab og Ishmael lader sig således anskue som repræsentanter for ska samtidig der kompositionsprincipper, bærende to romanens ber to forskellige figurationer Ahabrejsens af er bevægelse. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------233 Moby Dick

Johan Heinsen Johan In this new scenario, Volume 04 , som Ishmael skulle over ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, (Moretti, 1994, p. 16) I 16) p. 1994, (Moretti, af den passive helt, som søger at af den passive helt, er i sidste ende Ishmaels værk. Ishmaelsværk. Ishmaels ende sidste i er Men i modsætning til ridderen af den arme Men i modsætning til ridderen være nogen fortælling være den moderne roman Moby Dick Moby passive vidne og fortolker af begivenhederne.

Don Quijote. Ishmael, derimod, træder aldrig i fuld karakter. Han indtager Han indtager Ishmael, derimod, træder aldrig i fuld karakter. Romanen relativerer dog denne modsætning, idet Ahab samtidig Ahab idet modsætning, denne dog relativerer Romanen Heroverfor har Ahab med sin abstrakte, anakronistiske idealis tervenerer tervenerer ikke i verden for at søge sin bestemmelse, og derfor bliver han aldrig en afrundet subjektivitet (Kearns, 2006). Dette Ahab Hvor læseoplevelsen. i udtryk til konkret kommer forhold fremstår med ikonisk klarhed, og er blevet gjort til genstand for frem at umuligt nærmest det er repræsentationer, billedlige talrige fly tentativ, en ”faceless”, forbliver Han Ishmael. af billede et mane dende subjektpositionering, som aldrig træder frem af den skrift, sig. hvori han konstituerer me klare lighedstræk med titelfiguren i Miguel de Cervantes’ me taroman skikkelse er Ahab dog langt fra nogen harmløs, udgrænset be magtmenneske, som auto vidsthed. Han er tværtimod et moderne i sit billede, idet omverdenen kratisk former og instrumentaliserer han formår at gøre sit begær til gældende princip og lov for Pe mono Ahabs uden der ville Desuden mikrokosmos. sociale quods ikke projekt mane leve for at fortælle. kun en birolle som vidne og fortolker af romanens drama. Han in forbliver det er fikseret somet objekt for sit eget begær – men også for Ishmaels For fortælling. eneste signifikante handling er selveromanen, som erdet eneste, såle er Romanen dybet. i forsvundet er Pequod da tilbage, står der des et af produkt Ishmaels overlevelse, som en symbolsk transcen dens af Ahabs (selv)destruktive idealisme til fordel for en mere bæredygtig position, som bygger på en pragmatisk, relativistisk tilpasning til det moderne vilkår. gennem sine handlinger former verden i sit billede, erstattes denne handlende helt i gennem kontemplation: indfange virkeligheden action, the epic no longer takes shape in tranformative the grand world of in magic. in dream, in imagination, but geninstal en repræsenterer som helt, episk ”overleveret” en Ahab er almagt, mens Ishmael er den kon lering af det handlende individs templative helt, som flyder gennem verden, og på fatalistisk vis la men i verden, ikke at intervenere der sig handle med. Han søger quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------s ære 234 Den spæn

Moby Dick således fun

Johan Heinsen Johan Mass.): Harvard Mass.): Harvard Volume 04 Phenomenological Rea Phenomenological

æstetiske udforskning af af æstetiske udforskning s ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, ofte været betinget af den re således Moby Dick Ishmael´s White World. A Ishmael´s White World. Reading for the Plot. Cambridge ( er som rejseroman og ’ironisk totalitet’ ’ironisk og rejseroman som er som romantisk epos reducerer Ishmael til et kor i Ishmael til et kor i epos reducerer som romantisk i romanens univers: Ahab kommer kun til syne som ob som syne til kun kommer Ahab univers: romanens i Moby Dick ding of ”Moby Dick”. University Press Moby Dick Det er Ahab og Ishmael som formbærende subjektpositioner, Den nye udgave er oversat af Flemming Christian Nielsen og udgivet se: http://www.dingbat.dk/ herom For mere på Forlaget Bindslev. Denne kritik af den sociale ordens forkrøblende effekt på den menne Kaul bl.a. Se samtid. amerikanske Melvilles i udbredt meget var skelige 1963, p.21ff New Haven: Yale University Press. Yale New Haven: 1984. Brooks, P., Referencer 1965. P., Brodtkorb, destruktion af selve den vitalisme, som bærer det. Og Ishmaels re Ishmaels Og det. bærer som vitalisme, den selve af destruktion lativistiske position, som forbliver ”a on little Eternity” treatise (p. hvor alle faste mål og erken 482), en evig, uafsluttelig fortælling, forgreninger. delser opløses i sproglige Noter 1 2 Ahabs tragedie (Matthiessen, 1949), bliver Ahab i modernistiske modernistiske i Ahab bliver 1949), (Matthiessen, tragedie Ahabs fortolkninger af romanen blot til en komponent i Ishmaels sprog konstruktion (Brodtkorb, 1965). Denne artikels hovedpointe at er, en fyldestgørende læsning af romanen i stedet bør fastholde et komplement ligeværdige, som Ishmael og Ahab på dobbeltblik positioner jekt for Ishmaels fortælling; men samtidig bliver denne fortælling plot mytologiske Ahabs gennem historie afrundet som mulig kun ting. deret på disse to komplementære positioner: Ahabs monomane en i indefra op brænder indsnævring entropisk en i som idealisme, der tegner hovedlinjerne i tema. psykologisk og eksistentielt kulturelt, som rejsen mellem dingsfyldte de relation to positioner skaber en kompleksi tet og flertydighed iromanen, som også har præget udsigelse og genre af romanens Fortolkninger receptionshistorie. har historiske tilhørsforhold hvor læsninger to protagonister: spektive status, man har tillagt de af quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

. ------235 In: J. Bry

Johan Heinsen Johan I J. Bryant, M. K. ‘Ungraspable Phan ‘Ungraspable Phan Volume 04 Moby Dick. Moby Verso Verso Stanford University Press University Stanford Baltimore: The John Hop Baltimore: Berlin: Sammlung Luchter Moby Dick. New York: Alfred A. Knopf A. Alfred York: New ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, New Haven: Yale University Yale Haven: New ‘Ungraspable Phantom. EssaysPhantom. ‘Ungraspable New York: Penguin Books York: New Herman Melville: The Contem New York: Oxford University New York: . London: Stanford: Stanford: . Kent: Kent State University Press, . Kent: Kent State University Press, London: Penguin Books, 1986 The Merrill Studies in “Moby Dick”. The Merrill Studies in “Moby Dick”. The American Renaissance: Art and Expression The American Renaissance: Art and Expression The Wake of the Gods – Melville´s Mythology. Melville´s – the Gods of Wake The Selected Essays. Moby Dick. . Kent: Kent State University Press, pp. 25-37. . Kent: Kent State University Press, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Cambridge: Cambridge University The American Vision – Actual and Ideal Society in Ideal Actual and – American Vision The Topographies. Topographies. Love and Death in the American Novel. New York: the American Novel. New York: Love and Death in The Modern Epic Die Theorie des Romans. Studies in Human Time. Frontier – American Literature and the American West. and the American West. – American Literature Frontier The Power of Blackness. Charles E. Merrill Publishing Company. : ant, M. K. B. Edwards and T. Marr, ed. 2006. ed. Marr, T. and Edwards B. K. M. ant, Dick” tom. Essays on “Moby pp. ix - xvii. Criterion in the Age of Emerson and Melville. Press kins Press Nineteenth Century American Fiction. Press 2006. ed. Marr, T. and Edwards B. K. M. ant, tom. Essays on “Moby Dick” pp. 117-32. hand, 1971 Princeton (N. J.): Princeton University Press Princeton (N. J.): Princeton University porary Reviews. In: Vincent, H. ed. P. 1977. Columbus of Narrative the Breaking Truth; the B. Edwards ed. and Marr, 2006: T. on “Moby Dick” Stanford: Stanford University Stanford Stanford: Melville, H., 1851. J. H., 1995. Miller, 1994. F., Moretti, 1956. G., Poulet, Kaul, A.N., 1963. Kearns, M., 2006. Morality and Rhetoric in Levin, H., 1958. 1941. F.O., Matthiessen, Fussell, E., 1965. E., Fussell, Higgins, B H., and ed. Parker, 1995. Horsford, H. C., 1977. The Design of Argument in “Moby Dick”. L. R., 2006. Howard, “Ungainly Gambols” and Circumnavigating Bryant, J., 2006. “To fight some Other World” (preface).fight In:Bryant, some J.J., Other Bry 2006. “To 1982. Emerson, R.W., L., Fiedler, 1960. Franklin, B. H., 1963. Lukács, G., 1916. G., Lukács, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - 236 London:

Johan Heinsen Johan Boston: D. C. Boston: D. C. . Kent: Kent State Volume 04 ”En disposition, form og orden” form og ”En disposition, . Cambridge: Cambridge Uni Cambridge Cambridge: . . København: Forlaget Tiderne Tiderne Forlaget København: . Myth and Literature in the American Renais Myth and Literature Discussions of “Moby Dick”. Discussions of “Moby Filling the Void: A Lacanian Angle of Vision on Angle of Vision Lacanian A Filling the Void: Erfaringens fiktion Erfaringens 1968. City of Words: American Fiction 1950-70. American Fiction Words: City of Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Cambridge: Cambridge University The Reign of Wonder The Reign of The American Mystery. American Literature from Emer from American Literature The American Mystery. In: J. Bryant, M. K. B. Edwards and T. Marr, ed. 2006. ed. Marr, T. and Edwards B. K. M. Bryant, J. In: Bloomington: Indiana University Press Bloomington: Indiana sance. Heath & co. versity Press son to Delillo. Skifter Moby Dick. “Moby Dick” ‘Ungraspable Phantom. Essays on pp. 61-81 University Press, Jonathan Cape Tygstrup, F., 1992. F., Tygstrup, D., 2006. Williams, Richardson, R.D., 1978. Richardson, ed. R., M. Stern, 1965. T., Tanner, 1971. T., Tanner, 2000. T., Tanner, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

The trip as a script Mobility as a tool for creation in artist’s cinema

Miro Soares is a Brazilian visual artist based in Paris. He holds a Master of Arts and Digital Media and is a Ph.D. candidate at the University of Paris 1 Panthéon-Sor- bonne. Filmmaker and traveller, he has participated in exhibitions in different countries in the Americas, Europe and Asia. He has also participated in artistic residences in Latvia, Lithuania, Slovenia, Norway, Germany, Finland and Netherlands.

The article’s intent is to analyze aspects of artist’s cinema connect- ed to the issue of mobility and, therefore, to the context of globali- zation and of cultural transnationalism. These works are part of a specific segment in art in which the displacement, the journey, and/or the walk itself assume a major role in the creative process. They are relevant because they push us to reflect on the issue of mobility at the same time that they collaborate to expand the bor- ders in moving images.

Sometimes I wonder why I went left, while I might have had to go right... (Raymond Depardon, Errance) Introduction The journey has always been a source of inspiration explored in many different ways in films from all over the world. The list of these productions is so vast that road movie has become a genre in cinema. In most cases, the itineraries of the trip appear not only as the place for the story but as a main character. Eventually it is also an element that would open up a space in the script making room for improvisation in the film.

Volume 04 237 ------238 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 In artist’s cinema, which can be generally understood as a specific a as understood generally be can which cinema, artist’s In notion the on based study a of beginning the of part is article This to analyze aspects of artist’s cinema connected to the I intent Here By the adoption of this specific approach and by the selection of segment in moving images based on principles of both production experi and documentary art, to related more much distribution and mental cinema than the usual cinema the industry, journey – more creation. for tool active an become can – inspiration of source a than It places the artists in a modified state of mind and of contact with use of this him. The artists can then make around the environment critical and a personal, expressing artworks to produce condition poetic point of view about the world. of voluntary uprooting as creative process. Responsible for break the up of the daily existence, here ing the time and space instances is rooting an engine for the being production, understood as a per dialectic movement in a creation of manent and continuous exercise of refinement of the personal gaze. The voluntary uprooting is an mobil of context a in production a determines that position artistic position of dialogue and under ity at the same time that it is a critic standing face today’s world. issue of mobility and, therefore, to the context of globalization, of liberal global market and of cultural transnationalism. These works are part of a specific segment in art in which the displacement, the and/or journey, the walk itself assume a major role in the creative process. They are relevant because they push us to reflect on the is sue of mobility at the same time that they collaborate to expand the in moving images. borders I also suggest the existence of a particu here, the artworks presented the of practices by influenced considerably is that works of group lar called art so in context. Described by Michel De Certeau (1990) as “con a as (2002) Ardenne Paul by and life” everyday of practice “the his textual art”, this is a segment in art in which the artist places him. He around in contact with the reality directly process creative ur cities and roads, to discover puts himself in movement in order ban and natural spaces, a new land or his own native place. The equal but space, in movement of way a just not is here displacement ly a psychological phenomenon, a tool for imagination and produc (2002, Davila Thierry by concept the taking – “cineplastic” This tion. In my point of a stage for creation. the city into p.21) – transforms quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------239 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 The issue of mobility often evokes two different processes con The aim here is to identify the elements involved in the produc the elements involved in the identify is to The aim here to the singularity of a voluntary gaze. It focuses on the group that to the singularity of a voluntary gaze. It focuses on the group benefits from an expanded on mobility, the individual that can be a between transiting simultaneously citizen, global a as understood city-world, the “virtual métacité” as named by Paul Virilio (1984), If in the artworks to related exile forced the and po the world-city. litical aspects can be seen right through its content, in the ones connected in to voluntary displacement they tend to appear more tegrated in its form. cal and media resources, cal as of and well socio-eco media as resources, the reorganization nomic and geographical networks, the concept of mobility is in becoming creasingly an important issue in moving images, both in in we head to the production cinema and contemporary art. Before the exact context artist’s cinema it seems important to specify here analyzed take place. the productions of mobility where placed in movement in our glo of people that are cerning groups stud to contrast In uprooting. voluntary and forced world: balized ies based on into the exile forced of collective due groups nature to dedicated is article this conflicts, political and social or poverty, war, the other can become a protocol for the shooting. I am going to pre to going am I shooting. the for protocol a become can other the some of the principles of thesesent some of these aspects examining ranging from genres different as appear would which productions, fic to actions performative from essays, personal to documentaries docu and artists besides here, mentioned work of body the In tion. mentary filmmakers I have decided to include also particular pro which process, creative distinct a show that directors cinema of jects in their career. most representatives not the are A voluntary movement state of to technologi related the global establishment of a new order With view, there is a visible view, connection between contextual art and some which mobility, of context the in produced works audiovisual the of the pur discourse of these authors due to not included in the were poses of their publications. Most of them emphasize objects, inter actions in public spaces. ventions and performative tion of films, videos and video-installations made by artists and analyze this aesthetic The of idea mobility. is also to understand and elsewhere the of knowledge to open space a as journey the how quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------240 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 The question of mobility lays on the dialectical relationship be Among the global citizens we can identify a psychological and wan- the of figure Benjamin’s Walter course, of is, it context this In etc. are roaming, wandering, Displacement, exile, drift, crossing, tween the Local and the Global. According to Marc Augé (2009, the ideal and the ideology of as a city” represents p.34), the “world the globalization system, while the “city as a world” expresses the historical contradictions and tensions determined by this very sys- tem. The mobility of the global alien is forced and he/she is - fre quently occupied with a sense of belonging, both to the country of of the while the presence country, origin and/or to the receiving global citizen is welcomed and his mobility is desirable. The situa similar in people of group a to connected normally is first the of tion alone. condition, as the second steps out as well as a change of focus a geographic voluntary uprooting sin This singularity. individual to an national identities the from “whatever a as p.9) (1990, Agamben Giorgio by referred is gularity to notice that the understanding singularity”. But it is important on based but indifference by defined be not should “whatever” of the Latin translation of “being such that it always matters”. This kind of that “crossroad-individual” is currently emerging, a hy Bour Nicolas by described is influences, cultural different of brid subject, contemporary “this “radicant”: a being as p.58) (2009, riaud caught between the need for a connection with its environment singularity, and globalization between uprooting, of forces the and between identity and opening to the other”. These are attributes that are been shaped gradually and can certainly be conflicting with their pairs or more confronted when these individuals are widely with the society. derer (flâneur) who appears as a major historicalreference. His ex- perience is the freedom to displace, observing and being observed, litera in figure similar A other. the with interacting never almost but ture is These the heroes of stranger. modernity share the possibility of the voluntarily up traveller, the solitary of perspective and the closely place. They are of the anonymous arrival into a new rooted, linked to the living conditions in the flux of the cities of their time. all figures and of each mobility, one shows a specific aspect of it. so becomes mobility why reason the maybe and point common The places journey the that fact the to related is artworks the in important quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------241 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 Even if the journey gives the director in traditional cinema a A A journey is generally based on the trinomial composed by de certain degree of freedom to improvise in productions like road like road in productions to improvise of freedom certain degree The road to a story. still committed movies, at the end they are can feed them with inspiration and with assets they would have never thought about before the start of the shooting, but the fact is that – in almost all cases – a script is meant to completed. We can say that in cinema the production of a film always foreseea result. final precise Artist’s cinema: notes on the context of production notes on the context of cinema: Artist’s If cinema gives us a vast repertory on the issue of which mobility, comes out essentially as content within the films, artist’s cinema on the other hand tends to make a distinct point, integrating the com cin traditional the In form. artwork’s the in also mobility of ponents in a quite clear man these components ema the narrative organizes ner (even in a non-linear story), showing us the whole piece: cause, event and consequences. But in contemporary art it is not surprising intui provocative, abstract, fragmented, a show that artworks see to personal approach. tive or more parture, displacement and return. Each one of these stages reveals a stages reveals Each one of these and return. displacement parture, what about expectations different with fed mind, of state particular is ahead. If very often it is motivated by a more or less specific im clear, a by driven be to have necessarily not does journey the pulse, logic or understandable reason, and it is not rare to be a goal in it is the entrance door for an unme self. The fact is that the movement per cultural experience, for everyone’s geographical and diated sonal will of a better of understanding theof the self and the other, space between here and As there. in an experimental creative pro for one to step into the unknown. cess, the movement is an entrance the artist in a modified psychological andrelational state. This modified state allows him/her to be open to new and random en to position a in being himself/herself, decentralize and counters, It think forces differently. him/her to leave his/her confortable zone, to overcome inertia, and to produce. It also brings fruitful road the of mythologies and stories to associated be to imaginations between the ambivalences of the local and the global. The journey points out to a distinct reality in which the way to observe, think not ordinary. are with the environment and react quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------242 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 The need for freedom in terms of movement and immediacy dur in terms of movement The need for freedom Moving images more art-orientated also invest in experimenta in invest also art-orientated more images Moving In certain productions in artist’s cinema (likewise in some docu some in (likewise cinema artist’s in productions certain In structure; standard a follow not does and plural is cinema Artist’s they in work in a connection programs for with artist-in-residence eign These country. programs allow the artists to works abroad having another geographical base and a certain structure in (or closer to) the location he wants to put himself in. The equipment that is used in this context is generally small and light, which allows the artist to go on a than trip a carrying backpack nothing – more a mobility concept that had already been extensively explored by Glauber Rocha. The backpack becomes “the artist’s studio” and he both creation and display. Everything in terms of equipment tends equipment of terms in Everything display. and creation both to be more compact, flexible and immediate compared to the tra ditional cinema industry (although the industry itself sometimes not to say that, That is a trend). as this direction to follow intends a have only artists the of most crew, big a with working of instead All connected, these factors very small team or even work alone. pre elements aesthetic the in difference significant a to contribute sented in the artworks. and to make use networks ing the travel pushes the artists to create of equipment that are better adapted to their practices. often Very it is diverse in its means of production and display as well as in its in as display as well and production its means of in diverse is it genres and forms. In terms of production it is noticeable that an in been have display and creation both for protocols of variety creasing used, collaborating to emerge an aesthetic of mobility and propos Beyond audience. the to experiences time-based and space- new ing the subversion of traditional narratives structures – which is a con and dis for creation protocols stant concern of cinema itself – these channel single the on based (usually film of concept the expand play time). length of on a limited or pre-determined and screen and devices, for media recent of the use in eventually tion and mentaries, and in exceptional cases in cinema) the trip gets notably gets trip the cinema) in cases exceptional in and mentaries, an to reduced be can story The itself. story the than relevance more starting point for the produc or a vague inspiration, a referential, The content of of creation. new protocols by tion, or even replaced the film may not be defined or known until the itinerary begins define truly can way such in journey The place. take events the and of the artwork. the production quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------243 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 Artists and directors combine both the production process and In terms of display, the process is not different. More and more the and more More is not different. the process In terms of display, Currently, artists and independent filmmakers still keep explor Currently, finalresult as well as a strong interest on the traceability and the connecting one a circuit are The artworks frequently cartography. place to the other. of crea the experience of displacing itself, in a continuous exercise a higher of tion. or intervention Presenting lower by degree the artist according to the nature of the project, these productions length can be expanded from the film itself to the place of display. length can be expanded from as a tool for creation The journey elsewhere and the The journey sets up the context for production and appears as a The principle of nomad and personal adventure. space for creation with fed is aesthetics This work. artistic the of state the becomes ism the movement and insists on the poetic necessity of the departure, Some works on an experience that can only take place elsewhere. on the places them as other focus on the itineraries and the roads selves. Between other specificities of these productions there is the than the the same relevance reaches fact that very often the process use of DSLR cameras, handy sound recorders, cell phones, laptop cell recorders, use of DSLR cameras, handy sound computers, customized GPS, applications and and software, other portable devices, which all allow the development of new practic a or geographical location taking in consideration a es of creation shift in space. limitsthe of out interactivity and projections for open is perspective of the cinema. multi-screen Video-installations, projections, pro gramming language based software, and a multitude of other new than those in the rather different are experiences there media offer and rhythm to temporality, Issues related traditional movie theater. can basically work everywhere, since almost all the equipment is digital and the images are stored in files that can be easily trans phone even by internet or ferred, the or mm 16 mm, 35 either films, of use the of possibilities the ing welcome digital they specially 8 mm. However, immortal super formats and 3GP cell supports, phone such videos, as inter HDV, etc. Beyond the handy video cameras – that long ago net streaming gradually started to replace film cameras –, the artists also make quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------Ten 244 13 Lakes Miro Soares Miro

(16mm / 109 The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 Ten Skies Ten (The central region / 16mm / 180 min. / (16mm / 135 min. / 2004) and La région centrale shows a series of skyscapes, filmed in a journeyVal around While Benning has chosen the fixed frame, the Canadian film A filmmaker that showsremarkable a look on A the environment 13 Lakes subtle change of light and shadows conjugated with the natural to notice and clouds. It is interesting vegetation elements: water, the tension hidden in the length of time of the images. The shots show mostly a desert landscape, but in specific moments clearly by the human presence. affected maker and artist Michael Snow has done the opposite. His work called bers of shots and are simply organized in about sequence. Taking of movement no is there still, is films these in shot each minutes 10 to the landscape. camera. The frame is totally dedicated States and its frame is the United across regions different presents equally distributed between the sky and the The water. horizon process same the basically Following middle. the in right is line Skies California. This minimal Verde, and precise configuration intensi fies the experience of duration at the same time as itreveals new to scale, ephemerality and the cinematic frame. related perceptions In the stillness of the frame in both works we can see a richly and source for the experience. Landscapes, cities and people will be thesource an accurate gaze. of target is James Bening. With an extreme minimalistic aesthetics in both the concept and the structure, Benning is able to capture the im ages of the places and organize them in long films that offer the immer positively a and contemplation of level beautiful a viewer sion in his landscape films. simple as As good instances of that immersion. min. / 2004) are indicate the titles both films are composed by a determined num would range from documentaries to personal essays, from per to personal essays, from documentaries would range from to fiction. formative actions Documentary approaches in approach documental have a more cases the artworks some In the images trying to inter is to capture of the artist which the role fere as less as possible on the subjects. These productions share cin experimental and documentaries in genres with aspects similar ema, where the act of observation seems to come out as the main quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------245 (35 mm (35 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 New York, NY New York, (video / variable length length variable / (video Interview Project Project Interview “Interview Project is a road trip where people have been should found and interviewed. People watch Interview of peo going to meet hundreds because they are Project ple. There was no plan really for Interview Project. That Inter different. interviewed each was people who were sev over trip road mile twenty-thousand a is Project view and back the United States.” enty days across From the deserted landscapes through the roads to the city we to the city we the roads deserted landscapes through the From From From the position of observation and documental approach some artists would also add a layer of personal veryreflexions, often ex pressed by his/her own voice, composing a sort diary of oressay, notes director A (and on photographer) the who journey. will take the camera in his travels with a remarkable sense of discovery is in presence his of witness a often are films His Depardon. Raymond that attracts the attention of his gaze. a region / 10 min. / 1986) is a black and white film composed by three se along the journey: The film-essay meet David Lynch and his and Lynch David meet / 2009). In a completely project different compared with his fic composed a documentary has produced tion movies the director by 121 parts which showcases interviews with ordinary people. If the way of determined production is by peculiar, the encoun its way of display is also not conventional. ters he has in the roads, a releasing website artist’s the in displayed are interviews These In his descrip year. days for the entire new episode every three of chance explicitly points out the character tion David Lynch within the project that is created based on random encounters 1971) is centered on the landscape and precisely on the camera on the camera landscape and precisely on the 1971) is centered movement, one the most basic elements on the film medium. Mi Theprinciple of autonomy of the camera. us a chael Snow presents movie shot work on is a a deserted monumental moun three-hour the camera to rotate was designed in order tain, in which a system without the need of an operator and being able to do complete 360 in all directions. and in circles craning skyward movements, degree the artwork leads movement, Due to the unconventional camera documented in the film. the matter beyond the landscape quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - He - - 246 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 Afriques, comment ça va avec laAfriques, comment (16 and 35 mm / 92 min. / 1985), Wim Wend Wim 1985), / min. 92 / mm 35 and (16 Tokyo-Ga (Africa, how are you with pain? / 35 mm / 165 min. /

That’s it. I am starting a journey. This is not a road movie. road a not is This journey. a starting am I it. That’s This is not a work of investigative journalism. I’ll try to observe and listen to the Africa. pain ordinary Subjec in my also but desires, my through necessarily, journey, tive fears. Don’t worry; I will not try to overwhelm you. I hope I’m not going to shoot always the same things. let myself to to improvise, I don’t know my stops, I prefer whatshoot, I’ll what advance in know don’t I guided. be my meetings will be.” “Hello. I am here at the Cape of Good Hope, right at the “Hello. I am here African continent, alone with my camera of the extremity highest sand dune thatand my amateur tripod. I’m on the windy; I’m not veryI have found, facing the sea. It’s very comfortable, but ready to a shoot. late It’s after winter, to make use of the I take the opportunity noon of July. my first shot. light and I improvise In the film the In In a film produced ten years later, In a film ten produced years later, The film begins and everything is The clear. viewer is invited on to the image. related of all issues is aware the trip. Depardon works in a critic and auto-critic manner. director to tribute a Japan to trip first his make to decided had ers modernity. Japanese the about investigation an and Ozu Yasujiro It is a deeply personal movie, which gives us a small sample of goes to Japan moti Wenders life in Japan and the director’s view. would be no distinction between what is the acting of filming and the film: is how he begins result. Here the film itself as a final quence shots that result on a panoramic view of the city. The shots a panoramic view of the city. on result quence shots that associated are with the voice of describing Depardon, – in an auto- critic discourse – the experience to make this very same film in the American city. douleur? 1996), Depardon is even more expressive and fully opens up the context of the work and of his At position the as begin a director. there as So film. the inside thoughts his exposing on insists he ning, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 247 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 “And so, my trip to Tokyo was in no way a pilgrimage. Ipilgrimage. a way no in was Tokyo to trip my so, “And some whether I still could track down was curious as to was still anything left there this time, whether thing from whether Or people. even or perhaps, Images, work. this of in the twenty years so much would have changed in Tokyo be left to find.” since Ozu’s death, that nothing would The creative protocol can be understood as a tool capable of guid of capable tool a as understood be can protocol creative The ing the production of an artwork without a predetermined script. predetermined a without artwork an of production the ing The main principle is not to tell a story delimitated in advance, but prac a In creation. the to lead will that situations of field a create to tical way the creative device is the elaboration of a certain logic, out points As place. take to film the for limits and parameters rules, guidelines of introduction “the is device the (2005), Migliorin Cezar in a selected universe. The artist determines space, time, actors or characters in a universe and adds to it something that will force personal protocols to trigger the production of the work. This prin of the to trigger the production personal protocols appearsand works the audiovisual in trend recent a is which ciple, in varied ways, is often described by the generic term of “creation priority to space They mostly give protocol”. device” or “creative and chance. The term is certainly and prob instant, improvisation it as and ways different in comprehended be to allows it as lematic could be used to refer to most kind of procedures related to the arts. However, this is the way how it is widely used by critics to describe the strategy to subvert or to create new structures of the discourse in moving images. Wenders goes through Wenders the city and meet people. The film focuses on the figure of Ozu and his films. The interviews with the actor about bit a reveal Atsuta Yuuharu cameraman the and Ryu Chishu also is however, result, The director. the of icon the behind man the Wenders, about his gaze and his way to become Wim a film about himself a director. Creative protocols In order to replace the predetermined script and embark on the adventure of the directors and unpredictability, artists will create vated to know what he could find or meet, as he explains in the film: beginning of the quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

- - - - - in situ 248 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 (Accident / super 8mm and miniDV on DV / DV on miniDV and 8mm super / (Accident Acidente The poem leads the artist in a continuous itinerary. The camera The poem leads the artist in a continuous itinerary. In the body of work of the Brazilian artist and filmmaker Cao Creative protocols simultaneously blend the act observation/un act the blend simultaneously protocols Creative Without the script, it is the journey, the walk, or the itinerary that itinerary the or walk, the journey, the is it script, the Without produce images and acquires, as all devices, a certain power over images and acquires, produce the artist” (Lins, 2007). these in life about details reveals and routine everyday the observes aspects of the local in these small towns. This images show different regions, a universe that has its own bases and not connected to different also is as different is places these in Time strategies. global the contact of people with The each shots other. produced by the aesthetics and personal knowledge, in a process that – retaking a a that – retaking in a process aesthetics and personal knowledge, to to live and indistinct desire the to express seems utopia – modern at the same time. produce Guimarães we can identify some particular protocols for creation. In the video 72 min. / 2006), co-directed by Pablo Lobato, the creative device the of towns of names twenty by structured poem a as places takes state of Minas Gerais, Brazil. The artwork is driven by imprevisi towns the visit artists the names such by Guided chance. and bility for their very first time. “The poem-device becomes a machine to interference interference of chance and imprevisibility as the control over its The work reveals the hands of the author. content slips away from then the ambivalence: part of it is controllable and precise (which incapable is part other as creation) of protocol the by determined is will occur). of being anticipated (the events that They production. of act the with around space the of derstanding same the at place certain a in experienced be to situation the trigger memory the keeps that result final a artwork, an produce they time of the experience beyond the present moment. The artistic practice understood as a continuous research feeds the author with both movements and connections between them (characters, techni etc.) “. appliances, geography, cians, climate, technical not are they case In this the artwork. of creation the determine will only subjects of the works but an effective condition to be experi enced, to which the can related action be of directly the artist or to a testimony of an event in the world. The film is then made and in an almost “live” situation, being shaped from the stimula to susceptible is It itinerary. proposed the through visit the of tions quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 249 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 (In the pampa / HD-CAM / (Action and dispersion / DV / 6 min. /min. 6 / DV / dispersion and (Action En la pampa Ação e Dispersão The video-installation The film The All the dialogues were created naturally from the contact between the way as the installation Considering them and the landscapes. was displayed at Jeu de Paume (in Paris, in 2008), five screens are placed in different positions within the room. Each projection dis plays a different scene of the be To story. able to access the whole of each content the visitor has to displace himself, standing in front one. The screens show a variable running time and are set in loop. sequence he wants. to watch the scenes in the The visitor is free precise the narratives tend to show a quite minimal scrip. The story the precise of the work. does exist but rather not as the center five projection video installation / variable length / 2008) by Jordi of the way representatives Colomer is one of the artworks that are how the journey can build up the story in a fiction. In this installa tion, composed by five video projections, the artist invites a man Atacama Desert, in the and a woman to live certain situations in the actors, not professional north of Chile. These two people, that are did not know each the other shooting. before They will go through this region in the search of a story that does not exist beforehand. the artist put in discussion the cultural politics and the circuit of politics and the circuit the artist put the cultural in discussion and camera his with alone travels director The distribution. cultural the money to produce the film. He goes through several different all places where all means of travel he uses, countries. He records is he adopts eats. The only rule he sleeps and all kinds of food he never to stay two nights He in continues the his same journey city. prize is over. randomly until the money of the Fiction As a vast source of imagination the journey will also feed the crea tion of the plot or the story in fictions. However, instead of being artists are meant to correspond to this specific frame of space and two layers of through made is the video an immersion, As time. con the story of the poem and the other to narrative: one related accidentally in life events, which appear nected to the everyday of the cities. of the camera in each front politicala with and device, travel a also is Migliorin Cezar by 2002) component. The film was produced with public fundingreceived from a prize for audiovisual production. In this performance-film quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------250 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 (Video / 2006). Res (Video Baffin Figure (Number eight / 16 mm to HD / 10 min. / 2007) is These works serve as a way to observe the environment, give A similar image is that made by the Russian artist – and gradu and – artist Russian the by made that is image similar A Nummer acht are somehow like heirs of experimental cinema and the old Glauber old the and cinema experimental of heirs like somehow are Rocha’s principle of making cinema with “a camera in the hand and an idea in the head”. This production looks backwards and the years, throughout the itineraries of moving images recognizes tries to find out what are and at the same time it looks to the future to be the new audiovisual works. the personal discourses, replace present for improvisation, room omarev, in a performance called in a omarev, this is a performance in whichtituted as video and as photographs goes ship a ship. The part of in the front the artist attaches himself through the open Baffin Sea, a marginal sea of the Atlantic North Ocean, located between Baffin Island and the southwest coast of Greenland. Conclusion Artist’s cinema made in the context of mobility pushes us to reflect same the at world globalized our to related issues contemporary on itself. Such works time it also questions the audiovisual production The film shows a huge ice breaker ship making his way figure throughsmall the a it of front In Finland. of region remote a in sea frozen In as if he has to lead the way. of the artist walks few meters ahead, and monumental image the short distance between the artist this makes you hold imminence of a danger, the ship, and the real associated is figure romantic this work, his of typical As your breath. walks he how indifference the both on irony of degree certain a with in front of the ship as well as on the subtitle of the artwork “every thing is going to be alright”. Pon Alexander – School Marine Engineering Higher the from ate Acts of presence The presence of the artist itself can also become an element in the these artworks show us par some of Based on the reality, creation. that af of the artist, as well as acts and gestures ticular discourses the of figures different Between world. the of face presence his firm to is very often connected the explorer and the traveller, wanderer lands. the incursion to desert and remote an impressive artwork by the Dutch artist Guido van der Werve. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , - - - - - Com , Uni 251 Miro Soares Miro

, Payot Rivages: Payot , The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 , Gallimard: Paris. , Gallimard: , Flammarion: Paris. Lost highways: an illustrated history an illustrated history Lost highways: , Editions du Regard: Paris. , Editions du Regard: L’invention du quotidien L’invention Driving visions: exploring the road movie Driving visions: exploring the road Radicant. Pour une esthétique de la globalisation La Communauté qui vient: théorie de la singula vient: théorie de la La Communauté qui Un art contextuel , Edição Caja de Burgos: Espanha. , Edição Caja de Burgos: , Seuil: Paris. , Creation: London. , Creation: Marcher Créer : Déplacements, flâneries, dérives dans Créer : Déplacements, flâneries, dérives Marcher Pour une anthropologie de la mobilité Pour une anthropologie , Niterói. versity of Texas Press: Austin. Press: versity of Texas Cao Guimarães pós movies of road rité quelconque Paris. Éditions Denoël: Paris. l’art de la fin du XXe siècle Produced independently in the sphere of contemporary art or ex or art contemporary of sphere the in independently Produced Laderman, D., 2002. Laderman, e dispositivo nos Lins, filmesC., de2007. CaoTempo Guimarães. Migliorin, C., 2005. O dispositivo como estratégia narrativa. 1999. W., Watson, J., & Sargeant, References Agamben, G., 1990. 2002. P., Ardenne, 2009. M., Augé, Bourriaud, N., 2009. 2002. Davila, T., De Certeau, M., 1990. the field of moving images. Through its dimensions of production industrial of rules alienating and strict the of out set distribution and or commercial cinema, these artworks allow us to believe that the artistic production resists not only as an inventive, but also demo cratic and liberating space. These audiovisual productions made in the context of mobility push us to important reflections about the art’s universe and our daily social universe. They collaborate to the renewal the field of moving images, to the understanding of our time, and to the establishment of a critical and poetic consciousness of the world. predetermined script by new protocols for creation, inspire fictions inspire creation, for protocols new by script predetermined determineThey also can mark his presence. the artist to allow and a critical attitude face to the established notions and indicate us of origin and place institutions such as family, changes in social mobility, the to related aesthetics particular a us show They nation. roots, in which their elements suggest a skepticism about stability, certainty and order. paths in many and different perimental cinema, these works explore quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk 252 Miro Soares Miro

The trip as a script The trip Volume 04 L’espace critique: essai sur l’urbanisme et les nouvelles critique: essai sur l’urbanisme L’espace , Christian Bourgois: Paris. , Christian Bourgois: technologies Virilio, P., 1984. P., Virilio, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Spectators’ Journeys Immersions in Experimental Theater

Elsa Belhomme Elsa Belhomme is currently writing her doctoral the- sis on the “Cartographies of Spectatorial Experiences at the Avignon Festival: Transmission, Ruptures, Creations and Becomings“, as part of the Erasmus Mundus Joint Doctorate in Literary Interzones. Her research interests include contemporary theater and new media, intercultural productions and the dy- namics of international living arts festivals.

This articles looks at two theatrical performances from the point of view of their spectators. The act of going to the theatre is in itself a journey immediately followed by the confrontation of an unknown world during the performance. This article questions the position and roles of the spectators in contemporary, interactive perfor- mances, where spectators become central within the theatrical set- up. It analyzes two plays, Le Bardo and EUX, both presented at La Chartreuse in Villeneuve-lès-Avignon. The two plays present spec- tators with mixed territories of actual, fictional and virtual, and ac- centuate immersive processes by using virtual or augmented reali- ties. The article argues that in those apparatus, spectators must undertake an intro-directed journey and renegotiate their own sense of being there, while remaining at the center of attention. This allows them to appropriate the territories with which they are con- fronted and eventually participate in the plays, in a process similar to that of the traveler.

Vois sur ces canaux / Dormir ces vaisseaux Dont l’humeur est vagabonde; C’est pour assouvir / Ton moindre désir Qu’ils viennent du bout du monde (Charles Beaudelaire, L’invitation au voyage)

Volume 04 253 - - - - - 254

Elsa Belhomme Elsa s playwright, Eli Spectators’ JourneysSpectators’ Volume 04 EUX’ were both presented at La Chartreuse, a labora a Chartreuse, La at presented both were Le Bardo and One important aspect of these systems is the fantasy and fantasy the is systems these of aspect important One the expectations. If you tell people it is going to be an eager to play so immersive situation, some people are wasperson The themselves. immerse they that game that people Some started. text the before projecting already just refused to get in there [...] Reactions were generally of reactions from the part of the participants: from of reactions not explain what the theatrical apparatus would consist of, but were specific on the fact that only a spectator at a time could enter the plays. This laboratory mode, as well as the presentation of works during either or probes festivals, incited spectators to take a forms alternative expecting were They plays. those to going by risk of without theater, knowing what the rules of the game would be. The absence of many information gave an incentive to the spec tators and to to discover the plays without many preconceptions, with the plays. eventually engage entirely Commins, noted in an interview the importance of keeping a mys tery about the nature of the plays, in order to leave a greater range who observe them. However, in some contemporary experiences, who observe them. However, notably with the use of virtual technologies in the one theater, can roles. of casting the and encounter theater the in shifts small observe vir of use extensive making plays of cases two observe to want We tual technologies in both this produced essay, by and presented at and discuss the CNES of La in Chartreuse Villeneuve-lès-Avignon, to their participants. offer the “invitations to the voyage” they Limiting expectations E.U.X did plays both of leaflets presentation The writings. theater for tory In the theater, a play is an ephemeral event which unites, in a unity a play is an ephemeral event In the theater, spec technicians, (artists, beings human various place, and time of tators), who come from diverse backgrounds and will, after the a is itself, in event, theatrical The trajectories. own their follow play, 2008). (Fischer-Lichte, individuals those of co-presence the of result the of all participants creates and reactions The sum of the actions the that accepted generally is It object. an as well as event an as play participants of a theatrical event have a clearly definedrole: with situations to spectators present the actors technicians, the help of quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------255

Elsa Belhomme Elsa Spectators’ JourneysSpectators’ Volume 04 , the participants are invited to experiment , the participants are request that request the bodies of their spectators occu E.U.X Le Bardo and quite strong. They ranged from deep anxiety to pleasure anxiety to pleasure deep from They ranged quite strong. (Commins, 2010). know, or control. In or control. know, Reality helmets. They enter a virtual and sense the play via Virtual world reminiscent of gaming universes, which they can explore by are they Indeed, walking. by and direction any in gaze their pointing pushing a cart (in the virtual world, a wheelchair), which connects their movements and pace to the computer graphics that they see the through helmet. They by surrounded are actors and technicians who monitor their movements and reactions, but who they cannot py other spaces. Indeed, both plays are labyrinths through which vision,their mainly using way, own their make must participants subscribing than Rather proprioception. and touch hearing, also but im intellectual the appreciate to mind and body of dichotomy the to they rather ask their spectators to engage fully mersion into a play, in the plays by the means of all their bodily senses. The plays must be appreciated both intellectually and physically to make sense to their spectators. If they are observers coming from the outside, as the term “spectator” suggests, they only observe themselves in the midst of the object-play to presented them. In those theatrical situa tions, they become participants in an apparatus which they do not his opera house in Bayreuth, at the end of the XIXth Century, spec at the end of the XIXth Century, his opera house in Bayreuth, tators asked are to silent. remain Only the stage is lit, and every As in the cinema, the in its direction. one’s attention is directed spectators forget their bodies during the time of They the doplay. not direct their attention to their surroundings, but rather towards minds their that so alone left are bodies Their stage. illuminated the primarily experiment they which object an on fully concentrate can sight and sound, and analyze intellectually. through sensorium one’s Experimenting the plays through E.U.X In addition to presenting the work as a game whose primary play the work as a game whose primary In addition to presenting the us to which extent shows remark the spectators, this ers are play is experienced through the body of the spectators. Their reac tions are not only intellectual, but mostly physical. In Europe, the mostly accustomed also complete forms of theater to which we are of and the construction Wagner ly immerse their spectators: since quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------Le - - 256 His the Le Bardo

Elsa Belhomme Elsa It has been re

demonstrates Spectators’ JourneysSpectators’ Volume 04 Matter and Memory. Matter and Memory. (2001, 317):

Matter and Memory participants experience the fiction of the , participants also have to walk through a labyrinth, entering To sketch To very briefly, at an is One axes. two on operates always attention that events and sensations external of flow the to tentiveness while the other is attention to the memo way in which perception. “present” from ries coincide with or diverge From this summary, we can induce that participants, during the this summary, From experiencing with ones they are the sensations try to match play, play as a situation to which they are directly confronted and to to and confronted directly which they are situation to play as a which af situation, thus transforming it into a real they must react, decisions.fecting their personal immediate and sensory Perceptions renegotiations The focus on one’s body must and open perceptions, in ter a play, spec where theater in common not are that possibilities and ritories tators forget about their own bodies. Bergson studied perceptions to memory in and attention in relation summarized by Crary sis is here several rooms, each activating different senses. One is entirely dark; entirely is One senses. different activating each rooms, several another one has an inclined plan on which to walk; on yet another, participants cannot decipher whether the characters are embodied by actors or are mere video projections, etc. Although participants VR helmets, into a virtual world through not delved are optical theater and video, to alteruses cinematic techniques, such as of reality the of sense make cannot Participants reality. perceived the Both experiences, heavily drawn on their immediate surroundings. participants to use their sen force awareness, focusing on corporeal fully understand the plays. Into sations, their sensorium, in order type of immersion this Bardo, see. Their senses are stimulated throughout the play: they are spo the play: they are throughout stimulated are see. Their senses pushed are they name; first their by addressed being directly, to ken to draw on their own clothes; they are lied down on a table, before virtu are they where galleries the in journey their continue can they ally walking; they are touched by strangers, etc. marked about CREW’s work that: “in this hybrid experience, the most a causing extreme, the to pushed is body own the of perception In 2009). Wynant, and (Vanhoutte awareness” corporal confusing quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------E.U.X 257 A Mid A

Elsa Belhomme Elsa Spectators’ JourneysSpectators’ Volume 04 or Shakespeare’s or Shakespeare’s and [...] refers to one or and [...] refers that spectators experiment

With it, as With Frank Popper (2007, co-sensation Life is a Dream Life is a Dream It is often referred to as an intermingling of It is often referred

. Those plays, created before social codes simultaneous perception. simultaneous perception. other plays, in Calderon’s other plays, in Calderon’s Dream summer Night’s for whom the characters silenced theater audiences, presented had and faded, boundaries reality if between not dream disap peared. The position of the characters on a threshold between two certain conventions, and eases the accept the play from states frees ance of unreality-like events, opening spaces to explore, and lead In transformations. ing to happy encounters or disastrous Those discrepancies between various senses, in both plays, open up open plays, both in senses, various between discrepancies Those thresholds between the awareness of the materiality of one’s body comple Both aspects are and the immateriality of the experience. the of bodies the in Rooted exclusive. mutually than rather mentary, participants, the play develops in their imaginations and fantasies. ungrasp remain to seem play the of memories the event, the After able, difficult to transmit through words or images, to remember to sense live A accurately, of again an mentally. unattainable real intersectionthe at happened had they if as plays, those to pertains of the actual, and the the real virtual. They have qual a dream-like which is not ity, new in and the has theater, been explored, among sensory renegotiation during the play. The disruption of sensations The disruption during the play. sensory renegotiation sight, from received information the of re-organization a trigger may of syn impressions and create and proprioception smells sounds, aesthesia. It “literally means more (emotionally) related sensorial qualities” Vanhoutte (Wynant, p.160). 2008, Bekaert and the Greek It comes from the senses, a shift in sensorial perception. sunaisthêsis, possible”. are p.162) points out: “all sensorial inter-relations (Im)materiality they already know, in an attempt of making sense of their surround attempt of making sense of their in an know, they already ings. Being mediated and augmented by the use of immersive tech to for the spectators as to what pertains is a confusion nologies, there sees that to the actual. For example, one and what pertains the real in fact they feel that they are tiles when walking on hard they are stepping on Althoughrelyinga oncarpeted theirfloor. senses, par ticipants are lead to doubt them. From then on in the performance, the spectators remain in a state of uncertainty about what can hap argued be can It bodies. own their to pen quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - 258

Elsa Belhomme Elsa Spectators’ JourneysSpectators’ Le by Bardo a room Volume 04 by its theme. To To theme. its by Le Bardo This book accompanies the dead for 49 days 49 for dead the accompanies book This Bardo Todhöl. would suppose the ability from spectators, technicians , which refers to the Tibetan Book of the Book of the to the Tibetan Bardo or not Bardo, which refers Ce temps qui, par opposition au temps mesuré par les moment un à renvoie (kronos), calendriers les et horloges où aussi, mais frappe, destin le où celui décisif: singulier, s’offrent des occasions à où saisir, s’ouvrent des brèches dans lesquelles activement (Sermon, s’engouffrer. 2008). by clocks This time which, in opposition to the time measured decisive moment: to a singular, refers and calendars (kronos), the moment when fate strikes, but also the moment to seize open in which one must actively opportunities, when breaches mine] dive.[Translation kairos Le Bardo, no character played by an actor enters liminal spaces Liminal states Those states are reminiscent of the state of betwixt-and-between “the as Fischer-Lichte by described and Turner by conceptualized as a physical primarily realized experience of a crisis, [which] is en the physiological, change to a words other in transformation, The and in between realities as in those plays. the However, participants and actors the by watched spaces, those into thrown are themselves them. to react to order in moves very their observe who technicians, in is also reinforced The state of liminality Volodine’s Antoine was inspired the company this play, create book, Dead, the -each of those days represented scenically in or reincarnation their until walk- must spectator the which through its cycle. escape from ergetic, affective and motoric state” (Fischer-Lichte, 2008, p.117). Those changes are the locus of opening new possibilities, of acci- Eli Commins, as a work of the reads Julie Sermon as dents, or, to strike: place for the kairos and artists to seize unplanned opportunities to create something something and artists to seize unplanned opportunities to create thus new, simultaneously co-creating common territories and liv although the plays seem to ing a unique experience. However, transformations transport the participants into such a state, where on stand to seems play the of actuation the where and possible are quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - Le - 259 , where the , where

Elsa Belhomme Elsa plays permit to

E.U.X Spectators’ JourneysSpectators’ Volume 04 (Turner 1995, (Turner p.95) which

soon meets the real constraints soon meets the real :

kairos , an actor summons you to forget who you , an actor summons you to forget Le Bardo , a participant enters the apparatus every seven minutes, and, a participant enters the apparatus tors have initially followed, is upset and even destroyed tors have initially followed, is upset and even destroyed and another one has to be established. (Fischer-Lichte 2008, p.87). The question is what perceptional multistability achieves. multistability perceptional what is question The is a rupture, […] Whenever such a shift takes place, there which the specta of perception, The order a discontinuity. Again, the limits between the actual and the virtual are not clear for clear not are virtual the and actual the between limits the Again, the participants, nor the are limits between the and real the fiction al. When, as in your touching gently while twig, a become you imagine to and are, phenomenal bodies, or are they seen as embodying characters? perceived those roles the actors playing, and how are are Which role by participants who are not only spectators in those plays? Erika postdramatic that arguing been has Fischer-Lichte perceive the actors’ bodies in thus their creating phenomenality, shifts, moments of betwixt-and-between actualize the theatrical experience space for unplanned developments which would exceed the allot space for unplanned developments is found in similar structure A ted seven minutes. participants exchange their makes two choreography structural and tight is timing the play, both In minutes. twenty every goggles of participation only an illusion. the sense of freedom Co-construction If participants have an acute sense of how their bodies react are to who actors the the of bodies the consider turn, in they, do how plays, the actors do not take on the main Apparently, the play? in present roles: the participants Are the do. actors apprehended only by their Bardo leaves no alone at all time. This particular structure must remain an ever-changing threshold, which is triggered by the reactions of each participants, the plays are also created according to a fixed time of the and the structure, of the The time labyrinthine allotted path to of the the play. plays, on one hand, helps the spectators’ sense of being lost in space, but and, to a cer maintains them on a planned path, on another hand, tain extent their controls and whereabouts their movements. In quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------, to - - 260 E.U.X

Elsa Belhomme Elsa Spectators’ JourneysSpectators’ Volume 04 Becoming is always of a different order than filiation. It concerns alliance. A becoming A is not a correspondence between relations. lim the at or, imitation, an resemblance, a it is neither But it, Toan becomeidentification. is […] not to or progress occur not does becoming all, Above series. a along regress evolu an not is becoming Finally, […]. imagination the in […] filiation. and descent by evolution an not least at tion, The immersive processes at play in those two experience lead to an at play in those The immersive processes par and Actors event. the in participants the all between alliance ticipants influencereact each to other, each other and, through the At each mo actions that they lead, challenge the course of the play. ment, the actors, by the their participants presence and in the play, ticipants. Participants and artists in present a those immersive per formances deeply andinfluence influence therefore each the other, such as becomings of processes defined Deleuze itself. performance (2004, p.262-263): of reactions to occur, from which the play can develop. In from to occur, of reactions the reinforce feedback-loop and offer a distanciation from the bod stay to invited is former-spectator each had, just they experience ily in the space of the performance to observe an other participant’s journey through There, the spectators play. can confront their sen of the experience else’s of the play with someone sory memories the event, is radi they can see that the play, same material. There, on their depending to another, one participant from cally different reactions and the amount of trust they manage to build with the actors and technicians. The of processes becomings at play depend part of the par the from control and on a letting go off on this trust, neck or your arms, the fiction of the plays matter little and the phe the and little matter plays the of fiction the arms, your or neck more takes participants the touches who actor the of body nomenal the how not is matters What character. fictional his than importance ac the between relationship the how but play, the in evolves action constructed. are participants the and technicians visible the tors, Those relationships and, are of if proximity, possible, trust. The building of trust between the various individuals who are present which process this is it but succeed, or fail can event theatrical the in collaborates to create a feedback-loop which, in turn, allows chain quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------261

Elsa Belhomme Elsa Spectators’ JourneysSpectators’ Volume 04 , is the one who watches, who ob spectare of the plays is always ready to be re-lived, re-traversed, to create a new form, to be co-created again. The artists offer their apparatus acti are they when exist only plays the but plays, the presenting by vated by the actions and reactions of participants who accept to states, West-Pavlov Russell As worlds. those in themselves immerse “This space is not the pre-existing stage upon which human life is of it, in relations create us, as we played out. [...] The world creates 2009, p.242). Pavlov, (West reciprocity” through through their bodily sensations, and experience its immaterial im immaterial experience ispacts on their memories. The immersive, of our contemporary uses of virtual technologies: one reminiscent discussing, play writing, creating, can spend a whole day reading, ing on a turn computer, it off and possess nothing tangible to pre allplays: with those is similar They experience party. third sent to a actions have been carefully planned and monitored, yet the imagi nation of the participants, triggered by their sensorial perceptions, pertain to the domain of fantasies, of unspoken memories. No cap the experiences of idea transmit an could audio, or tation, visual the experience As a consequence, perhaps, lived during the plays. Conclusion It may seem paradoxical to speak of a spectator’s Indeed, journey. Latin from the spectator, serves, whereas the journey implies the idea of the movement of traveling from one place the to Yet, immersive another. plays we the ter can travel through have discussed show us that a spectator ritories presented by the plays: they explore, experiment, experi ence through their senses and build relationships with the people In a they liminal encounter. state mixing real and fictional, actual play the embrace to lead are spectators – participant the virtual, and the same space, enter processes of becomings. Each participant, by entering the apparatus of the plays and by experiencing his/her has own an journey, impact on the way the actors react, as well as of process the creative In this sense, representations. on the future those plays is never finished, and isreinvented for each perfor the encounter those plays permit rigid structure, mance. Despite a specta Each co-creation. of moment a in participants, and artists of to get to know in order the territories they cross tor appropriates those territories. them, and by this action redefine quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk . ------pace Pres Break 262 and

Elsa Belhomme Elsa Being Inside the EUX Cambridge: The . Spectators’ JourneysSpectators’ Volume 04 http://agon.ens-lyon.fr/ . [L’Aléatoire, Dossiers, N°2] Dossiers, N°2] . [L’Aléatoire, A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism A Âgon Annual International Workshop on Annual International Workshop th 33 (1), pp. 84-96. [Company Haut et Court, France] [perfor [Company Haut et Court, France] The Transformative Power of Performance: A A Power of Performance: The Transformative Space in Theory: Kristeva, Foucault, Deleuze. [Translation Brian Massumi] London and Brian Massumi] London and [Translation [Accessed 21 December 2011].

[Company CREW, Belgium] [performance lived Belgium] [performance [Company CREW, [Translation Saskya Jain] Routledge. [Translation From Technological to Virtual Art. Virtual to Technological From The Ritual Process: Structure and Anti Structure Structure The Ritual Process: Le Bardo Cambridge: the MIT Press. Press. Cambridge: the MIT Suspensions of Perception: Attention, Spectacle and Mod Attention, Suspensions of Perception: EUX . [Padova, 16-18 October] pp. 157-162. ), April. 21 dex.php?id=985 New-York: Rodopi. New-York: Image. Heightening the Sense of Presence in a Captured Video Artistic Means: The Case of CREW. through Environment of the 11 ence 2008. Proceedings Presence gies accidentées d’Eli Commins, [Online]. Available from: ENS LSH. in Trans Aldine Jersey: New of University State Printing] [Second actions, 1995. ing the space inbetween, in: Klaveren, van, R. et al. (eds.) S hybrid spaces. networks and visualises cowboys: how art creates Genk:Academy. Media and Design Theatre Research International, International, Research Theatre mance lived July 14 2010, CNES La Chartreuse de Villeneuve- lès-Avignon]. MIT Press. ings ern Culture. and Schizophrenia. Continuum. New-York: New Aesthetics. Villeneuve-lès-Avignon]. de Chartreuse La CNES 2008, April 25 Wynants, N., Vanhoutte, K. and Bekaert, P., 2008 K. and Bekaert, P., N., Vanhoutte, Wynants, Turner, V., 1995. V., Turner, K. Vanhoutte, and Wynants, N., 2009. Pending presence: negotiat R., 2009. West-Pavlov, Fischer-Lichte, E., 2008. 2008. E., Fischer-Lichte, Joris, E., 2008. Mathieu, J., 2010. , 2007. F. Popper, Sermon, J., 2010. Entre combinatoire et catastrophe(s): les dramatur References Commins, E., 2010. Personal Interview (creating J., 2001. Crary, 2004. Guattari, F., Deleuze, G. and theatre, contemporary in fiction and Reality 2008. E., Fischer-Lichte, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Travelling Sociability The Mobile Library

Pirkko Raudaskoski Professor MSO ved Institut for Kommunikation ved Aalborg Universitet. Er aktiv inden for en række forskningsområder. Leder af Mattering: Mate- rial-Discursive Practices – gruppen, og er kontaktperson på AAU an- gående forskning om SenhjerneskadeCenter Nord. Med sine tværfaglige forskningsinteresser er hun associeret medlem af fx AAU centre: Dis- courses in Transition, Kvalitative Studier, Mobility and Urban Studies.

Thessa Jensen Ph.d. og lektor ved Institut for Kommunikation ved Aalborg Univer- sitet, medlem af forskningsgruppen MÆRKK (Markedskommunikation og Æstetik, Reception i f.t. Kognition og Kultur), Center for Interaktiv Digitale Medier, og Værdibaseret forbrug.

Introduction The Danish mobile library as a concrete place in a material vehicle has changed remarkably throughout the years. Used at the begin- ning just as transportation from point A (main library) to point B (small villages in the countryside), nowadays the buses and even trucks are not merely bringing books to people. The modern mobile library is a place for sociability. At the stops of the library route people meet, discussing books and other materials: The bus or truck itself has changed from just being a transportation unit to a place for rest, tranquility, immersion and information. The material setup is meant to create an atmosphere and not merely offer a mov- ing shelter for books. Mobility means connecting between spaces but with the mobile library the place itself (the room) is moved from one place to another, carrying the same artefacts into a different, yet similar setting. In this article we define mobility as the possibility to move arte- facts, people, and encounters to different locations, thus creating new kinds of relationships and meaning. The aim of our article is to be part of the “critical engagement in and through mobilities studies” in which “researchers are making a difference to the ways in which (im)mobilities are conceived of, in research, design and areas of public policy” (Büscher et al. 2011: 14). We want to con-

Volume 04 263 ------264

Travelling Sociability Travelling Volume 04 Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko of state infrastructure and offer a free service to citizens. Our case a free and offer of state infrastructure came that library Randers in observations and interviews of consists a from development during project which some librarians also pro col of their duced videos own work practices. These videos were showing Randers, of library main the at and move the on both lected differences and similarities between the mobile library and the sta tionary central library. bile library aims at immobility (cp. Adey 2007 about airports bile as library aims at immobility (cp. places for immobility for people on the move). As libraries are meant to be the emblem of democracy in providing free access when as a concept with us to information, we will take democracy zooming into the affordances of the mobile library as a place for about aspects theoretical these find We making. relationship good closer a take we when background interesting an as libraries mobile analysis of actual encounters. The case In Randers, Denmark, as almost everywhere else, libraries are part (e.g. Jensen 2006). In to order the ground practice/material turn researchers mobility those join we life, everyday the to more even articles several (cp. observations especially ethnography, use who in Büscher et al. 2011), and to our case, the Randers Mobile in focus a Li been not have libraries mobile know, we as far As brary. this detail in mobility research, nor When in exam ethnography. ining “mobile” we are not going to follow the mobile library on its of stops the at on going is what on focus instead, but, road, the route – as we deem those as sites of “crucial action” (Scollon & route en stop to is library mobile the of purpose The 2004): Scollon for And citizens not to just visit. to visit, but to dwell. So, the mo centrate on relationships when we explore how the librarians in a in librarians the how explore we when relationships on centrate better relating of ways learnt newly their constitute library mobile to young library goers. It seems to be clear from the mobility lit Mo necessary. are that empirical studies we have studied erature bility studies clearly belong to the recent practice and even mate rial turn Adey (e.g. 2010, Büscher et al. but 2011), the discussions discus the theoretical level. Sometimes often stay at a theoretical or other examples and stories sion is illustrated with historical (e.g. Urry 2007) or spiced up with private memories of mobility quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------265

Travelling Sociability Travelling Volume 04 Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko , are repeated. The rationale is that ”the library is library ”the that is rationale The repeated. are , In a press release, In the a that release, words press also appear on the bus,

At the same time, the library is one of the last regular free places free regular last the of one is library the time, same the At The focus on close and dyadic relations is due to the fact that the The focus on close and dyadic relations The project where the video data comes from is called “Meaning the video data comes from where The project For the present article, we focus on the mobile libraries in Rand in libraries mobile the on focus we article, present the For state via Internet. How much they have to do this kind of work var on how many depending municipality to municipality, ies from citizen service stations the municipality in question has shut down (Jensen & Buchhave 2009). and young without people. having They for can children be there disciplined. somehow being or learning for requirements fulfil to Progressively more children’s libraries allow the borrowers to libraries’ task as mediator of culture and society is seen to be real Randers around libraries ten to five from So, relations. those in ized have started a specific project about good communication with cli ents (a topic which surprisingly is not part of library education in Denmark). The Danish libraries not only have to collect and man age materials and everything that is published in writing. As mu of closing an increasing in the process nicipalities and counties are number of town halls and citizen service stations, libraries have to take upon many of their tasks. Thus it is the librarians’ task to help for instance, have to contact the municipality or citizens when they, bile library with fantasy light, and air, book covers” (Press release 19.1.2009, our translations). has, Library Children’s Randers 2011). (Andresen Relationships” ful municipalities, surrounding the from libraries with cooperation in chil and librarians between relationships better establish to worked people. The focus is on how to develop closeness and or young dren how the librarian can become a meaningful part of a child’s world. that projects activity certain develop librarians the time, same the At explore further how it is possible to enhance being together with of youngsters and children. various groups ers. A new Finnish-built mobile library was taken into use in Janu in use into taken was library mobile Finnish-built new A ers. ary 2009. Think, Meet, Notice information, to access equal and free with democracy, for basis the they wherever knowledge that citizens have to get experiences and live”. In the same press release the new design of the mobile li closed- and dark heavy, traditional the to ”Goodbye hailed: is brary mo modern a to hello backs; book of loads with library mobile up quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------266 part of

, the mobile Mediating Travelling Sociability Travelling Volume 04 Practices . With meanings Adey Adey meanings . With As for As Meanings Politics. Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko understanding of Meanings, mobility, Politics,

All libraries, inclusive mobile ones, should be sources of knowl of sources be should ones, mobile inclusive libraries, All bile libraries part of (welfare) focus has been an increasing also sites in which there libraries are As mentioned and youngsters. on communication with children above, the librarians working with children have taken a course on that. The mobile library can as be a regarded the main library; the books and other items always are carried on bor the to library the connects library mobile The there. from loan rower and for the borrower: Mediation compresses the time to a sumed lesser status of mobile libraries but they also want to renew renew to want also they but libraries mobile of status lesser sumed the identity of the mobile library goers: It is not just the (maybe disabled and families with that children have poor) to elderly, use willing be should anybody now – services mobile “secondary” the to experience the air and lightness of a mobile In library. the pre sent we paper, want to see what is going on in the mobile library participants’ interpreted those, especially how the and interpret Mean data: video the of analysis close of basis the on situation, the data. inductively from ings (and contexts) emerge ideal that makes mo edge and information. It is this democratic Relation to mobility studies In Adey’s (2010) clear library mobile new The central. are Mediations and Practices seems to want to convey new ly wants to emphasize that mobility never is pure movement, but movement is always interpreted in a certain context. A mobile li brary is always “a visit from the centre”, thereby constituting the mobile library stop as part of both periphery, geographically and recent the that case the be to seems It 1992). Burke (cp. figuratively updates of mobile libraries not only want to challenge the pre play, use mobile phones, and play computer and platform games games platform and computer play and phones, mobile use play, (Jensen & Buchhave 2009), all this without demanding payment or some kind of educational focus. exactly However, because of this freedom, the library has a good possibility to enhance the This knowing the materials. that comes from kind of learning clubs gaming or reading of form the in offered often is possibility where librarians present books and games to children and en available various the of knowledge their deepen to them courage materials. resource quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------267 temporarily temporarily

Travelling Sociability Travelling in which people, in which people, Volume 04 The library itself, the itself, library The . and they all are and they all are as a relationship that is “solid, as a relationship the face-to-face encounters takeencounters face-to-face the travel Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko how mooring, constitutive of a mobility system One important feature, as stressed by the course on com on course the by stressed as feature, important One So, it could be claimed that the democratic ideal of information In this motile limited space, the library-goers have to be much The new mobile library in Randers is emulating as best as it can Still at this general level, we want to turn to another recent pub recent another to turn to want we level, general this at Still library – at least an exchange of greetings takes place –, whereas in whereas –, place takes greetings of exchange an least at – library library- the by approached be to have normally they library main a goer for a contact. im for space nor time, no is there as truncated bit a is services and mersion, not to speak of any club activities that only take place in ask: can, Is therefore, democracy best served We the main library. by central, static institutions? fantasy and book covers” in it the does mobile not library, claim to have visitors the bus, a of that be will size the – space is there that do their business in a much more cramped space. The mobility of the library also means that the library is open for a considerably shorter time than is the could, immobile We in library. fact, talk about stopping hours (or minutes), rather than opening hours. more disciplined than in the Also, big the library. librarian is “on next the to travelling when only is it time; the all practically stage” cus library the of gaze the from away relax can she or he that stop mobile a in librarian a encountering avoid to hard very is It tomers. objects, information and ideas come together come ideas and information objects, library goers and librarians all stationary. is mentioned, just munication analy empirical our In librarians. and goers library between place library-goers the about knowledge intimate the how explore we sis in a mobile library gets constituted. the stationary library buildings. The “what is a library” (as a mate as services, and so on) is “copied”/remediated/ rial environment, is “light, air, claims that there release translated. Though the press scheduled stopping time and the space to a miniature model of model of time and the space to a miniature scheduled stopping the library (cf. Adey 2010: 198); the main library is related to the mobile library as a closest (Adey 2010: 20). static and immobile” mo how see to 2011) al. et Büscher (by studies mobility on lication find authors these what to relation in placed be could libraries bile central for mobility: First of all, with its scheduled appearances, a mobile library is quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------268 social any

Travelling Sociability Travelling Volume 04 Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko an ethnographic approach to investigat an ethnographic approach

How do (or do) so called “big D” (political, media, edu media, (political, D” “big called so do) (or do How

“It is not just about how people make knowledge of the the of knowledge make people how about just not is “It world, but how they physically and socially make the people, mobilise and move they ways the through world objects, information and ideas.” nian interaction orders (for example, you might be doing some thing alone, in a “with” or as part of and a group); in larger dis ofout circumstances material concrete in place, that is, in courses which meaningful elements lifted are up (or to ignored) be able to 1 with its discourse cy accomplish an action. The graph in Figure cles (or discourse itineraries) attempts at showing how something familiar and of practice is at the same time a repetition has a possibility for change. (Scollon & Scollon 2004), ing practices. (Also Ole B. Jensen in his article from 2006 turns to Goffman and Simmel – and the Scollons -- to ”connect the global flows to the everyday level of social practice” (2006: 145).) In NA, always executed they are always social and mediated, actions are andelements) meaningful tools, (cultural means mediational with by social actors that have learnt to do the actions in certain ways culture, family, certain a of part is, (that history life their of because social actions or sites institution etc.). So, the focus is on concrete of engagement that are done by people with certain “historical Goffma in done are actions the experiences; life certain bodies”, It is this constitutive approach that we, too, want to turn to now. In that we, too, want to turn to now. It is this constitutive approach to the every political statements we want to go from other words, world. day democracy, for basis the is library “the like discourses etc.) cational, and equal access to information, experience and knowl with free to what is they live” relate edge that citizens have to get wherever D big the between connection a there Is library? mobile a in on going press release statement by a politician and what the librarian said one afternoon in a mobile library to a little girl (“I have something for you”)? One way to explore the possible connection between abstract policies and everyday practices is to use nexus analysis Analytical considerations &al Büscher studies, mobility of aspects relevant cover to trying In 14): state (2011: quarter

academic The analytical task of The analytical task of

nexus analysis Figure 1. 1. Figure

kvarter akademisk ------269

What should pre Travelling Sociability Travelling : Volume 04 discourses Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko instructive if not anticipatory that the mobile library has on the bus itself, and 2) the course

To find out about the historical bodies, that is, past experiences of To We now We turn to finding out more about how these two types of We also We believe in claims that all movements of people, objects that at the beginning the librarian asks the children or young people young or children the asks librarian the beginning the at that to restart the action they would so be that doing he anyway, can some of the questions will present for him. We have it recorded nexus analysis recommends. em other and interviews have we goers, library and librarians the takenhave librarians the that know We to. resort to materials pirical an emotional and create “to the course on meaningful relationships Analysis impor be to seem that instructions of types two with start can We to think/meet/no instruction tant in the case of Randers: 1) the tice that the librarians who work with and children youth have taken on meaningful relationships. will mostly in our empirical materials. We present are instructions be concentrating on video clips that one librarian has kindly given the sense staged in are they that them most of see from can us. We to now, nexus analysis wants to now, understand how the “big D” societal questions either shape or are shaped by the local accomplishment be found within them. of action. So, democracy should also transformations. What does change and why in a and ideas are nex use and that explore shall we following, the In library? mobile empirical materials. Some materi us analysis to make sense of our als show ferrably take place in There are the direct quotations library. from interviews or the videos that one librarian made for the course on better communication skills. This focus on here-and-now qualities of the central, immobile phas immobile central, the of qualities here-and-now on focus This es in the mobile library’s route, resonates well with Büscher et al’s 14) point on (2011: “how [people] physically and socially make the world through the ways they move and mobilise people, objects, information and ideas.” Also, with a mobile the library, cyclic na stopping For instance, the scheduled of the action is clear. ture hours also mean that a library-goer collects books not when the li brary gets them (like in the main library) but when the mobile li brary arrives next time. In spite of concentrating on the here-and- quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------270

the mobile how Travelling Sociability Travelling Volume 04 ” (course website). becomings Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko and as with a small girl and her mother (see Fig

beings books with me for you today”. The books are not just referred not just referred books are books with me for you today”. The The bus also has computers to play with and this can cause con In another encounter Let us now the explore materials we have about Our first example comes from when a librarian and a youngster So, the participants in the (mobile) library encounters the are doing that, the librarian uses ways of talking from the big library, thus showing that he is in ethnomethodological terms “doing be ing a relational librarian” (something they were taught as part of library big a in works also that communication) good on course the acting. is a mismatch between talking and – there up ended who brothers three between happened as interest of flicts of services the demanded apparently who (and fight loud a having and says “that is misspelt”. ure 2), the librarian explains: “I actually think that I have some (.) fine to (e.g. ‘here’s a nice book’) but they are oriented to as being a re asult of special work and that work is part of the fact that this is visit (“today”, “with me” constituting the ’I’m on a visit’ aspect of the mobile library). When the librarian a bit later processes some reserved books at the computer desk, he finds them immediately to his left hand side. as However, he is meant to be explaining all the time what he is doing, he goes “I’ll just go and find them”. In sion (Roed 2006). library and being its used are semiotic as aggregates a meaningful size. the about idea an get can we 2 Figure in photo the From space. which of height the desk, library mobile the at other each to close are is better suited to a child. The boy is following very closely all the course the of part as – who librarian the of movements professional all the time what he is do on good communication – is explaining ing. At one point the librarian types on the screen to order a book. The boy monitors him and notices a typo. He points at the screen librarians taking a course on good communication skills and chil and skills communication good on course a taking librarians dren (with parents) that are familiar with the practice of visiting would that family a about interview an in tells librarian A libraries. library the – bed for ready kids the with stop hour late the to come almost like an extension to home instead of using it as a is treated or as a special library visiting “dumping occa place” for children relational relational basis for growth such that children can enjoy the chil dren’s library both as quarter

academic

Jørgen Ledet) Jørgen Figure 2. Using mobile library Figure video collected by (still from

kvarter akademisk ------271

Travelling Sociability Travelling Volume 04 The boy, sitting stiff, says stiff, sitting boy, The

Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko a bit (Boy: “mm-m”). Then one has to go a bit (Boy: “mm-m”). Then one has to go forget The calm and – also embodiedly – friendly “telling off” seems to seems off” “telling friendly – embodiedly also – and calm The about to say something (“yes because”) when the librarian over there, be will Internet the wishes he that comment a adding by laps too. After this he asks the boy if he wants to ask something: “was about?” ask to want you something there “It’s just that children have a better memory than: adults”. The li prac library to back topic the turns and do they that agrees brarian are if there get ignored might sometimes how children tices and adults present. are are going to teach him that [how to behave] don’t you think so”. (the through message the gotten have to fact in seems librarian The boy also nods and acknowledges what he hears with mm’ms). abstract the in about talked has he what makes librarian the When understand “you “here”): at pointing (and saying by concrete more then you wait now that when you see that I’m serving down here, a bit”. After this, he explains, that “it sometimes happens with adults that they After this the librar right?” and say to them it has to happen now, main points he has said, he lists the ian does a typical “closing off”: and finishes: “so I think it’llreally go well”. The boy and agrees is goes through the rules of the game, explaining why there should be should there why explaining game, the of rules the through goes 15 minutes slots so that there would not be “shouting in the bus” and also explaining how and when they should call upon a librari library. the in gadget computer a around rules about talks he So, an. dialoguea as it of interpretation his shows boy the and well, work rather than a one-way adult-child interaction. In fact, after the li him, after shout or bus the in shout to OK not is it that says brarian the boy repeats “one musn’t shout”. The librarian also mentions the smaller brother as an example of one who cannot wait for the “we that boy the to states He him. after loudly shouts but librarian the librarian also in a loud manner). So, the experiences that a little dur have librarians The too. kind, negative of be might offers space ing the course been taught how to have a “difficult conversation” and this indeed does take place. The librarian has the conversation mostly with the eldest of the brothers who is sitting at a computer, but involves another brother who is moving back and forth in the discussion, too. The librarian leans on the computer table, thus coming physically closer to the boy being primarily talked to and maybe also conveying a relaxed but strict atmosphere. He calmly quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------272

– this time cre Travelling Sociability Travelling Volume 04 Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko instead of, for example saying ‘if I seem

What was mentioned maybe as a typical adult way adult typical a as maybe mentioned was What physically and socially making the world physically and socially equal terms. We went this through episode because it We shows how the librari Our last example comes from a short encounter with a young

whether the teenager would have felt embarrassed should there borrowed. has she books the of titles the to listen to others been have spacesmall the in challenged be can borrower the of privacy the So, of a mobile library. Conclusion vid these at looking about conclusions our in humble very are We needed. However, is data analysis and acknowledge that more eos dialogue – and on equal terms. woman who returns a book and asks about reserved books. She does that in very general terms “if one a has book”. reserved The li brarian uses the screen with information about the girl’s reserva He screen. the at pointing girl, the to titles book the quotes and tions hasshe that books the of titles the aloud reading extra, bit a doing is called is them of One returned. be should they dates the and loan on as slower, bit a title the reads librarian The me”. love you know “You There screen. on the saying it’s what out make quite could not he if are no other customers visible in the bus. were We wondering to have forgotten you, to then...’). have The forgotten boy builds on that and contrib utes to the discussion with a bit of information “It’s just that chil unmitigatedtotally a is It adults”. than: memory better a have dren (and perhaps strange, that is, out of place) and an almost scientific explanation compared to the “child-talk” about sometimes forget ting. it However, shows that the boy is a willing participant in the cluded and involved to the extent that they start behaving in some in behaving start they that extent the to involved and cluded how of talking to a child “it sometimes happens that a adults bit”forget (that makes the forgetting understandable, a general feature of adults, or all the librarians an succeeds in (and techniques certain through closeness social and physical ating to how on instructions The bus). the of space limited the of because behave are given both in the abstract and in mobilising through pointing at certain places in the bus’ interior to exemplify concrete actions. The boy seems to understand the situation as one of learn ing and even knowledge sharing. Again, like in our first example where the boy was correcting a typo, a young library goer is in quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------273

Environment Environment Aalborg: Aal Aalborg: it also is about , Travelling Sociability Travelling Volume 04 – it moves books, ideas, ide 25: 515–536. Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko Relationer på biblioteket. . London: Routledge. trans-port that could be regarded as big a victory forvictory a big as regarded be could that to than walking to. The children that go to the to than walking to. The children Mobility equality turning (that respectful attention also could be called) seems to phies of spectatorship, position, and (im)mobility. phies of spectatorship, position, and (im)mobility. and Planning D: Society and Space Universitetsforlag. borg The aim of many main libraries has become to emulate a living References Peter (2007) Adey, ‘May I have your attention’: Airport geogra Peter (2010) Adey, (2011), red. B., Bent Andresen, young people. He seems to be very successful in his ability to engage to ability his in successful very be to seems He people. young with the young library goers. The analysis shows that this kind of affect work of feeling a create democracy as having read all the possible standpoints about it (or is ideal democratic or D big The matter). that for else anything about in the little d’s of dialogue and doing. So, democracy is not “just about how people make knowledge of the world” how to become citizens other-oriented that “physically and socially make the world through the ways they move and mobilise people, 14). objects, information and ideas” (Büscher et al. 2011: library not only get to know and find books and other lendables instruc get also they there), being them to goes that work the (and tions on how to behave. room. In mobile libraries the home-like atmosphere is almost una voidable: Not only do you know where everybody else is, the kids are taught everyday ethics and norms of how certain library prac tices should be undertaken. It is in these practices they learn how to how fellow citi importantly, “think, meet and notice” – and, most zens should be involved in these activities. The librarian in the vid on how to make contact with eos analysed was taking a course we can start making some tentative we can start making claims that idea of counter the big, stable libraries with enormous amounts of materials being necessarily better places for the ideal of democracy and sociabili The mobile ty. library is a ologies, librarians through a scheduled route. When stopping, it intimate than much more to encounters that are opens its doors those in the main library: the librarian gets to know the library- immobile, fairly are encounters the so cramped is space the goers; more there’s quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - 274 Mobile Mobile . Køben 1(2):143– New York: New York:

Travelling Sociability Travelling Mobilities Volume 04 Cambridge: Polity. . Fremtidens børnebibliotek i Fremtidens Nexus analysis. Pirkko Raudaskoski and Thessa Jensen Thessa and Raudaskoski Pirkko Contemporary City. Contemporary City. . Cambridge: Polity Press. ‘Facework’, Flow and the City: Simmel, Goff

History and Social Theory History and Social Mobilities Børn bruger biblioteker – hvordan og hvornår Børn bruger biblioteker – hvordan og . Aalborg: Aalborg Bibliotekerne. Aalborg Aalborg: . http://huset.randersbib.dk/course/view.php?id=129 . London: Routledge. havn: Københavns Kommune. Methods the in Mobility and man, 165. bør Det (næsten) bogløse udformning. Rapport om projektet konkret nebibliotek Routledge. Jensen, Ole B. (2006) Roed, T. (2006) Roed, T. Scollon, Ron & Scollon, Suzie (2004) John (2007) Urry, Websites Course site: Burke, Peter (1992) Burke, Peter (1992) Büscher, Monika, John Urry, & Katian Witchger, (2011) (2009), Bente Buchhave, & Thessa Jensen, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk quarter

academic

Aalborg Universitet kvarter akademisktidsskrift for humanistisk forskning

Virtual journeys – digital journeys – journeys on the internet akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Why walk when you can teleport? Themes of travel in online roleplaying games

Nick Webber is Senior Researcher and Research Developer at the Birmingham Centre for Media and Cultural Re- search, Birmingham City University, UK. He has written on identity, cultural history and the rela- tionship of technology and culture, and his current research includes popular music consumption, on- line archiving and civic history, and the culture of massively multiplayer online games.

Abstract Travel constitutes a significant activity in the majority of Massive- ly Multiplayer Online Roleplaying Games (MMORPGs), wheth- er players are pursuing quests, trading, adventuring or simply exploring. Yet not all journeys are equal, and the roles of, and responses to, various journeys demonstrate a number of interest- ing interpretations of travel. From one perspective, journeys in games are simply consumers of time: notably, World of Warcraft ob- tained the nickname “World of Walking” due to player perceptions that there was too much travel involved. Yet it is intriguing that some players voluntarily undertake extensive journeys, which are often difficult (in gameplay terms) and time-consuming, when more convenient routes are available. This article seeks to consider the many roles of travel in MMORPGs, and to reflect on ideas of the journey as, among other things, labour (travail), a rite of pas- sage, and a means of saying goodbye. Article Although the players themselves remain firmly in their seats, travel, and the journeys that are made, are significant activities within Mas- sively Multiplayer Online Roleplaying Games (MMORPGs). As- pects of game-driven play which incorporate travel, such as quest-

Volume 04 276 ------277

Nick Webber Nick Volume 04 Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why The academic debates which contextualise this work focus on at on focus work this contextualise which debates academic The A study A of these interpretations and meanings contributes to a and Nick Yee’s model of player motivations (2006) are undoubtedly are (2006) motivations player of model Yee’s Nick and the most Typologiessignificant. of gamers are, however, “young” enough to be necessarily incomplete, has and drawn Yee attention (2007). analysis Bartle’s supporting evidence empirical of lack the to de antagonistic often and lengthy a although terms of narrative, In bate has taken place within and game around studies about the re Eskelin example, for (see, narrative and games between lationship en, 2001; Jenkins 2004), this can be broadly set aside (Frasca, 2003). tion about online spaces which, while widely increasingly studied, in the context of poorly understood, particularly still relatively are between online and offline behaviour. the relationship to understand the practices of gamers, and the extent to tempts struc narrative containing texts as of thought be can games which analytical structures, strong of inquiry feature Both areas tures. which are valuable tools when they are allowed to inform, but not When considering the ways in which our research. to construct, typologies; create to tendency a is there games, approach players 2003) in (refined types player on work 1996 seminal Bartle’s Richard will investigate and consider different kinds of travel, attempting to kinds of travel, will investigate and consider different means. understand what, for players, travel investigationthe Firstly, developments. and discussions of number informs (and is informed by) debates about social roles in games nar and games between thereof) lack (or relationship the about and understanding of player activi a clearer Secondly, rative structures. information useful to game providers ties in game spaces provides in creating fulfilling environments for their players and in accom gen and in more Finally, to play. modating a variety of approaches adds to the corpus of informa eral terms, examining online games ing and trading, are supplemented by player-driven journeys, to location. Scholars have noted or to visit a favourite perhaps, explore em an place are) typically MMORPGs (which environments 3D that travel more prompting world, the through movement on phasis jour of variety the in Yet 4). p. 2003, (Book, environments 2D in than that the them, we can see discourses that surround neys, and in the travel in a and make meaning from players of these games interpret in number and of sometimes different contradictory ways. Travel MMORPGs serves a number of purposes, and therefore, this article quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------278

Nick Webber Nick Volume 04 Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why The notion of a quest as a motivation for travel, and as a way to Here, then, I set out not to produce another typology, nor to un another typology, I set out not to produce then, Here, consideringWhen themselves. journeys the to then, on, move We say). Finally, travel occurs as an aspect of situation: location is im say). Finally, portant in certain games for particular reasons access(e.g. security, elsewhere. from travel to these locations to facilities), prompting Some traditions. narrative in rooted firmly is meaning, travel give writers refer to the archetypal heroic quest of Odysseus (Krzywin ska, 2008, p. 133), and as the vast majority of these games employ are MMORPGs of 85% (around literature fantasy of tropes common outcomes of these forms of travel can ultimately be the same – ar inand route same the by travel after even location, same the in rival the same manner – the sense of purpose is significant. In the ma jority of MMORPGs, game-driven travel a is through constructed mechanism of these game are quests, objectives. where Typically, a totown another (to incidentally either travel to required is character fundamental part of the collect a package, for example) or as a more quest experience (they might have to escort an injured soldier to ob (rewards achievements offer games many addition, In safety). tained for completing longer-term, non-quest objectives) and these game, the in system cave every visit (to travel-related sometimes are contextual information) and metastory (narrative overlay) elements p. 145). 2004, (Pearce, dertake a narrative analysis, but rather to explore the journeys that practices, in their own terms. Tak players make in games as cultural ing both elements narrative from and I typological willapproaches, work. future a cultural analysis which might help to refine produce players undertake, we might the various forms of travel which travel types: general two between distinction immediate an make driven by the game, and travel driven by the Although player. the It has been the site of a great deal of misunderstanding, but has at stories, not are principle that, while games its heart the common notions of narrative (alongside other analytical approaches) can a use this study, of them. For the purposes of help us to make sense ful intervention is that of Celia Pearce (2004), who offers a consid num a defines Pearce context. play-centric a in narrative of eration particular of games; in found be can which elements narrative of ber value in understanding game journeys are experiential (the emer gent narrative of the play experience), augmentary (backstory and quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------279 for exam

Nick Webber Nick being perhaps perhaps being in the truest sense. in the truest Volume 04 travail World of Warcraft World Lord of the Rings Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why , in which you can unlock badges “for the foursquare Where the quest, achievement or simple location is the driver, location is the driver, quest, achievement or simple the Where We might then think of We achievements which celebrate this kind of travel, among other things, as celebrations of the mundane; much like the “gamification” of (Castronova, 2011) life implied in appli cations like achievements 2011), (Foursquare, world” real the in do you things “gamify” games, making play activities out of incidental labour. That many of these activities also are (quests repetitious that re are cultists; 100 kill cultists; 10 kill scale: which achievements or peatable tionality of shopping and banking – the end result (the purchase, the purchase, (the result end the – banking and shopping of tionality is ignored. is the objective, and the cultural experience reward) extent meaningless in these spaces: trav travel is to a large therefore, but activity, location or achievement quest, the of time the extends el is not integral to it, and the fact that a player may be pushed to ex in player This is reflected the game world becomes incidental. plore travel and quests, with discourse around ple mocked as a “travel simulator” (e.g. Newlin, 2009) or as “World must which work as perceived is Travel 2011). (Rohnalt, Walking” of be completed in order to obtain a reward, and other, and more functional other, and experiential, terms” (Krzywinska, an augmentary or metastory nar 2008, p. 133). While quests provide activity in terms of the game’s story rative which sets the triggered world (Krzywinska, 2008, p. 127), the majority of players engage piece a as prompt, they journeys the and quests, of majority the with of game function which sets clear and simplistic objectives. Indeed, players game by understood well so is journey heroic the of idea the that transitional and expositional sequences can be removed (Jen activity. game to shortcut a into quest the turning 120), p. 2006, kins, For therefore, quests the function majority, in a manner similar to achievements, and both of those are not far from the simple func fantasy games: Van Geel, 2012), we might also note the prevalence of the prevalence Geel, 2012), we might also note fantasy games: Van Tolkien’s with there, quest narratives the best-known of many examples. Campbell More broadly, noted the importance of the monomyth or heroic journey to the structure of myths Academics (2008). in game studies have worked to define the player to example, that they require suggesting, for quests, to fulfil a goal while masteringa landscape in order “move through a series of challenges” (Aarseth, 2004, p. 368). For game players, quests however, are understood in a dual mode: “in both narrative quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------280

Nick Webber Nick Volume 04 Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why , “one distinct advantage of the tourist experience in vir , “one distinct advantage of the tourist Evidently, the designers of such games understand that travel, of such games understand the designers Evidently, With this instrumental notion of travel in mind, it is therefore it is therefore notion of travel in mind, this instrumental With etc.) supports notions of these activities, and the connected journeys, connected the and activities, these of notions supports etc.) as in pursuit of a work ethic or corporate ideology (Rettberg, 2008). commute. we might see such a journey as a In another locale, beyond first instance exploration, becomes onerous (and it is per set games are such). The worlds in which these haps intended as small. Indeed, functionally very such that they are “scaled” are and extensive dis on the oddities of world sizes, players remark accurate measure to provide cussions take place which attempt (the Telara tiny the from spaces, these of size effective the of ments world of Rift; 4.6 miles long and 5.5 miles wide) to larger spaces cover(EverQuest), which at launch was claimed to Norrath as such rela is speed travel addition, In 2011). (Maverick, miles square 350 everywhere, their characters run tively swift: most players make and it is possible to cross the entirety of even a mid-sized game travel. Even so, as charactersworld in under an hour of continuous increase in power (and often, also, as games increase in age), the jour make to ways of variety a and lifted, is travel “blockage” of neys shorter become available: mass transit systems, personal transport devices (e.g. mounts), the ability to orfly, the ability to in tourism the context of in notes, As one commentator teleport. Second Life tual tual worlds is that instead of being to required walk to the next sight, one can simply click a link (Book, and ‘teleport’ 2003, there” p.(i.e. players long-time and sink, time a and tedious is Travel 15). with it. themselves established customers) need not trouble striking that a substantial number of players appear to choose to travel for reasons other than those driven by the game. Moreover, or in a manner which many of these players choose to travel slowly, to those who adopt does away with the conveniences accorded In general, inconvenient forms of conventional approaches. more travel offer no tangible gameplay benefit and, in fact, may expose full a forest a character to additional risk – travel on foot through of monsters is rather more dangerous than simply teleporting be tween cities. So although travel to complete game objectives may ultimately be either or onerous meaningless, these voluntary jour meaning of, and through, players a way to make neys seem to offer online travel. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------281

Nick Webber Nick , in the early , in the early Volume 04 EverQuest Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why It is in terms of these considerations that the deliberate undertak In some regard, the idea that travel becomes easier as one gains months of its release. Two of the major cities in the game stood at at stood game the in cities major the of Two release. its of months either side of the game world’s main continent, and the journey be tween the two was lengthy (taking approximately one hour) and very hazardous at lower level. the Yet trip was considered to be would Players doing. so of experience the for simply making, worth the in belongings their of all place to order in naked, characters strip bank as a protection from loss, before running across the world, at tempting to evade lions, bears, griffons and giants. Death on the out access to “easy” forms of transport becomes a badge of pride, superficial a At players. other from respect gain to mechanism a and level, players of high level characters will remark, in public chan nels, on the presence of a lower level character in a notably danger ous playersarea of willthe discussgame world. More significantly, of rite specific and concrete more a represent that journeys particular levels of power up” of increasing passage than the simple “growing activities these of think might We 4). p. comments 2010, Olivetti, (e.g. in terms of trials or tests, and the completion of such trials provides a topic of discussion and of An reminiscence. example of a journey of this kind could be found in the game stitutes an increase in independence (and MMORPGs are tradition are MMORPGs (and independence in increase an stitutes dependent games, in that much of the game content ally relatively access that requires to the groups of ability allies); to and secondly, make a choice about transport gives you the opportunity to use path. the harder transport as a statement, to choose ing of “perilous” journeys must be set. Before they reach the break or instant trav that grant access to high speed points in progression small patches of danger through el, players will have passed slowly ous territory on numerous occasions. to Yet deliberately undertake and successfully complete certain substantial more journeys with power, and power, as the game ages, indicates that specific journeys, and for some form of “rite of passage” constitute generally, travel more an MMORPG The player. process of levelling a character (increas ing their power by gaining experience in battle, etc.) replicates the experience up; of as growing level/age rises, access to increasingly powerful and effective forms of transport becomes available. This raises two important that considerations: increasingfirstly, power, access to transport and to choices of transport, con and increasing quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk . ------282 travail

Nick Webber Nick Volume 04 Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why As noted above, as character power increases, so too does their Another important aspect of such journeys is that, unlike reach ing maximum level, relatively few people undertake them. Their maximum level, relatively ing “adventures”, these in succeed who of those the status and status, of travel as cultural practices, asindicate that we can see these kinds which generate cultural capi forms of performance and of display travel in-game of nature cultural the of indication visual more A tal. games and their players ad the way in which these from comes players are modern games, notion of appearance. In more the dress look unique a with equipment new powerful obtain to only not able – a staple of MMORPGs – but also to choose to hide this under “wardrobe” set a of equipment which presents a different appear implications. two has attention sartorial this travel, of terms In ance. In the first, players will travel to or around cities or other areas of dense player population to display their Yet outfits (Royce, 2011). can be fairly subtle (especially in the case of small clothing features items such as gloves and boots), and a parallel but more ostenta tious display comes not from the character’s attire, but from the character’s means of transport. access to high-speed travel, and many MMORPGs offer a variety of “mounts” or “vehicles”, including some which are hard to ob enquiry or often prompt acquisitions will tain. Display of such rare comment from other players, sometimes including outright jeal- Again a ousy. claim to in-game capital, the use of the mount as a in American culture in of the car form of display calls on tropes and particular, in youth culture more which generally, have been explored by scholars 2001; (Miller, Best, 2006). The idea of “cruis thevia America post-war from space online the into stretches ing” explicit, are youth. In some cases, parallels modern medium of with specific mentions of cruising and even the incorporation of a (Maninscratch, of Warcraft into World 2010). “hot rod” The fantasy (and thus generally medieval) setting of many of these games also us prompts to think of forms of and regal noble display his from The peril, the nature of risk and trial, and the sense of achievement of risk The peril, the nature . aventure a matter of make this more journey was commonplace, returning the traveller to their departure departure their to traveller the returning commonplace, was journey point, and successful completion was felt to be a triumph (Ceeb, And 1999). although reattempting the journey a number of times simply not was this distance, a from laborious seem might quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------283

Nick Webber Nick Volume 04 Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why , talking on the subject of a new flying mount, run, by choosing to walk, players are generally identifying Of course, travel doesn’t only have a communicative function, Each of these examples indicates that journeys and the activity of activity the and journeys that indicates examples these of Each Touring the city on a high-speed epic mount, however, is not the not is however, mount, epic high-speed a on city the Touring itself – prestige, wealth, in-game achievement. Equally, itself walking – prestige, wealth, in-game achievement. Equally, conveys a strong message to other players; in these spaces it is as shop or house. in a real-world around unusual as running travel, and of though, and we can clearly discern instances where ten a isspecific not journey, only uncommunicative but actually highly personal. In the broadest sense, this applies to the idea of exploration, where this is not driven by a desire to unlock every nuanced consideration of the character’s to the world. relationship eve people do not normally run They will often walk, noting that and they (Sullivan, will rywhere 2011), take to care avoid collision a social activ is most usually As roleplaying with other characters. populated areas. often found in densely such characters are ity, travel play a significantrole in these spaces in contributing to, and as forms of, communication. Perilous journeys act as the subject of have who peers between or players other between conversations, again, for display prompts, the same experiences. Travel undergone inter-player communication, but as an activity it communicates in participate is designed into the game. in these spac used as communication is travel which in only way the cities far around of characters will proceed small group A es. moving along at walking pace, a distinct contrast to slowly, more everywhere. run to characters typical for above noted tendency the that they have not yet discovered Although some new players may can themselves, through their characters, as roleplayers (Manekineko, to maintain a patina of “ap Attempting comments 7, 8, 13). 2011, propriate” behaviour for their role-players offer avatar, a more torical contexts, conjured in art: Godiva, perhaps, or Napoleon. phi the in reflected are connections cultural these certainly, And for Kaplan, the lead designer these games. Jeff losophy underlying of Warcraft World wanted noted: you “We to be able to land in front of your friends dude! Check me out. I’m on a and be able to show like, it ‘Hey, off flying mount!’” & (Yu Park, 2006, p. 2). therefore, Not do only, players travel to display themselves and their accrued in-game capital, but the idea of display as an activity in which players will quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------284

Nick Webber Nick Volume 04 Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why as the source of the memories (e.g. memories the of source the as player, heavily involved in a large in a large heavily involved player, EverQuest EverQuest One player activity in particular truly characterises the concept of concept the characterises truly particular in activity player One The notion of exploration is again underwritten by the structure structure the by underwritten again is exploration of notion The even continuing to use slideshows build will players of number a While 2010). Valcaron, during their time that they have produced the screenshots from appar are in itself, there activity playing the game, an interesting althoughtravelogues, deliberate create who players fewer far ently the introduction of the ability to capture in-game activity as video In the context of the game, make this simpler than it was historically. advantage or opportu this is not an activity which grants reward, and not “killers”. For these explorers, the frontier is the boundary real-world of spirit the capture they and them, to known is what of it’s there”. “because in journeying to see what is there explorers form a as travel is that and spaces, game these in journey personal a My own first encounter with this of memory: the goodbye journey. practice concerned an a se player community site, who travelled the world and created ries of screenshots to memorialise the space before cancelling his this material is no longer available subscription to the game. Sadly, online, but more modern versions of this practice can be found, of many of these games; so much so, indeed, that some scholars re mentality, concern that they invoke a frontier have expressed flecting the legacy of western imperialism and an ideology that a frontier is a boundary of exploitation (Gunkel & Gunkel, 2009). In sense, then, exploration could be seen as a participation crude in a encouraged to kill “the other” and in which players are structure steal their goods, without engagement with a notion of pre-exist ing culture, co-existence in Yet or reality sustainability. player ex ploration is must less about conquest and much more a reflection “explorers” these are terminology, Bartle’s – again, in of curiosity achievement but rather by a desire to see the game world in full. As full. in world game the see to desire a by rather but achievement Bartle’s typology suggests (1996), there is a qualitative difference between these two approaches to between play, what he calls the “achiever” and the Achievements “explorer”. reflect a character’s presence in a number of generalised locations, whereas explora a about and location, and place of sense a about more much is tion personal experiential narrative of visitation. (2006), For this Yee is in an between immersion; and achievement between distinction a in the gameworld. the game and an interest in terest quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , ------Fa 285 The Monk

Nick Webber Nick discussed at the Volume 04 travail Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why , is one good example (Tan, 2005). (Tan, , is one good example , becoming something altogether more per more altogether something becoming , video – is communicative, so each of these ac video – is communicative, so each travail EverQuest 2 YouTube , or a We must also reflect on theWe between differences these communi This enquiry only begins to consider how we might usefully un Of course, for us to know about the existence of these more per start of this article. Considering these practices in terms of gamer start of this article. Considering these practices in terms of gamer kinds of travel – the different typologies, it is clear that the different purposes – can be more easily understood in terms of these frame works. As noted, the simple initial division into game-driven and and achievers Bartle’s reflects ways many in travel player-driven Yee’sa model reflectionexplorers. Yet upon suggests that, while achievement,by motivated is travel of deal great a that recognising many journeys driven are not only by immersion (the Yee’s of area the narratives that players construct in the game. It is not immedi in the game. It is not the narratives that players construct personal narra narratives are ately clear whether these experiential thewhether thus and example, for narratives, avatar-centric or tives of player ex a sense from motivations that underlie travel proceed of the storyworld, or from for the coherence a respect perience, from a combination of the two. In particular, when players memorialise avatartheir place, that remember to so do they do gameworld, their in that place, or the experience that they had playing that avatar in here. done be to work more is there therefore, always, As place? that cative forms of travel and the travel as work/ cebook that In communication. of piece a for substance the provides tivities online massively multiplayer games as much as they are these are games, in many senses a communicative – a social – or roleplaying in game to have meaning. It maycontext is essential for activities keeptravellers “goodbye” of majority vast the that case the be well indi not do some that fact the but themselves, to journeys last their and communicate underpins much of cates that the drive to share what occurs here. of nature the and practices travel between relationship the derstand nity, and in that respect this piece of travel is again removed from from piece of travel is again removed this and in that respect nity, the framework of sonal. Parallels can be sought and seen in machinima productions chronicling similar last journeys in a narrative mode – in produced not wholly personal in na sonal practices indicates that they are the activity itself is not a piece of communication, the While ture. sharing of the activity – whether through a forum or blog post, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------286

Nick Webber Nick [Accessed 30 30 [Accessed Volume 04 . Lincoln, NE.: Univer . Berkeley, CA.: New Ri CA.: . Berkeley, , 1(1). [online] Available , 1(1). Available [online] Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why Tourism & Photography: Still Visions - & Photography: Still Visions Tourism . Narrative across Media Narrative across Sheffield, UK, 20-23 July 2003. [online] Available at: Available [online] 2003. July 20-23 UK, Sheffield, . New York: NYU Press. York: . New Designing Virtual Worlds Designing Virtual Journal of Virtual Worlds Journal of Virtual Fast Cars, Cool Rides: The Accelerating World of Youth of Youth Fast Cars, Cool Rides: The Accelerating World http://www.mud.co.uk/richard/hcds.htm and their Cars Worlds graphy in Virtual Changing Lives. http://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/Delivery.cfm?abstractid=538182 [Accessed 2 December 2011]. M-L.2004. ed. Ryan pp. 361-376. sity of Nebraska Press, Suit MUDs. at: December 2011]. ders. Evidently, although these games support notions of exploration,of notions support games these although Evidently, Best, A., 2006. Best, and Book, Photo Through B., Cyberspace: 2003. Tourism Traveling References Aarseth, E., 2004. Quest Games as Post-Narrative Discourse. In: Bartle, R., 1996. Hearts, Clubs, Diamonds, Spades: Players Who Bartle, R., 2003. player or the cruising of the flamboyant. Much as in other popular cultural activities, then, players of travel,MMORPGs reappropriate a work/achievement context and transforming it into taking it from mundanity and vacancy of mean an immersive and social tool. Its it to communicate with and to other play ing allow players to reuse Much as cycling in the age of the ers, and to make meanings anew. of the supermarket makes a state car or keeping chickens in the age ment of novelty in the context of the background of the world, so world. game the of background the against statement a makes travel In travel in MMORPGs, therefore, we can see a cultural activity of surprising richness. model which incorporates discovery and exploration) but also by social factors. This offers support for proposition Yee’s that player types might not be independent in the way that Bartle suggests 2006, p. (Yee, 772), and implies that player motivations are more typologies allow. our current complicated than this mundane and unnecessary, travel initially appears as something very presentation means that journeys undertaken in spite of this immediately banality notable are – whether the walking of the role quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------as Digi Level- 287 , 26(2), , [guide] , 1(1). [on 1(1). ,

Nick Webber Nick ed. Novato, rd https://fours . 3 Ratajik.net World of Warcraft World Volume 04 , [blog] 30 April. Avai April. 30 [blog] , Game Studies First Person. New Media as . New York: New York Uni York New York: New . http://www.mmorpg.com/ http://www.youtube.com/ Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why [Accessed 30 December 2011]. Terra Nova Terra . London: Berg. [Accessed 30 December 2011]. . Cambridge, MA.: MIT, pp. 118-130. pp. MIT, MA.: Cambridge, . . Cambridge, MA.: MIT, pp.123-141. . Cambridge, MA.: MIT, . [online] Available . at: [online] Available . Utrecht: Utrecht University, pp. 92-99. University, Utrecht . Utrecht: [Accessed 30 December 2011]. . MMORPG.com Discussion Forums [fo Forums Discussion MMORPG.com . [Accessed 30 December 2011]. http://www.ratajik.net/eq/members/ , [forum post] 13 September. Available , at: [forum post] Available 13 September. How large are MMO worlds now REALLY? A A MMO worlds now REALLY? are How large http://www.gamestudies.org/0101/eskeli Critical Studies in Media Communication Car Cultures The Hero with a Thousand Faces The Hero [Accessed 29 December 2011]. [Accessed 29 December foursquare Convergence Culture Convergence [Accessed 30 December 2011]. http://terranova.blogs.com/terra_nova/2011/04/ga Guildwars Guru [Accessed 28 March 2012]. [Accessed 28 March [video online] Available watch?v=kJA7LSJkLIY at: sizes world in comparison at: Available February. 4 post], rum discussion2.cfm/thread/306052 versity. 2008. eds. Rettberg J.W. & Corneliussen H.G. In: Text. Rich Play and Identity tal Culture, game? http://www.guildwars2guru.com/forum/ideas-for-making- easier-find-t21885.html ld of MMORPGs. CA.: New World Library. CA.: New World lable at: mification.html Wardrip-Fruin & P. Harrigan eds. 2004. eds. Harrigan P. & Wardrip-Fruin and Game Performance, Story, line] Available at: line] Available nen/ quare.com 2003. eds. Raessens J. & Copier M. In: place. took never that Proceedings Up Conference pp. 104-127. 20 April. Available at Available April. 20 Ceeb/qeynostofreeport.htm Maninscratch, 2010. WoW Cataclysm Goblin Kezan Cruising. D. ed., 2001. Miller, MMO.Maverick, 2011. Jenkins, H., 2006. H., Jenkins, and Lore: Creation 2008. World Krzywinska, T., Manekineko, 2011. Ideas for making it easier to findroleplayers in Foursquare, 2011. 2011. Foursquare, Frasca, G., 2003. Ludologists Love notes Stories, from a Too: debate – The New Wor Nova 2.0 A. H., 2009. Terra Gunkel, D. J. & Gunkel, N. In: Architecture. Narrative as Design Game 2004. Jenkins, H., Campbell, J., 2008. Gamification. 2011. E., Castronova, Freeport. to Qeynos from get to How 1999. Ceeb, Situation. Eskelinen, M., 2001. The Gaming quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

------288 . [blog] http:// http:// . In: H.G. [Accessed [Accessed

Nick Webber Nick Journal of Cy of Journal http://users. http://www. . Availa [guide] . Forums – World – World . Forums Volume Digital Culture, Play Digital Culture, 04 . [video online] Avai . [video online] MMOData.net [Accessed 29 March 29 March [Accessed . [online review] Avai . [online review] , [blog] 14 November. , [blog] 14 November. [Accessed 30 December World of Warcraft World , with chart at [blog post], 28 August. Avai Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why First Person. New Media as Story, First Person. New Media as Story, Massively [Accessed 30 December 2011]. ((RP)) Made Simple , 9, pp. 772-775. [Accessed 30 December 2011]. Massively . Cambridge, MA.: MIT, pp. 143-153. . Cambridge, MA.: MIT, . [video online] Available at: Available online] [video . [interview], 18 May. Available at: Available [interview], 18 May. W.O.W. = World of Walking = World W.O.W. http://massively.joystiq.com/2011/11/14/the- http://mmodata.net/ Sight-seeing Neriak one last time [Accessed 30 December 2011]. SW:TOR threads and fond memories threads SW:TOR . Cambridge, MA.: MIT, pp.19-38. . Cambridge, MA.: MIT, The Monk http://massively.joystiq.com/2010/08/28/the-daily- http://www.amazon.com/review/RM95GV2LVF4C6 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8YbSmkWFQJA GamespotUK http://rpmadesimple.com/the-rp-survival-guide/myth Performance, and Game lable at: lable at: Fruin Harrigan & eds. P. 2004. telenet.be/mmodata/Charts/genre.png 2012]. berPsychology and Behaviour Q&A. uk.gamespot.com/pc/rpg/world-of-warcraft-the-burning- ble at: busting-rp/ archive.org/details/EQ2_The_Monk at: lable [Accessed 30 December 2011]. at Available Corneliussen and Rettberg J.W. eds. 2008. and Identity of [forum Warcraft, post] at: 29 Available November. us.battle.net/wow/en/forum/topic/3595348419 30 December 2011]. at: Available daily-grind-do-you-banksit/ [Accessed 30 December 2011]. [Accessed 30 December MMO rite of passage? grind-rites-of-passage/ 2011]. Yee, N., 2006. Motivations of Play Yee, in Online Games. The Burning Crusade of J. Warcraft: & A., Park, 2006. Yu, World Sullivan, 2011. Mythbusting RP. Sullivan, Mythbusting 2011. RP. Rettberg, S., 2008. Corporate Ideology in Ideology Corporate 2008. S., Rettberg, Rohnalt, 2011. Do Royce, you B., banksit? 2011. Newlin, B., 2009. Newlin, B., 2009. Olivetti, J., 2010. The Daily Grind: What’s your most memorable a Game Theory of Game. In: N. Wardrip- C., 2004. Towards Pearce, Tan, P., 2005. P., Tan, 2010. Valcaron, Geel, Van I., 2012. Market Share by Genre. quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk 289

Nick Webber Nick Volume 04 Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why [Accessed 30 December 2011]. [Accessed 30 December crusade/news/6151428/world-of-warcraft-the-burning- crusade-qanda quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk 290

Nick Webber Nick Volume 04 Why walk when you can teleport? you can walk when Why quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier I sporene på Sherlock

Thessa Jensen Ph.d. og lektor ved Institut for Kommunikation ved Aalborg Univer- sitet, medlem af forskningsgruppen MÆRKK (Markedskommuni- kation og Æstetik, Reception i f.t. Kognition og Kultur), Center for Interaktiv Digitale Medier, og Værdibaseret forbrug.. Universitet.

Peter Vistisen Studieadjunkt ved Institut for Kommunikation ved Aalborg Univer- sitet. Er uddannet som Cand.it. indenfor Interaktive Digitale Medier, med forskningsinteresser inden for strategisk digital design. Er gene- relt optaget af de nye digitale mediers potential og samspil mellem medier, maskiner og mennesker i en samfundsmæssig kontekst.

Abstrakt I denne artikel gøres et forsøg på at kortlægge, hvordan en tv-serie spreder sig i de sociale medier. Med udgangspunkt i opdagelsesrej- sen som metafor og virtuel etnografi som metode tages BBCs mo- dernisering af Sherlock Holmes historien i serien “Sherlock” som bagvedliggende interesse for at starte rejsen. Formålet er at under- søge, hvordan sociale medier medierer mening, betydning og nyt indhold i forhold til tv-serien. Rejsen er til tider overraskende og bevæger sig fra mere velkendte områder ud i mindre kendte, altid med det formål at beskrive, forstå og fortolke de bevæggrunde, mennesker har med at bruge tid og energi på at udvide tv-seriens univers med egne produktioner og give feedback til andre men- neskers deltagelse i samme. En opdagelsesrejse med etnografien i rygsækken Den opdagelsesrejse, som denne artikel vil beskrive, vil tage læse- ren ud i de sociale mediers verden. Sociale medier defineres som netbaserede services, der giver mennesket mulighed for at

1. Konstruere en offentlig eller halvoffentlig profil indenfor et af- grænset system 2. Formulere en liste over profiler, som mennesket har en relation til

Volume 03 291 ------292

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse Se og gennemgå deres og andres lister over relationer indenfor relationer over lister andres og deres og gennemgå Se og Ellison, 2007:2) systemet (efter Boyd En anden form for etnografiskrejse er blevet foretaget af Camp Sherlock historie, én i udgangspunkt tages følgende det i der Når afnogle beskrive blot eller klarlægge at til metode anvendte Den 3. nografisk undersøgelse af et indhold, som mennesker skaber nye etno den med sammenlignes rejsen kan Delvis igennem. relationer grafiske beskrivelse af en bestemtbegivenhed, som Bateson (1958) beskriver i bogen “Naven”. Her søger Bateson at forklare de kul turelle bevæggrunde, som får en indfødt indonesisk stamme til at Naven ritualet, hvor mænd klæder sig som kvinder gennemføre skriver indledningsvist, så kanog kvinder som mænd. Som Bateson ritualet der se ikke bizart kender ud til for den den kulturiagttager, og historie, ritualet er udsprunget fra. Den beskrivelse og de infor ritualet på en me der skal gives, for at kunne forklare mationer, kan kun gives, hvis iagttage ningsfuld måde for udenforstående, ren bliver en del af kulturen og på denne måde kan sammenholde Se forskellene og lægge mærkedenne nye med sin gammelkendte. hvad meningen er. til lighederne - og qua dem forklare, kanhelten om historien hvordan undersøger, Campbell (1993). bell genfindes i forskellige kulturer verden Modsat over. Bateson, som tager udgangspunkt i ét ritual hos én gruppe tager mennesker, den hvordan undersøger, og historie én i udgangspunkt Campbell og kultur op igennem tiden. ne er blevet påvirket gennem historie serien fra BBC, kunne det umiddelbart ligne Campbells undersø af historien er og remedieringen Men spredningen gelsesmetode. kun den ene side af artiklens formål. Det andet formål er at se på, og kultur en skabe at til med er relationer menneskelige de hvordan fortælling omkring netop denne tv-serie, som igen kan forklare de tid, bruge at for grund til ligger der bevæggrunde, menneskelige og viden til energi at skabe og og formidle ny nye videnprodukter uden at få materielle goder i bytte. de sociale der medier, gør sig gældende på internettet i dag (anno 2012), kaldes virtuel etnografi og tager sit udgangspunkti Hines (2003) og Boyd (2008). Virtuel etnografi er kendetegnet ved, at de som skal undersøges, ikke er og de rum, der iagttages, mennesker, fuldstæn vælge at være kan iagttageren Ligeledes fysiske enheder. Den rejse, som læseren her begiver sig ud på, kan ses som en et quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------293

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse Derfor faldt valget på, at følge med hvor dér, det virkede “inte I denne artikel skelnes der ikke mellem internettet og de sociale For at kunne forstå de der mennesker, vælger at blive en ska Produktsemantikken som forklaring Den virtuelle etnografi i den metodiske rygsæk og lysten til at se, re og produkter skabe at til med være kan tv-serie given en hvordan er udgangspunktet for lationer, rejsen. Men der er en antagelse om, at forklaringen på nogle af der de vil fænomener, blive iagttaget og opdaget undervejs, vil kunne findes i konceptet omkring produkt kvaliteter, symbolske hvilke af, studiet som udlægges der semantik, medier som kulturelle det artefakter, vil sige, en enhed, der blev hvor et område, eller som af en given kultur, udviklet på grund kultur i sig selv bliver udviklet (Hine, 2003). sætter Teknologien tidspunkt grænserne for udviklingen af relatio på nuværende en given kultur hvordan nerne mellem mennesker og dermed for, kan udvikle sig – takt med ogmen teknologien udvikles ligeledes i at for har mennesket ønsker, og behov de end hurtigere gang nogle kunne kommunikere og skabe Ligeledes relationer. er det selve brugen af teknologien og dermed om de der sociale viser, medier, mennesket kan se en mening med denne form for skabelse af pro dukter og relationer. blev hurtigt klart, at væksten inden for brugerskabt materiale og proble det gør som hastighed, en i sker medier nye af udviklingen matisk at følge med. ressant”. Det vil sige, at rejsen på nettet blev bestemt af, hvorvidt den følte, rejsende at det ene det fremfor andet medie havde noget at byde på. Dette vil svare til at starte en opdagelsesrejse med det formål at lade sig guide af en lyst til se de spændende steder og såvel som afdække de historie og kultur, dykke ned i netop deres for denne. der foreligger semantiske forudsætninger, dig anonym og usynlig på nogle sociale medier, mens det andre mens det andre usynlig på nogle sociale medier, dig anonym og steder er nødvendigt at have en ogprofil give sig tilkende som fol undersøges. skal der fællesskabet, af del en blive kunne at for lower at nødvendigt været tider til det har medier, sociale de af del bende deltage i skabelsesprocessen. Dette påvirker selvfølgelig undersø muligt at noget tidspunkt været gelsen. Ligeledes har det ikke på skabe et egentligt overblik hvad over, der reelt findes af Sherlock medie. Det materiale på internettet eller i et givet socialt relateret quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------294

Volume 04 ”If inconvenient, come ”If inconvenient, come Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse (sms fra Sherlock til John, Study in Pink). Men BBCs nytolkning i form af “Sherlock” bringer historien ind historien bringer “Sherlock” af form i nytolkning BBCs Men Med seriens modernisering fulgte ligeledes en på nogle områder Produktsemantikken giver et designorienteret perspektiv, som som perspektiv, giver et designorienteret Produktsemantikken Hypotesen at er, tv-seriens fremstilling af en moderne Sherlock ord ikke ord zoome ind på en mobiltelefon eller en computerskærm. Publikum kan følge med i, sig, hvad foretager samtidigkarakteren med at beskedens indhold vises og på denne måde bliver til en rum af brug denne giver Ligeledes scene. givne den i “medspiller” skeskal det at uden optræde karakter en lade at for mulighed met ved hjælp af en En given skuespiller. tekst meddelelse afsluttes al Eksempelvis: initialer. tid med afsenderens – SH” anyway. i den moderne verden med internet, sociale medier og mobiltelefo og medier sociale internet, med verden moderne den i Hvert afsnit. 3 hver med sæsoner 2 af 2012) (anno består Serien ner. afsnit er på halvanden times sendetid. Serien blev sendt i juli og august 2010 på BBC, og er siden blevet solgt, oversat og udsendt i sæson anden bliver 2012 januar I over. verden lande række lang en begyndelsen af 2013. sæson forventes filmet i sendt og tredje af mediernes ind optageteknik og anvendelse eksperimenterende Således vises tekst til selve skuespillet på skærmen. hold i forhold beskeder i rummet i form af hvid skrift. Kameraet skal med andre duceren af indhold meget lavt. duceren en tv-serie rejsens begyndelse: Ved litterære portrætterede mest den afstand med er Holmes Sherlock figur op igennem film og tv-mediets udvikling (Guinness, 2011). I de seneste år kan de to amerikanske film “Sherlock Holmes” og nævnes som nytolknin Game of Shadows” A “Sherlock Holmes 2: ger af figuren, hvor den viktorianske tidsalder udgør baggrunds forsøg på at modernisere været historien. Der har gennem tiden figuren, bl.a. en mindre tv-serieaf Sherlock Holmes, somudspil Anden Verdenskrig. ledes under der opstår i designede artefakters interaktion med menneskets kog artefakters interaktion med der opstår i designede 1984). kontekst. (Krippendorf & Butter, nitive og sociale for mening giver forskellige udtryksformer hvordan undersøger, mennesket, samt giver mulighed for at blive egen producent af vi semantik. af et artefakts dereudviklinger produkt tv-seriens af eksplicitering en skabe at til med er Holmes for aktiv participation og pro semantik og dermed sætter tærsklen quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------295

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa - Scandal in Bohemia, Conan Doyle, Conan Bohemia, in Scandal - - The Great Game, 1. sæson, 3. afsnit 3. sæson, 1. Game, Great The - En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse Endelig er der ikke tvivl om, at serien er en Sherlock Holmes for Endelig er der ikke tvivl om, at serien Udover selve den teknologiske og historiske modernisering har teknologiske og historiske modernisering Udover selve den I am lost without my Boswell.” lost without my blogger.” I am moderniseringen tro overfor oplægget, ligesom flere af dialogerne overfor oplægget, ligesom flere moderniseringen tro fra Conan Doyles oprindelige tekster. er hentet næsten ordret “ 1998:120 “ 2010 publikum kan holdes interesseret i de kommende afsnit trods de vises. hvormed de tidsintervaller, store at de bliver nødt til at tælling. være Forfatterne udtaler således selv, for at moderniserin overfor Conan Doyles oprindelige historier tro gen kan lade sig gøre og publikum vil acceptere den. Det betyder uden ændringer, overtages ikke, at historiernes plot og mordgåde og Mark Gatiss, hovedforfatter Steven Moffat modsat, idet snarere ne bag og medproducenter på serien, er kendt for at udvikle over raskende historier – bl.a. til Who. tv-serien Men Dr. samspillet mel trods er på, løses gåderne måden, samt hovedpersoner, to de lem overvejelser med hensyn til personernes seksuelle orientering. For restau en i bl.a. diskussion denne indarbejder tv-serien bag fatterne ogJohn mellem diskuteres kæreste-problematikken hvor rantscene, Sherlock, som er på fornavn i tv-serien, samt gennem John Watsons i serien hen karakterer når andre gentagne udsagn: “I am not gay” efter ord netop dette. Med andre tyder til, at han måske kunne være relation, denne omkring dobbelttydighed en med publikum lades samtidig med at den i talesættes, hvorved en åben fortolkning af det vil Som muliggøres. produktsemantik dette fortælleelements vise sig, så åbnes der med dette en ladeport ind i et område for so seriensat for, betydning stor forholdsvis have kan som medier, ciale serien et andet særkende: manuskriptforfatterne lægger hovedvæg manuskriptforfatterne lægger serien et andet særkende: Sher mellem de to hovedpersoner, af relationen ten på udviklingen første afsnit en Således er det John Watson. lock Holmes og Doktor Study A historie, Holmes allerførste Sherlock den af genfortolkning in Scarlet (Conan Doyle,1998 - oprindelig 1887), Study med A titlen in Pink, hvor de to hovedpersoner møder hinanden for første gang. siden de første har allerede Relationen mellem de to hovedpersoner historier blev skrevet af Conan Doyle været genstand for en række quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------/. 296

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse http://www.thescienceofdeduction.co.uk den faktiske verden, her udtrykt i BBCs hjem BBCs i udtrykt her verden, faktiske den den fiktive verden, som BBC har kontrol over. over. som BBC har kontrol den fiktive verden, Institution-faktisk: Institution-fiktiv: Udgangspunkt er en model i fire overordnede med områder, meside, som BBC har fuld kontrol over og som indeholder oplys indeholder og som over kontrol har fuld BBC som meside, med mere. interviews ninger som sendetider, len, hvorom de forskellige udtryk, remedieringer og informationer de forskellige udtryk, remedieringer len, hvorom af: områder udgøres overordnede fire De koncentreres. Nemlig de forskellige blogs, som er tilknyttet serien og dermed gi tv-serie. til den oplevede ver en ekstra dimension i forhold skal der nu forsøges en kortlægning af, hvordan Sherlock breder sig breder Sherlock hvordan af, kortlægning en forsøges nu der skal på internettet. Som fora er der de officielle og institutionelle ram fra BBCs side af. Indholdet som er underlagt den fulde kontrol mer, der er på serien. Indholdet er sta er givet fra BBC og de forfattere, opdateringnogen sker afslutning ikke en sæsons efter der tisk, idet af materialet, før den nye sæson starter igen. Indholdet på BBCs interviews, til hensyn med opdateret bliver hjemmeside Sherlock til, serien har vundet eller er nomineret eventuelle priser, trailere, og deslige. Selve historien bliver ikke videreudviklet. tentpolen i midten. I dette tilfælde udgør “Sherlock” serien teltpæ kan vise. Hvad der eksempelvis kun er et skævt smil i tv-serien, ud tv-serien, i smil skævt et er kun eksempelvis der Hvad vise. kan vides via bloggen til en større psykologisk og menneskelig dybde, hvor karaktertræk og relationer ekspliciteres. Ligeledes bliver flere af de cases, som omtales kort i serien, uddybet yderligere på de to blogs. Derudover findes alle de indlæg som og omta oplysninger, seriens selve med sammen hænger indholdet så tv-serien, selve i les indhold og skaber en meningsfuld relation tv-seriensmellem hhv. og web-siderne som platforme. En første kortlægning og inddeling Med udgangspunkt i tentpole begrebet fra Davidson et al. (2010) Fra tv-mediet til hjemmesiden tv-mediet til Fra Sherlocksblog, egen deres især hver har hovedpersoner Tv-seriens her: findes kan blog at den Umiddelbart til er der intet på selve bloggen, der indikerer, kommer hjemmeside BBCs til Henvisningen person. fiktiv en hører information”, “More punktet under blogsites begge på allernederst hvor linket så fører til BBCs hjemmeside for tv-serien. Begge blogs John beskriver Således information. yderligere tv-serien tilfører tv-serien end måde personlig mere en på oplevelser og følelser sine quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------297

Volume 04 Så rejsen fortsætter fortsætter rejsen Så Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa @Markgatiss. og En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse @steven_moffat , som er et samarbejde mellem flere Twitterprofiler Twitterprofiler , som er et samarbejde mellem flere den faktiske verden, som brugerne har kontrol over. over. kontrol har brugerne som verden, faktiske den Området for brugernes operationalisering af produkt af operationalisering brugernes for Området Med ovenstående kortlægning som udgangspunkt, skal vi nu forMed ovenstående kortlægning som Disse fire med områder, tentpolen som samlende instans i mid Folk-faktisk: Folk-fiktiv: Således findes der: @sherlockology omkring bl.a. en hjemmeside, der indeholder informationer om, hvor serien filmes henne, hvad skuespillerne er i gang med - og oplysninger omkring Sherlock-universet i det hele taget. Der bli anmeldelser skuespillere, involverede med interviews ver foretaget af film og seriens forskellige afsnit. der De emner, tweetes om, har og folkestyrede lag. og folkestyrede ved løbende at udfolde rejse, modellens indhold,alvor starte vores mellem de forskellige elementer. samt relationen Twitter hjemmeside til Fra at afslører, Sherlock om hjemmeside BBCs af gennemlæsning En de to hovedforfattere bag serien, Moffat og Gatiss, hver har en Twitterprofil: Sherlock til, hvordan i forhold med en undersøgelse af Twitter derude. kan spores ten udspænder det tværmedielle univers, der tilsammen gør Sher ten udspænder det tværmedielle lock til er et det transmedia her Vigtigt univers at (Jenkins 2011). er det tv-serien, ikke dets bare blogs hvordan og forfat pointere, ternes brug der af udgør sociale det medier, samlede tværmedielle fan eksempelvis af form i indhold brugerskabte det at men univers, net samlede det optegne til med er også fanfiction og communities tentpole og dets øvrige medie mellem Sherlocks værk af relationer, kortlægningen også en hypo indikerer samme grund Af platforme. for det tværmedielle univers ikke tese om, at produktsemantikken mellem det institutionelle er fast, men er i en konstant forhandling Dette er navnligt såvel der er opstået online, de fan communities, pro egne personlige og manuskriptforfatternes som skuespillere filer på de sociale hvormedier, der kommunikeres og teases om fra BBC. henvisning eller kontrol direkte kring serien, uden mo og adapteres vokabular semantiske seriens hvor semantikken, herun – produktioner brugergenerede nye til brugerne af dificeres flash mobs. der video-mashups, fanfiction og quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------298

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse , igen et samarbejde mellem flere Twitterprofiler, som Twitterprofiler, flere mellem samarbejde et igen , Tumblr virker på en måde som et samlingspunkt for vidt forskel vidt for samlingspunkt et som måde en på virker Tumblr har Tumblr en helt anden vinkel på Sherlock. Her bliver der skabt der bliver Her Sherlock. på vinkel anden helt en Tumblr har nyt materiale til selve historien omkring Sherlock. Især tegninger, photoshoppede billeder kaldet fanart bliver lagt op på akvareller, de forskellige blogs og reblogget. lige tilgange til fanfællesskabet omkring Sherlock: udover selve lyd billeder, indlæg, kopieret der bliver Tumblr, på blogindlæggene og videoklip fra andre steder på nettet. Materialet bliver distribue tioner om filmen, samtidig med, at der kunne diskuteres forskellige diskuteres kunne der at med, samtidig filmen, om tioner emner undervejs. Hashtagget sørgede at for, en follower kan fore sin måde fuldt ud koncentrere tage en søgning på dette og på den tidslinie om netop denne film. Twitter drives især @sherlockology at er, profiler to de mellem Forskellen drives af mænd. mens @TheDiogenes af kvinder, brugerskabte materiale Reblogging af alverdens Tumblr: sig forholder til den fysiske overordnet ver profiler Hvor Twitter liv, deres med forbindelse i events oplevelser, om fortæller og den film, idéerne bag, samt mere nicheprægede fortolkninger, som ek film, idéerne bag, samt nicheprægede mere fortolkninger, sempelvis en Holmes musical. @TheDiogenes havde i 2011 flere fælles arrangementerTwit på hvor followers til blev at opfordret deltage i ter, en afstemning om, mulige, der skulle ses på ud af tre hvilken Sherlock Holmes tv-film en kopi af havde Alle interesserede tid på en given dato. samme filmen som klar, så startede på det angivne tidspunkt. Når filmen var i gang, tweetede en eller flere om filmens indhold, baggrund, kunne de, ord Med andre med mere. skuespillerne, producenterne der fulgte med på hashtagget #221b får en række ekstra informa med den udviderfaktiske at Profilen ikkeverden gøre. selve histo rien, men fortæller og informerer om de begivenheder, der finder sted omkring serien. @TheDiogenes detil forhold i undersøgende og analyserende sig forholder især Holmes historien gennem ti forskellige fortolkninger af Sherlock dens løb. Hjemmesiden, der er tilknyttet profilen, giver en række oplysninger omkring tilblivelsen af forskellige Sherlock Holmes quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------299

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse Brugerne kan tale sammen to og to gennem video. Omegle finderOmegle video. gennem to og to sammen tale kan Brugerne en som partner, samtalen kan begynde med. Der opfordres fra bliver samtalen i noget hvis videre, klikker man at til, side mediets at man ikke forpligter sig i selve samta ubehageligt. Det betyder, i et samtalen kørende sig eller holde lesituationen til at præsentere bestemt stykke tid. Der er heller ingen nødvendighed for at af “farvel”. uden det almindelige slutte samtalen - det kan gøres Endelig dukker der noget helt uventet op: udskrifter fra samtalerEndelig dukker der noget helt uventet ProfilerneTumblr på virker ved første øjekast noget yngre end Den erotiske del af materialet består især af billeder og tegnin Det er på Tumblr vores rejse begynder at tage en ny drejning: fra begynder at tage en ny drejning: rejse vores Det er på Tumblr 1. se til at udvide historieuniverset. på web-sitet omegle.com. En såkaldt hvor chat-roulette, to fremme Sitetidentitet. deres skulle afsløre mødes og samtale uden at de kan brugere antal maksimale det som 25.000 omkring lille, forholdsvis er hvor om, idé en os giver det fordi interessant, er sitet Men samtidig. for Sherlock er blevet så populær på nettet. Derfor tager vi en kort afstikker til Omegle.com, for bagefter at vende tilbage til Tumblr. to Strangers Talk Omegle.com: forskellige måder: på tre som samtale forum Omegle fungerer kommer frem i tidslinjen. kommer frem den ser ud til at udgøre og enkelte drenge Teenagepiger på Twitter. der holder til i Sherlock fanfællesskabet. største del af gruppen, som viser ger, kys, kram og samlejestillinger mellem hovedperso Ligeledes er der en del materiale,nerne i serien, Sherlock og John. som bearbejder billeder fra selve serien, giver dem nyt indhold og billederne remedierer ind i en anden kontekst. ta Brugergruppen aspekter, ger altså seriens kendte vokabular af produktsemantiske såsom påklædning personernes deres mm., retorik, og bruger dis ret på en sådan måde, at det kan være svært, at finde originalkilden finde at svært, være kan det at måde, sådan en på ret tidsangi med ikke Tumblr arbejder Twitter til modsætning I det. til i ens tidslinje. der kommer frem velser på de indlæg, nuvi er serien, Sherlock omkring fakta af præget var der univers, et på vej ind i et område, hvor Ogfiktionen ikke tager nok over. med det: i løbet af kort tid bliver det tydeligt, at det ikke er Sherlocks der deduktioner, er i Det højsædet er på en Tumblr. meget direkte og tydelig erotisk, til tider pornografisk tone i det materiale, der quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 300

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse Sex i enhver form og afart Sherlock rollespil Brugerne kan skrive sammen. Her foregår samtalen via tekst, samtalen kan skrive sammen. Her foregår Brugerne om, at man videochatten er der ingen krav men ligesom med samtalen på en høflig måde. sig eller afslutte skal præsentere Endelig kan en tredje part skrive et spørgsmål og lade to frem mede skrive sammen deltager om ikke det. i Tredjeparten sam den udvikler sig. De to fremmede på, hvordan talen, men kan se som på denne sig til og som de kan forholde har et spørgsmål, af samtalen den indledende del med til at gøre måde kan være lidt nemmere. Det betyder, at to fremmede, som Det kender betyder, serien, ikke behøver at Forsøget på at samtale viser, at Omegles samtaler i hovedsagen i samtaler Omegles at viser, samtale at på Forsøget 1. 2. 2. 3. I og med flere Omegle samtaler i form af rollespil var dukket op på op dukket var rollespil af form i samtaler Omegle flere med og I havde dette Tumblr, givet os en idé om, at der måtte være en del rollespil. til medie dette benyttede faktisk som Omegle, på brugere tidlige den kraft i Sherlock, at er, forbindelse den i interessante Det bud klart meget et giver produktsemantik, eksplicitte beskrevne re på, hvordan et sådan skriftligt rollespil kan ske: ved at bruge sms beskederne som en ekstra skuespiller på skærmen, kan publikum skriftlige me mediet på til andre denne måde at håndtere overføre dier, som eksempelvis Omegle. Hvis en bruger på Omegle stiller et spørgsmål i stil med: “John, put the kettle on. I’ll be home in 5 minutes. - SH”, så vil brugerne fra Sherlock fanfællesskabet vide, SH er Sherlock Holmes. De semantiske og Watson er John at John mønstre, der giver samtalen en meningsfuld form, findes således markører intertekstuelle som men samtalen, Omegle i direkte ikke som er kendt fra BBC serien. stilarter, til situationer og retoriske forklare eller beskrive, hvilket univers, de er i. Begge vil med det samme kunne tage fat i selve Og rollespillet. den første sætning gi denmens Sherlock, spille skal sandsynligvis to de af ene den at ver, anden har frit valg. Deltagelsen i denne form for samtale føles grænseoverskridende Deltagelsen i denne form for samtale ind at komme forsøg, lykkedes det Efter et par indledende os. for at skabe samtaler. i universet og det lykkedes endda om to ting: sig drejer quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------301 http://

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa kan udbredes yderligere eller al En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse

#believeinsherlock Vores umiddelbare bud Vores på, hvorfor folk deltager i denne bevæ Og med dette er vi ved ind at i rejse som en har verden, eksiste På Twitter giver en søgning på hashtagget #believeinsherlock en #believeinsherlock hashtagget på søgning en giver Twitter På På nuværende tidspunkt er bloggen vokset til 116 sider, hvor ret ret siden Sherlock Holmes historierne blev skrevet for første gang Holmes som et af nok netop havde Sherlock – og som interessant videre at om ønsket fanfiction, interesse: deres for emner første de af. udvikle den historie, som publikum er blevet fascineret - en kvindesag Fanfiction så er nettet og udenfor, steder på I modsætning til så mange andre fanfiction området domineret af Og kvinder. har været det siden i weekenden. er det aner ord gelse er medlemskabet af et fællesskab. Med andre medier og mennesker på de forskellige sociale kendelsen fra andre ikke mindst anerkendelsen fra forfatterne og producenterne bag mulighe Anerkendelsen, retning. denne i skub et giver som serien, grundlagt der har de mennesker, med at indgå i en relation den for som de folk historier føler og betyder karakterer, noget for dem, er at på energi og tid bruge at til folk driver der ønsker, største de af et skabe nyt indhold på de sociale medier. lerede lerede har bredt sig. Et eksempel på dette kan findes her: www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q0mnC3F7h5E eller ugen af løbet i er det om efter alt time, halve hver ca. tweet ny budskabet. Ikke nok med det, så bliver der med jævne mellemrum hvor folk fra storbyer indkaldt verden over til møder via Tumblr, i netop de plakater med mere til at mødes for at fordele opfordrer res storby (eksempler er fra Hamborg og Berlin). Disse møder ­ You På steder. forskellige nettet på ud bliver lagt og dokumenteret tube er der startet en konkurrence om at lave en video, der viser, tagget hvordan Tumblr og det, at starte at og det, Tumblr bevægelse en verdensomspændende påvist Sherlock af afsnit sidste foreløbigt blev 2012 januar 15. Den BBC. The Reichenbach Fall ender med, at Sherlock tilsyneladende svindler. en værende som afsløret bliver han fordi selvmord, begår starter bloggen: believeinsherlock.tumblr.com Den 16. januar 2012 viser, der tekster, eller billeder 10 og 5 mellem indeholder side hver og spreder op udfordringen tager folk i den fysiske verden hvordan quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - ­ - - - - 302

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse Mens 1970‘ernes fanfiction var andre hensat til fjerne planeter, denne i co-creator, være deltage, at for tærsklen at dette, viser Igen der Tages udgangspunkt i fanfiction.net, der viser en oversigt Ude og hjem igen - Sherlock som eksempel på en tværmediel dynamik nyt af skabelsen men afslutning, sin sig nærmer Rejseberetningen materiale og nye måder at bruge de sociale medier på vil fort begrebet for begrebet alvor fandt indpas i 1970‘erne i forbindelse med det Kirk Captain mellem forholdet af fascination publikums kvindelige Fanfic 2006:99). (Woledge, Trek Star i hovedkaraktererne Spock, og tion blev på den tid udgivet i små som hæfter, blev sendt til inter esserede. Allerede dengang var omdrejningspunktet en form for at vælger at kalde intimatopia for intimitet, som Woledge erotisk el pornografi ren fra fanfiction for type denne af indholdet adskille ler erotik. Forholdet mellem to mænd er hovedomdrejningspunkt. der på ingen måde er platonisk, men hvor sex og erotik Et forhold, opstår i forbindelse med den nærhed og fortrolighed, de to karak relation. i deres opnår terer især og fanfiction, nutidens kan kulturer, eksotiske eller tidsaldre tage skulle at uden London nutidens i sig boltre fanfiction, Sherlock hensyn til det tabubelagte emne om sex mellem to mænd. I selve tv-serien tages emnet op Samtidig med arbejder en serienvis ironi. venskab nære mændenes gennem opstår der fortrolighed, den med og kendskab til hinanden. for Historien lægger op til, at relationen lav. sammenhæng er uhyre klares og uddybes ved at tilbyde en eksplicit produktsemantik, der kunpublikum ser tv-serien selve I felter. tomme har også imidlertid glimt af denne relation, publikum skal selv tænke sig til, hvordan ertanker Disse stadie. dette til nået er mænd to de mellem forholdet netop, hvad fanfiction arbejder med. Hvordan enrelation udvikles og vedligeholdes. Og Sherlock er ingen undtagelse for dette. er indlæg, skrevne antal til forhold i tv-serier populære mest de over Sherlock på en 18. plads (29. marts 2012) med 13.088 indlæg. Tv-se - rierne, der ligger foran Sherlock har det tilfælles, at de alle har eksi steret i længere tid og består af langt flere afsnit, som eksempelvis indeholder ord andre Med indlæg. 67.262 med pladsen 1. på Glee forholde kan publikum kvindelige det som noget, serien Sherlock sig til (Busse og Hellekson, 2006:17). quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------303

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse Ved at Ved investere sine egne følelser i skabelsen af video historier, produk egne af skabelsen i energi og tid følelser, investere at Ved Og så kunne men og rejsen som historien vi slutte har her, set, Rejsen viser, Rejsen at viser, sociale medier byder på et hav af muligheder i gangspunkt i #believeinsherlock (Teletubby101). klip, billeder som med tager mere, udgangspunkt i den oprindelige historie, så skabes der en ny retorisk situation: pathos tager over, måde denne på bliver og engageret følelsesmæssigt bliver co-creator en loyal fan af den oprindelige historie. der skabes produktioner, folks andre til hjælp og kommentering ter, en videre bearbejdelse af den. Ser vi “subcreation” på be Tolkiens greb, kan dette netop bruges til at forklare, hvad der rent faktisk sker i forhold til ændringen fra “publikum” til “co-creator”, med- end sus går et skridt videre påpeger at subcreation Tolkien skaber. pub at kræver, Sub-creation 1989:45). (Tolkien, disbelief of pension publikum eller læseren At universet. af medskabere til bliver likum tror så meget på historien, at den overtages og bliver relevant i det Denne forandring kan daglige bl.a. liv. ses i #believeinsherlock be vægelsen, som flytter detfiktive univers ud i det faktiske univers har Således univers. fiktive det til tilbage – fanfiction gennem - og for eksempel Teletubby101profilen skrevet fanfiction med ud gennemgående model med yderligere et forklaringsforslag. Figuren et forklaringsforslag. Figuren gennemgående model med yderligere officielle tilknyttede de og historien Sherlock selve hvordan viser, blogs er med til at give publikum en mulighed for at gennemføre publi at sige, vil det 1817:174), (Coleridge, disbelief” of “suspension på historien og leve sig ind i den. Den retoriske kum vælger at tro situation, den “overtalelse”, der skal finde sted i denne sammen hæng, skabes både gennem selve historiens indhold og form, men ethos. Hvis dette ethos er givet og ligeledes gennem producentens på historien, kan indlevelse finde sted. publikum tror sker der i forbindelse med Sherlock en overtagelse af historien og sætte i lang tid fremover. Ovenstående beretning viser, at sociale Ovenstående viser, beretning sætte i lang tid fremover. mediers brug og målgruppe varierer meget fra medie til medie. Omegle er nærmest blevet overtaget af Sherlock-fans, Tumblr huser især de yngre teenagepiger og fanfiction området er i faste kvindehænder. gennem og aktiveres mennesker kan engageres hvordan til, forhold derforklaringer mulige hvilke vise, at på prøvet har Vi internettet. vores udfylde at med afslutte nu vil og engagement dette bag ligger quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 304

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse den tredje retoriske situation: logos tager over. Produktet bliver vist bliver Produktet over. tager logos situation: retoriske tredje den og frem er med til at skabe ethos yderligere for den oprindelige hi storie. Og publikum går fra Fordi co-creator folk til erstakeholder. har blevet de medproducenter, nu noget at tabe i forhold til, hvor ethos ved tilbage er igen vi Hvorfor andre. af opfattes historien dan publikum, oprindelige det er som stakeholderen, vil nu situationen: overbevise det nye publikum om, at det her er en rigtig god histo rie. Cirklen er sluttet. quarter

academic tværs af platforme, mod selv at engagere og involvere sig, for til sidst at stå som stakeholders og involvere tværs af platforme, mod selv at engagere for universets (og dermed tv-seriens) fortsatte eksistens. Den endelige opsætning af den tværmedielle kortlægning af Sherlock universet, hvor vi gen vi hvor universet, Sherlock kortlægning af tværmedielle den endelige opsætning af Den på universet acceptere at ved proces deres i følger seerne rejse den følge kan rejse vores nem

kvarter akademisk - - - - 305 http://

Volume 04 Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse a&printsec=frontcover&output=reader&pg=GBS.PP1 Communities in the Age of the Internet, mcfarland, North Age of the Internet, mcfarland, North Communities in the Carolina London na Press, cal Sketches of my Literary Life and Opinions, e-bog: Definition, and History, Scholarship, i Journal of Computer- Article 11 Mediated Communication, 13 (1), Publisher: 1, Issue: 35, Volume: Method, About Conversations Sage, Pages: 26-32 books.google.dk/books/reader?id=QHdaAAAAMAAJ&hl= d Tv-seriens eksplicitte produktsemantik lægger op til, at tærsklenat til, op lægger produktsemantik eksplicitte Tv-seriens der når anerkender, og Twitter på er forfatterne og Producenter de Trods lange ventetider med hensyn til nye afsnit, har forfat terne været gode til at sende billeder og tekster ud via Twitter og Twitter via ud tekster og billeder sende at til gode været terne tale om” og dermed“noget at er der at for, den måde sørget på engagement. fanfællesskabets drive og interessen fastholde både for tværmediel deltagelse og involvering via internettet er meget og involvering via internettet for tværmediel deltagelse lav. arrangementer. og tid på ovenfor nævnte energi bruges Campbell, Josepch, 1993, The Hero With a Thousand Faces, Fonta Faces, Thousand a With Hero The 1993, Josepch, Campbell, Biographi Or, Literatia, Biographia 1817, Taylor, Samuel Coleridge, Referencer Californien 1958, Naven, 2. udgave, Stanford, Bateson, Gregory, Boyd, Danah, og Ellison, Nicole B., 2007, Social Network Sites: Hine, i Internet Inquiry Response to Christine A Boyd, Danah, 2008, Busse, Kristina og Hellekson, Karen, 2006, Fan Fiction and Fan Gennem sine tværmedielle relationers særlige retoriske struktur, struktur, særlige retoriske Gennem sine tværmedielle relationers anerkender seerne først tv-seriens og dennes semantik ved at give ethos, dernæst involverer seerne sig personligt som co-creators producen side med seriens side om står de med pathos og endeligt stakeholders for et Sherlock univers, der på tværs af ter om at være platforme, brugergruppe og er involveringsgrader, blevet udvidet fænomen. mediekulturelt til et stadig voksende og dynamisk Tv-serien Sherlock har med andre ord en række punkter, som kan som punkter, række en ord andre med har Sherlock Tv-serien en del af fascinationen: forklare • • • quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 306 , fanfic ,

, MIT Press Volume 04 , IP, 2011, Business Horizons, Business 2011, IP, , Thessa Jensen and Peter Vistisen and Peter Jensen Thessa McCarthy En opdagelsesrejse ud i de sociale medier i de sociale ud En opdagelsesrejse Seesmic Social Media Management , http://archiveofourown.org/works/326315 http://henryjenkins.org/2011/08/defining_transme artikel: dia_further_re.html Elsevier Things), (Of Sense Making Is Design That Proposition the on or pp. 9-39 5, No. 2 (Spring, 1989), Design Issues Vol. Sherlock Holmes, Wordsworth Editions, Hertfordshire Wordsworth Sherlock Holmes, Media Experi Integrated Art of Creating to the Introduction Commons Creative ences, ETC Press, London Slash and the Mainstream, i Karen Hellekson og Kristina Busse, Hellekson og Kristina i Karen Slash and the Mainstream, Age of the Internet, in the Fan Fiction and Fan Communities mcfarland, North Carolina på #believeinsherlock tion historie baseret Exploring the Symbolic Qualities of Form, University of Penn of University Form, of Qualities Symbolic the Exploring sylvania Scholarly Commons Woledge, Elizabeth, 2006, Intimatopia: Genre Intersections Between Intersections Genre Intimatopia: 2006, Elizabeth, Woledge, Blog og Web-sites: Teletubby101: www.seesmic.com Kietzmann, JH, Hermkens K, Krippendorff, Klaus, 1989, On the Essential Contexts of Artifacts Reinhardt, 1984, Krippendorff, Klaus, Product Semantics: Butter, Allen and Unwin, UK and Leaf, George J. R. R., 1989, Tree Tolkien, Conan Doyle, Sir Arthur, Conan Doyle, 1998, The Sir Arthur, Original Illustrated ‘Strand’ Davidson, Drew et al., 2010, Cross-Media Communications: An York New Bantam Books, 2011, 2012, Records Guiness World Hine, Christine, 2003,Virtual Ethnography, Sage Publications, Online Reflections, Further - 202 Transmedia 2011, Henry, Jenkins, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk quarter

academic

Aalborg Universitet kvarter akademisktidsskrift for humanistisk forskning

Spiritual journeys akademiskkvarter Volume 04 • 2012 academic quarter

Identification-of-self through a yoga-travel-spirit nexus

Patrick J. Holladay Ph.D. is Assistant Professor at Department of Rec- reation, Sport and Tourism Management, Universi- ty of St. Francis, 500 Wilcox St., Joliet, IL 60435

Lauren M. Ponder Department of Parks, Recreation & Tourism Man- agement, Clemson University, Clemson, SC, USA.

Abstract This article examines a heuristic paradigm of a yoga-spirit-travel nexus and its agency on the identification-of-self. In the ancient San- skrit yoga means union or yoke. Yoga practice may act as a yoking or linking element between self-identity and spiritual development such that yoga travel may lead to the enhancement of self-identity for the yogi traveler. Conceptually, the practice of yoga acts as a cata- lyst for travel to partake in foreign yoga experiences. Both during travel and in the travel destination, the engaged spiritual capital via yoga may act as an uplifiting transformative agent for identity for- mation. We conclude that by linking self-identification to a yoga- travel-spirit nexus a foundation of self-enlightenment may emerge.

Spiritual motivation has been noted as a reason for adopting a yoga practice and for yoga travel (Lehto et al. 2006). There seems to be a therapeutic ability of a yoga-place connection (as through a travel destination) to foster spiritual purity (Hoyez, 2007), disrupt the mundane and allow in the ‘new’ (Lea, 2008). Yoga, and its intimate partner meditation, may allow individuals to achieve self-reali- zation, purification and intrinsic feelings of love (Aggarwal et al. 2008). Yoga landscapes such as Rishikesh, India, Yogaville, USA (the creation of yoga guru Swami Satchidananda), and La Mercy,

Volume 04 308 - - - - - , the 309

Yoga Sutras Yoga Volume 04 , an ancient treatise on , an ancient treatise This induced stillness and

’ such as outllined in some (Chatterjee & Datta, 1939) or1939) Datta, & (Chatterjee = limb). This path was developed Yoga Sutras Yoga , the end-point of the yoga journey yoga the of end-point the , Absolute ashtanga Patrick J. Holladay and Lauren M. Ponder Lauren and J. Holladay Patrick anga samhadi = eight, Identification-of-self through a yoga-travel-spirit nexus yoga-travel-spirit a through Identification-of-self ashta or a notion of an ’ (e.g. Satchidnanada, 1990). We suggest that (e.g. by Satchidnanada, marrying 1990). We totality Yoga is guided by Yoga eight principles. In Patanjali’s The descriptions laid out in this article should not be confused This article examines the archetype of a yoga-spirit-travel nexus yoga-spirit-travel a of archetype the examines article This wards wards an object of attention (Lee, 2004). state new a awareness, higher achieving about is energy of direction of mind or “mindfulness” (Freidberg, 2009; Langer 1989). This mindfulness may facilitate stronger connections between individu als and place (Langer & Moldoveanu, 2000). as described is path eightfold “eight limbs” ( Rather, the Rather, thoughts here are based on a philosophy of principles expounded upon in Patanjali’s Raja Yoga self- of foundation a nexus yoga-travel-spirit a to self-identification enlightenment may emerge. Yoga from the Yoga, Sanskrit, means union or yoke (Joshi, is1965). Yoga an ancient form of spiritual self-discipline that promotes enlight enment and ultimately to fully directed are the consciousness is stilled and energies where and its agency on the identification-of-self. Consideration is given spir of evolvement the to identification-of-self melding whether to ituality through yoga tourism might influence personal dynamics through positively reinforcing reciprocal feedbacks of spirit. This heuristic focuses on the multi-faceted nature of this phenomenon self of boundaries overcoming by transformed are travelers yogi as versus non-self by linking self-identification to spiritual capital yoga practice and travel. through with forms of religion like Buddhism or Hinduism (e.g. Brodd, 2003). South Africa are recognized by some as spiritual places (Hoyez, to experiential in in meaningful travel leading 2007). Engagement implications could have positive processes transformative trinsic for the development-of-self through a tourism product (Gelter, 2010), which in yoga this journey example may is A possiblyyoga. integrate the mind, the body and the spirit (Kelly & Smith, 2009; Smith, 2003) leading to a causatum of values-laden transformation et al., 2011). in self (Pritchard quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - - 310

Aggarwal et is connected is connected

spirituality may be Volume “ 04 samadhi experiences may pro . In a case study of Ma Raja, Karma, Bhakti, Jnana,Raja, Karma, Bhakti, is supported by meditative practicesmeditative by supported is Patrick J. Holladay and Lauren M. Ponder Lauren and J. Holladay Patrick and its goal of Spiritual travel samadhi Raja Yoga Identification-of-self through a yoga-travel-spirit nexus yoga-travel-spirit a through Identification-of-self ). While the yogin is encouraged to explore all six is encouraged to explore ). While the yogin Hatha and Spirituality often describes what individuals feel to be missing in The development of is sought between people, ‘this world’ and specific places, such as within it.” the countryside, ( humility and oneness wellness, of state healthy a mote al. 2008; 2006a; 2010) Smith Wilson, & Kelly, creative their with consociate to able were pilgrims Peru Picchu, chu and with the sustaining power of with nature reconnect energies, the ancient Inca civilization (Raj & Morpeth, 2007). More than sim people or landscape, the ply seeking to gaze at an authentic culture, or existential authenticity (Steiner & 2006). Reisinger, It has been suggested that society contemporary has Western come to be de fined by a ‘spiritualWoodhead,revolution’ 2005). (Heelas & There has been a shift in the sacred landscape and a search for spiritual nourishment through the pursuit of a variety of beliefs and practic 2004). Age (Drury, es, such as holism, fen shui, yoga, or New their lives rather than explicitily defining what is hoped for (Brown 1998). Sharpley & Jepsen (2010, p. 55) stated, thought of simply as a connection between the self and the ‘this exists or world’, implying that a spiritual or emotional relationship and the world allowing action to be more effective (Combs, 2002). all Virtually forms of meditation lead to a more calm and objective mental, emotional and spiritual poise (e.g. Arambula et al., 2001; 2008). al. et Waelde 2010; Kanojia, 2006; al., et Ditto 2008; al., et Butler of yoga, including meditation,Thus, it would seem that the practice leads in the direction of integral consciousness of identification-of- self (Bose, 2011). Spirituality and travel that people seek authentic life generates uncertainty such Modern fragmented personal identity experiences as a means of revitalizing most closely to spirituality (Mehta & Mehta, 1990).most closely to spirituality (Kabat- self of understanding the build to help may that yoga within Zinn, 2006). Meditation opens clearer understanding of individuals to infuse balance between the polarities of strength and compassion and strength of polarities the between balance infuse to within an individual (Chopra & Simon, 2004). In support of the eight limbs are the six branches of yoga ( Tantra, branches of yoga, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk - - - - 311

Volume 04 Patrick J. Holladay and Lauren M. Ponder Lauren and J. Holladay Patrick Identification-of-self through a yoga-travel-spirit nexus yoga-travel-spirit a through Identification-of-self The idea of tourism as a spiritual journey has been excogitated byexcogitated been has journey spiritual a as tourism of idea The Prominent Prominent in the discussion of the Lake District was the idea of Since the late 1700s, the Lake District in the United Kingdom has the Lake District in the United Since the late 1700s, Voigt, et al., 2011). Solitude, silence, time and space are all important Solitude, silence, time and space are et al., 2011). Voigt, life-giving as described been have and well-being spiritual in factors and development human in increase an to leading rejuvenating and spirituality (Heintzman, 2002; 2009). Self-yoga-spirit-travel The dualism and wholeness of physical and spiritual space, united in a holistic manner of being in and understanding the world, The Lake District led to a temporary fellowship with other tourists,The Lake District led to a temporary a sense of ‘communitas’ bound by common interests and shared disre were boundaries normal and status social where experiences, 2006). (Digance, garded a number of authors (e.g. Olsen, 2006; Sharpley & Jepsen, 2009) sometimes with the spiritual concept under the guise of holistic or wellness tourism (Smith & 2006b). studies Kelly, Various reveal a correlation between the natural environment and a deep sense of belonging, a sense of place, a profound connection with the world 2008;al., et Ratz 2011; al., et Pritchard, (e.g. feelings harmonious and tion to a greater power amd held a sacred meaning that compen meaning power amd held a sacred tion to a greater spiritual void in urban society. sated for the increasing and how spir to the world around examining one’s life in relation ituality was related directly to nature and the earth (Sharpley & of their visit, spirituality a result Jepsen, 2010). Either during or as was inreflected the of interpretation the feelings they experienced: being of feelings world, the to connection and oneness of sense a power greater a of sense a infinite, and bigger something of part of and timelessness of sense a creation, of the appreciation and scale, euphoria, a feeling of being blessed and a sense of renewal. ‘post-tourist’ wants to live an 1990). experience These (Urry, newly self transformation towards centered quests are developing tourist for spiritual travel experiences. ground and constitute new been an area steeped in fascination and seemingly able to deliver the of study case A visitors. to benefits spiritual and mental physical, found area that those who visited motivated were by or achieved spiritual meaning or fulfillment through their visits (Sharpley & connec travelers an emotional Jepsen, 2010). The landscape offered quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------312

“Real spiritual Volume 04 Patrick J. Holladay and Lauren M. Ponder Lauren and J. Holladay Patrick Identification-of-self through a yoga-travel-spirit nexus yoga-travel-spirit a through Identification-of-self Our age is one which denounces love, hope and the and hope love, denounces which one is age Our “ The practice of yoga is an awakening of the self, to include weak The practice of yoga is an awakening One path for this transformation is self-identification influenced seems to have been lost (Lightman, 2005). As Pritchard et al. (2011, (2011, al. et Pritchard As 2005). (Lightman, lost been have to seems p. 18) posited, lessness, of ‘us’ and ‘them’, of profit and loss, when we cut our our essence. It is a from what makes us human, from selves off relationships nurturing sustaining, mutually nullifies which world rela such ignore merely not does world our Yet, beauty. shuns and tionships, it rails against them and so to even talk about them makes us vulnerable.” beau and courage strength, as well as limitations and fears, nesses, is ty about (Cope, experiencing 1999). life, Yoga while working to wards something greater than one’s self (Chopra & Simon, 2004; Easwaran, 1985). The journey for the identification-of-self is a com of a a personal level to that from plex one as an individual travels transpersonal one by overcoming imagined boundaries to self- spirit with the universe around thus unifying the mind and identity, (1979, As 1979). p. Wilber 160) stated, them (Wilber, intuit your self is to commit your To ticed twenty-four hours a day. in all beings.” being to the actualization of that self entire spiri- of development the yoga, of practice the of interactions the by tual capital or ethical and moral beliefs (Guest, 2007), and the so Sanskrit, the from yoga, mentioned, previously As travel. of journ means union or yoke (Joshi, the 1965). Accordingly, yoga-spirit- con- is identification-of-self the that posits article this in travelmodel nected to the development of spirit, which in turn may be strength ened by travel. This comingling of yoga practice and yoga travel Aggarwal, (Cf. traveler yogi the for unification-of-self a to lead may pulled and pushed is traveler yogi The 2006). al, et Lehto, 2008; al., et 1979; Dann, (Crompton, 1977) by for a spiritual desire development and hope (Pritchard et al., 2011), which begets positive identity-of- of journey a signifies tourism Yoga transformation. personal and self transcendental. It is governed by the mundane; it is a time of love of time a is it mundane; the by governed is It transcendental. two for a day, minutes do for twenty something we practice is not something we do once a It is not of for six hours a day. hours a day, Spiritual practice is on Sunday. day in the morning or once a week all of ground the is it activities; human other among activity one not com- prior a their validation. It is and source their activities, human mitment to transcendent truth lived, breathed, intuited, and prac quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------313 (Konu &

. Kozhikode, Volume 04 . Through yoga tourism the outer yoga tourism the . Through Patrick J. Holladay and Lauren M. Ponder Lauren and J. Holladay Patrick Health, Spiritual and Heritage Tourism. In: . Identification-of-self through a yoga-travel-spirit nexus yoga-travel-spirit a through Identification-of-self tourism: a case study on experience of foreign tourists visiting tourists foreign of experience on study case a tourism: Rishikesh, India India. 15-17 May 2008. Wilson (2010) Wilson presented an argument that spirituality was the Kelly & Smith, 2009; Smith, 2003) References Guglani, A. K., M., & Goel, R. K. 2008. Spiritual & yoga Aggarwal, in India – Challenges Ahead on Tourism Conference IIML argued that argued all travel was spiritual, which supported work by Co hen (1979), and expanded perspectives on meanings and purpose The work of these au for life, connectedness, and transcendence. thors and others on spirituality in tourism (e.g. Mansfeld & McIn connections about conversation a of beginnings the are 2009), tosh, within and without the individual and a travel dynamic enhance the and practice Yoga 2011). al. et Voigt 2010; Laukkanen, experi travel the to yoked deeply be may capital spiritual of ment ence (Cohen, 1979; Hall, 2003) and the authors of this article sup port the idea that these concepts be considered as one avenue for the development of self-identity. itual fulfilment (Sharpley & Jepson, 2011). The harmonious con of feedbacks positive generate may landscape travel a of sumption spirit to a traveller’s well-being (Ratz et al., 2008). The ontological notion of travel and tourism as merely hedonistic could be laid to rest 2008). All (Wilson, humans may be seen as spiritual beings and if one views tourism and spirituality as a necessary condition of self then tourism and spirituality appear to be deeply linked 2008). (Wilson, life- both were experiences travel that and human being of essence defining and imbuedwith one’s the Further, spirituality. author knowledge and enlightenment merging the physical and spiritual the physical and enlightenment merging knowledge and ( world of experiences may be woven together to create ‘narratives’ in the and understanding with desires connect metaphorically that spirit (Graburn, 2002).ner world of the Conclusion yoga-spirit-travel a considering for heuristic a as acted article This spir of means a as seen is Travel identification-of-self. the in nexus quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk

, - - , 26, 2, 314 . Sierra Tourism, Tourism, Annals of Sociology Journal of . Thames , 64, 7, pp. , 21, 15-16. 21, ,

Wiley & Sons, Inc: & Sons, Inc: Wiley Volume 04 Penguin Books: New Dehli. Dehli. New Books: Penguin . Bloomsbury: London. . [online] Available at: http:// at: Available [online] . An introduction to Indian philo An introduction . Saint Mary’s Press: Winona. Press: . Saint Mary’s The seven spiritual laws of yoga. A The seven spiritual laws of yoga. A . Routledge: Abingdon, pp. 36-48. Abingdon, pp. 36-48. . Routledge: , 32, 3, pp. 227-234. Patrick J. Holladay and Lauren M. Ponder Lauren and J. Holladay Patrick Journal of Clinical Psychology Applied Psychophysiology and Biofeedback Applied Psychophysiology The bhagavad gita. The bhagavad International Journal of Yoga Therapy Yoga International Journal of World religions World 6, pp. 408-424. , 4, pp. 184-194.

, The spiritual tourist Identification-of-self through a yoga-travel-spirit nexus yoga-travel-spirit a through Identification-of-self The new age: searching for the spiritual self The new age: searching Integral conversations The unsettling of America: culture & agriculture culture The unsettling of America: . University of Calcutta: Calcutta. & Marshall, J. 2008. Meditation with yoga, group therapy with yoga, group & Marshall, J. 2008. Meditation with mood: depressed long-term for psychoeducation and hypnosis, a randomized pilot trial. 806-820. sophy mind and spirit. practical guide to healing body, New Jersey. physiological correlates of Kundalini yoga meditation: a study Kundalini yoga meditation: a of physiological correlates of a yoga master. pp. 147-153. Francisco. Club Books: San collaboration? or religion and spiritual Journeys religion meditation.scan body mindfulness of effects cardiovascular and Annals of Behavioral Medicine & Hudson: London. 13, 2, 179-201. www.cejournal.org/downloads/IntegralConversations.pdf August 2011]. [Accessed 21 Research Leisure Research Tourism dolent with meaning. In & D. D. Timothy Olsen, eds. Brown, M. (1998). M. Brown, B.,A., Chin, X., Symons, L. C., Hastings, T. L. D., Waelde, Butler, Bose, B. K. (2011). Mindfulness, meditation and yoga: competition yoga: and meditation Mindfulness, (2011). K. B. Bose, (2003). Brodd, Jefferey Ditto, B., Eclache, M., & Goldman, B. 2006. Short-term autonomic N. 2004. Drury, Cohen, E. 1979. A phenomenology of tourism experiences. experiences. tourism phenomenology of A Cohen, E. 1979. 2002. A. Combs, vacation. J. 1979. Motivations of a pleasure Crompton, Dann, G. Anomie, 1977. ego-enhancement and tourism. Digance, J. (2006). Religious and secular pilgrimage: Journeys re Chatterjee, S., & Dhatta, M. D. 1939. 1939. D. M. Dhatta, & S., Chatterjee, Chopra, D., & Simon, D. 2004. Arambula, P., Peper, E., Kawakami, M., & Gibney, K. E., H. Kawakami, 2001. M., Peper, The& Gibney, Arambula, P., 1996. W. Berry, Easwaran, E. (1985). E. Easwaran, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk . . - - - - , 65, , 315 , 20, 4, , 20, 4, The Nor

, Leisure/Loisir Volume 04 , 1, pp. 77-91. Resilience: InterdisciplinaryResilience: The sociology of spirituality The spiritual revolution: Why reli The spiritual revolution: Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Journal of Hospitality and Tourism . Blackwell Publishing: Oxford. Patrick J. Holladay and Lauren M. Ponder Lauren and J. Holladay Patrick Coming to our senses: Coming healing ourselves and the Wellness and tourism: mind, body, spirit, place and tourism: mind, body, Wellness Identification-of-self through a yoga-travel-spirit nexus yoga-travel-spirit a through Identification-of-self Introduction to tourism: dimensions and issues 4th tourism: dimensions and to Introduction . University of Hawaii Press: Press: Hawaii of University Philosphy east and west. , 40, 1, 90-98. Journal of Park and Recreation Administration Journal of Park and Recreation Area . Hyperion: New York. mindfulness. Hyperion: New world through India. in illness mental of burden the Perspectives on Science and Humanitarianism York. Cognizant Communication Corporation: New holiday intentions in Finland. Management, 17, pp. 144-149. Journal of Social Issues, 56, 1, 1-9. scapes’. spirit. In R. Bushell & P. J. spirit. In R. Bushell & P. duction of therapeutic landscapes. Social Science & Medicine duction of therapeutic landscapes. pp. 112-124. Honolulu. gion is giving way to spirituality 33, 1, pp. 419-445. Ashgate, Aldershot, pp. 181-200. Aldershot, Ashgate, Forest. Frenchs ed. Hospitatlity Press: well-being. pp. 147-169. el for transformational experiences within tourism. In: experiences within tourism. el for transformational and Practice Education Research, on Experience 2008. dic Conference November 26-28 2008. Finland. in Media. Vaasa, In cultural resource. Kanojia, A. 2010. Meditation and depression: a novel solution to a novel solution to A. 2010. Meditation and depression: Kanojia, Konu, H., 2010. & Predictors of Laukkanen, tourists’ T. wellbeing Langer, E. J. (1989). Mindfulness. Addison Wesley: Reading. Addison Wesley: E. J. (1989). Mindfulness. Langer, mindfulness. of construct The (2000). M. Moldoveanu, & E. Langer, Lea, J. (2008). Retreating to nature: rethinking ‘therapeutic land- Kelly, C., & Smith, M. 2009. Holistic tourism: integrating body, mind, body, integrating tourism: Holistic 2009. M. Smith, & C., Kelly, Sheldon, eds. 2009. Joshi, K. S. 1965. 1965. S. K. Joshi, Kabat-Zinn, J. (2006). Hoyez, A. C. Hoyez, 2007. The ‘world of yoga’: the and production repro Hall, C. M. 2003. Hall, C. M. L. 2005. & Woodhead, Heelas, P., 2002. Heintzman, A conceptual P. model of leisure and spiritual leisure. of benefits spiritual The 2009. P. Heintzman, Guest, M. J. 2007. In search of spiritual capital: the spiritual as a of spiritual capital: the spiritual In search Guest, M. J. 2007. K. Flanagan C. & Jupp, P. eds. 2007. Gelter, H. 2010. Total Experience Management – a conceptual mod Experience Management 2010. Total H. Gelter, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk ------38,

, , 56, 56, , 316 , 28, 1, pp.

Tourism Re Tourism Tourism Wellness and Wellness . Dorling Kinder Tourism: The Spiri Tourism: Tourism Recreation Recreation Tourism Volume 04 . CABI: Wallingford. , 13, 2, pp. 25-46. , 66, pp. 16-30. Annals of Tourism Research Annals of Tourism , 38, pp. 52-71. . Cognizant Communication Cor Religious tourism and pilgrimage festi , 31,1, pp. 15-24. Yoga the Iyengar way Yoga Tourism Recreation Research Recreation Tourism Patrick J. Holladay and Lauren M. Ponder Lauren and J. Holladay Patrick , Lincoln, England. 5-7 April 2006. , Lincoln, England. 5-7 . Ph. D. University of Hawai’i. . Ph. D. University Body & Society Tourism Review Tourism A sense of the mysterious: Science and the humanand Science of the mysterious: sense A , 31, 1, 25-35. Identification-of-self through a yoga-travel-spirit nexus yoga-travel-spirit a through Identification-of-self The subjective well-being of beginning vs. advanced beginning vs. advanced of The subjective well-being The tourist gaze: leisure and travel in contemporary soci The tourist gaze: leisure , 31, 1, pp. 1-4. Annals of Tourism Research Annals of Tourism , Pantheon Books: New York. , Pantheon Books: New . Sage Publications: London. Balaton’s tourist milieu on visitors’ quality of life. Balaton’s tourist milieu on visitors’ the practice of yoga. mind and spirit. of body, tourism: mind, body, spirit, place tourism: mind, body, York. poration: New sley Limited: London. tual Dimension Conference new transformative perspective. hatha yoga practitioners market. tourism wellness the within niche rism as a Research creation spirit rism encounters. In R. Bushell & J. P. Sheldon eds. Tourism Recreation Research Recreation Tourism Research eties of transformation. 2, 127-142. ence? 103-108. 3, pp. 941-963. perspective vals management: An international Mehta, S., & Mehta, M. 1990. Smith, M., & Kelly, C. 2006b. Wellness tourism. C. 2006b. Wellness Smith, M., & Kelly, J. 1990. Urry, tourists: in search Wellness G., & Howat, G. 2011. C., Brown, Voigt, Ratz, T., Ratz, Michalko, T., G., & Kovacs, B. 2008. The influence of Lake spiritual experi a tourism: Rural 2010. D. Jepsen, & R. Sharpley, of an analysis spirit? Towards and mind R. 2007. Body, Smith, B. the reconciliation and tourism holidays: 2003. Holistic Smith, M. Smith, C. M., 2006a. & Holist Kelly, tourism: journeys of the self? Olsen, D. 2006. Typologies of spiritual tourists. In: tourists. spiritual of Typologies 2006. D. Olsen, Hopeful tourism: a Ateljevic, I. 2011. A., N., Morgan, & Pritchard, (2007). D. N. Morpeth, & R., Raj, Lee, G. W. 2004. G. W. Lee, tou Yoga 2006. M. A. Morrison, & Y., Chen, S., Brown, Y., X. Lehto, 2005. P. A. Lightman, Mansfeld, & Y., McIntosh, A. 2009. through Wellness spiritual tou quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk , - 317

Volume 04 Journal of Traumatic Stress Journal of Traumatic Patrick J. Holladay and Lauren M. Ponder Lauren and J. Holladay Patrick Identification-of-self through a yoga-travel-spirit nexus yoga-travel-spirit a through Identification-of-self The 2nd International Colloquium on Tourism and and on Tourism The 2nd International Colloquium No boundary: Eastern and Western approaches to per approaches No boundary: Eastern Western and . Shambhala: Boulder. . Chiang Mai, Thailand. May 5-8 2008. . Chiang Mai, Thailand. May 5-8 travel in facilitating life purpose and meaning within the lives travel in facilitating life purpose of Waikato. of individuals. Ph. D. University S., & Pardo, A. 2008. A pilot of meditation for mental health Hurricane Katrina. workers following 21, 5, pp. 497-500. sonal growth tourism. In: Leisure Wilson, G. B. 2010. Exploring travel and spirituality: the role of of the role G. B. 2010. Exploring travel and spirituality: Wilson, Waelde, L. C., Uddo, L. C., Marquett, R., Ropelato, M., Freightman, R., Ropelato, M., Freightman, L. C., Marquett, L. C., Uddo, Waelde, 1979. K. Wilber, G. B. 2008. Conceptualizing spirituality in the context of Wilson, quarter

academic

kvarter akademisk